GERNSBACK SPECIALTY SERIES L 49604

1990ELECTRONICS
ËJÌCPER/MENTERS
handbook.
TELEVISION Special High -Voltage TECHNOLOGY

Gated -Sync Descrambler

Section Containing High -Definition TV
Surround -Sound Processor 10 Articles Guaranteed Thermoelectric Devices
Video Edit Controller Nikola Tesla
To Add Zap To Your
Experiments. COMPUTERS
YOUR HOME

Electronic Thermometer Speech Synthesizer

Line -Power Monitor RS -232 Control System

Amplified Speaker Line -Carrier Modem

HOW TO HIGH-TECH FUN

VCR Servicing Laser Listener

Coping With Coils Micro -Size Amplifier

BUILD IT

Subwoofer Simulator Active Antenna

Hi-Fi Amplifier FM Wireless Mike

HIGH VOLTAGE MORE PROJECT`..

Jacob's Ladder Laser Power Supply

Tesla Coil Stun Gun
Electronic Tornado Lightning Bulb

$3.50 U.S.
$3.95 CANADA

PLUS- GERNSBACK
Ne iv Products Projects PC Service PUBLICATION

And Much Much More

 HITACHI SCOPES AT DISCOUNT PRICES
V-212 DC to 40MHz
Dual Channel
DC to 100MHz
Dual Channel
CRT Readout Delayed Sweep
ii'1t a', a, $419 Cursor Meas CRT Readout
,.
DC Offset Sweep Time
41.11MINIMIIMP04: IN + Alt Magnifier
Compact Size
Autoranging
List $560 V-425 V-1060 Trigger Lock
List $995 List $1595
$1, 359 Sensitivity
Save $141
LIST PRICE SAVE
V-223 20MHz D.T., 1mV sens, Delayed Sweep, DC Offset, Vert Mode Trigger $770 $695 $75
20MHz Dual Trace Oscilloscope V-422 40MHz D.T., 1mV sens, DC Offset Vert Mode Trigger, Alt Mag $875 $ 725 $150
All Hitachi scopes include probes, schematics V-423 40MHz D.T., 1mV sens, Delayed Sweep, DC Offset, Alt Mag $955 $ 825$130
V-660 60MHz D.T., 2mV sens, Delayed Sweep, CRT Readout $1,195 $1,095 $100
and Hitachi's 3 year guaranty on parts and V-1065 100MHz D.T., 2mV sens, Delayed Sweep, CRT Readout, Cursor Meas $1,895 $1,670 $225
labor. Many accessories available for all V -1100A 100MHz O.T., 1mV sens, Delayed Sweep, CRT Readout, DVM, Counter $2,295 $2,045 $250
scopes. V-1150 150MHz Q T., 1mV sens, Delayed Sweep, Cursor Meas, DVM, Counter $3,100 $2,565 $ 535

ELENCO PRODUCTS AT DISCOUNT PRICES

20MHz Dual Trace Oscilloscope 35MHz Dual Trace Oscilloscope
50MHz Logic Probe LP -700
$369 Logic Pulser LP -600
Your Choice $23
$495
MO -1252

-
MO -1251
»t -

_ SCOPE PROBES High luminance 6"CRT

..
..

6" CRT P-1 65MHz,1x,10x $19.95 4, 1mV Sensitivity

Built in P-2100MHz,1x,10x $23.95 6KV Acceleration Voltage
component tester Fits all scopes with 1Ons Rise Time
TV Sync BNC connector X -YOperation Z Axis
1.1 _ e ' - .!J Delayed Triggering Sweep
Top quality scopes at a very reasonable price. Contains all desired features Two lx, 10x probes, diagrams and manual. Two year guarantee.

A toranging DMM True RMS Multimeter with Digital Capacitance Meter Digital LCR Meter
®
4+/2

M-5000 eDigit Muitimeter rinit Capacitance and

CM 1550 -1800
`i
Translator Tester iiii t
LC

$45 i. ° $135
M-7000
$55 CM -1500 $58.95 $125
9 Functions 9 Ranges
9
.05% DC Accuracy Reads Volts, Ohms, .1pf-20,000ufd Measures
Memoryy and
/ :t:;. ,'
_ Coils 1uH-200H
o
Data hold -1 Resistance Current, Capacitors, .5% basic accy
.9 Caps.01-20M f
'Nt..:r-:,
I/2% basic acc with Freq. Counter -+-+ Transistors and Zero control ! Res .01-2oM
3+/2 digit LCD and deluxe case Diodes with case with casettErtt;t1111;Eli
AC Clamp -On Bench DMMS SOLDERING STATION Solderless Breadboards Low Cost Multimeter
Current Adapter _.._
t emu a
7em reture Controlled
SL -30
-'
9430
® M-1600
ST -265 6- 'i \
1,1 pins $15 ®'® $25
$99 943q
digit LCD
31/2
2,170 pins $25
$ 25 Digital display
6 1% DC Acct'
Temp range.
0-1000A AC M-3500 M-4500 2,860 pins $35 10A Scale
ig,- Works with
most DMM
31/2 digit $125 41-2 dig/ $175
.1% accy O5 accy
300F -900F
Grounded tip
Overheat protect 9436 SHOWN
All have color
coded posts
V Gi2 Auto zero
/polarity
Wide Band Signal Generators TRIPLE POWER SUPPLY XP-620 Function Generator Decade Blox
SG -9000 $129 Assembled $ 65 - Biox #9610 or
k'
-
1

0
j- .n '' .
SG -9500
RF Freq 100K-450MHz
AM Modulation of 1KHz
Variable RF output
with Digital Display
Contains all the
.

tine desired features for

doing experiments. Features short
2
Kit $45
to 15Vvat A,
(or 4 to 30V at 1A)
-s-

Provides sine,tri,squ wave

#9600
$ 28'95
+4

/9610 Resistor Bllo

47 ohm to 1M & 1001< pot
#9620
18.95

from 1Hz to 1MHz /9620 Capacitor Blox

and 150MHz built-in Frog Ctr $249 circuitprotection all supplies and 5V at 3A AM or FM capability 47pf to 10MFD

-- " $249r
Digital Triple Power Supply XP -765 Quad Power Supply XP -580
LEARN TO BUILD AND PROGRAM

e -i -._-..---i- -
title= 1 - t 0-20V at 1A -
$59.95 COMPUTERS WITH THIS KIT!
INCLUDES ALL PARTS, ASSEMBLY AND

_
- "
1á+4osiiii 41Aoi 0-20V at 1A
5v at 5A
Fully Regulated, Short circuit protected with
2 Limit Cont., 3 Separate supplies
__>011131
Fullyregulated and
short circuit protected
2-20V at 2A
12V at 1A
5V at 3A
-5V at 5A
LESSON MANUAL

- `- n, M
MODEL
M-8000
XP-660 with Analog Meters $175 XP -575 without meters $39.95

Four -Function Fre uency Counters GF -8016 Function Generator

°I
148.00
Starting fromtrainerscratchteaches buildto a completetoRAMS,
n F-100 120M H with Freq. Counter computer system.and Our Micro
Master runa
4 $179 ß.
i r rt 1s $249
249
write in RO M$
microprocessor, which uses the same machine language as IBM PC.

+
You will write the initial instructions to tell the 8085 processor to get
-. .. F-1000 1.2GH Sine, Square, Triangle started and store these instructions in permanent memory in a 2816 E'

Frequency, Period, Totalize, $259

+1 Pulse, Ramp, .2 to 2MHz PROM. Teaches you all about input and output ports, computer timers
Build your own keyboard and learn how to scan keyboard and display.
Freq Counter .1 - 10MHz
Self Check with High Stabilized Crystal Oven No previous computer knowledge required. Simple easy to understand
Oscillator, 8 digit LED display GF -8015 without Freq. Meter $179 instruction teaches you to write in machine language

WE WILL NOT BE UNDERSOLD!

UPS Shipping: 48 States 5 0
C & SALES INC.
S 15 Day Money Back Guarantee
2 Year Warranty Pr e subject to change
($10 Max) IL Res., 7% Taxmc 1245 Rosewood, Deerfield, IL 60015
(800) 292-7711 (312) 541-0710 WRITE FOR FREE CATALOG
CIRCLE 12 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD
 ELECTRONICS
1990 ELECTRONICS
1390
EXPERIMENTERS
handbook
EXPERIMENTERS mcmps Special Hìghloltage
Section Con aining
10
To
Articles
Add Zap
Gu
j
ºanteed
Your
=etocr

handbook..
Experimeits.
1,15.

HIGH -VOLTAGE PROJECTS

26 BUILD THE LIGHTNING BULB

29 HIGH -VOLTAGE ZAPPERS

31 STUN GUN
HIGH -VOLTAGE
PROJECTSi 34 BUILD JACOB'S LADDER BUILD THIS
39 UNIVERSAL LASER POWER SUPPLY
103 MICRO -SIZED AMPLIFIER
2=2,===z---
107 LASER LISTENER
45 ELECTRONIC DAZER
11 GATED -SYNC DESCRAMBLER
47 ELECTRONIC TORNADO
lb lee
131 SURROUND SOUND
53 SOLID-STATE TESLA COIL
DECODER
57 MAKE KIRLIAN PHOTOGRAPHS
136 SUBWOOFER SIMULATOR
60 HIGH VOLTAGE PULSE GENERATOR
147 HIGH -POWER HI-FI
AUDIO AMP
COMPUTERS
155 WIRELESS FM MICROPHONE
113 RS -232 MONITOR/CONTROL
SYSTEM 22 ELECTRONIC THERMOMETER
158 BUILD A PAIR OF LINE -CARRIER 69 VIDEO -EDIT CONTROLLER
MODEMS
77 POWER LINE MONITOR
81 BUILD THIS SPEECH SYNTHESIZER
87 ACTIVE ANTENNA
93 BUILD A SERIAL PRINTER
MULTIPLEXER 89 AMPLIFIED SPEAKER

AND MUCH MORE

166 AD SALES OFFICES
Thermoelectric TECHNOLOGY
Coolers
118 COPING WITH COILS 166 ADVERTISING INDEX

141 HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION 35 FREE INFORMATION CARD

73 VCR SERVICING BASICS 121 PC SERVICE

9 ALL ABOUT THERMOELECTRIC 165 MARKET CENTER

COOLERS
2 EDITORIAL
98 NIKOLA TESLA:
INTERPLANETARY COMMUNICATOR? 4 NEW PRODUCTS
 1980
ELECTRONICS
EDITORIAL EXPERIMENTERS
handbook
Hugo Gernsback (1884-1967) founder
M. Harvey Gernsback,
editor-in -chief, emeritus

Larry Steckler, EHF, CET,

editor-in -chief and publisher
Why shouldn't electronics be fun? EDITORIAL DEPARTMENT
Brian C. Fenton, editor
Welcome to a new edition of the Radio -Electronics Marc Spiwak, associate editor
Daniel Goodman, technical editor
Experimenters Handbook! As in past editions, we've
Teri Scaduto, assistant editor
gone through the issues of Radio -Electronics from the Jeffrey K. Holtzman
last year or so. We've picked the stories that we computer editor
thought would interest you most. Robert A. Young, assistant editor
Jack Darr, CET, service editor
Robert Grossblatt, circuits editor
In a break from tradition, we've also gone back through Larry Klein, audio editor
the pages of our sister publication, Popular Elec- David Lachenbruch
contributing editor
tronics, to find even more feature articles to get you Don Lancaster
going. The result is 164 pages jam-packed with a wider contributing editor
variety of construction projects than you'll find any- Richard D. Fitch
contributing editor
where else. Kathy Campbell, editorial assistant
Andre Duzant, technical illustrator
We have projects ranging from the simple (Wireless Injae Lee, assistant illustrator
FM Michrophone) to the complex (Hi -Power Hi-Fi Au- PRODUCTION DEPARTMENT
dio Amp). We have projects for your home theater Ruby M. Yee, production director
Robert A. W. Lowndes
(Surround Sound Processor) and projects for high- editorial production
tech fun (the Laser Listener). Karen Tucker, advertising production
Marcella Amoroso, production traffic

For the computer buffs in our audience, we not only CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT
Jacqueline P. Cheeseboro,
show how computers can speak (Build This Speech circulation director
Synthesizer) but how they can control the world Wendy Alanko,
circulation analyst
through their serial ports (with our RS -232 Monitor/
Theresa Lombardo,
Control System)! circulation assistant
Typography by Mates Graphics
We also have articles on technology that you'll want to Cover photo by Herb Friedman
keep on top of, such as high -definition TV and ther- Advertising Sales Offices listed
moelectric devices. But the highlight of this year's on page 166.
Gernsback Publications, Inc.,
handbook is our special section on High -Voltage Proj- 500-B Bi -County Blvd., Farm-
ects. We'll show you how to build a plasma display, a ingdale, NY 11735. 516-293.3000
stun gun, a high -voltage pulse generator, a Jacob's As a service to readers, Radio -Electronics Elecrtonics
ladder, and six other high -voltage projects. Experimenter's Handbook publishes available plans or
information relating to newsworthy products. tech-
niques and scientific and technological developments.
Because of possible variances in the quality and con-
Our job is done. We had a lot of fun putting this maga- dition of materials and workmanship used by readers.
we disclaim any responsibility for the safe and proper
zine together. Now it's your turn. It's time to build our functioning of reader -built projects based upon or from
plans or information published in this magazine.
projects and build your knowledge. And it's time to have Since some of the equipment and circuitry described in
fun, too! Radio -Electronics Electronics Experimenter's Hand-
book may relate to or be covered by U.S. patents. we
disclaim any liability for the infringement of such pat-
ents by the making, using, or selling of any such equip-
-The Editors ment or circuitry, and suggests that anyone interested in
such projects consult a patent attorney.

Radio -Electronics Electronics Experimenter's Hand-

book is published annually by Gernsback Publications
Inc. All rights reserved Printed in U.S.A. Single copy
price $3.50. Canada $3.95. c Copyright Gernsback
Publications Inc.. 1989.

2
 SELECT 5 BOOKS 'HEADING
SCHEMATICS

,' /'t"t /
>4111140
!t./ ', I (
for only $495
(values to $131.70)
and get a FREE Gift!

"' THE ENCYCLOPEDIA OF II

MAWR
2790

SOvowR
ORU1nKARD

'4-111 qlyC.
PUE
519.95

H*,
1536P $9.99

2960 $26.95
Counts as 2 --.a, i
ELECTRONIC ,

CIRCUITS 8
eUdOlFf GNAf
2972 523.95 1625P $18.95

//+'/'
BEGINNERS
TV REPAIR

3133 $15.95
2900P $24.95
Counts as 2
(ipo....00..romirofflev"we
1938 $60.00
THE GLINT 1300E Of
counts as 3
1897P $14.95 2925 516.95
ELECTRONICS
Itlp}p11!Cö
rt sIG\ U
ktllrlw\
PROJECTS
Electronics projects ideas ...
the latest technology ...
tl\,11Ni4T
11I1111> 150 all at up to 50% off publishers' prices!
nUlillit
Tirs''.
Membership Benefits Big Savings. In addition to this introductory
offer, you keep saving substantially with members' prices of up to 50% off the
publishers' prices. Bonu; Books. Starting immediately, you will be eligible for
2970P S15.95 1367P $18.95 our Bonus Book Plan, with savings of up to 80% off publishers' prices. Club
News Bulletins. 14 times per year you will receive the Book Club News, describ-
ing all the current selectior s-mains, alternates, extras-plus bonus offers and
special sales, with scores o- titles to choose from. Automatic Order. If you want
20
IRIpvRnYE
the Main Selection, do noth ng and it will be sent to you automatically. If you prefer
EILCiRpRICS
PROJECTS
another selection, or no book at all, simply indicate your choice on the reply form
Ro, flame provided. As a member, ycu agree to purchase at least 3 books within the next
12 months and may resign at any time thereafter. Ironclad No -Risk Guaran-
.,,.w+ ,r,®
tee. If not satisfied with your books, return them within 10 days without obliga- 0
tion! Exceptional Quality. All books are quality publishers' editions especially rN. -044.
AUSREr PdGRtbi
selected by our Editorial Board.
1989 ELECTRONICS BOOK CLUB= , Blue Ridge Summit, PA 17294-0810
2947 $21.95 3156 323.95
All books are hardcover unless number is followed by a "P" for paperback (Publisher's Prices shown).
3031P $16.95

HR FREE when you join! o.leeat

15 Easy Electronic I)rltonT.I foin
All -Time Favorite
Projects From Deltoin T. Horn Electronic Projects
Projects you can build-some
unique, some old favorites-from a _.

the author's vast treasury of

electronics know-how.
2707 526.95
3044 $18.95 Counts as 2
2875 517.95 2912P 014.95
ELECTFIONJCS BOOK CLUB
Blue Ridge Summit, PA 17294-0810 OESI6N1N6, 81160156 k
TI:STING 10118 OM6
Please accept my membership in the Electronics Book Club® and send the 5 volumes listed SPEAKEB SNSTE.M
MM./P.
below, plus my FREE copy of Delton T. Horn's All -Time Favorite Electronic Projects (3105P), .. N.
billing me $4.95 plus shipping and handling charges. If not satisfied, may return the books
I

within ten days without obligation and have my membership cancelled. I agree to purchase w
at least 3 books at regular Club prices (plus shipping/handling) during the next 12 months and
may resign any time thereafter.

2975 $24.95 1604P $17.95 3195 $28.95

Counts as 2
1964P 512.95

,E GIANT SOON 0, .....__..

EASY-TO.BUILO r< ELECTRONIC 101
ELECTRONIC Name
g}.xCOMPONENTS'. SOLDERLESS
PROJECTS rYCIR, t I IJI S,,nl RS
BREADBOARDING
.ÿ C.e!C:f.iri "ä Address PROJECTS
WPTti
PRACTICAL City
APPLICATIONS
State Zip Phone

Signature
Valid for new members only. Foreign applicants will receive special ordering instructions. Canda must remit in
U.S. currency. This order subject to acceptance by the Electronics Book Club .
REX989
1599P $17.95 2920
Counts as
$29.95
2
... e
1493P $15.95 2985 $24.95
3
 NEW PRODUCTS
bass reproduction. Because the total
power is divided between two sepa-
rate circuits, the heat produced by
each side is cut in half, although the
total dissipated heat is unchanged.

CIRCLE 99 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD

The system uses a 61/2 -inch, twin -

drive, flat honeycomb -laminate
woofer for stiffness; a 2'/2 -inch hybrid
tweeter for clean, extended highs;
and an 8 -ounce strontium magnet to
improve overall frequency response.
With a power capability of 200 watts
with 75 watts RMS, a 30 -Hz to 20,000 -
kHz frequency response, and an 88 -dB
sensitivity, the system delivers deep,
clear sound while handling the kind of
power levels that normally require
much larger speakers.
The HD -622 TD speaker system has a
suggested retail price of $199.99.-
Sanyo Fisher (USA) Corporation, 21350
Lassen Street, Chatsworth, CA
CIRCLE 100 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD 91311-2329.

DIGITAL WALKMAN. Digitally syn- choice of continuous or single play of VIDEO SWEEP GENERATOR. Leader In-
thesized tuning precisely locks in AM - both sides, and a choice of tape direc- struments' model 430 is a video sweep
or FM -stereo signals for accurate re- tion. The unit uses Sony's "Mega Bass" and multiburst generator for the per-
ception on Sony's WN-AF605 Super system to provide stronger, fuller bass formance evaluation of VTR's,
Walkman personal stereo. For con- and an automatic shut-off feature to monitors, and video -processing
venience, channel seek automatically extend battery life. The portable audio equipment. The sweep and multiburst
scans up or down the tuning band, package also includes lightweight output can be continuously variable or
stopping at the next receivable station. headphones. preset, and the unit contains a built-in
The personal stereo features 14 sta- The WM-AF605 Super Walkman has color -bar generator.
tion presets and a stereo cassette play- a suggested retail price of $249.95.-
The sweep signal repeats at the field
er with auto -reverse, allowing both Sony Corporation of America, Corpo- rate from 100 kHz to 10 MHz. Any one
sides of a tape to be played without rate Communications Department, 9 of five sets of drop -out markers can be
removing it. Auto -reverse provides a West 57th St., New York, NY 10019.

CAR SPEAKERS. Sanyo's HD -622 TD au- Each woofer is driven from both front
tomotive speakers use a high -defini- and rear by twin magnets. An os-
tion, twin drive system that reduces cillator plate, placed between two fac-
high -frequency harmonic distortion, ing drive units to create a "push-pull"
delivers extended bass reproduction, motion, can efficiently convert even
and handles exceptionally high power. low -power signals to deliver extended CIRCLE 98 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD

4
 EXPERIMENTERS' DELIGHT!
We have a large supply of parts that we sold exclusively for two articles (FEB 84 & FEB 87)
published in Radio Electronics magazine. However, we agreed not to sell these items for the
purpose of building a device to intercept unauthorized cable TV signals. Therefore, we are sell-
ing these items as just electronics parts with no specific use intended.

SB -3 PARTS (1984) TRI -MODE PARTS (1987)

#701 PARTS PACKAGE $19.00 #301 PARTS PACKAGE $39.00
Includes resistors, capacitors, diodes, Includes resistors, capacitors, diodes, IC's,
transistors, IC's, coils, and Toko transformers transistors, potentiometers, LED's, Toko coil
(BKAN-K555AXX). (E52OHN-3000023) and Plessey SAW filter (SY323).

#702 PC BOARD $6.95 #302 PC BOARD $7.95

3"x4" etched, drilled, and silk-screened 5" x 8.8" etched. drilled, and silk-screened pc board.
pc board.
#304 AC ADAPTOR $6.95
#704 AC ADAPTOR $6.95 14 Volts DC @ 200 ma adaptor.
14 Volts DC @ 200 ma adaptor.
#305 PAC -TEC ENCLOSURE $19.95
#705 PAC -TEC ENCLOSURE $14.95 Crackle black plastic box that pc board fits.
Crackle black plastic box that pc board fits.
TRI -MODE TUTORIAL $7.95
An in-depth gate -by -gate circuit analysis of the
1987 Radio Electronics article on the tri -mode
method of scrambling. This informative technical
paper includes chapters on: troubleshooting,
For a complete listing of parts and corrected schematic, construction notes, circuit
specifications of either article description, initial and final adjustments. 21 pages
send $2.00 ea. for a censored reprint. of text, 44 pages of illustrations for a total of 66 pages.

FOR OUR RECORDS

DECLARATION OF AUTHORIZED USE -I, the undersigned, do hereby declare under the penalty of perjury that
all products purchased, now and in the future, will only be used or tested on cable TV systems with proper authoriza-
tion from local officials or cable company officials in accordance with all applicable federal and state laws. Federal
and various state laws provide for substantial criminal and civil penalties for unauthorized use.

Date Signed

SNOOPER STOPPER $39.95 MACROVISION ....Now you see it, Now you don't.
Cable TV descramblers are being sold by the
thousands, and most people are unaware their MS1-Kit $29.00
use can be detected. Protect your privacy with Includes all the parts, PC board, ac adaptor, and
Snooper Stopper and prevent cable companies instructions published in Radio Electronics magazine.
from spying on you.
JMAK-4 PAC -TEC ENCLOSURE $14.95
Send $2.00 for our "Cable TV Snooper" article. Original black box to house MS1-Kit.

ORDER TOLL FREE ANYTIME /-800-227-8529

Inside MA 508-695-8699
VISA, MasterCard, or COD _ Add $3.50 S&H. $6.00 for Canadian, Alaskan, and Puerto Rican orders.
J& VV Electronics. Inc.. PO Box 800 Mansfield. MA 02048

CIRCLE 16 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD

5
 selected. Sweep start/stop is provided. suggested retail price of $1,995.00.-
For multiburst operation, the 430 pro- Toshiba America Inc., Telecommunica-
vides a 100% white reference pulse at tions Systems Division, 9740 Irvine
the beginning of each line, followed Boulevard, Irvine, CA 92718.
by equal amplitude bursts of 0.5, 1.25,
2, 3, 3.58, and 7 MHz. PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTEM. The
The built-in color-bar generator pro- PHD850, with a full -logic double -cas-
duces full -field and SMPTE color bars. sette deck, a 25 -selection programma-
It also provides eight color rasters and ble CD player, and a 19 -function
selectable burst, chrominance, and lu- remote control, is Fisher's most so-
minance. For easy oscilloscope trig- phisticated portable -audio system. It
gering, sync -trigger output is avail- features built-in surround -sound cir-
able. All of the patterns are in NTSC- cuitry; a 4 -band graphic equalizer; de-
composite and S -VHS (Y/C) formats. A tachable, 3 -way bass-refiex speakers;
sync and setup ON/OFF control allows and a quartz clock and timer with
non -composite output. sleep-on/off, play, and recording func-
The model 430 video sweep/multi- tions. It has full logic controls and a
burst generator has a suggested list rechargeable battery pack.
price of $1,756.00.-Leader Instruments CIRCLE 95 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD
Corporation, 380 Oser Avenue, Haup-
pauge, NY 11788. troller has a suggested retail price of
$89.99.-Bondwell Industrial Company,
FACSMILE MACHINE. The 3700 fax ma- Inc., 47485 Seabridge Drive, Fremont,
chine from Toshiba has a built-in auto- CA 94538.
matic paper cutter, will transmit at
9600 -BPS in as little as 15 seconds per
page, and is compatible with all G2
and G3 fax machines.
Designed to meet the communica- CIRCLE 96 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD
tion needs of small businesses and
home offices, the 3700 offers a wide The CD player includes 3 -way repeat
selection of user-friendly features. It for one selection, all selections, or
has gray scale with 16 resolution set- only programmed selections. It can
tings for clear halftones and photos. play 3 -inch CD singles without an
An automatic document feeder lets adaptor, and has dual -LED volume
meters that graphically display audio
output. CIRCLE 94 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD
The double -cassette deck has dou-
ble auto reverse for hours of uninter- POWER SUPPLY. The Elenco SP-620 is a
rupted, two-sided cassette play. It fully regulated 3 -output power supply
provides high-speed dubbing for du- that provides one fixed voltage (5 volts
plicating tapes in half the normal time, DC at 3 amps) and two variable sup-
and Dolby noise reduction. plies (1.5 to 15 volts DC and -1.5 to
The PHD850 portable audio system -15 volts DC at 1 amp). Regulation is
has a suggested retail price of better than 200 mV when going from
$699.99.-Sanyo Fisher (USA) Corpora- no-load to full -load.
tion, 21350 Lassen Street, Chatsworth, The unit shuts off if a short occurs,
CA 91311-2329. avoiding internal damage. The com-
pact, 81/4- x 7- x 4 -inch unit is avail-
CIRCLE 97 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD UNIVERSAL REMOTE CONTROLLER. able fully assembled or in kit form,
Bondwell's sophisticated BW-5000 re- with easy -to -follow instructions and
users send up to 15 pages while the mote controller can be programmed circuit descriptions.
machine is unattended. Several poll- to reproduce the infrared remote -con- The XP -620 power supply costs
ing functions let the user dial other fax trol commands of eight different de- $89.95 assembled, or $59.95 in kit
units, request messages, and retrieve vices. It consolidates the commands of form.-Elenco Electronics, 150 West
documents. The 3700's delay function an entire home -entertainment system Carpenter Avenue, Wheeling, IL
makes forwarding messages easy. into one hand-held device. 60090.
Users can preset the machine to send The BW-5000 can learn and re-
messages to another fax at a later produce up to 126 commands, includ- MONITOR-STYLE TV RECEIVER. With a
time-often at lower phone rates. As ing commands for digital audio tapes, dark metallic finish for a contempo-
many as 50 fax numbers can be stored audio tape decks, laser-disc players, rary look, Samsung's 27 -inch TC2750S
for automatic speed dial, and an auto- cable control boxes, color TV's, and color TV offers 600 -line resolution, an
matic redial function will try to call a surround -sound amplifiers. The con- MTS decoder for stereo and SAP re-
busy number up to three times. Ten troller features LED indicators for ception with dbx noise reduction, a
single -touch memory buttons provide "use" and "learn" modes of operation. Super-VHS input jack, and 181 -channel
easy access to frequently -dialed fax It has a 10 -minute battery back-up cable compatibility.
numbers. "Voice -confirmation re- when batteries are removed, a range The set's on -screen multi -mode dis-
quest" lets the sender and receiver of 20 feet from the remote sensor, and play indicates channel; time; picture
converse after a message is sent. a master ON/OFF switch. controls (color, tint, brightness, and
The 3700 facsimile machine has a The BW-5000 universal remote con - contrast); audio controls (bass, treble,

6
and balance); and a sleep timer. Other The station -file function can be oper-
features include a quick -start picture ated remotely, or by pressing one
tube, video input/output jacks, audio - front -panel button.
input and variable audio -output jacks, The SA -R477 stereo receiver has a
a 36 -key infrared remote control, pro- suggested retail price of $529.95.-
grammable channel scan, dual RF -an- Technics, One Panasonic Way,
tenna inputs,, and a comb filter for Secaucus, NJ 07094.
higher resolution.
PHONE -ANSWERING SYSTEM. Com-
bining a full -feature telephone with a
remote -access answering machine,
CIRCLE 91 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD AT&T's Answering System 1521 offers
one -touch message playback, memo-
one of the computer's Micro Channel ry dialing, and an audible tone to alert
plug-in slots. No hardware setup is re- users when messages have been re-
quired; initialization is automatic ceived. By pressing one button, the
upon power -up. message tape rewinds and plays all
The PM 2202 comes with a set of messages, and the machine automat-
software routines and drivers that sim- ically resets. The message -alert tone
plify GPIB programming, and can be sounds once every 10 seconds.
included in applications written in The beeperless remote-which
BASICA/GWBASIC, Microsoft C, and works from touch-tone phones using a
Microsoft Pascal. The routines include pre-set 2 -digit code-offers several ad-
commonly used functions such as bus vanced features, including options to
commands, message sending and re- play new messages only, skip mes-
CIRCLE 93 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD ceiving, remote and local instrument sages, and change the outgoing an-
setting, serial polling, error checking, nouncement. Other remote features
The TC2750S color television has a and time-out setting. The interface include fast forward, rewind, save,
suggested retail price of $899.95.- card supports a number of Philips erase, reset, and access to all mes-
Samsung Electronics America, 301 May - GPIB software packages, and includes sages even when the tape is full.
hill Street, Saddle Brook, NJ 07662. comprehensive user manuals with
complete installation, start-up, and
SOLDERING -IRON SLEEVE. Techni- programming instructions.
cians can save 5 to10 minutes per field - The PM2202GPIB interface card has
service call with the innovative Iron a list price of $695.00.-John Fluke Mfg.
Sleeve from Electron Processing. The Co., Inc., P.O. Box C-9090, Everett, WA
device lets a technician place a hot sol- 98206; Tel. 800-443-5853 ext. 77.
dering iron back in a toolkit without
having to wait for the iron to cool off. AUDIO RECEIVER. Technics' model
SA -R477 is a full audio/video and
home -entertainment -center control
system. Its 45 -key full A/V remote lets
the user control selected Technics cas-
sette decks and Panasonic televisions
and VCR's.
Delivering 100 watts per channel,
CIRCLE 92 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD the receiver drives two channels into 8 CIRCLE 89 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD
ohms from 20 Hz-20 kHz, with 0.008
The Iron Sleeve is an
11 -inch long, THD. With the addition of a second set The unit's dual -microcassette sys-
-inch diameter tube that contains a
11/2 of speakers, the SA -R477 delivers sur- tem uses separate tapes for the outgo-
proprietary heat -absorber. Besides ab- round sound. The receiver also fea- ing announcement and incoming
sorbing the soldering iron's heat, the tures a built-in, 7 -band graphic messages, so that messages can be left
tube protects the iron from potential equalizer with electronic level keys. immediately after the announcement
tip damage caused by other tools in Five personalized EQ curves, in addi- ends. The user can give important call-
the tool case. Most popular soldering tion to five popular factory-preset ers a special code that is entered from
irons of 50 watts or less will fit the curves, can be stored in memory. a touch-tone phone and that sets off a
sleeve. The iron is held in place by a The unit's preset RAM lets the lis- special tone, alerting the user to a pri-
Velcro fastener. tener store any combination of 24 AM ority caller.
The Iron Sleeve has a suggested and FM stations. The stations can be Other features include an LED dis-
price of $19.95; quantity discounts are "filed" by music type: rock, classical, play that indicates the number of mes-
available.-Electron Processing, Inc., jazz, easy listening, news, and other. sages received, message save, call
Sales Department, P.O. Box 708, Med- monitor/screen, personal memos that
ford, NY 11763. the user can record for later retrieval,
and an announce -only mode in which
GPIB INTERFACE CARD. The Philips an outgoing announcement is played
PM 2202 GPIB interface card from John but no messages are recorded.
Fluke turns an IBM PS/2 computer into The Answering System 1521 has a
a versatile GPIB/IEEE-488 instrumenta- suggested retail price of $169.95.-
tion- and measurement -systems con- AT&T Consumer Products, 5 Wood -
troller. The card is easily inserted into CIRCLE 90 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD hollow Road, Parsippiny, NJ 07054.

7
GET THE LATEST ADVANCES IN ELECTRONICS
WITH A SUBSCRIPTION TO

Radio-
Eleciron ¡o: -
COLD FUSION
Try it for yourself!
eiGvSi1969
ENJOY THE WORLD OF ELECTRONICS EACH MONTH!

Now you can subscribe to the best elec-

tronics magazine. The only one that brings
17 you articles on-electronics projects, tech-
A primer on the
Musical Instrument nology, circuit design, communications, new
Digital Interface
products and much more.
Power your projec
from the sun-eve
:! ;
n117

:;
iyht!
Radio -Electronics looks to the future and
shows you what new video, audio and com-
rd puter products are on the horizon. What's
An easy -co .:.re
for any Touch -Tone phone
more you'll find helpful, monthly depart-
ments such as Video News, Equipment
Practical hints and tips Reports, Hardware Hacked Audio Update,
Choosing the right ¡ rle
Drawing Board, Communications Corner. All
component for ' J f designed to give you instruction, tips, and fun.
the job
rr;
Multitask ng with a '386
Plus:* Audio Update
* Video News Nam
* Hardware Hacker
* And lots mare!
S.ea:l Elecrronics.
Radio -Electronics gives you exciting 8111.0
alW.l.l.l
MIl'mlrryrl\P.
articles like:
ISDN: The Telephone Network of Tomorrow EMI, i n6N
nwn. roten,
Li The Facts on FAX »WII,ll
A Digital Phone Lock
How To Design Switching Circuits
PLUS: COMPUTER DIGEST! A New Kind of
Magazine for Electronics Professionals.
EIA -232 A real standard for serial interfacing?
Build a synergy card for your PC
'386 Power at a '286 price
Build a biofeedback monitor
More on Multiplexing

FOR FASTER SERVICE CALL TODAY

1-800-999-7139

DON'T DELAY SUBSCRIBE TODAY!

Just fill out the order card in this magazine and mail it in today.
 Li-A\ 0 L J

Thermoelectric
JOHN POTTER SHIELDS

SINCE THE LAST CENTURY WE'VE KNOWN

coolers
Here's a look at Peltier devices-
that when you form a closed circuit of
two dissimilar metals and two junc- tiny solid-state heat pumps that can be used
tions, a current may flow between the in a wide variety of cooling or heating applications.
junctions. That happens when there is
a temperature difference between the
junctions, or when the metals have
different temperatures.
The phenomenon is known as the
Seebeck effect, and is the fundamental
principal behind the thermocouple.
Generally speaking, the greater the
temperature differences, the higher
the current. Also, the combination of
metals that are used will affect the
current flow.
The reverse of the Seebeck effect
was discovered in 1834 by James C.
Peltier. He found that passing an elec-
tric current through a junction formed
by certain types of dissimilar mate-
rials could cause an increase or de-
crease in temperature. Peltier also
found that the direction of current
flow dictated whether heating or cool-
ing occurred, and that the amount of
temperature change was determined
by the type of material and the size of
the junction. In his honor, that effect
is called the Peltier effect, and it is the
fundamental principal behind Peltier
devices. In this article, we'll examine
Peltier devices, and how they are
used, in more detail.

Semiconductor thermoelectric
devices
Since the discovery of the Seebeck
and Peltier effects, we've discovered
that they are not necessarily limited to
metals. In fact, they are seen strongly
in semiconductors. Figure 1 shows the
arrangement of a simple semiconduc-
tor Peltier device. It consists of two
pieces of semiconductor material; one
is p-type, and the other is n -type.
When current is applied, charge
carriers move through the two mate-
rials; causing cooling of the top sur-
face and heating of the bottom
surface. That action is basically that
of a heat pump-heat is pumped from
the top to the bottom of the device. If
the applied current is reversed, then
the top surface will be heated, and the
9
bottom surface cooled. The device is
then a heater. Most practical ther-
moelectric devices, like the Marlow
(10351 Vista Park Road, Dallas, TX
ELECTRICAL INSULATION
(GOOD HEAT CONDUCTOR) -
75238) MI 1069 shown in Fig. 2, con- BODY TO BE COOLED
sist of many such elements. In those, (HEAT SOURCE)

the elements are connected in series

1-
electrically, and in parallel thermally.
The tiny devices are capable of put- P -TYPE

ting out great quantities of cold and ELECTRONIC CARRIERS SEMICONDUCTOR

MOVING HEAT TO THE
heat, regardless of whether they are HEAT SINK
r

used as a cooler or heater. Therefore, T

a practical semiconductor cooler or T N -TYPE
SEMICONDUCTOR
heater absolutely requires a heat sink.
Otherwise, the device would overheat
and fail within seconds.
HEAT SINK
Applications
One of the most interesting ap-
plications, especially for the elec-
tronics experimenter, is localized
cooling of electronic components.
For that, the cold side of the Peltier jI----II
device is mounted directly to compo-
DC SOURCE
nent using thermal epoxy, solder, or
thermal grease. When power is ap-
plied to the Peltier device, heat is FIG.1-A BASIC THERMOELECTRIC COOLER. The action is similar to that of a heat
pump, conducting heat away from the cold side to the hot side.
drawn away from the component
being protected. Those components
can include IC's, power transistors,
laser diodes IR detectors, and solid-
state imaging devices.
Peltier devices can also be used to
cool moderate volumes of air or other
gasses. In that application, a finned
heat sink is attached to the cold side of
the Peltier device. That heat sink thus
becomes a cold sink. The Peltier de-
vice cools the cold sink; when air
passes over the cold sink, a small air
conditioner is created. The cold sink
serves the same function as the evap-
orator coil in a conventional air-con-
ditioner design.
Likewise, Peltier devices can be
used to cool liquids. In that applica-
tion, liquid is pumped through the
cold sink and is cooled to the desired
temperature.

Power generators
One interesting, and little -dis-
cussed application of Peltier devices FIG. 2-A COMMERCIAL PELTIER DEVICE. This single -stage unit is the Marlow MI 1069.
is as power generators.
The circuit shown in Fig. 1 can be that the solders used in most devices Thermoelectric coolers are avail-
used as a power generator by simply melt at about 138°C (although some able in single -stage configurations at
replacing the DC power source with a units use solders that are designed to prices that range from about $15 to
load and applying heat to the top sur- withstand short term exposure to tem- $50. For applications where a high
face of the Peltier device. Note that peratures as high as 200°). That limits degree of cooling is required, single -
the delivered power will have a polar- the maximum efficiency of Peltier de- stage units can be ganged; that is the
ity that's the opposite of the battery vices, but it is still possible to use a hot side of one unit is attached to the
polarity shown. solar collector to heat a Peltier device cold side of the other. Commercial
One consideration when using a and achieve outputs and efficiencies units with up to six stages are avail-
Peltier device as a power generator is that rival those of solar cells. able. R -E
 s
GATED -SYNC
DESCRAMBLER

This somewhat unusual-

but easily installed-decoder
restores the gated sync pulses of
scrambled TV signals.

STEVE PENCE

OF THE MANY METHODS USED TO SCRAM-

ble a video signal for secure transmis- YOU MUST PAY
sion, one of the more popular ones is
called Gated Pulse or Gated Sync. Please note that the gated -pulse Federal law renders illegal both the
The scrambling is accomplished by decoder is intended only for those interception and reception of any
applying 6 -dB suppression to the vid- whc presently subscribe to a communications service offered over
scrambled cable service and are dis- a cable system, unless those actions
eo signal's horizontal sync pulses
satisfied with the picture quality at- have been specifically authorized by
thereby making it impossible for a the cable operator or by law. Federal
tained from the supplied decoder, or
television set to maintain a syn- who want to experiment with various law imposes both civil and criminal
chronized picture on the screen. decoding devices. If you are not pres- penalties for violation of the applica-
Figure 1shows how gated sync ently a subscriber but want to view ble statutes. In addition, states have
works. Figure 1-a shows a con- scrambled programs using our de- enacted "theft of cable services' stat-
ventional video signal with normal coder, you must make subscriber ar- utes that impose penalties for viola-
horizontal sync pulses. Notice the rangements with the originating tions thereof.
colorburst riding on the hack porch of procram service. The foregoing is not intended to
The subscriber arrangement is constitute legal advice. Readers are
necessary because the unauthorized advised to obtain independent ad-
reception of cable services is illegal vice based upon their individual cir-
under Federal and State laws. cumstances and jurisdictions.

H SYNC
a

the horizontal blanking pulse. Figure Although the gated -sync scram-
1-b shows the same signal with the bling technique is basic and straight-
H SYNC horizontal sync pulse suppressed 6 forward, its exact implementation can
b dB. Notice that in Fig. 1-b the hori- vary greatly from one equipment
FIG. 1-A CONVENTIONAL TV signal is zontal sync pulse and its blanking manufacturer to another; which
shown in a. With suppressed sync the sig- pulse, and the colorburst are all with- means that each system needs its own
nal resembles b. in the video -signal level. particular kind of decoder to regain
11
 the original programming. As a gen- will work on nearly any single -level some of a TV set's circuits-the basic
eral rule, the variations used to sync -suppression system and does not principle used in the gated -sync de-
customize gated -sync scrambling need a reference signal to operate; no coder is that of a phase -locked loop.
usually involve a reference signal of demodulation of any kind; a sim- The loop, which is indicated by the
some kind that is either multiplexed plified circuit design that uses low- bold lines, is formed by the TV set's
onto the audio carrier in some fash- cost, readily available parts. sync separator, horizontal AFC cir-
ion, or onto some kind of outband The disadvantages are that the de- cuit, horizontal oscillator and output,
carrier on an empty channel. vice must be used with a television and the high -voltage flyback trans-
But if we can get around the "mis- set-a VCR by itself will not do. The former. When all of that circuitry is
placed" reference signal, a simple television set must be tuned to the being fed normal video (containing
gated -sync decoder is all that's neces- channel that is being decoded, and sync pulses), the loop is closed by
sary to decode nearly any single -level phase -lock is not automatic-it must taking a pulse from a winding on the
gated -pulse signal. And that's exactly be done manually each time the de- flyback transformer and feeding it
what our decoder does. It eliminates coder is turned on or when the chan- back to the AFC circuit, where the
the need for a reference signal, so it nel is changed. Also, the decoder will flyback's pulses and the sync pulses
doesn't matter where the scrambling not work on tri -mode systems or any are compared. If they are not in phase,
system hides the reference. other system that uses more than one an error voltage is generated that
As you'll see, our decoder requires level of sync suppression, or on any forces the horizontal oscillator to
no special set-up equipment, al- system that suppresses the vertical change frequency until the two sig-
though a scope does simplify setting sync pulse. Also, the decoder will nals are finally in phase and the pic-
up. Best of all, there's no intricate RF operate only in the low VHF band; ture locks.
alignment because no RF tuned cir- hence it must be used with a cable If the sync pulses are suppressed,
cuits are used in the decoder. downconverter that outputs on chan- as they are in a gated -sync system, the
nels 2, 3, or 4. AFC loop has been opened because
Pluses and minuses the pulses from the flyback trans-
As with any other decoder, ours has How it works former have nothing to be compared
both advantages and disadvantages. As shown in Fig. 2-a functional with; so the horizontal oscillator runs
Its advantages include: versatility-it block diagram of the decoder and free (unsynchronized).

VOLTAGE CONTROLLED
ATTENUATOR DECODER

FROM CABLE O- CABLEBOX

VERTICAL
ONESHOT PAIR
COMPARATOR

TUNER VIDEO HORIZONTAL

I.F. AMPLIFIER ONESHOT
DETECTOR COMPARATOR

am«, H.sour

L 1
SYNC VERTICAL
SEPARATOR VERTICAL OSC.
INTEGRATOR

i0

VERTICLE
PICK-UP
DEFLECTION
COIL
COILS

HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL HIGH

OUTPUT
I V
AFC OSCILLATOR VOLTAGE

o FLYBACK
TRANSFORMER
HORIZONTAL
PICK-UP
DEFLECTION
COIL
COILS

TELEVISION SET

J
FIG. 2-THE DECODER WORKS by using sync samples from the TV's deflection yoke to
control a signal attenuator.

12
 - 8V +-
R2 R8 R11
R6
4.7K 10K 20K
2K
VN
C2 R7 C3 R10
RI 10K 2K
1µF 16 15, 114
1K

12
R3 10
0
L1 _ Cl 10K
VERT IC2-a +8V 1 IC2 b
' 14538 /, 14538
R9

01 --MVr- 3.3K
D
9
1N4148 - 05
R4 R R

i 10K
1MEG
i8 03 LEDI 13

PLI PHASE
8V
R17
R15 10K
2K

C5 R16

0047 2K
R12
1K
1M
L2 IC3
C6
HORIZ. 311 IC4-a
014
/ 14538
1
2 5
i
4
# iMEG
C7

R13 047
10K 8 03
VN
PSI
C12
r J1
i

.Ti
22µH
IC5
- 8V R25
1001! L3
7808 05
C9
MBD-101
J

FIG. 3-THE DECODER'S CIRCUIT. The attenuator is built as a separate subassembly.

right combination of horizontal os-

Closing the loop cillator, decoder oneshot phase delay,
Our decoder closes the loop by tak- and re-insertion level occur. When ev- J2
ing samples of the pulses produced by erything is correct, so that a few sync
the horizontal oscillator and feeding pulses are inserted at the proper time, J3
ouT
them back around to the antenna input the whole system locks up and sta- THREADS III IIIII Illillllj
to increase the amplitude of the RF bility is restored to the picture. III VIII 11,411111

envelope during the signal's sync - THREADS

pulse period. The samples of the TV The circuit 0/ J1

set's vertical and horizontal sync

pulses are obtained by induction from
the TV's vertical and horizontal de-
flection coils.
The sync -pulse reinsertion is ac-
The decoder, which is shown in
Fig. 3, requires that no direct elec-
trical connection, nor any modifica-
tion, be made to the TV set. The TV
signals are obtained by pickup coils
22µH
L3

?
GND POST
05 =
- C8
.001
R26
68521 IN

complished with a voltage -controlled L1 and L2 through inductive coup-

attenuator. The attenuator reduces the ling; hence, there is no shock hazard FIG. 4-THE ATTENUATOR is built in a
gutted splitter. The assembly will be sim-
amplitude of the RF signal feeding the during set up as long as the television plified if you follow this parts layout.
TV set. Pulses from the decoder cause set is unplugged from the powerline
the attenuator to "unattenuate," thus and you touch nothing but the deflec- L1 and L2 are identical air-core
increasing the signal level during the tion yoke during the installation of the coils. The vertical coil, L1, is taped to
"unattenuate time"-which is effec- coils. The purpose of the coils- the side of the yoke (either right or
tively the same thing as re-inserting which are taped to the deflection left, it doesn't matter). Coil L2 is the
the sync pulse. Sync pulses are inser- yoke-is to pick up the horizontal and horizontal coil, and it is taped to the
ted pretty much randomly until the vertical scanning pulses. top of the yoke.
 PHASE LEVEL
1M - -Wr- R21
PARTS LIST
R17

1
All resistors watt, 5%
-R9- D4 1/4

C2
J
- R20- D2 D3
C11
R1, R12,
R2-4700 ohms
R18-1000 ohms

-
-R10
R7
R18

IC4
R16
-R22-
R23 IC5 010
R3, R4, R7, R13-10,000 ohms
R5, R14--1 megohm
R6, R10, R15, R16, R20-2000 ohm;
-C3- -C4-
R8, R19-10,000 ohms, trimmer
-R2-
-R5- -R14-
0:5

C13L
I C9 POWER
R9-3300 ohms
R11-20,000 ohms, trimmer
R17, R21-10,000 ohms,
I
R3
I R6 R15
J3 S1

potentiometer
R22-75 ohms
RID1_ R23-220 ohms
-
3
-R12- PSI R24-not used
-R1 Cil
i
C12
'C6- ATTENUATOR
R25-100 ohms, trimmer
1

R26-68 ohms
All capacitors polyester, 25 volts,
V5 H1
OUT IN unless otherwise noted
BLK
YEL GRN RED
Cl, C2-1 µF, 25 volts, tantalum
C3, C6, C9, C12-0.1 µF
FIG. 5-THE PARTS LAYOUT. The attenuator subassembly is installed directly on the C4, C8-0.001 µF
component side of the PC board. C5 0.0047 µF
C7-0.047 µF
C10, C11-330 µF, 25 volts,
A 15.734 -kHz resonant circuit is have both a positive and negative sup-
electrolytic
formed by L2 and C6/C7. The wave- ply voltage. The positive voltage is C13-220 pF
form displayed on an oscilloscope that supplied by voltage regulator ICS. Semiconductors
is connected across L2/C6/C7 will be IC3's negative voltage is provided by IC2, IC4-MC14538 dual mono -
a pure sine wave whose amplitude D7 and C11. stable multivibrator, Motorola,
depends on the size of the picture IC4-a is used as a phase delay and National, or Toshiba only
tube. That's because as the screen gets sync pulse restorer pair. Phase Adjust IC5-7808, 8 -volt regulator
larger, the yoke scanning current must control, R17, can vary the period of D1, D2, D3, D4-1N4148 silicon
become larger to deflect the beam. IC4 over the range of 9-56 µs. R17 is rectifier
IC3 is a zero -crossing detector that installed on the front panel because it D5-MBD-101 silicon rectifier
D6, D7-IN4001 silicon rectifier
squares up the sine wave induced in is used to phase -lock the decoder
LED1-red light -emitting diode
L2 and converts it to single -ended when the unit is first powered up, or Q1 -2N2222, NPN transistor
drive for 1C4 -aCMOS oneshot- when the user selects a different tele- Other components
that follows. Because the input to IC3 vision channel. L1, L2 -see text
is a sine wave that goes both above IC4-b is used as a sync restorer that L3 -22µH coil
and below ground potential, IC3 must provides a pulse of 1-11 µs (set by Attenuator-see text
trimmer-potentiometer R19). The out- J1, J2, J3 -part of attenuator
put pulse at pin 9 is normally high; it PS1-wall transformer, 12 VAC,
goes low during the sync pulse. Tran- 50mA
sistor QI is a low -impedance driver S1-SPST switch
PL1-Mating DIN connectors
for attenuator-diode D5. Diodes D2,
Miscellaneous: Printed -circuit ma-
D3, and D4 limit the amplitude of the terials, wires, solder, etc.
pulse so that D5 (in the attenuator) Note: The following items are
cannot be overdriven. available from Cybernetworks,
A simple shunt attenuator is made P.O. Box 41850, Phoenix, AZ
up of R25, R26, and D5. The RF 85080. The printed -circuit
signal that is applied to J1 is attenu- board: $15.00. A partial kit that
ated at J2 when D5 is forward biased: includes the PC board, IC's, and
When the voltage across D5 drops to coils: $25.00. The PC board for
zero, the RF signal is unattenuated. the April '85 Sync Separator
project is available for $15.00
(the complete kit has been dis-
Basic circuit continued). Allow 4 to 6 weeks
In many instances, only the pre- for delivery. We cannot accept
viously described circuit that is asso- orders from Arizona residents.
ciated with L2 is all that's needed. Canadian orders please use
FIG. 6 -THE COMPLETED DECODER. The
With some judicious knob twisting, postal money orders in U.S.
three operating controls are mounted on the circuit can be aligned by simply funds and add $2.00 handling.
the cabinet's cover. observing the picture to see the effect
14
 template in PC Service. Take note that ground wire. After the module is
space and a ground plane are provided mounted to the board, solder the wire
on the PC board for the RF attenuator, to the PC board's ground plane.
which, as shown in Fig. 3, is a sepa- The reason for the ground wire is
rate unit. because the attenuator module's
Figure 4 shows the assembly of the mounting screws often do not make a
attenuator, which is built inside a gut- good ground connection to its case
a
ted two -set coupler. Most couplers are and the PC board. The ground wire is
made of aluminum and cannot be sol- simply ensurance against possible
dered to; and most, but not all, will grounding problems.
have a solderable ground stud inside. You should also drill a 3/8 -inch hole
If yours does not, you will have to in the top of the attenuator module
drill a hole for a machine screw with directly over where trimmer -potenti-
which you can bolt down your own ometer R25 will be mounted. The
ground lug. Solder a bare bus wire to hole will allow you to adjust the trim-
the ground lug in the attenuator (the mer without dismounting the module.
cut-off lead of a resistor or capacitor Figure 5 shows the parts placement
FIG. 7-STRETCH THE COIL into an oval,
will do). The wire should exit out the on the PC board. Secure the at-
as shown in a. Then cover the coil with bottom of the attenuator and be tenuator case to the PC board with
tape, as shown in b. snaked through a hole in the PC board two screws. If the case has a separate
that you must drill specifically for the external grounding tab, simply cut it
of each control. The decoder is con-
nected between the output of a cable
box and the antenna input of the tele-
vision set. If desired, a VCR can be HORIZONTAL
COIL
placed between the decoder and the L2
television set, and the effect on the
signal can then be observed with a
scope by looking at the VCR's video
YOKE y
output.
The vertical circuit, composed of
Ll, ICI, and IC2, locks out IC4 dur-
ing the vertical interval. The pickup
coil, Ll, must be taped to the deflec-
tion yoke in order to pick up enough
of a signal to drive IC1. Capacitor C1,
which is connected across Ll, serves
only as a filter to remove the horizon-
VERTICAL
tal hash that is picked up along with COIL
the vertical pulse by Ll. Lt

The signal across L1 will be polar-

ized, and must be of the correct polar-
ity to drive ICI; hence it may be
necessary to reverse the coil's connec-
tions. LEDI will light when Ll's po-
larity is correct.
The two sections of IC2 operate the
same as they do for IC4, except that FIG. 8-TAPE THE COILS on the CRT's yoke as shown.
they are used for the vertical, rather
than the horizontal, sync pulses. IC2
is adjusted by R8 and RII until the
output pulses at pin 9 go low during
the time you want the horizontal L1

pulses locked out, which usually oc- DIN PLUG

curs during vertical blanking. L

1[
DIN PC BOARD
SOCKET
Construction FOUR WIRE
Except for the RF attenuator, con- CABLE
INSULATED
struction is non -critical. The author's COILS
prototype was first built on a Radio
Shack breadboard, and the circuit
a b
worked perfectly the first time. For
those of you who prefer printed -cir- FIG. 9-THE ELECTRICAL COIL connections are shown in a. The way they are connected
cuit assembly, we provide a full-scale to printed -circuit board is shown in b.

15
off if it gets in the way of anything. Make two coils, then attach leads
Notice that IC1-IC4 are not mounted to each coil that are long enough to USING A SCOPE
with the same orientation; that is, all reach from the inside of the TV set to
No. pins and/or notches do not face
1 the decoder. You can use either indi- Whenever you work with video,
and in particular when working with
the same direction. Instead, all pin l's vidual wires, pairs for each coil, or
decoders, you must often correlate
and/or notches face the center of the quad (four wires: two for each coil). the video signal with another signal,
PC board, as does ICS's metal tab. Sandwich the coil assemblies in white such as a sync re-insertion pulse.
Figure 5 also shows color-coding adhesive tape for insulation, making That is impossible to do if the scope
for the wires connected to the vertical certain that the tape covers the coils you are using is not set-up to be trig-
and horizontal PC -board connec- and the ends of the heavier hook-up gered properly.
tions. The exact colors are unimpor- wires. (The tape provides stress relief The secret is in a setup that allows
tant-they will depend on the for the thinner coil wires). you to look at only one line of video at
particular multi -conductor wire that's Mount the coils to the yoke of the a time; each time the scope sweeps,
it displays the same line. In other
used. (The colors shown are those of television set as shown in Fig. 8. The
words, if you want to look at scanning
conventional telephone quad.) We easiest way to do it is to simply hold line number 32 (that is, the 32nd line
only show color-coding to help you the coils in place with a strip of adhe- of video that occurs after the first field
integrate the parts placement with the sive or electrical tape. Snake the begins), you must make the scope
wiring of L1 and L2, which we'll get wires out of the TV set and connect sweep only during the time that line
to in a short while. them to a 5 -pin DIN connector as 32 is present.
At this point the circuit board can shown in Fig 9. Figure 9-a shows the Most scopes do not easily allow
be installed in a cabinet, as shown in actual wiring and the DIN -connector you to trigger that way. Those that can
Fig. 6. The phase (R17) and level numbers. Figure 9-b shows how the be triggered that way have an extra
(R21) controls, and the power switch coils connect to the PC board. feature called "delayed sweep." De-
layed sweep allows you to trigger on a
(S1), are mounted on the cover.
relatively slow repetitive event like
Tweaking
vertical sync, delay out to a specific
Making the coils Due to the differences in induc- line of video, then begin a very fast
Coils L1 and L2 are made by tance that are possible when coils are sweep that is set by a second time -
scramble -winding 100 turns of No. 28 wound by hand with whatever size base. The delayed sweep allows you
or No. 30 solid, insulated, magnet wire is readily available, it may be zero in on any part of a waveform that
wire around a 11/4 -inch form. (The necessary to select the value of C6/ occurs after the trigger, and then ex-
author used an empty 35 -mm film C7. The value needed to resonate with pand that portion.
canister for the form.) As shown in L2 ,will be near 0.15 µF. After the A project that provides scope delay
Fig. 7-a, after each coil is wound, coils are taped to the yoke, turn on the was described in the April 1985 issue
slide it off the form and elongate the TV set and use a high -impedance of Radio -Electronics.
coil to form an oval. To prevent the voltmeter or scope to measure the in-
coils from becoming unwound or de- duced voltage across C6/C7. Try dif-
formed, dip them in hot candle wax or ferent values of capacitance until you Alignment
paraffin (available in most hardware attain the maximum peak -voltage Ideally, alignment should be done
stores.) reading. with a scope, using the equipment
arrangement shown in Fig. 10. The
best scope to use is a dual -trace model
having delayed sweep. For those of
cy_l CABLE BOX VCR R.F. OUT
you without access to such a scope,
FR OM
CABLE Í VIDEO
begin by interconnecting the decoder
IN
SYSTEM
R.F.
OUT with your television as shown in Fig.
11 (the VCR is optional). Turn on the
TV set and tune the cable box to a
non -scrambled station. Adjust the
set's vertical -hold control until you.
n can see the vertical -blanking bar: Try
ATTENUATOR SCOPE to get it to sit still long enough so you
can measure the vertical height of the
CH1
o bar with a ruler or a tape measure.
CH2 Make a note of the height.
EXTERNAL Set R8, R11, R17, R19, and R25 to
TRIGGER the center of their rotation, and set
INPUT
DECODER ANTENNA R21 fully counterclockwise. When
TV
I you apply power to the circuit the
HORIZONTAL vertical -polarity LED should come
COIL
VERTICAL
on. If it does not, reverse the leads
COIL from LI or physically flip the coil
o
180°.
FIG. 10-THIS IS HOW TO CONNECT the equipment when making your checks and Slowly adjust R21 clockwise-the
adjustments. The VCR is not necessarily required (see text). picture becomes lighter as the control
 No other training in school, on the 'ob,
anywhere-shows you how to trouble-
shoot and service computers like NRI
PACKARD BELL COMPUTER
HARD DISK NEC V10 dual speed 14.77 MHz/8 MHz) CPU, MONITOR
512K RAM, 360K double -sided disk drive.
20 megabyte hard disk drive you install High -resolution, non-glare, 12" TTL
internally for greater data storage monochrome monitor with tilt and
capacity and data access speed. swivel base.

TECHNICAL MANUALS
DIGITAL MULTIMETER With pi ofessional programs and
Professional test instrument for complete specs on Packard
quick and easy measurements. Bell computer.

DISCOVERY LAB
LESSONS Complete breadboarding
Clearcut illustrated system to let you design and
texts build your modify circuits, diagnose
understanding and repair faults.
of computers
step by step.

DIGITAL
SOFTWARE LOGIC
Including MS-DOS, GW PROBE
BASIC,word processing, Simplifies
database and spreadsheet ee, analyzing digital
programs. * circuit operation.

Only NRI walks you through the moving from the fundamentals to
step-by-step assembly of a powerful sophisticated computer servicing
XT-compatible computer system you techniques. Step by easy step, you
keep-giving you the hands-on get the kind of practical hands-on
experience you need to work with, experience that makes you uniquely
prepared to take advantage of every
troubleshoot, and service all of today's most
opportunity in today's top -growth
widely used computer systems. You get all it field of computer service.
takes to start a money-making career, even a
What's more-you learn at your own
business of your own in computer service. pace in your own home. No classroom
pressures, no night school, no need to
No doubt about it: The best way to learn to service computers is to actually
build a state-of-the-art computer from the keyboard on up. As you put the quit your present job until you're ready
machine together, performing key tests and demonstrations at each stage of to make your move. And all throughout
assembly, you see for yourself how each part of it works, what can go wrong, your training, you have the full support of your personal NRI instructor and the NRI
and how you can fix it. technical staff always ready to answer your questions and give you help whenever
you need it.
Only NRI-the leader in career -building, at-home electronics training for 75
years-gives you such practical, real -world computer servicing experience. Indeed, Your FREE NRI catalog tells more
no other training-in school, on the job, anywhere- shows you how to trouble-
shoot and service computers like NRI. Send today for your free full-color catalog describing every aspect of NRI's innovative
computer training, as well as hands-on training in robotics, video/ audio servicing,
You get in -demand computer servicing skills as you electronic music technology, security electronics, data communications, and other
train with your own XT -compatible system-now growing high-tech career fields.
with 20 meg hard drive If the coupon is missing, write to NRI School of Electronics, McGraw-Hill
Continuing Education Center, 4401 Connecticut Avenue, Washington, DC 20008.
With NRI's exclusive hands-on training, you actually build and keep the powerful
new Packard Bell VX88 PC/XT compatible computer, complete with 512K RAM and PC/XT and XT are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation
20 meg hard disk drive.
You start by assembling and testing the "intelligent" keyboard, move on to test
the circuitry on the main logic board, install the power supply and 5'V, " disk drive,
then interface your high -resolution monitor. But that's not all.

Only NRI gives you top -rated micro with compete

a
Amem School of
Electronics
I:A
For career courses
approved under GI bill
training built into the assembly process
McGraw-Hill Continuing Education Center
4401 Connecticut Avenue, Washington, DC 20008
E check for details

Your NRI hands-on training continues as you install the powerful 20 megabyte hard
CJ Check one FREE catalog only
disk drive-today's most wanted computer peripheral-included in your course to
dramatically increase your computer's storage capacity while giving you lightning- Computers and Microprocessors Security Electronics
quick data access. Robotics Electronic Music Technology
Having fully assembled your Packard Bell VX88, you take it through a complete TVNideo/Audio Servicing E Basic Electronics
series of diagnostic tests, mastering professional computer servicing techniques as you Computer Progrmming E Data Communications
take command of the full power of the VX88's high-speed V40 microprocessor.
In no time at all, you have the confidence and the know-how to work with,
troubleshoot, and service every computer on the market today. Indeed you have Name (please print) Age
what it takes to step into a full-time, money-making career as an industry technician,
even start a computer service business of your own. lddress
No experience needed, NRI builds it in
City/State/Zip
You need no previous experience in computers or electronics to succeed with NRI.
You start with the basics, following easy-to -read instructions and diagrams, quickly L Accredited by the National nome Study Council 5-10J
19
 VIDEO
VERTICAL SYNC PULSE :i`:i f
¡.4 1:1:
.
............'S':':......

VERTICAL COIL riiimiirrili****81.****Ne

fThemmim
U1-7 740 µs

I Em"im
U2 PIN
LI- 16 4m

U2 PIN 9 660µs
I I I

VIDEO

HORIZONTAL
4
COIL

32µS 3LµS
U3 PIN 7

U4 PIN 6 30µs

FIG.
U4 PIN 9

11-IF YOU USE A SCOPE

10µs

for checks and adjustments, this is how the important

LI
waveforms will be displayed.

is advanced. You may see a bar near Set R17 midway between where the enough (controlled by R21) to keep it
the center of the picture that will be bar disappears on the left and right off the sharp knee of its forward -bias
slightly darker than the picture itself. hand side of the screen. Tune in a curve. If it is allowed to act as a diode,
If you do not see the bar, adjust R17 to scrambled channel and set R21 to it will also rectify the incoming sig-
bring the bar in from either side of the about 3/4 of its clockwise rotation. nals and produce a varying voltage
screen. If you cannot make the bar (That ensures that the attenuator di- that will also modulate its own for-
appear from either side, reverse the ode is being driven hard.) Adjust R25 ward -bias voltage. That action will
connections to L2 or flip it over. until the picture corrects; which will produce an interference pattern in the
Adjust R17 until you can see the be easiest to do on a brightly lit pic- picture.
full width of the bar; then adjust R8 ture, and nearly impossible to do on a Once everything is properly op-
until you see a clear spot in the ver- dark picture. R25 should be set so that timized, all you should have to do will
tical bar. Then adjust R11 until the the picture is somewhat over -cor- be to adjust R17 and R21 whenever
clear spot is just a little wider than the rected and washed out; then adjust you turn the decoder on, or after you
vertical blanking bar was that you R21 for normal brightness and con- change channels. In most, but not all,
measured previously. As R8 is ad- trast. The three controls-R21 instances, picture -lock will occur au-
justed through its full range, you (phase), R19 (pulse width), and R21 tomatically when a scrambled chan-
should be able to make the clear spot (level)-all interact with one another nel is selected and a fairly bright
appear from either the top or the bot- and may require considerable experi- scene is available.
tom of the picture. Note where in R8's mentation and knob twisting to get If the signal level of your cable
rotation the spot appears at the top, them all correctly adjusted. system is too low, the 6 -dB signal loss
and where it appears at the bottom of Keep in mind that D5 is being used caused by the attenuator module will
the screen. Set R8 midway between as a switch and not as a diode. That often cause snow in the picture. One
those two points. means that it must be driven hard solution to the problem is to place a
distribution amplifier in the signal
chain prior to the decoder.
Scope set up
CABLE -TV
Begin by interconnecting every-
thing as shown in Fig. 10. Set R8,
R11, R17, and R19 to the center of
their rotation. Set R21 for zero correc-
tion-full counter-clockwise. If the
vertical -polarity LED does not come
on, reverse the connections to pickup -
coil Ll or flip it over and retape it to

BONANZA!
the yoke. Perform the set-up adjust-
ments with an unscrambled signal.
Adjust R8 and R11 until the ver-
tical -sync waveforms on your scope 10 OR
match those shown in Fig. 11-a. Both ITEM UNIT MORE
HAMLIN MCC 300036 CORDED REMOTE CONVERTER (Ch only, 2900 1800
comparators of IC2 are triggered on PANASONIC WIRELESS CONVERTER Iour hest hey(
l

9800 7900
the falling edge. The period of IC2-a STAR GATE 2000 88 00 69 00
169 00 11900
is approximately 16.4 milliseconds. It 'JERROLD 400 COMBO
00
JERROLD 400 HAND REMOTE CONTROL 29 00 18
should be adjusted to time out just 'JERROLD 450 COMBO 199 00 139 00
1800
before the beginning of the next ver- 'JERROLD 450 HAND REMOTE CONTROL 2900
9900 6300
JERROLD SB -ADD-ON
tical interval. 'JERROLD SB -ADD-ON WITH TRIMODE 10900 7500
7000
IC2-b is triggered by the falling 'M-35 B COMBO UNIT Cl,I 3 output only( 9900
7500
'M-35 B COMBO UNIT WITH VARISYNC 10900
edge from the first section. For most 'MINICODE IN -12( 9900 6200
gated-pulse systems, its period will 'MINICODE IN -12, WITH VARISYNC 10900
14500
6500
10500
'MINICODE VARISYNC WITH AUTO ON-OFF
be approximately 660 µs. Again it ECONOCODE Im(nicode suhsttute( 6900 4200
should be set by comparing its pulse ECONOCODE WITH VARISYNC 7900 4600
'MLD-1200-3 ICh 3 output, 9900 6200
width to the video waveform. It 'MLD-1200-2(Ch 2 output( 9900 6200
should fire just before the vertical 'ZENITH SSAVI CABLE READY 175 00 125 00
1400
INTERFERENCE FILTERS( Cl' 3only 2400
sync interval and time out just after 'EAGLE PD -3 DESCRAMBLER(Ch 3uutput only1 11900 6500
the last equalizing pulse. 'SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA ADD-ON REPLACEMENT DESCRAMBLER 11900 8500

To set up IC4, compare the sine

wave across L2 with the video wave- Output Price TOTAL
Quantity Item
form. The leading edge of the hori- Channel Each PRICE
zontal -sync pulses should correspond
to the positive to negative transition of
the sine wave through zero volts. If it
does not, reverse the connections to
L2 or flip the coil over. California Penal Code #593-D forbids us SUBTOTAL
Both sections of IC4, like IC2, are from shipping any cable descrambling unit Shipping Add
to anyone residing in the state of California. $3.00 per unit
negative -edge triggered. Adjust R17
and R19 until they match the wave- Prices subject
I g without notice.
to change Cards -
COD & Credit

TOTAL
Add 5%
forms shown in Fig. 11. The output at g
pin 9 should be set for a starting pulse Name
Ó
width of 8-10 µs. V
Then, use the same alignment pro-
Address City
r
State Zip Phone Number ( ) é
cedure as previously described, start- E Money Order COD ElVisa Mastercard U
Cashier's Check
ing with the adjustment for R21.
Acct # Exp Date i
Vá
Signature
Operating tips
w
If you can't locate an MBD-101 or a FOR OUR RECORDS:
1N5817 you can use a 1N4148; but if DECLARATION OF AUTHORIZED USE - 1, the undersigned,

that all products purchased, now and in the future, will only
do hereby declare under penalty of perjury
be used on cable TV systems with proper
fo
O

you do, another diode must be con- authorization from local officials or cable company officials in accordance with all applicable federal and
state laws. FEDERAL AND VARIOUS STATE LAWS PROVIDE FOR SUBSTANTIAL CRIMINAL AND CIVIL
nected in series with D2, D3, and D4 PENALTIES FOR UNAUTHORIZED USE.
to make certain that there will be
Dated- Signed'
enough drive voltage for D5.
The 14538 used for IC4 must be
manufactured by either Motorola or Pacific Cable Company, Inc.
National. The reason for that is be- 73251/2 RESEDA BLVD., DEPT. REHB-9 RESEDA, CA 91335
cause most other manufacturers do
not guarantee operation for pulse wid-
(818) 716-5914
No Collect Calls (818) 716-5140
ths below 20 microseconds, which is IMPORTANT: WHEN CALLING FOR INFORMATION
not narrow enough. R -E Please have the make and model # of the equipment used in your area. Thank You
21
 L
L

Electronic Thermometer
MARC SPIWAK, ASSOCIATE EDITOR

QUITE OFTEN, THE BEST KIND OF PROJECT batteries won't have to work so hard.
to build is just a neat little gadget that However, because the LDR is in paral-
you don't necessarily need, but one lel with an 18K resistor (R1), the com-
that will give you something to do bined total resistance of those two
without costing you an arm and a leg. components will never be more than
That way, you don't have to rush the 18K. Therefore, another alternative is
project in order to meet some dead- to leave the LDR out of the circuit
line. And if you should run into any completely.
problems while trying to get your
project to work, you won't be ready to Components
kill your friends and family-and be- The electronic thermometer can be
lieve it or not, the fourth -most leading built using parts that you gather indi-
cause of death in this country is due to vidually, or purchased as a complete
crazed electronics hobbyists who kit for $17.54 from the source listed in
have wasted hundreds of dollars and the Parts List. The kit includes the PC
hours on a dead-end project. board and all components except a
The project we are presenting, how- power supply, ON/OFF switch, and a
ever, is one that you'll want to build. It case. While buying the kit is probably
is an electronic thermometer that dis- the easiest and cheapest way to build
plays a temperature range of 40 de- the project, you can also make your
grees Fahrenheit (or about 23 degrees own PC board from the pattern in the
Celsius) on a 16 -LED bar-type dis- PC-Service section of this magazine.
play. It's easy to build, very inexpen- You may even be able to get away with
sive, and it is a great desktop-novelty point-to-point wiring since it's such a
item when it's finished. It's also so simple circuit. Then, if you're lucky,
small that, with a little customizing, it your junkbox may contain all the parts
can be made to fit, along with two you need except the IC.
small 6 -volt batteries, inside a very The ON/OFF switch that was used in
small project case. Here's something that you the prototype is a momentary push-
don't really need-but button -type switch. A momentary
Circuitry switch was used because LED's are
As you can see from the schematic you'll probably want very power-hungry, and if the device
in Hg. 1, the heart of the electronic to build one, anyway! were left on, the batteries wouldn't
thermometer is IC1, a Siemens last very long. However, if you decide
UAA170. That IC is really just a 16 - to build or buy a 12 -volt DC power
LED driver. Depending on the level of 90 degrees Fahrenheit, but you can supply, or use a much larger battery
the input voltage to pin 11, and how calibrate the center temperature (the pack, then it won't hurt a bit to leave
VREF(min) and VREF(max) (pins 12 middle LED) via potentiometer R12. the unit on all the time.
and 13) are biased, one of the 16 The circuit also includes an LDR
LED's is illuminated. (Light-Dependent Resistor), Rll, that Construction
The temperature -sensing ability of adjusts the display's brightness ac- Begin building the project by in-
the circuit is made possible by R10, cording to how much light is in the stalling all of the resistors on whatever
an NTC (Negative Temperature Co- room. The LDR's resistance in bright PC board you're using, as shown in
efficient) thermistor. (A thermistor is light is about 350 ohms, and in total Fig. 2. Then, install the potentiometer
a temperature -dependent resistor, and darkness its resistance approaches R12, the thermistor R10, the light -
NTC means that as the temperature 200,000 ohms. When the prototype dependent resistor R11, the IC socket,
increases, the resistance decreases; was tested, the photoresistor did its and lastly the LED's. Be sure to be
PTC means that as the temperature job too well. The display's brightness very careful when spreading the leads
increases, the resistance also in- varied greatly between a very pleasant of the LED's, because too much force
creases.) As the ambient temperature level and an excessively bright one. will crack the LED in half. The kit
increases, the thermistor's resistance, Thus, the light -dependent resistor was includes 15 LED's of the same color,
and consequently the input voltage to covered with a piece of tape so that the and one of a different color. You
pin 11, decreases. The 16 LED's on display will maintain the same low should install that single LED on the
the prototype display from about 50 to (pleasant) level of brightness and the right-hand side of the board (above
22
R12 in the LED16 position) to indicate of the LED's are concerned.) Now ON/OFF switch, and whatever you are
the maximum temperature on the dis- just press IC1 into its socket. using as a power supply. The pro-
play. (If you don't buy the kit, it's After the board is completely as- totype uses two 6 -volt photo batteries
entirely up to you as far as the colors sembled, you'll need some wire, an (Eveready type A544 or equivalent)
taped together, with the positive side
of one connected to the negative side
of the other. They are held in place
inside the case with a piece of double -
sided tape. Depending on what size
case you're planning to install the
LED LED LED LED LED LED
LED
1
LED
2
LED
3
LED
4
LED
5 6
LED
7 S 9'0
LED LED LED
11 12 13
LEO
14 15
board in, cut and solder appropriate
lengths of wire to the + and - termi-
nals on the PC board. Then install Si
in series with the positive supply line
and connect the leads to the batteries.
(Depending on what type of switch
you use, and how it's supposed to
5 4 mount to the project case, you may
ICI have to install it in the case first, and
+ 12V
UAA17O
R2
then solder it in the circuit.)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1.5K
1M Test and calibrate
By now you've probably already
Cl --eh-
R8 R9
R11
pressed the button to see if your ther-
22µF R7s 4/vie
56K 18K
75K R3
18K
R1
mometer is working-if not, do it
24K
now. At least one LED, or two right
R10 R6
56K
next to each other, should light up. (If
nothing happens, check your solder-
R5 1K
ing and the placement of the compo-
R12 2__ 180K I04 nents-there can't be too much
10K
wrong with a circuit this simple!)
FIG.1-THE SCHEMATIC FOR the electronic thermometer. It can be built from a kit or from Once you are sure that your ther-
separately purchased pieces on a PC board or perforated construction board. mometer is working, you have to let it
sit for about a half an hour. That's so
the board can cool down to room tem-
perature after all the soldering and
handling. Try to let the board cool in a
room that's at about 70 degrees-
you'll have to get an ordinary ther-
mometer, or look at your home ther-
mostat's reading.
After the board's temperature has
settled to about 70 degrees, adjust
R12 so that the center LED (or one or
two LED's higher or lower, depending
on the exact room temperature) is il-
luminated. Now you should take a
sheet of paper and draw 16 circles
representing the 16 LED's on your
display, and write a 70 next to the
appropriate circle.
Place both the electronic ther-
mometer and a regular thermometer
inside a refrigerator for about ten min-
utes, and then remove them both. The
temperature inside the refrigerator
should be lower than 50 degrees, so
the far-left LED should light up when
the button is pressed. As soon as the
next LED begins to light, check the
FIG. 2-PARTS-PLACEMENT DIAGRAM. Follow this when soldering the parts on the temperature on the regular ther-
board supplied with the kit, or the one you can make from the pattern in PC Service. mometer, and record it next to the
 appropriate circle on the sheet of pa-
per. Then you can estimate what tem-
perature the first LED should indi-
cate. As the temperature continues to
rise, keep on recording the readings
until both thermometers once again
level off at 70 degrees. (Try not to
handle the board while you're doing
that). If you are in doubt as to whether
or not both thermometers are warm-
ing up at the same rate, you will have
to do the calibrating by allowing both
thermometers to level off in environ-
ments having different temperatures.
Then you will have to approximate the
temperatures in between.
Now you have to work near a warm
lamp, or some other source of heat,
and continue recording the readings
until you reach the far-right LED. (It
should be about 90 degrees when that
LED lights.) Now you have a sheet of
paper that represents the entire dis-
play on your thermometer. You
should now check it out by placing FIG. 3-THE BOARD FITS inside the case as shown. Holes are cut in the cover, and a lens
both thermometers in different en- is made using any kind of flexible clear plastic, which is then screwed in place.
vironments to make sure that they
both display approximately the same
temperature. At this time you can ap- Final assembly and cut a strip that is slightly narrower
proximate the readings you've made Now you are ready to put the board than the faces of the LED's, and the
in nice even increments, to allow for in some kind of project case. In order exact length of them (about 4 cm).
neat labeling later on. to fit it inside Radio Shack's small Stick the tape down in the exact center
project case (number 270220), the PC of one piece of plastic, and make sure
board's edges had to be filed down, as that the edges are firmly pressed
All resistors are'/4-watt, 5%. well as cutting away the plastic ribs down. At a distance of at least a foot,
Rl. R9-18,000 ohms
inside the project case. (You can use a spray the plastic, tape -side up, with
R2-1500 ohms
R3-24,000 ohms larger case if you like.) Then, the some spray paint (whatever color you
R4-1000 ohms cover has to have a hole drilled in it for like), until you can no longer see
R5-180,000 ohms the switch, and a rectangular slot cut through it. Wait until the paint is com-
R6. R8-56,000 ohms in it so that the faces of the LED's can pletely dry, and then pull the tape off
R7-75,000 ohms come through (see Fig. 3). Make sure Now you have a lens that covers the
R10-20,000 ohms, NTC thermistor that the faces of the LED's are flush rough edges of the slot in the cover of
R11-350-200,000 ohms, light-de- with the surface of the cover-you the case, yet still allows the LED's to
pendent resistor might have to put a piece of foam be seen. Some rub -on lettering was
R12-10,000 ohms, PC -mounting rubber of other kind of non-con- used on the side without the paint to
type potentiometer
ductive material underneath the board indicate the temperature scale on the
Capacitors
C1-22 µF, 15 volts, electrolytic in order to get them to the right display, as well as to add a profession-
Semiconductors height. al appearance to the device. The tem-
IC1-UAA170 or equivalent The lens for the display was made perature range on the prototype was
LED's 1-16-rectangular LED's from two identical pieces of clear divided into 5 -degree increments, and
Miscellaneous plastic cut from the box that the kit the labeling was evenly spaced along
116 -pin IC socket, plastic case, clear came in. However, any clear plastic, the 4-cm display. The finishing touch
plastic, wire, solder, screws, tape, perhaps from bubble-type packaging, is the second piece of plastic used to
momentary switch, etc. may be used. The plastic is cut large protect the lettering from being
Note: A kit containing all parts ex- enough so that it can fully cover the scratched off The two pieces of plas-
cept a power supply, a momen- slot in the case's cover, and also over- tic are then screwed back in place, and
tary pushbutton, and a project
case, is available for $17.54 from
lap enough to have room to screw it in the case is then closed up.
all TSM distributers. You can place (see Fig. 3). Tape both pieces of The unit is now ready to be placed
contact the TSM headquarters, plastic in place on the case cover, drill in the location of your choice. There it
at 2065 Boston Post Road, a small hole on each side, put a small will silently wait, ready at all times,
Larchmont, NY 10538, for the screw in each hole, and then remove to give you an instant yet accurate
TSM distributer nearest you. the screws and the tape. temperture reading at the touch of a
Now take a piece of electrical tape, button. R -E

24
Jacob's Laddar-The easy-to -build laboratory toy made
famous in Frankenstein and other horror films.

Solid State Ms a Coil-Build an updated version of

Nikola Teslas famous electrical spark generator.

Lightning BL. lb-Create a stunning electrical displaf

within the co -fines of an ordinary light bulb.
Electronic Cazer-A budget project designed for the
experimenter who needs experience with high -voltage
circuits.
Universal Laser Power Supply-Power HeNe lasers fcr
experimental work using a supply that can deliver about
2.5 amperes.

Electronic Tornado-Build a high-tech, low-cost plasma

globe display that rivals the best money can buy.

Stun Gun-It's not a toy, but an experimental device that

can produce 75,000 volts at a peak pulsed power of
25,000 watts.

HV Pulse Generator-A universal power supply for

creating your own special effects with high voltage.

Kirlian Photographs-Tips. and techniques that help you

explore the mysteries of high -voltage photography.

Solid -State Tesla Coil

 Build Create an electrical storm
in a light bulb with this
easy-to-bui>`d prole

the
litnin
Since the dawn of civilization, mankind
has been fascinated by lightning. And it
was that fascìnatìon with lighting and
electricity that has brought about many of
the high-tech novelty items--ILke the
Testa Coil. Eve 4 the Storm, Jacob's
Ladder, and the Van DeGraph Generator,
for example-that are showing up in the
market place.
Similar effects can be prJ laced by the
Lightning Burt), which crez tes a stunning
display, yet consists of liE.lc :more than a
modit: d clear :ncandeseent lamp and a
high -voltage power, sappy. me lamp is
e or_-atu urn

26
foil to the back half of its glass envelope, equal or higher rating can be used in its of TI, causing a voltage to be induced in its
forming a sort of make -shift capacitor. The place. secondary winding. The high -voltage out-
electrode inside the lamp forms one plate of Figure 2 shows a schematic diagram of put (about 20,000 volts) at the secondary of
the capacitor, the glass envelope of the lamp the Lightning Bulb circuit. The heart of the Tl is applied to the lamp, Il, creating an
serves as the dielectric, and the aluminum circuit is a 12 -volt automotive ignition coil, electrical storm -like effect.
foil is used as the second plate. Ti, which is used to deliver a high -voltage The value of C2 must be limited to be-
The aluminum foil, like the negative plate charge of sufficient magnitude to ionize the tween 2-2.5 µF to prevent damage to igni-
of a polarized electrolytic capacitor, is gases within the glass envelope of lamp II. tion coil TI. On the other hand, if the value
grounded. A high voltage is discharged into Power for the circuit is taken directly from of C2 is too small, the display will be some-
the lamp through its inner electrode, ioniz- the AC line and applied through a phase - what insufficiently pronounced. Inductors
ing the thin gas that remains in the envelope, shift network (consisting of capacitor Cl LI and L2 were added to block any switch-
creating a visual effect similar to an elec- and resistor RI) to the trigger input (T) of ing transients from entering the AC line.
trical storm. quadrac TRI, causing it to conduct.
With TRI conducting, a short burst of Safety First. As shown in the schematic
Circuit Description. The Lightning Bulb energy is applied via C2 to the primary diagram (Fig. 2), you'll be dealing with a
circuit uses a quadrac (see Fig. I)-a device winding of TI. (Recall that when power is high -voltage transformerless power source.
that combines a triac and a diac trigger in a first applied to a capacitor, the capacitor acts Because of the possible safety hazard asso-
single package-to control the supplied cur- as a short, and then the capacitor begins to ciated with projects of this type, it is strong-
rent. Figure IA shows the schematic symbol charge to the applied voltage.) That burst of ly recommended that you use an isolation
for the quadrac, while Fig. IB shows the energy creates a magnetic field around the transformer when testing and troubleshoot-
pinout for the unit used in our circuit. Note primary winding of TI, causing a high volt- ing the circuit. For an extra margin of safety,
that quadracs are becoming increasingly age to be induced in its secondary. always be sure to discharge the capacitors
more difficult to come by; if one can not be When capacitor C2 begins to charge to its before performing any work on the circuit.
located, a discrete diac/triac combination of highest level, the AC signal begins to col- A capacitor can store a charge large enough
lapse. As the signal collapses, the current to melt a copper penny.
MT2 t14004LT
needed to maintain triac conduction dips Caution: In assembling the Lightning
below the holding level (IH), the triac turns Bulb, do not omit the protective plexiglass
off, and the second half of the AC signal tube that covers the lamp. The clear Vs -inch
begins. thick plexiglass tube helps to prevent an
As the AC signal becomes more negative, accidental shock. The high voltage can pen-
a signal is again applied to the triac's trigger etrate the glass and you could get a shock or
input, causing it to conduct. Triacs conduct worse. The safety cover is an absolute must.
during both the positive and negative half
MT1
MT1
cycles of an AC waveform, and can be acti- Construction. Because of the simplicity
MT2 vated by either a positive or negative trigger of the circuit, the author's prototype was
source. (For a better understanding of the built on a piece of perfboard (measuring
A B
operation of triacs and other thyristor de- about 3 x 4 inches), and the connection
Fig. 1. The Lightning Bulb circuit vices, see All About Thyristors, which ap- between the components were made using
uses a quadrac-a device that com- point-to-point wiring. Note that for those
peared in the March and April 1988 issues of
bines a triac and a diac trigger in a
Hands-on Electronics.) who wish to use a printed -circuit board, one
single pack- age-to control the
With TRI now conducting in the opposite is offered by the supplier given in the Parts
input power source. Shown in A is
its schematic symbol for the quad- direction, the charge on C2 is bled off, via
rac, while B is the pinout for the unit TRI, and a burst of energy (of opposite PARTS LIST FOR THE
used in our circuit. polarity) is applied to the primary winding LIGHTNING BULB
U1-Q4004 4 -amp, 400 -volt quadrac,
MT2 or triac/diac combination (see text)
HOT
óöp ` Oo Cr p MT1
C1 -0.02-µF metal -film capacitor
L1
C2-2-µF, 400-WVDC metallized
S1 F1
10uH 3A
C1
02
TR1 polyester or polycarbonate
04004LT
capacitor
-3
.
AC F1 -amp 3AG fuse
IN 11-G-40 clear incandescent lamp
C2
R1 with 5 -inch envelope
2
390 K L1, L2-10-µH hash choke
R1 -390,000-ohm 1/2 -watt resistor
L2
10u H
ONEUTRAL
bire' S1-single-pole, single -throw toggle
GROUND LEAD
switch
T1 -12 -volt automotive ignition coil
FOIL
Perfboard materials or printed-circuit
GLOBE
board, plastic enclosure, 6 -inch OD
NC Ti plexiglass tube, 11/2 -inch OD
12 -VOLT
IGNITION plexiglass tube, high -voltage cable,
COIL fuse holder, aluminum foil,
HIGH
VOLTAGE electrical tape, wire, solder,
hardware, etc.
Fig. 2. Here's the schematic diagram of the LightningBulb circuit.
 List. However, printed -circuit board con- FOIL directly to the circuit board. The other lead
struction will not be discussed in this article. is then connected through Si to the circuit
Assemble the circuit board using Fig. 2 as board.
a wiring guide, making the interconnections Once that is done, check your work. If
between the components as the components everything looks okay, seal the board in its
are installed on the board. Just about any 12 - enclosure and place a 6 -inch OD plexiglass
volt automotive ignition coil should do for tube over the lamp and column assembly.
Ti. The .02-µF capacitor specified for Cl (The actual length of the protective tubing
can be replaced by two .01-µF units con- depends on the physical height of the lamp/
LAMP
nected in parallel, which is what the author support-column combination.) The tube
used in his prototype. Fig. 3. A wire is connected from the provides the user with some measure of pro-
When the circuit -board assembly is com- ground lead of Ti to the aluminum tection from high voltage that's present in
foil that's been placed on the glass
plete, set it aside for a while and begin the circuit.
envelope of the lamp.
modifying the lamp. The lamp used in the The 6 -inch tube can be secured in place
author's prototype is a 25 -watt designer's
bulb with a 5 -inch clear-glass envelope.
LAMP
Contrary to common belief, the area within
the envelope-particularly where larger en-
velopes are concerned-is not a total vac- LAMP SOCKET EPDXIED TO PLASTIC TUBE
uum. Some gas still remains within the
PLASTIC TUBE

2 envelope even after the evacuation process.

Lamps having large envelopes produce a
SOLDER TWO LUGS FROM SOCKET TO HV WIRE

more impressive display because of the GLUE OR EPDXY PLASTIC TUBE

TO ENCLOSURE HIGH VOLTAGE WIRE
higher concentration of gas (in comparison
to standard household lamps) within the en-
velope.
Start the modification process by placing
black electrical tape on what will be the PLASTIC
back half of the lamp. Place a layer of alumi- ENCLOSURE

num foil over the tape and then add a second

layer of tape over the aluminum foil to hold it
IGNITION COIL
in place. Starting from the outer edges of
the foil, apply the tape, working your way Fig. 4. Mount the lamp -and -socket assembly to its support column, and then
inward toward the center. Leave a small mount the entire assembly on the project's plastic enclosure.
portion of the foil exposed so that a wire can the flyback transformer to the anode of the
o0
be attached. The author used aluminum sol-
der to the attach a lead to the aluminum foil,
but gluing or taping should work. Once the
CRT is ideal. Once the wires to the lamp are
in place, mount the lamp and socket to their
support column. It's a good idea to devise
1/4 INCH
0000 0 000
wire is attached, it should be connected to the some sort of identification method for the 0 00 0
Do 0 0 0
ground terminal of Tl as shown in Fig. 3. leads; that will cut down on the confusion
O
i
Then cover the exposed aluminum and the that may arise during the final electrical -
wire with tape. assembly process.
The author used a regular plug-in lamp The lamp -support column is a 5- to 6-inch ) 0 000
socket to connect the lamp to the high -volt- length of plastic tubing with an outside di- 0 0 0
age output of T1. A high-voltage cable is ameter (OD) of 11/2 inches. After threading o
connected across the two contacts of the the wires from the lamp-and -socket assem-
6 INCHES
lamp socket. The type of lead wire used in bly through the tube, secure the lamp-and -
TV sets to bridge the high -voltage output of Fig. 5. A 6 -inch diameter lid is
socket assembly to the tube with glue or
fashioned from a piece of clear
epoxy. (See Fig. 4.) Once the glue has dried,
plexiglass. Quarter- inch holes are
re -enforce the assembly where the lamp - then drilled into the lid to help
and -socket assembly meets the support col- ventilate the lamp.
umn with one or two wraps of tape .
The support-column assembly is then se- with' -inch wide angle brackets. (See pho-
cured to the project box with glue, or is held tos.) A lid for the tube can be fashioned from
in place with screws and "L" brackets. The a piece of clear plexiglass. Holes, about %
two leads from the lamp are then connected inch in diameter, should be drilled in the lid
to the circuit -board mounted components. for ventilating. The lid can then be glued to
The "hot" side of Tl's secondary is con- the top of the protective tube.
nected to the bridged lamp -socket terminals You are now all set to give your Lightning
(as shown in Fig. 4), and the negative side is Bulb a test run. As with all other projects of
When applying the second layer of connected to the lead coming from the alu- a similar nature, ambient light detracts from
tape, leave a small area of aluminum minum plate on the lamp. Feed a line cord the visual effect of the display. The Light-
exposed, and connect a wire to the through the enclosure wall to the circuit ning Bulb gives a much more impressive
foil. board. Connect one lead from the line cord display in a darkened room.
 HIGH -VOLTAGE ZAPPERS
It doesn't take much to generate enough high voltage to curl your hair

CHARLES D. RAKES

THE TWO CIRCUITS WE'VE GOT HERE ARE

for the experimenter having a touch of Ti
R1
1 Ì
D1 R8
Ben and Nikola's fascination for 1N4003 1000 R3 R6
Z 100K
117VAC 10K 33K R7
working with high voltage. But unlike 48V 5W 15K
+
those two brave pioneers who flirted
with lightning and gigantic spark -- Cl A R4 Q2`^
SCR1 10K 2N3630
10IiF
coils, our high -voltage circuits are NTE5463 R5 01 D2
3.3K 2N2222 1N756
mild in comparison, having outputs P A K G
R2 ' 14_ R9
of less than 50 kilovolts (kV). Even T2 X 3.3K 2.2K
so, don't ever become careless when
working with high voltage. To do so
could be dangerous to your health and FIG. 1-BE SURE TO KEEP EVERYTHING, especially yourself, away from the high -voltage
your good nature. So please take care. output at point "X."
A circuit that generates a high volt-
age by discharging the energy stored Q3. The positive gate voltage causes by the value of Cl, the voltage across
in a large-value capacitor through the Q3 to conduct, thereby discharging Cl, and the turns ratio of T2. The
primary winding of a high-turns -ratio Cl through the primary winding of frequency or pulse rate of the high
step-up transformer is known as a Ca- step-up transformer T2; the end-result voltage is determined by the resis-
pacitor-Discharge (CD) system. It's is a high -voltage arc at the output ter- tance of Tl's primary and secondary
the same concept used by many of the minal (X). windings, the value of Rl, and the
high-performance auto -ignition sys- The value of the high voltage de- value of Cl. The lower the value of
tems to produce a super-hot spark. It's veloped at T2's output is determined each item, the higher the output pulse
also the same kind of system used by rate; the peak output voltage will re-
some of the top -of-the -line electric main unchanged only if Cl 's value
fence chargers. And let us not forget PARTS LIST remains unchanged.
one of the most popular personal -de-
fense devices now on the market, the FIG. t Building the CD system
All resistors are 1/2 -watt, 5%, unless
electronic Stun Gun, which also gen- The circuit shown in Fig. 1 is non-
otherwise noted.
erates its zap with a capacitor-dis- R1-100 ohms, 5 watts critical, so any parts layout and
charge circuit. R2, R5-3300 ohms mounting can be used; perforated wir-
R3-10,000 ohms ing board will probably make for the
How we make the zap R4-10,000 ohms, potentiometer easiest assembly. But no matter what
R6-33,000 ohms
As shown in the circuit of Fig. 1, R7-15,000 ohms kind of construction is used, keep
step-down transformer Tl drops the R8-100,000 ohms T2's output terminal (labeled X) at
incoming line voltage to approximate- R9-2200 ohms least three inches clear of all circuit
ly 48 VAC and, in the process, adds a Capacitors components, yourself, and anything
C1-220- or 440-µF, 75-100 volts, elec-
degree of safety through the trans- trolytic, or 10-µF 220-VAC motor capac-
else that can conduct electricity.
former's primary-to -secondary isola- itor (see text) The transformer used for T2 can be
tion from the power line. Tl's 48 -volt Semiconductors almost any 6- or 12-volt auto -ignition
secondary is rectified by diode Dl; the D1 -1N4003 silicon rectifier coil, but one designed with a high
D2 -1N756, 8-volt Zener
resulting DC charges capacitor Cl, turns ratio for a capacitor-discharge
Q1 -2N2222 NPN transistor
through current -limiter R1, to a volt- Q2-2N3638 PNP transistor ignition system will produce the
age level pre-set by R4. When the SCR1-NTE5463 10 -amp, 200 -volt sil- greatest output voltage. The CD coil
voltage on R4's wiper reaches about icon -controlled rectifier that we used produced a spark 1'
8.6 volts, Q1 begins to turn on, draw- Other components inches in length from the output ter-
T1-Step-down transformer, 48 VAC, 300
ing current through R7 and the base - mA minal to the coil's common terminal.
emitter junction of Q2. Then Q2 turns T2-Auto ignition coil, or substitute (see An old (but good) TV flyback
on and supplies a positive voltage to text) transformer can also be used for T2.
the gate of silicon-controlled rectifier Simply wind about 10 turns of test -
29
 itor (or any other lower value with a
C4 6-12VDC
rating of 75 volts or more). Experi-
02 470µF ment with different component values
2N3055 to obtain the desired results.
An excellent electric fence charger
Q1
R4
1000 R5
( can be made by building the CD cir-
R3 2N3838 150
T1 cuit in a suitable case and selecting a
1K R6 Q3 220-11F capacitor for Cl. Adjust R4
C2 2700 2N3055
CI
47
for one to two pulses per second.
.22

Battery -powered high voltage

FIG. 2-THE SPARK DURATION is controlled by a 555 timer in this circuit. A high -voltage generator circuit
that can operate from a battery or
lead wire around the transformer's fer- with a small -engine ignition coil, other low-voltage DC source is shown
rite core and connect the free ends of connect the primary leads to termi- in Fig. 2. Output voltage great enough
the wires to the points labeled "A" nals "A" and "B," and a % to 3/4 -inch to jump a -inch gap can be obtained
1

and "B" in Fig. 1. Some experiment- spark should be possible. from a 12 -volt power source, and with
ing with the number of turns may be To make a "magnetic charger," se- a higher pulse rate than the circuit in
necessary to obtain good results with lect one of the ignition coils that has a Fig. 1.
that type of transformer. Our experi- good primary winding and carefully A 555 timer IC is connected as an
ments with the TV flyback produced a remove the secondary winding from astable multivibrator that produces a
voltage that would jump a 3/4 -inch the coil's core. Connect the primary narrow negative pulse at pin 3. The
gap. wires to terminals "A" and "B." Po- pulse turns Q1 on for the duration of
If a small -engine repair business is sition any object that you want to the time period. The collector of Ql is
located in your area, see if the owner magnetize on the exposed core lami- direct-coupled to the base of power-
or mechanic will give you a few of the nations and apply power; you should transistor Q2, turning it on during the
old ignition coils. If you obtain sev- hear a "Zap" sound as the magnetic same time period.
eral old coils, one or more should be pulses hit the metal object. The emitter of Q2 is direct-coupled
usable. To produce a high voltage through current -limiter R5 to the base
Maximum spark of power-transistor Q3. When Q3
If you want to achieve a maximum turns on, there is a minimum resis-
spark, select a CD ignition coil, and
Be an FCC use a 4404.11,75- to 100-WVDC elec-
trolytic capacitor for Cl. Using a DC
tance between its collector and emit-
ter. That causes a high-current pulse
through the primary of T1, which gen-

LICENSED
ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN!
voltmeter, monitor the voltage across
Cl. Adjust R4 so that the Q3 fires
when the charging voltage across Cl
erates a very high pulse voltage at TI's
secondary output terminal (labeled
X). The pulse frequency is deter-
E;;w.. :,s;, reaches between 50-55 volts. That mined by the values of R1, R2, and
setting should produce a spark 11/4 to C2. The values given in the Parts List
1' inches long every second or so. were chosen to give the best possible
Earn up to
To obtain a faster pulse rate, with performance when an auto ignition
$30 an hour some reduction in the output, change coil is used for T1. Here too, a CD -
and more!
o Cl to a 10-µF, 220-VAC motor capac- type ignition coil will produce the
olº greatest output voltage.
=Fi -
41
Learn at home in spare time.
No previous experience needed!
PARTS LIST Perforated wiring board con-
struction is a good choice for this cir-
No costly School. No commuting to class.
The Original Home -Study course pre- FIG. 2 All resistors are th -watt, 5%, un- cuit, but remember to be careful when
pares you for the "FCC Commercial Radio- less otherwise noted.
R1-10,000 ohms working near the output terminal of
telephone License". This valuable license Tl while the power is on.
is your "ticket" to thousands of exciting R2-4700 ohms
jobs in Communications, RadioTV, Micro- R3-1000 ohms
wave, Computers, Radar, Avionics and R4-100 ohms Getting parts
more!. You don't need a college degree to R5-15 ohms, 5 watts Radio Shack is a prime source for
qualify, but you do need an FCC License. R6-270 ohms
Capacitors most of the components used in this
No Need to Quit Your Job or Go To School
This proven course is easy, fast and low Cl, C3-0.22 µF, 100 volts, Mylar article. Digi-Key Corp. (701 Brooks
cost! GUARANTEED PASS You get your -
FCC License or money refunded. Send for
C2-0.47
C4-470
µF, 100 volts, Mylar
µF, 25 volts, electrolytic
Ave. South, P.O. Box 677, Thief
River Falls, MN 56701-0677) is an-
FREE facts now. MAIL COUPON TODAY! Semiconductors other good source. A good selection
IC1-555 timer
commanD PRODUCTIONS Q1 -2N3638 PNP transistor of unusual components, such as pho-
FCC LICENSE TRAINING, Dept. 205 Q2-2N3055 NPN power transistor to -flash capacitors and telephone
P.O. Box 2824, San Francisco, CA 94126 Q3 -2N3055 NPN power transistor with transformers, is available from All
Please rush FREE details immediately! heatsink Electronics Corp. (905 S. Vermont
NAME Other components
ADDRESS T1-Auto ignition coil (see text) Ave., PO Box 20406, Los Angeles,
CITY STATE ZIP CA 90006). R -E

30
_. . Zr

STUN GUN
ROBERT GROSSBLATT, and ROBERT IANNINI This experimental high -voltage
generator can produce 75,000
Man's fascination volts at a peak power of 25,000
with high voltages watts.
began with the first
caveman who was
terrified by a bolt of
lightning. In more
recent times,
electronics
experimenters and
hobbyists have found
the Tesla coil and the
Van de Graaff
generator equally
fascinating. In this
article we'll show you
how to build a hand-
held high -voltage
generator that is
capable of producing
75,000 volts at a power
level as high as 25,000
watts. The stun gun
can be used to
demonstrate high -
voltage discharge and
WARNING
as a weapon of self- THIS DEVICE IS NOT A TOY. We present
defense. Before it for educational and experimental pur-
poses only. The circuit develops about
building one, however, 75,000 volts at a maximum peak power of
25,000 watts. The output is pulsed, not
you should read and continuous, but it can cause a great deal
pay very close of pain should you become careless and
get caught between its output terminals.
attention to the And you should never, repeat, NEVER,
use it on another person! R may not be
warning in the against the law in your area b carry a stun
accompanying text gun in public, but, if you use it on another
person, you may still be liable for civil ac-
box, as well as to the tion.
To help you build, test, aid adjust the
description of device safely, we have included a number
physiological effects of tests and checks that must be followed
strictly. Do not deviate from cur procedure.
that follows.
31
 Physiological effects
So that you may understand the danger 04
C2
07 3.9µF
inherent in the stun gun, let's discuss the
physiological effects first. When a high
voltage is discharged on the surface of the
03

05
I
1N4007
VV
R3
350V
+
o
HIGH -VOLTAGE
06 2.2K
D8=
l 2
OUTPUT
skin, the current produced travels through IN4007 (41 1W

the nervous system by exciting single

cells and the myelin sheaths that enclose
Á 41i9

FifT
Tl`
G21RÖbiEb H bób
2
SCR1 IN4007
N4443
I
them. When that current reaches a syn-
R6
apse connected to a muscle, it causes the 39K 91 1K
muscle to contract violently and possibly VN V1h
to go into spasms. R5
01 R2 TO ELECTRODES
R7 D40D5 R8
The longer contact with the high volt- 22K # 10012 10052
1101W o
age is maintained, the more muscles will --1N- D52

be affected. If the high voltage maintains 81 0--v 10µF

25V
contact with the skin long enough to cause C3
25VF (33
9V
muscle spasms, it may take ten or fifteen 2N2646
SJ1
minutes before the brain is able to re- R4
D1 Si [ICHARGER 102
IN4001=FIRE
362
establish control over the nerve and mus- MIT 1N4001

cular systems. SEE TEXT

How much power is required to cause
FIG. 1-THE STUN GUN'S CIRCUIT is a multi -stage voltage step-up circuit. The 01,'02 circuit produces
such spasms? That's not an easy question a squarewave output of about 10 kHz, and Q3 produces 1511s discharge pulses at a rate of about 20
to answer because, although it is rela- ppm. Those pulses fire SCR1, which induces a voltage in the windings of step-up transformers T2 and
tively easy to make precise measurements T3.
of the power produced by a high -voltage
device, it is difficult to rate the human be as a deterrent. A foolhardy volunteer from one transistor to the other. Oscilla-
body's susceptibility to shock accurately. was paid an enormous sum of money to tion occurs at a frequency of about 10
Some obvious factors include age and dis- have the Taser fired at him. No matter how kHz.
eases such as epilepsy. But the bottom line big, strong, (and stupid) the person was, The switching action of the first stage
is simple: The only one who fools around as soon as the Taser's "darts" hit him, he generates an AC voltage in Ti's high -volt-
with a stun gun is a fool. would collapse to the ground and go into age secondary (leads A and B). The
The amount of energy a device delivers uncontrollable convulsions. amount of voltage depends on the battery
is actually the amount of power delivered The energy produced by the Taser is used, but a battery of seven to nine volts
in a given period of time. For our pur- only 0.3 joules-about 60% of what our should produce 250 to 300 volts across
poses, it makes sense to talk about energy stun gun produces! Even so, the Taser has Ti's secondary.
in joules (watt -seconds). Using a fresh been officially classified as a firearm by That voltage is rectified by the full -
9.8 -volt Ni -Cd battery, the stun gun is the Bureau of Tobacco and Firearms be- wave bridge composed of diodes D3-D6.
capable of delivering peak power pulses cause it shoots its electrode "darts" Capacitor C2 charges through D7 at a rate
of 25,000 watts. Actually, pulses start out through the air. Even though our stun gun that is controlled by R3.
at peak power and then decay exponen- doesn't operate that way, the Taser puts The value of capacitor C2 affects the
tially. The length of the decay time de- out considerably less energy than the stun output of the stun gun. The greater the
pends on the components used in the gun. Keep those facts and figures in mind capacitance, the more energy that can be
circuit, the ambient temperature, the bat- as you assemble and use the device. stored, so the more powerful the dis-
tery's capacity, and the positioning of the charge will be. A larger capacitor gives
output contacts with respect to each other. How it works bigger sparks, but requires more charging
Assuming that the decay rate is purely The schematic diagram of the stun gun time, and that gives a lower discharge
exponential, the stun gun can produce is shown in Fig. 1. Basically, it's a multi- rate. On the other hand, a smaller capaci-
about 0.5 joules of energy, provided that stage power supply arranged so that each tor gives smaller sparks, but a faster dis-
the battery is fully charged. Let's put that succeeding stage multiplies the voltage charge rate. If you wish to experiment
number in perspective. produced by the preceding stage. The with different values for C2, try 3.9 µF (as
Both the Underwriter's Laboratory (in final stage of the circuit feeds two op- shown in Fig. I), 7.8 µF, and 1.95 µF.
Bulletin no. 14) and the U. S. Consumer positely -phased transformers that produce Those values were arrived at by using one
Product Safety Commission state that extremely high voltage pulses. If that de- 3.9 µF capacitor alone, two of the same
ventricular fibrillation (heart attack) can scription sounds familiar, you've proba- capacitors in series, and two in parallel.
be caused in humans by applying 10 bly studied capacitive -discharge ignition Meanwhile, UJT Q3 produces 15-µs
joules of energy. Since the stun gun only systems-the stun gun works on the same pulses at a rate of about 20 ppm. That rate
generates about half a joule, you might principles. is controlled by C3 and the series com-
think that a device that produces only one The first section of the power supply is a bination of R6 and R7. When a pulse
twentieth of the critical amount has a switcher composed of Q1, Q2, and the arrives at the gate of SCR1, it fires and
more -than -adequate margin of safety. primary windings (connected to leads E, discharges C2. That induces a high -volt-
Don't bet on it. A brief contact with the F, G, and H) of T1. When FIRE switch Si is age pulse in the primary windings of T2
stun -gun's discharge hurts a great deal, closed, R1 unbalances the circuit and that and T3, whose primaries must be wired
but it takes only about five seconds of causes it to start oscillating. Since base out of phase with each other. The result is
continuous discharge to immobilize current is provided by a separate winding a ringing wave of AC whose negative
someone completely. of Ti (connected to leads C and D), the component then reaches around and
Let's compare the stun gun's output two transistors are driven out of phase forces the SCR to turn off. When the next
with a similar device, called a Taser gun, with each other, and that keeps the circuit pulse from Q3 arrives, the cycle repeats.
which appeared on the market a few years oscillating. Resistor R2 limits base drive The outputs of the stun gun appear
ago. You may have seen a film demon- to a safe value, and diodes DI and D2 are across the secondaries of T2 and T3. The
strating just how effective the Taser could steering diodes that switch base current hot leads of those transformers connect to

32
 PARTS LIST
E
All resistors are 1/4 -watt, 5% unless oth-
A G H C B 02-
erwise noted.
--I4--D3- <R2 C
R1-1000 ohms
-F--D4- D2-' OO-
R2-110 ohms, 1 watt
R3-2200 ohms, watt
C2 -}4--67-- ;CI Ti
! 1

--1-Q6-
S1
R4-36 ohms
FIRE
-i4---D5- R5, R8-100 ohms
->I-D1- E R6-39,000 ohms
F E , . _D 8 01 R7-22,000 ohms
C

,1 II Capacitors
B1 C1-10 µF, 25 volts, electrolytic
9V
C2-3.9 F,350 volts, electrolytic
C3-1 µF, 25 volts, electrolytic

Semiconductors
CHARGER D1, D2 -1N4001, 50 -volt rectifier
OUTPUT
OUTPUT D3 -D8-1N4007, 1000 -volt rectifier
FIG. 2-MOUNT ALL COMPONENTS ON THE PC BOARD as shown here. Note that T2 and T3 are 01, Q2-D40D5, power transistor
mounted off board, and that J1, Cl, and D7 mount on the foil side of the board. In addition, a number of Q3-2N2646, UJT
components mount beneath Ti: D1 -D6, R1, and R3. Those diodes and resistors must be installed SCRI-2N4443
before T1.
Other components
B1 -9 -volt Ni -Cd battery
S1--SPST momentary pushbutton switch
R4 R8 C3 R3 R2 02 T1-12 to 400 volts saturable -core trans-
C2 03 SCR1 D8 T1 S1 01 former. See text
T2, T3-50 kilovolt pulse transformer,
0.32 joules. 400 -volt primary. See text

Note: The following components are

available from Information Unlimited,
P. 0. Box 716, Amherst, NH 03031: T1,
$12.50; both T2 and T3, $12.50; C2,
$1.50; PC board, $4.50; case, $3.50;
case with T2 and T3 potted, $17.50;
charger, $6.50; 9.8 -volt battery, $16.50;
complete kit of all parts including all
components, PC board, case, and
charger, but no battery, $39.50.

the output electrodes, which should be

held securely in position about two inches
apart, and which should be insulated from
each other and from the environment with
high -voltage potting compound.

FIG.3-BEND SCR1'S LEADS 90° so that the nomenclature faces up and then solder the SCR to the
Batteries
board. Also note that C3 must be bent over at a 90` angle, and that R2 is mounted vertically. The stun gun can be powered with al-
most any battery that can supply at least
seven volts at one amp. A Ni -Cd battery
would be a good choice; R8 and JI will
allow the battery to be recharged without
removing it from the case.
The higher the battery's voltage, the
higher the stun -gun's output voltage.
Most nine -volt Ni-Cd's actually have a
maximum fully -charged output of only
7.2 volts. However, batteries that deliver
9.8 volts when fully charged are available
from several sources.

Construction
Keep in mind the fact that the stun gun
produces dangerously high voltages, and
don't approach the construction of the
stun gun with the same nonchalance with
which you might build a light dimmer.
The circuit can be built on a PC board
Flu. 4-JACK J1, DIODE D7, AND CAPACITOR Cl mount on the foil side of the PC board. One terminal
of J1 mounts to the same pad as R8, and the jack should be gflued to the board with RTV (or other high- or on perfboard. The foil pattern for a PC
vcltage compound) after you verify that the circuit works properly. continued on page 67
33
L J

BUILD
JACOB'S
LADDER
A climbing electric arc has held
the imagination of science-fiction fans
as the symbol for an eerie laboratory!

JAMES, NICOLE, and DWIGHT PATRICK, Jr.

IN MANY SCI-FI AND HORROR FLICKS, ESPECIALLY THE STOCK "FRAN-

kenstein" variety, along with weird sound effects and the like,
movie producers always feature the fantastic visual effects pro-
duced by Tesla coils, van de Graaff generators, and Jacob's
Ladders. Of those three devices, the Jacob's Ladder is the easiest
to build. With a low-current neon-sign transformer, a converted
flyback transformer, converted auto spark coil, or other similar
transformer, you can whip together your own Jacob's Ladder in
less than an hour. Because the ladder is so simple, there's no
need for a detailed parts list or a schematic. We tell you how to
build one as we reveal the theory of operation.

Getting started
As we can see in Fig. 1, a Jacob's Ladder provides a fantastic
visual effect. A beautiful electric arc hisses its way up two
diverging wires, providing a fascinating and downright scary
effect. The arc starts at the smallest distance between the vee
electrodes (Fig. 1-a), and "walks" up the widening gap toward
the top of the electrodes (Fig. 1-b).
Why does the arc walk up the vee electrodes? You would
expect that when the arc starts to jump across the narrow gap at
the bottom of the electrodes, that it would stay there where the
electrical resistance between the electrodes is lowest. What
actually happens is that the arc heats the air it passes through,
causing it to rise. Because the heated air is ionized by the high -
voltage arc, it provides a very low-resistance path, so the current
path (the arc) rises with the wann air.
Eventually the arc reaches the top of the ladder (the elec-
trodes) and bows upward creating an electrical path that gets
longer and longer. At the point where the resistance at the
bottom of the electrodes is less than that of the arc -path, the
upper arc stops, and a new arc begins at the bottom of the ladder.
Thus, what is seen is a continuous climbing arc that disappears
at the top of the ladder and reappears at the bottom. It's all a lot
of fun to watch, providing that you don't poke your finger
between the electrodes or get your nose too close.
To build a Jacob's Ladder, you need a high -voltage source that
 Adjustment and operation
The last step in getting your Jacob's
Ladder to work is the adjustment of
the vee electrodes. DO NOT MAKE
ANY ADJUSTMENTS WHEN THE
UNIT IS TURNED ON. The unit
should be turned off and unplugged
when making adjustments, to prevent
accidental electrical shocks.
The electrodes must be close
enough at the bottom to establish the
spark or arc -over, with the wires gent-
ly angling away from one another to
form the "V." The initial distance at
the base to start the spark will vary
with the voltage applied, humidity,
altitude, etc.; so, it's pretty much
done by trial and error. Start with the
wires at the base about an inch apart
when using 10 kilovolts or more, and
move them closer in small increments
until an arc is established. But re-
member to kill the power before each
adjustment.
When the distance is correct, the
arc should start. On the other hand, if
the ladder arcs at the initial setting,
move the wires apart until an arc is
FIG. 1-HERE ARE TWO TIME -EXPOSED PHOTOGRAPHS showing the development of just sustained. Placing the wires too
an arc at the bottom of the ladder (a) and its climb to the top (b). You should display close together will ruin the trans-
Jacob's Ladder in a darkened room for maximum viewing effect. former over time. When you have es-
tablished the arc, if it does not move
placed in a well -insulated case or cab- up between the two diverging wires,
inet. If the case is metal, it should be they must be adjusted in or out.
adequately grounded. In the pho-
tograph in the opening of this article, Better safe than sorry
a 7 -kilovolt transformer was placed in Once your Jacob's Ladder is up and
a 1/4 -inch Plexiglas case with the pri- running, a clear Plexiglas or acrylic
mary winding connected via fuse and
switch to the 117 -volt AC input. The
output of the transformer was con-
nected via high -voltage TV anode
hook-up wire to two pieces of no. 12
copper wire used for the vee-shaped
electrodes that protrude from por-
celain insulators. When removing the
insulation, be sure not to nick the
wire. The connections between the
transformer's secondary and the bot-
tom of the insulators must be kept as
FIG. 2-NOTICE HOW NEAT THE WIRING short as possible and void of sharp
IS. RTV cement is used around the high - bends (see Fig. 2). Exposed high -volt-
voltage connection points. The line cord's
third lead is used to ground the case. age points were given a coat of RTV
silicon rubber to prevent any arcing
can deliver around 10 kilovolts at 30 inside the enclosure.
milliamperes or more-such as neon - In Fig. 3, a 10 -kilovolt neon -sign
sign transformer or high -voltage transformer in a grounded metal en-
power-supply transformer. The lower closure is used with a small auto
the current output, the less chance transformer (a Variac type) to control
there is for building a fatal shock haz- the primary winding voltage input.
ard. The higher the voltage, the larger Thus, the output voltage is adjustable.
A different type of porcelain insulator FIG. 3-ANOTHER JACOB'S LADDER.
the separation you'll be able to make
The transformer used in this model per-
at the top of the ladder's electrodes. is used, with the high voltage brought mitted the use of a low -profile baking -pan
The high -voltage source should be to the top of a stand-off type insulator. chassis.
 Radio-
R E PRINT BOOKSTORE
Electronics ,.

126 Radio -Electronics Annual 1986 $6.00 1 111 Hands -On Electronics #1 S6.00
1 125 Radio -Electronics Annual 1985 . $6.00 SP10 Special Projects #10 56.00
1 109 Radio -Electronics (1989 back issues) $3.50 SP9 Special Projects #9 S6.00
Write in issues desired SP8 Special Projects #8 $6.00
108 Radio -Electronics (1988 back issues ..$3.75 SP7 Special Projects #7 $6.00
Write in issues desired L; SP6 Special Projects #6 $6.00
1 107 Radio -Electronics (1987 back issues).. $4.00 r SP5 Special Projects #5 $6.00
Write in issues desired SP4 Special Projects #4 $6.00
.1 106 Radio -Electronics (1986 back issues).. $4.25 L. SP1 Special Projects #1 $7.00
Write in issues desired I
EH87 Experimenters Handbook (1987) $5.00
105 Radio -Electronics (1985 back issues) $4.75 r EH88 Experimenters Handbook (1988-89) $4.50

(January not available)

REPRINTS REPRINTS
Write in issues desired

104 Radio -Electronics (1984 back issues).. $5.75 169 Think Tank (133 Circuits) $3.50
(December not available) r 168 Fact Cards (#34-66) $3.50
Write in issues desired C'. 167 Designing With IC's $4.00
1 103 Radio -Electronics (1983 back issues) .. $6.00 166 Collected Works of Mohammed Ullyses Fips

(Jan, Feb, May, Dec not available) (62 pages, April Fools Collection) $7.50
Write in issues desired 165 How to Repair CD Disc Players $5.00
1 119 Popular Electronics (1989 back issues) $3.50 11 164 Modern Electrics (April 1908) $3.00
Write in issues desired El163 Receiving Satellite TV $5.00
118 Hands -On Electronics (1988 back issues)$3.75 LI 162 Build Your Own Satellite TV Receiver $5.00
Write in issues desired 161 Descrambling (Feb., 1984) $3.00
FIG. 4-A PLASTIC SHIELD SHOULD BE
USED to prevent inquisitive people from
1117 Hands -On Electronics (1987 back issues)$4.00 160 New Ideas - 42 Circuits $3.50 accidentally touching the arc or the elec-
Write in issues desired 159 Low Frequency Receiving Techniques trodes. Be sure to include a vent hole at
1 116 Hands -On Electronics (1986 back issues)$4.50 Building and using VLF Antennas $5.00
the top and bottom of the shield so that
gasses produced by the arc are allowed to
Write in issues desired 158 Electro Importing Co. Catalog
escape.
115A Hands -On Electronics #6 $5.50 (Circa 1918) $5.95
1 115 Hands -On Electronics #5 $5.50 157 All About Kits $2.00
1 114 Hands -On Electronics #4 $5.50 156 How To Make PC Boards $2.00
cylinder around the entire unit will
prevent the unthinkable from happen-
1 113 Hands -On Electronics #3 $5.50 155 IBM Typewriter To Computer $2.00
ing (see Fig. 4). The clear plastic
112 Hands -On Electronics #2 $5.50 154 How To Repair VCR's $3.50
1

housing should have vent holes at the

Toorder any of the items indicated above, check off the If you need a copy of an article that is in an issue we top and bottom to allow heated gasses
ones you want. Complete the order form below, include indicate is unavailable you can order it directly from us. to escape, but not so large that the
your payment, check or money order (DO NOT SEND We charge 500 per page. Indicate the issue (month &
CASH), and mail to Radio-Electronics, Reprint Depart- year), pages and article desired. Include payment in smallest child in the family can get his
ment, P.O. Box 4079, Farmingdale, NY 11735. Please full, plus shipping and handling charge. Make checks or her mitts or anything else inside.
allow 4-6 weeks for delivery. payable to Gernsback Publications, Inc.
Generally, such cylinders can be pur-
chased from most plastic -supply
ARTICLE
houses rather cheaply, and are well
worth the added protection.
PAGES MONTH YEAR You do have to keep in mind that
such high voltages are extremely dan-
TOTAL PAGES (a 500 each TOTAL PRICE
gerous, and you certainly don't want
to come in contact with them. Any-
MAIL TO: Radio -Electronics thing that you can do to play it safe is
Reprint Bookstore, P.O. Box 4079, Farmingdale NY 11735 All payments must be in U.S. funds worth your while, and be sure that you
SHIPPING CHARGES IN USA & CANADA
$0.01 to $5.00
$5.01 to $10.00
$1.25
$2.00
$30.01
$40.01
to 40.00.
to 50.00.
. $5.00
$6.00
SORRY
Canada
- We only ship to USA &
don't ever allow a child to get hold of
a high -voltage device.
$10.01 to 20.00 $3.00 $50.01 and above. $7.50
$20.01 to 30.00 $4.00
Come next Halloween, place your
Total price of merchandise $ Jacob's Ladder in your front window,
Sales Tax (New York State Residents only) $ and turn it on every time the doorbell
Shipping Charge (see chart) $
rings. Answer the door with a rubber
Name Total Enclosed $ monster mask on, and the chances are
Address that the wee visitors may scoot down
City State Zip EH90
the front walk and never be seen
again. Cruel? Not on Halloween! R-E
38
UNIVERSAL
POWER SUPPLY

Here's a power supply that can easily be adapted

for use with various kinds of hobbyist and experimenter laser tubes.

GORDON McCOMB

IT'S EASY TO GET STARTED EXPERIMENTING WITH LASERS. ALL YOU NEED IS A LASER TUBE, A
power supply, and a protective enclosure of some kind. Getting a tube is usually no
problem, because "surplus" and even used helium -neon (He -Ne) tubes are commonly
available. But since the characteristics of 'le -Ne lasers vary considerably from model to
model, a hobbyist's laser power supply should be able to work with all of them, which is
exactly the case with our pulse -modulated He -Ne power supply.

Caution!
Before building the power supply, let's take time out for a few words of caution. All gas
lasers including the popular helium -neon variety require a high -voltage power sup-
ply that boosts the main voltage, from 12 -volts DC or 117 -volts AC, up to 1200-3000
volts. Although the supply's output voltage is relatively high, the circuit -current. or the
laser current is low.
Because of the low laser current, some laser experimenters tend to disregard the high
voltage, possibly because they believe that as long as the current is low, a high voltage
can't do more than give a nasty shock. Not so! The byproduct of a nasty shock can result
in severe injury, so take extra care to prevent your corning in contact with any "live"
power -supply circuits or connections. To that end, all components and wires of a laser
 power supply must be properly insu-
lated and covered. In particular, you
must avoid operating a laser's power
supply in the open. Play it safe, and
POSITIVE you won't be sorry.
BI -PLANO MENISCUS Most laser power supplies use
FULLY REFLECTIVE VACUUM FILL OUTPUT high -voltage capacitors at the output
MIRROR TUBE BORE GETTER SPIDER TUBE MIRROR stage. Like all capacitors, they can
retain a charge even after the power
supply has been turned off. So when
working with a laser, make sure the
power supply is off and disconnected
from its power source, then tem-
OUTPUT porarily short the output leads of the
BEAM power supply together, or simply
touch the supply's positive output
MIRROR
connection to ground. Like the capac-
MIRROR WEDGE
itors, the laser tube itself can retain an
WEDGE ION ANODE TERMINAL) ION CATHODE TERMINAL)
electric charge after power has been
removed. That current should be
drained by shorting the tube's termi-
nals or leads together, or to ground.

ANATOMY OF A LASER TUBE How it works

Regardless of their size or output
The helium -neon tube is the staple tially reflective output mirror. The bore power, the operating conditions of he-
of the laser experimenter. He -Ne is held concentric by a metal element lium -neon laser tubes vary widely. A
tubes are in plentiful supply, es- called the spider. The inner diameter new tube starts easily and runs very
pecially in the surplus market. They of the bore largely determines the di- efficiently; an older or used tube is
emit a bright, deep -red glow that can ameter of the laser beam. harder to start and needs more current
be seen for miles around. Although The ends, where the mirrors are
the power output of He -Ne tubes is to lase continuously.
mounted, typically serve as the
relatively small compared to other anode (positive) and cathode (nega-
The pulse -modulated laser power
laser systems, it is perfectly suited for tive) terminals. On some lasers, the supply shown in Fig. was designed
1

many homebrew and school experi- terminals are mounted on the same to accommodate a wide variety of he-
ments in diffraction, reflection, etc. end. A strip of metal or wire extends lium neon tubes-both old and new-
The helium -neon laser is a glass to the cathode on the other end. The up to a maximum laser power output
vessel filled with 10 parts helium and output mirror can be on either the of about five milliwatts. Using pulse -
one part neon, pressurized to about 1 anode or cathode end, but on most width modulation (that is, varying the
mm Hg. (The exact gas pressure and tubes, it is the cathode. Many man- duty cycle of the square wave), the
ratios vary between laser manufac- ufacturers prefer that arrangement,
turers.) Electrodes placed at the ends
power supply individually controls
claiming it is safer and more flexible.
of the tube provide a means to ionize
the laser's start and run currents.
Metal rings with hex screws are
the gas, thereby exciting the helium often placed on the mirror mounts as Potentiometers R12 and R13 deter-
and neon atoms. Mirrors mounted at a means to tweak the alignment of mine the pulse width of the square
either end form an optical resonator, the mirrors. Unless you suspect that wave applied to the inverting trans-
or Fabry -Perot resonator. In most He - the mirrors are out of alignment, you former, T1. In the start mode, R12
Ne tubes, one mirror is totally reflec- should NOT attempt to adjust the varies the pulse width until there is
tive and the other is partially reflec- rings. They have been adjusted at the sufficient voltage to start the laser
tive. The partially reflective mirror is factory for maximum beam output. tube-typically 3-4 kV. Potentiome-
the output of the tube. Tweaking them may degrade the per- ter R13 is switched into the circuit by
Modern He -Ne lasers are com- formance of the laser. relay RYI's contacts as current starts
posed of few parts, all fused together He -Ne lasers are available in two
during manufacturing. Only the very
to flow through the laser. R13 is ad-
general forms: bare and cylindrical
old He -Ne tubes, or those used for head. Bare tubes are just that-the
justed for the minimum current possi-
special laboratory experiments, use tube is not shielded by any type of ble while still allowing the tube to
external mirrors. The all -in -one de- housing and should be placed inside lase.
sign costs less and the mirrors are a tube or box during operation for The power supply operates from a
not as prone to mis -alignment. protection. Cylindrical -head lasers 12 -volt, 750 -mA source; either a bat-
Helium -neon lasers are actually (or just "laser heads") are housed in- tery or an AC -to -DC converter. Timer
composed of two tubes: an outer side an aluminum sheath. Leads for ICI operates as a 16- kHz astable mul-
plasma tube that contains the gas power come out of the back end of the tivibrator. Relay RYI is initially not
and a shorter and smaller inner bore laser. The opposite end may have a
energized, so R13 and R8 are discon-
or capillary, where the lasing action hole for the output beam, or may be
takes place. The bore is attached to
nected from the circuit. The setting of
equipped with a safety shutter. The
only one end of the tube. The loose shutter prevents accidental exposure R12 determines the duty cycle, and
end is the output and faces the par- to the beam. thus the pulse width of the square
wave at pin 3 of ICI. That signal driv-
 Q1 S1
LASERS AND SAFETY 2
27µF
C4
CHU. s R9 0,0 POWER + 12V Lasers emit electromagnetic radia-
2000
47
35V
C7 C8 tion, usually either visible light or in-
4 8 3 R1
R12
.15 .15 frared. The level of "radiation" is
4300
7
2K
2KV 2KV generally quite small in hobby lasers,
having about the same effect on ex-
Ic1
R13
2K T C1
T1
ternal body tissues as sunning your-
=
1

D2
555 self with the livingroom lamp.
1N4148 R8
1K
R2 Skin is fairly resilient, even to ex-
560ít
VT posure up to several tens or hun-

C5
4;. dreds of watts of laser energy. But the
eye is much more susceptible to
C6
01
03 = R3 R5
damage, and it is the effects of laser
t 22MEG
1

1N4148
D8 22MEG
N5234 light on the retina that is of the great-
D1
R, 22
6.2V R4 R6 816 est concern. Even as little as 20-50
1N4148 22MEG 22MEG 75K
02 KS milliwatts of focused visible or in-
r
3.9 C2
14 3W
VW
4.7µF R15 R14 frared radiation can cause immediate
+ RIO
6V 75K 75K eye damage.
C3
RY1
3W 3W
10µF 10K
TO LASER A/W The longer the eye is exposed to
10V
radiation, and the more focused the
FIG. 1-THE COMPLETE POWER SUPPLY. Resistors R14 -R16 are used only for laser beam, the greater the chance that the
tubes rated more than 1 mW. laser will cause a lesion on the sur-
face of the retina. Retinal lesions can
812 813 heal, but many leave blind spots. Ret-
C7 C8 inal damage when using hobby
89I
ï lasers-those having outputs of less
BLK'WHT than five or ten milliwatts-is rare, but
D4
RY1 R16
can occur if you stare directly at the
-CS1 C4
06 beam for extended periods of time.
o Cs R11 Therefore, NEVER look directly at the
1d11D1 Q2
I I ¡C2 D5 D7 beam, or its reflection from a mirror or
3
810 a metallic surface.
-R2-- I
D8 -14-C9 010
Keep these points in mind when
-C1- R7 R3 R4 R5 , R6 R14
-"r": ï working with laser:
+ i HIGH R15 Any laser power supply delivers
TO 12VDC i TO LASER TUBE
+ VOLTAGE high voltages that, under certain cir-
GREEN OR BLUE BLK cumstances, can injure or kill you.
FIG. 2-THE PARTS LAYOUT. Although R16 mounts on the PC board, R15 and R16 are Use extreme caution when building,
spliced into the laser tube's anode wire. testing, and using lasers and high -
voltage power supplies.
es the base of power transistor Q1 by adjusting R13 clockwise until the
Do not attempt to build your own
through current -limiting resistor Rl. relay chatters, then turning it counter power supply unless you have at least
Transistor Q1, which operates as a clockwise until the relay remains some knowledge of electronics and
high-current/low-voltage chopper, de- latched in the energized position. electronics construction.
livers a series of square waves to the Resistors R3-R6 provide safety Although the power-supply project
primary winding of step-up trans- when handling the supply (with the is not difficult, it should be considered
former Ti. power source disconnected) by drain- suitable only for intermediate to ad-
With a 12 -volt square wave at Ti's ing the charge from the voltage dou- vanced hobbyists.
primary, the output voltage at the sec- bler's capacitors, as well as the Power supplies and laser tubes
retain a charge even after electricity
ondary is between 800 and 2000 volts electrostatic charge from the laser
has been removed. Be sure to short
AC, the precise value depending on tube. Note that the very high resis- out the output of the power supply as
the setting of R12. Capacitors tance of R3 through R6 prohibit them well as the terminals of the laser tube
C7-C10, along with diodes D4-D7, from quickly draining the excess before touching the laser or high -volt-
form a standard voltage doubler lad- charge, so you should still manually age leads.
der. The unloaded DC output of the short the power supply's output termi-
voltage doubler is about 3-5 kV. nals together before handling the laser Service. Alternatively, an etched and
As the laser tube begins to conduct, or its power supply. drilled PC -board can be ordered from
current flows through R7, which Resistors R11 and R14-R16 depend the source given in the Parts List.
causes a voltage to appear at the junc- on the laser tube. For 1-mW tubes, Install the parts on the PC board as
tion of R7 and R10. That voltage turns only Rll is used. R16 is eliminated, shown in Fig. 2. First mount RI
on Q2, which activates relay RY1, while R15 and R15 are replaced by a through R11. If you intend to use a
thereby switching resistors R8 and wire. laser tube rated for more than 1 mW,
R13 into ICI's timing circuit, chang- install R16 in the extra hole that is
ing the square wave's duty cycle. Construction adjacent to R11. All resistors are in-
Potentiometer R13 must be read- The laser power supply is as- stalled flush on the board except for
justed to control the laser tube's cur- sembled on a printed-circuit board for R11 and R16, which are mounted on
rent. The best position is determined which a template is provided in PC end-and only one lead of each re-
41
 BUYING AND TESTING HE -NE TUBES attach the laser to the power supply as
shown in Fig. 3, use the 1 -inch fold
Apart from size and output power, tions and adjustment of the mirrors as the support, and secure the laser to
tubes vary by their construction, re- can cause the satellites to wander off the bracket with plastic tie -wraps that
liability, and beam quality. After buy- axis. That can be unsightly and if it pass through two holes drilled along
ing a He -Ne tube, you should always matters to you, choose a tube that the long folded edge. Note that the
test it; return the tube if it doesn't work has a solid beam. laser tube shown in Fig. 3 is enclosed
or if its quality is inferior. Should the tube start but no beam in a metal tube. It was manufactured
Should you need a laser for a spe- comes out, check to be sure that that way, but it works the same as any
cific application that requires preci- nothing is blocking the exit mirror. If
other He -Ne laser tube.
sion or a great deal or reliability, you the beam still isn't visible, the mirrors
may be better off buying a new and may be out of alignment and the laser Using a suitable insulating washer,
certified tube rather than one from should be returned for a replacement.
surplus; it will come with a warranty If the tube doesn't ignite at all, PARTS LIST
and certification of power output. check the power supply and connec-
He-Ne's emit a deep red beam at tions. Try a known good tube if you All resistors are 1/4 -watt, 5%, un-
632.8 nanometers because it is the have one. The tube still doesn't light? less noted otherwise.
strongest wavelength produced with- The problem may be caused by: R1-430 ohms
in the tube. Although other colors are Bad tube. The tube is "gassed R2-560 ohms
produced, they are weak or may not out," has a hairline crack, or is just R3-R6-22 megohms
be sufficiently coherent or mono- plain busted. R7-3900 ohms
chromatic. Yet there are some special Power supply too weak. The tube R8-1000 ohms
helium -neon lasers that are made to may require more current or voltage R9-200 ohms
operate at different wavelengths, than the levels produced by the R10-10,000 ohms
namely 1.523 micrometers (infrared) power supply. R11, R14-R16-75,000 ohms, 3
and 543.5 nanometers (green). Insulating coating or broken con- watts
Green and infrared He -Ne lasers are nection. New and stored tubes may R12, R13-2000 ohms, miniature
exceptionally expensive and rare in have an insulating coating on the ter- potentiometer
the surplus market. minals. Be sure to clean the terminals All capacitors rated at least 12 -
The first step in establishing the thoroughly. A broken lead can be volts DC unless noted otherwise
quality of the tube is to inspect it visu- mended by soldering on a new wire. C1-0.1 µF
ally. If the tube is used, be on the Some "problems" with laser tubes C2-4.7 µF
lookout for scratched, broken, or are really caused by the power sup- C3-10 µF, 10 volts, radial tantalum
marred mirrors. After inspection, ply. In fact, if your laser doesn't work, C4-27µF, 35 volts, axial electrolytic
connect the tube to a suitable power expect the power supply first. One C5-0.01 µF, ceramic disc
supply, point the laser toward a wall, common problem is that the tube C6-0.1 µF, polystyrene
and apply power. If the laser is work- sputters when you turn it on. That C7-C10-0.15µF, 2-3 kV, ceramic or
ing properly, the beam will come out fault is most often caused by a tube Mylar
of one end only and the beam spot that isn't receiving enough current, C11-0.47 µF, polystyrene
will be solid and well-defined. either because the connections from Semiconductors
Occasionally, the totally reflective the power supply are loose or broken, IC1-555 timer
mirror allows a small amount of light the power supply is not producing 01-TIP146 NPN power transistor
to pass through and you see a weak enough current for the tube, or the Q2-2N2222 NPN transistor
beam coming out the back end (that ballast resistor is too high or too low. D1-D3-1N4148 diode
is especially true if the mirror is not Hard -to -start tubes flick on but D4-D7-High voltage (8-10 kV, 20 -
precisely aligned). Usually, that quickly go out. If the power supply mA) diode
poses no serious problem unless the incorporates a trigger transformer, D8 -1N5234, 6.2 -volt Zener diode
coating on the mirror is excessively the tube may "click" on and off once Other Components
weak or damaged, or if the mirrors every 2-3 seconds (correlating to the RY1-6-volt SPST printed -circuit
are seriously out of alignment. time delay between each high -volt- relay
All lasers exhibit satellite beams- age trigger pulse). Tubes that haven't T1-High-voltage step-up/step-down
small, low -powered spots caused by been used in a while can be hard to transformer, 12 to approximately
internal reflections that appear off to start, so once you get it going, keep it 280 volts.
the side of the main spot. In most on for a day or two. In most cases, the Miscellaneous: wire, tubing, metal
cases, the main beam and satellites tube will start normally. Hard starting bracket, insulator, spacers, cab-
are centered within one another, so may also be caused by age and de- inet, etc.
you see just one spot. But slight varia- gassing, two factors you can't fix. Note: The following items are
available from General Science
and Engineering, PO Box 447,
sistor is connected; the other leads One support Rochester, NY 14603 (716)
remain free for now. Then mount DI As shown in Fig. 3, the PC board is 338-7001: Etched and drilled PC
through D8; CI through CI1; finally, mounted on a metal plate-along board, $9; transformer T1, $15;
ICI and Q2. QI will be mounted on a with Ql, SI, and TI. The plate is 23A - complete kit of parts, including
heat sink, but its connections to the inches wide x 55/x -inches long. SI PCB and T1 (excluding project
PC board should be made now. Sim- and QI are mounted at one end on a'/x box), $39. For each order add $3
ply solder insulated wires about 21/2 - -inch fold. You can't see it in Fig. 3,
for shipping and handling.
COD's accepted. New York resi-
inches long to QI's terminals, and but there is a 1/4 -inch fold along the dents must include applicable
connect the free ends to the printed - entire length of the bracket that pro- sales tax.
circuit hoard. vides overall rigidity. If you decide to
 LASER TUBE THE PROPERTIES OF LASER
LIGHT
TIE

WRAPS Laser light is monochromatic.

Laser light coming from the output
mirror consists of one wavelength or,
in some instances, two or more spe-
RY1
cific wavelengths. The individual
wavelengths can be separated.
Laser light is spatially coherent.
The term spatial coherence means
that all the waves are in tandem. That
is, the crests and the troughs of the
waves that make up the beam are in
PROTECTIVE lock -step.
COVER Laser light is temporally coherent.
Temporal coherency is when the
waves from the laser (which can be
considered as one large wave,
METAL
thanks to spatial coherency) are
emitted in even, accurately -spaced
BRACKET
intervals. Temporal coherence is sim-
ilar to the precise clicks of the metro-
nome, timing the beat of music.
Laser light is collimated. Because
Tl
of monochromaticity and coherence,
01
laser light does not spread (diverge)
as much as ordinary light. The design
FIG. 3-FULLY ASSEMBLED, the tube is held to the racket with plastic straps.
of the laser itself, or simple optics,
can collimate the laser light into a
parallel beam.
an insulator, and heat -transfer past., If your laser tube has flying leads The four main properties of laser
mount Q1 on the folded end of the (wire leads already installed), then light combine to produce a shaft of
metal bracket. Use an ohmmeter to just connect them to the power-supply illumination that is many times more
check for a short between the metal output leads later on. If your tube has brilliant than the light of equal area
tab of Q1(which serves as an alternate its power terminals on its ends, then from the sun. Because of their co-
connection to Ql's collector) and the an electrical contact can be made by herency, monochromaticity, and low
beam divergence, lasers are ideally
metal bracket. Remount Q1 if your wrapping a length of wire around
suited for a number of important ap-
meter indicates a short. them .

plications. For example, the mono-

Transformer T1 is mounted on the Before using the power supply, in- chromatic and coherent light from a
bottom of the metal bracket. A ;/c- spect it carefully for solder bridges, laser is necessary to form the intri-
inch hole drilled in the bracket op- loose connections, and improperly cate swirling patterns of a hologram.
posite TI is used to pass the wires installed components. Without the laser, optical holograms
through to the underside of the PC would be more difficult to produce.
board. The wires from Ti's secondary Using the supply Coherence plays a leading role in
are soldered to the pads labeled A and Operating the power supply is the minimum size of a focused spot.
B on the foil side of the PC board. straightforward. Secure the power With the right optics, it's possible to
leads to the tube and, if necessary, focus a laser beam to an area equal
(The leads will protrude through the
to the wavelength of the light. With the
board to the component side.) In a wrap high -voltage putty or electrical typical infrared -emitting laser diode,
similar way, the wires from Tl's pri- tape around the leads to hold them in for instance, the beam can be
mary are soldered to the pads labeled place, but be sure that you don't block focused to a tiny spot measuring just
C and D. the laser's output mirror. Position the 0.8 micrometers wide. Such intricate
power supply so that you are facing focusing is the backbone of compact
Connections R12's and R13's adjustment "dial" audio discs and laser discs.
Make two 8 -inch high -voltage and set each potentiometer to its cen- Minimum divergence (owing to the
leads from high -dielectric wire. Strip ter position. coherent nature of laser light) means
and tin 1/2 -inch of each end and slip a Apply power and observe the laser that the beam can travel a longer dis-
length of clear neoprene tube.. Slowly adjust R12 clockwise tance before spreading out. The aver-
6 -inch
age helium -neon laser, without
(aquarium) tubing over both wires. until the tube triggers: You will hear optics, can form a beam spot measur-
Solder one wire into the NEGATIVE OUT- the relay click in, and possibly a high- ing only a few inches in diameter from
PUT hole near R7. Solder the remain- pitched whine. Both effects are nor- a distance several hundred feet away.
ing wire to the top of RI1. If you use mal. If the relay chatters and the tube With additional optics, beam diver-
R14 and R15, cut the wire connected sputters, keep turning R12 until the gence can be reduced, making it pos-
to R11/R16-and its tubing-in half relay locks in and the tube stays on. If sible to transmit sound, pictures, and
and splice in R14 and R15; then cover even a full clockwise adjustment fails computer code many miles on a shaft
the resistors with plastic or heat - to get the tube to ignite, adjust Rl3 of light. The signal is intercepted by a
shrinkable tubing. slightly counter -clockwise. receiving station in the light path.
 current variations. If the laser doesn't
LASER OPERATION trigger or run after adjusting R12 and
R13, try reducing the value of the
Some basics first. Albert Einstein Raising atoms to a high-energy
was responsible for first proposing state is referred to as pumping. In
ballast resistance, but avoid going be-
the idea of the laser in about 1916. common neon light, for example, the low 60K.' If the tube begins to flicker
Einstein knew that light was a series neon atoms are pumped to their high- after warming up, readjust R13.
of particles, called photons, traveling energy state by means of a high -volt- Most 1-mW tubes draw between
in a continuous wave. These photons age charge applied to a pair of elec- 750 -mA to 1 -amp from the 12-volt DC
could be collected, using an appara- trodes. The gas within the tube source. You will find that you need
tus not yet developed, and focused ionizes, emitting photons. If the elec- higher current when operating a laser
into a narrow beam. To be useful, all trical charge is high enough, a major- with greater power output. For exam-
the photons would be emitted from ity of the neon atoms will be pumped ple, a typical 5-mW laser draws 2.5-3
the apparatus at specific intervals. to the high-energy state. A so-called
Much of the light energy would be
amperes from the 12 -volt DC power
population inversion occurs when
concentrated in a specific wave- there are more high-energy atoms source. However, take note that the
length, or color, making the light even than low -energy ones. A laser cannot power source must be able to deliver
more intense and powerful. work unless that population inversion an initial surge of 3-5 amps. If your
Photons can be created by a vari- is present. 12 -volt power supply cannot handle
ety of means, including the ionization Protons scatter all over the place that requirement, try powering the
of gas within a sealed tube, the burn- and, on their own, they simply es- laser supply with a 12 -volt alkaline
ing of some organic material, or the cape the tube and don't strike many lantern battery. Also, two 6 -volt lead -
heating of a filament in a light bulb. In excited atoms. But assume that a pair acid, or gel -cell batteries in series
all cases, the atoms that make up the of mirrors are mounted on either end make a good 12-volt source.
light source change from their usual of the tube, and that some photons
stable or ground state to a higher ex- may bounce back and forth between
cited state by the introduction of the two mirrors. The enclosure
some form of energy, typically elec- At each bounce, the photons col- Your laser power supply should
tricity. The atom can't stay at the ex- lide with more atoms. If many of those never be used without placing it in a
cited state for long, and when it drops atoms are in their excited state, they protective, insulated enclosure. Elec-
back to the ground state, it gives off a too release photons. Remember: tronics stores sell project boxes of all
photon of light. The new photons are twins of the sizes. If you plan on using the supply
The release of photons by natural original, and share many of their to power a number of tubes, use
methods results in spontaneous characteristics, including wave- heavy-duty (25 -amp) banana jacks to
emission. The photons leave the length, frequency, polarity, and provide easy access to the anode and
source in a random and unpredicta- phase. The process of photons
ble manner, and once a photon is
cathode leads. Keep the jacks sepa-
bouncing from one mirror to the next,
emitted, it marks the end of the ener- each time striking atoms in the path,
rated by at least one inch and apply
gy -transfer cycle. The number of ex- constitutes light amplification. high voltage putty around all of the
cited atoms is low, so the majority of In theory, if both mirrors are com- terminals to prevent arcing. Avoid
photons leave the source without pletely reflective, the photons would using power leads longer than 6-9
meeting another excited atom. bounce back and forth indefinitely. inches especially for the anode con-
Einstein was most interested in Rub a little of the reflective coating off nection. If, for some reason, you in-
what would happen if a photon hit an one mirror, however, and it passes tend to test the supply outside of its
atom that happened to be at the excit- some light. Now, a beam of photons cover, we suggest you cover the high -
ed, high-energy state. He reasoned passes through the partially reflective voltage section with a piece of plastic,
that the atom would release a photon mirror after the light has been suffi-
as shown in Fig. 3.
of light that would be an identical ciently amplified. In addition, be-
twin to the first. If enough atoms cause the mirror is partially reflective,
could be excited, the chance of pho- it holds back some of the light energy. Experiments
tons hitting them would be increased. That reserve continues the chain re- With your power supply working,
That would lead to a chain reaction action inside the tube. it's time to experiment with laser
where photons would hit excited The combination of light amplifica- light. Try doing some simple experi-
atoms and make new photons-the tion and stimulated emission of radia- ments with optics, mirrors, and
process continuing until the energy tion makes the laser operate. As you lenses. At night, aim the laser at the
source was removed. Einstein had a probably already know, the the word wall of a distant building to see how
name for that phenomenon and "LASER" is an acronym for its theory far the beam travels before spreading
called it the stimulated emission of of operation-Light Amplification by
radiation.
out. Try to measure the width of the
Stimulated Emission of Radiation.
beam and calculate its divergence.
Then, insert a small telescope or rifle
Once the tube lights, adjust R13 quirements. You might have to scope backward in the path of the
clockwise until the tube begins to readjust R12 and R13 for every tube beam (the beam goes in the objective
stutter and the relay chatters. That you own. and exits the eyepiece). With some
marks the tube's threshold. Turn R13 Resistors Rll and R14-R16 form adjustment the beam's divergence
just a smidgen counter -clockwise un- the ballast for the laser tube. With the should be drastically reduced.
til the tube turns back on and remains components shown in Fig. 1, the total There are many other projects you
steady. Every tube, even those of the resistance is about 75,000 ohms. You can try, including holography, metro-
same size and having the same out- can safely use ballast values from 60K logy (the study of measurement), or a
put, has slightly different current re - to 120K; use R13 to adjust for tube - light show. R -E
ELECTRONIC
DAZER
Never walk in fear with this one -evening
project. It won't kill, but it's an
effective way to say "Leave me alone!"
By Rick Duker

LITHE ELECTRONIC DAZER IS A MODERN, PORTABLE, PER -

sonal -protection appliance. It generates high potential energy WARNING
to ward off vicious animals or other attackers. It is an aid to THIS DEVICE IS NOT A TOY. We present it for educa-
help escape from a potentially dangerous situation. The de- tional and experimental purposes only. The circuit develops
vice develops about 2,000 volts. Higher voltages may be about 2000 volts at a respectable amperage. It can cause you
attained by adding additional multiplier stages, but it should pain and even damage if you become careless and touch its
be noted that those stages will also increase the overall size of output terminals. The unit can also damage property as well
the unit. so use it wisely.
The Dazer is very compact, being built into a small plastic You should never use the device on another person! It may
case. It is powered a single nine -volt battery, either NiCad or not be against the law to possess such a device in your area,
alkaline. The high voltage is applied to two electrodes which but if you use it on someone you may be deemed liable in a
require only light contact to be effective. When touched with civil and/or criminal action suit. Don't just follow the golden
the Dazer, the victim will receive a stunning, but non -lethal rule after constructing the project, instead just don't do unto
jolt of electricity that will usually discourage any further anyone.
encounters. Included in the article are a number of instructions on how
The Electronic Dazer is a power supply which consists of a to build, test, and operate the Dazer; all of them must be
micro -size regenerative amplifier/oscillator coupled to an followed to the letter. Do not deviate from the procedure.
energy multiplier section. It should not be confused with
cheap induction -type cattle prods. The Dazer is more ver-
satile than other high -voltage stun devices currently being charge. That voltage is rectified and increased by the voltage
sold. Those devices are basically high -voltage, AC gener- multiplier section which consists of C2 and C9, and DI to
ators which jam the nervous system. However, the Dazer may D8. The final output is approximately 2000 volts. The neon
be used for heating and burning applications, or anywhere a bulb NEI is used as a charge indicator and indicates that the
high voltage DC supply is required. unit is charged and operating properly.

How It Works Construction

Referring to the schematic diagram in Fig. I, the two power As with all projects start out by laying out and identifying.
transistors QI and Q2, form a regenerative amplifier operat- If you do not wish to make a printed -circuit board, then you
ing as a power oscillator. When Ql turns on, Q2 turns on and
D1-138 ARE 1N4007
that shorts the power supply across the primary of TI. That C2 -C9 ARE .01 UNITS
current pulse induces a high voltage in the secondary of TI.
C3 C5 C7 C9
As Cl charges, Ql turns on again and the cycle repeats itself.
Therefore, a rapid series of DC pulses are generated and
stepped up by Tl to approximately 300 volts at full battery
05 D7 08
D1
04 D6
Fig. 1-As you can see, although the Dazer is not complex,
it contains enough doubler circuitry to pack quit a punch. C4 C6 C8
The oscillator does nothing more than send sharp current
pulses through T1. The back EMF across the secondary winding
is then pumped through the multiplier stage to produce the
very -high output voltage across the electrodes. ELECTRODES
R2
1M
NE1
 may use a perf board as long as you remember to keep the
leads of all high -voltage components isolated. That is to
prevent sparks from arcing across your board. A 4 x 7.5 cm of
perfboard is suitable for that purpose.
The first components you should mount are the two tran-
sistors Ql, Q2, transformer Ti, resistor RI, and neon bulb
NEI. Solder them in place (for PC construction) being sure
that the transformer and transistors are hooked up correctly.
Apply a small amount of adhesive to the base of NEI to hold it
securely in place.
Mount D1 to D8 and C2 to C9 on the board and make all
solder connections. Note proper polarity of the diodes. The
off-board components come next. Solder in leads for SI, and
the output electrodes. Also solder in the battery clip for BI.
Build the enclosure from some nonconductive material
such as plastic. Drill holes for SI, NEI, and output elec-
trodes. Be sure that the output electrodes are about a cm or
greater apart. Connect the output wires to the electrodes and
insert them through holes from inside of case. Thread on the
retaining nuts and tighten them securely. Set the circuit hoard
in the case and mount SI, securing with nut. That completes
the construction.

PARTS LIST FOR THE ELECTRONIC DAZER

C1 -0.1-µF monocapacitor
C2-C9-0.01-µF 400 volt polyester capacitors
D1 -D8 -1N4007 1-kVolt diode
NE1-Type NE -2 neon bulb
Q1-MJE521 NPN power transistor
02-MJE371 PNP power transistor
R1-3,300-ohm'/4-watt resistor
R2 -1,000,000-ohm 1/4 -watt resistor Good parts layout is the secret to any miniature project. If
S1-SPST monetary -contact, pushbutton switch T1- your layout causes the battery to come too close to the high -
1200 to 8 -ohm audio power transformer voltage components we suggest you insulate it with tape.

ADDITIONAL PARTS AND MATERIALS

9 -volt battery clip, 10 x 5 x 2.5 -cm plastic case, 7.5 x Operation and Use
4 -cm perfboard or PC board, two 8/32 x 1-1/4 bolts and Activate the unit by pressing Si. NEI will light indicating
nuts for electrodes, adhesive for mounting NE1, circuit the dazer is fully charged and ready to use. Notice also that
board standoffs (optional), hookup wire, solder, etc. only one pole of NEI will glow indicating DC voltage pres-
The following are available from Quantum Research, ent. It is important to remember that the device holds a charge
17919 -77th Avenue, Edmonton, Alberta, Canada T5T even after SI is off. To discharge, touch the electrodes to a
2S1: metal object and note the healthy spark discharge.
QV100K1-Complete kit without PCB (includes all The Electronic Dazer was designed as a self-defense weap-
above parts except those following the electrodes in the on for use against vicious dogs or other attacking animals.
above list) $40.00 (includes postage). The device is most effective when the electrodes contact an
QV100K2-Complete kit with PCB (includes all above
parts except those following the electrodes in the above
area of low resistance such as skin or flesh. Those include the
list) $45.00 (includes postage) snout or mouth since the resistance of those areas are much
lower than areas of hair or fur. The electrodes could be
pointed to penetrate these areas better. The dazer generates
Testing great stopping power. One contact will give a powerful jolt
Before inserting the battery and closing the case, a few test and should discourage any further attacks.
measurements should be made to ensure correct operation. The device can burn and heat materials with low resis-
With the ground clip connected to the battery, connect a VOM tance. Those include flesh, moistened paper or wood, etc.
between the positive clip and the positive terminal of the That makes the unit potentially hazardous to humans. Re-
battery. Set the meter for current reading, and press SI. You member, the dazer is not a toy but a quality electrical ap-
should measure a current of approximately 300 to 500 mA. pliance and therefore must be treated accordingly. Use the
NEI should be glowing. utmost discretion with this device.
With a high voltage VOM, you should measure about 2000 Another use for this device is as a high -voltage DC power
volts on the output terminals. Those measurements indicate supply. It may be constructed as a variable power supply if
proper circuit operation. Let the unit run for about one output taps are taken from various stages of the voltage
minute. Transistors QI and Q2 should be warm, but not hot to multiplier section. Remember, always disconnect the battery
the touch. Insert the battery in the holder and close the case. and fully discharge the capacitors before working with the
That wraps up the Electronic Dazer. circuitry.

46
ELECTRONIC
TORNADO
PLASMA
DISPLAY
POWER
SUPPLY

A universal power source for an Eye -of-

the -Storm -like display, and other unusual
plasma and neon lighting devices.
ROBERT IANNINI

You no longer need to go to a local discotheque to see the latest in unusual lighting
effects. Whether it's an Eye -of-the -Storm -like display, a Devil's Furnace, or
travelling-wave neon lamps, you can now buy them for your own home at the larger
department stores and high-tech boutiques. Only problem is, they usually cost big
bucks-in the neighborhood of $200; but you can certainly can build them for much
less if you have the special kind of power supply that's needed. And that's where our
universal plasma power supply comes in: it can drive all three kinds of displays-you
simply connect the desired display device to the universal plasma power source.
 HIGH VOLTAGE OUT

D1

---dVD-
F1
I
154007 WIRE

Cl C6 -a R15

í
R8
TS1
170pF 18K R10
.01 18K
330V 3W 47K
3W
C7 C6 -b
PL1 R3
47K
.01
'1
01
g FEEDBACK
RATE
MJ8501 R14
1MEG Q4
2202
GROUND
TERMINAL R4
22052 22052
R5 \ 03
2N2222
2N2646 04

3W
4M
3W
MANUAL
CONTROL
I R9
4.7
Wer
K
o
S1
o
154749

3W
JUMPER I

MODE R7
03 D2
2202
1N5234 1N914
D5
Q2
L H
'r1N4149 D40D5 R11 ~ C4
22K Ç
R6
Cl r? R12 SEE TEXT
e 1K
.1

400V
HE
INTENSITY 1K ó
o li R2 (SEE TEXT)
( 1052`
1 N4749

C3
001
10KV
o HIGH VOLTAGE RETURN
WIRE

FIG. 1-THE POWER SOURCE USES A COMMON GROUND so make certain PL1 is a
polarized linecord plug. The dashed line indicates a shorting jumper that's only installed
if the device is to be used only for powering a plasma bulb.

Fire in your hand so that you get the option of using all energize the tube's gas via a connec-
For those of you unfamiliar with three devices. The circuit that deter- tion to only one end of the tube. Thai
discotheque lighting, we'll take time mines the speed of end -to -end il- is made possible by the capacitance
out to explain. An Eye-of-the -Storm - lumination determines the brightness between the ionized gas and the sur-
type plasma device is a glass bulb that range of the plasma globes, while the roundings, which produces a low
surrounds a small golf-ball -size core. repetition -rate circuit for the neon enough reactive impedance so the
When powered, red and blue stream- tube can be easily bypassed for full- high -frequency energy can cause
ers resembling flashes of lightning time plasma -tube display. plasma ignition.
emanate from the ball to the globe. If Since ignition depends on the ca-
you move your fingers over the globe The usual power pacitance of one end of the tube to its
the streamers follow your fingers and The usual way to power neon and surroundings, it allows the ignited
appear to burst and mushroom at your cold -cathode gas discharge tubes is to plasma display to travel along the
fingertips. use a high -voltage, current -limited tube, creating a defined bright and
A Devil's Furnace is also a globe transformer operating at 60 Hz that is dark band. The degree or type of trav-
but there is no central ball. Streamers connected to both ends of the tube; an el-effect can be a pre -programmable
of flame -tipped lightning flow upward approach that only allows the full dis- event that determines where the plas-
from the base and follow the curvature charge length to be simultaneously ma ignition will start, causes the igni-
of the globe. As you move your hand energized. Sequential energizing of tion to travel steadily to the end of the
or fingers over the globe the Devil's the display is therefore impossible, tube, and then repeats the electrical
Flame follows them and "explode" and any display motion must be simu- effect; thereby creating the visual
against the bulb. lated by using individually -seg- effect of handwriting or tracing
A travelling -wave or tracing neon mented discharge tubes, each having Varying voltage levels such as those
lamp is a lighting device that illumi- a connection to an individual source from the output of a radio or audio
nates slowly from end to end, then of power. Timing and power-control amplifier can also be used to vary the
extinguishes, then repeats the cycle. circuits determine the distribution of tracing effect or the plasma -lighting
The time it takes for total illumination power to the individual segments of discharge -effect in step with the
of the tube and the repetition rate are the tube. sound amplitude. That creates bizarre
determined by the characteristics of In our universal power supply, in- and dazzling special effects.
the power source. stead of 60 Hz, we substitute high -
Since the power source for a travel- frequency energy of approximately How it works
ling -wave neon lamp is the most com- 20 kHz as the power source, which Refer to Fig. 1. The 117 volts from
plex, that's the one we'll describe- makes it possible to excite and re - the AC powerline passes through
 FEED-
BACK PRIMARY OUTPUT
PARTS LIST
T1

6Ö"0 J 000's- HV OUT

HV RETURN
Resistors
R1-10 ohms, 3 watts
R2-10 ohms, 1/4 watt
R3, R10-47,000 ohms, 1 watt
R4,R5-200 ohm, 3 watt, wirewound
DI R6-1000 ohms, watt 1

R7, R14-1/4 watt

R8, R15-18,000 ohms, 3 watt, wire -
-R3- wound
R10
R9-4700 ohms, Y watt
R11-2200 ohms, Y watt
Cl R8 R12 -5000-ohm trimmer potentiom-
eter
R13-1-Megohm trimmer potentiom-
R11 S1
eter

03 R7

-R9 /
03
04

R14
z Capacitors
C1-170 µF, 330 volts, electrolytic
C2, C7-0.1 µF, 400 volts, paper
C3-.001 µF, 10 kV, ceramic,
C4-220-1000
rR12l
INTENSITY
04
r 8131
RATE
µF, 25 volts, elec-
trolytic (see text)
C5-1 µF, 50 volts, electrolytic
C6 -a, C6 -b-0.01 µF, 1 kV, poly-
propylene (see text)
FIG. 2-THE CURVED LINES IN THIS PARTS LAYOUT indicate components that span Semiconductors
across other components. That is possible because most of the small -size parts are end -
mounted. Capacitor C7 can be placed on top or under the PC board. Q1-MJ8501, NPN high voltage tran-
sistor
Q2-D40D5, NPN power transistor
Q3 -2N2222, NPN transistor
HIGH VOLTAGE Q4 -2N2646, UJT transistor
OUTPUT D1-IN4007 rectifier diode
D2-1N914 small -signal diode
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
D3-1N5234, Zener diode
D4-D6-1N4749, Zener diode
II

Other components
F1 -1 -amp, slo-blo fuse
J1-Phono jack
PL1-Polarized power plug
Sl-SPDT PC -mounting slide switch
TS1-Thermal switch
T1-Ferrite transformer (see text)
Ti GROUND RETURN
T2-Miniature audio transformer, 8-
OF OUTPUT ohm primary, 1000 -ohm secondary
WINDING 10 KV; secondary inductance, 1H;
primary inductance, 2.5 mH; feed-
back winding, 10 turns, 20 µH

10 TURNS OF #24 WIRE

START AT GROUND RETURN LUG
Note: The following parts are avail-
a b
able from: Information Un-
limited, PO Box 716, Amherst,
FIG. 3-THE FEEDBACK WINDING, as shown in a, is wound directly over T1's core. Its NH 03031: An etched and drilled
leads, as shown in b, are routed under TVs mounting plate. The letters in b that identify the
wires are the same as those used by the manufacturer; they match the connections PC board ($5.50): Transformer
shown in Fig. 5. T1 ($29.50): 0.01 µF, 1 kV, poly-
propylene capacitor ($2 each): A
through thermal safety switch TS1 when operating the unit in a high- complete kit containing T1 and
(which is mounted on the device's powered mode, or may be required to all other components as well as
comply with local electrical codes.) the enclosure ($59.50). Add 5%
heat sink), is rectified by diode D1,
of the total order for for postage
and filtered by capacitor Cl. Resistor The rectified voltage across Cl is ap- and handling.
Rl limits the surge current of D1 and proximately 160 -volts DC. Plasma globes and custom
Cl. Fuse Fl is a slo-blo type that al- Transistor Q1 is connected as a neon tubes are available from
lows Cl to charge, yet opens (at 1 Hartley -type oscillator. It is biased Strattman Design, 791 Trement
amp) if a catastrophic fault exists in into conduction when base current is St. No. E517, Boston, MA 02118.
the circuit. Thermal switch TS1 turns first applied through R3. Feedback to Tel. 617-266-8821. Write or phone
the device off when the temperature Ql's base is obtained by a tertiary for specific information and
of Ql exceeds 200°F. (It is necessary feedback winding on Ti that is in - prices.
phase with Ti's primary winding. The as the ramp waveform builds. If R12 is The display
positive feedback is what causes Ql to adjusted for a "hold off" bias so Q2's The plasma arc-the visual dis-
oscillate. Base current is limited by conduction does not start until the play-is created by the electric cur-
resistors R4 and R5. ramp is well underway, the overall rent flowing through the gas in the
The resonant frequency of Ti is period of the output voltage, and tube. In a plasma bulb, the gas can be
such that the circuit oscillates at a therefore the display, is reduced. argon, neon, krypton, or any com-
frequency of approximately 20-25 bination thereof. The colors generated
kHz. A resonating capacitor, C6, Audio control are determined by the specific kind
tunes the primary of Ti to a smooth, An audio signal can be substituted and ratio of gasses. In a neon tube the
soft waveform, while R15 provides the for the ramp control voltage by setting gas is, of course, neon. When electric
load impedance that is sometimes Si so that Q3's base connects through current is applied to the gas, the atoms
necessary when the supply powers R9 to D2 rather than to C4. An audio become energized to a level where
very small display tubes and globes. signal, say from a transistor radio, both electrons and positive -charged
Since the power supply uses a that is applied to J1 will then provide atoms are produced. They emit light
ground circuit that is common to the the control signal for Q2, and the sys- spontaneously upon returning to their
AC powerline, capacitor C3 is tem's output voltage will more or less initial energy state. As the electric
provided to prevent a hazardous con- correspond to the amplitude of the current is reduced, the display short-
dition should polarized line -cord plug audio signal. ens because there is insufficient ener-
PLI be defeated. Normally, resistor R2 isn't neces- gy to cause further ionization.
The gain of Ql determines the out- sary unless the audio signal is so Increasing the ionization energy
put voltage. The gain is controlled by strong that it swamps the unit and causes the end of the display in a neon
the conductance of transistor Q2, produces an output that appears to be tube to lengthen because there are a
which is determined by the bias ap- on most of the time. You only have to greater number of free charges. In
plied to Q2's base through the install R2 if R12 has little effect on the simple quantitative terms, the number
INTENSITY control, R12. Diode D3 pre- output when audio is used as the con- of charges produced in the tube is
vents any offset voltage that may oc- trol signal. directly related to the input energy. A
cur at the beginning of the turn -on As a general rule, the 1-µF capaci- smaller -volume tube would the-
cycle from turning on Q2. Capacitor tor specified for C5 in the Parts List oretically produce a longer discharge
C2 bypasses any high -frequency sig- will be satisfactory, but you can ex- for a given ionization energy and vice
nal that might be developed across periment with different values to get versa. (That explanation neglects the
Q2, while Zener diodes D5 and D6 the plasma or neon display you prefer. change in the dynamic impedance of
limit Q2's instantaneous collector - If you have no need for either auto- the system due to a change in the
emitter voltage to 48 volts. matic ramp control by Q4, or audio volume of gas.)
The control signal applied to Q2's control via J1, then you can install the
base-which determines the in- shorting jumper indicated in Fig. 1 by Construction
stantaneous system -output voltage- the dashed line connecting R8 to R12. Although we provide details for
is determined by the ramp voltage With the jumper installed, the bright- construction of the universal plasma
produced by unijunction-transistor ness of a plasma-bulb display, or the power source prototype shown, keep
oscillator Q4. The period of the ramp brightness and maximum length of a in mind that a complete kit that in-
is determined by capacitor C4 and the neon display is determined only by cludes the cabinet and all prefabri-
setting of the RATE control, R13. The R12. cated metal parts is available from the
value of C4 should be in the range of
220-1000 µF. A mid -value of 500 µF
is suggested as an initial value. Al-
though 500 µF probably will work 2"
out best for most applications, you
can experiment to determine the exact
value for the kind of display that you
o
5/3z"DIA V32 " DIA
prefer.
HOLES %a " DIA
The ramp voltage is applied USE Q1
through the MODE switch, Sl, to emit- SOCKET AS
ter-follower Q3, which serves as a TEMPLATE
FOR HOLES
buffer-amplifier whose relatively high
input impedance isolates C4 from
variable resistor R12. The voltage pro-
duced by Q3 across R12 corresponds
to the ramp voltage, thereby provid-
I1 V?
"

BEND UPWARDS BEND UPWARDS

ing a relatively linear change in Ql's
power output.
Proper biasing of Q2 by R12 is the
point of conduction just as the ramp 8
voltage starts to increase. That
provides a minimum or zero tube or FIG. 4-THIS IS THE TEMPLATE for the metal frame. The holes for 01 should correspond
globe display that steadily increases to the particular socket you use.
 Q1

METAL FRAME

SOCKET

MICA INSULATOR

HIGH VOLTAGE
RETURN

PC BOARD
LINECORD
02

HIGH VOLTAGE MICA INSULATOR

OUTPUT 1

PLASTIC MOUNTING METAL FRAME

BOX
HARDWARE
a

FIG. 5-THE ASSEMBLY ON THE METAL FRAME should correspond very closely to the
view shown in a. Note in particular how the letter-identified wires from T1 connect to the
PC board. If TS1's mounting screws interfere with the frame's installation in its cabinet,
eliminate the screws and secure TS1 to the frame with epoxy cement.

source given in the Parts List, which nected together at the top after they bracket, they must be insulated from
is located on page 45. are installed on the board. Finish up the metal frame that is used as a chas-
The first step is to make the PC by using an RTV type adhesive such sis. The insulation can be a strip of
board using the template shown in PC as G.E.'s Silicon II to cement a sheet epoxy PC material from which the
Service. Then, using Fig. 2 as a of insulating material to the underside copper foil has been etched. (The in-
guide, install all board -mounted com- of the PC board. sulator is supplied in the complete kit
ponents. But note that the compo- When the PC board is completed, of parts.)
nents are mounted somewhat dif- you can set it aside and move on to
ferently than usual: except for D1, transformer Ti. The frame
D3, D4, and Rl, all components are The metal frame chassis, which is
mounted on end; that is, they stand A feedback coil called a mounting plate in the instruc-
vertically on the PC board. Although Although the Ti specified in the tions packaged with the complete kit,
Fig. 2 shows diodes D5 and D6 exter- Parts List is supplied completely as- also serves as the heat sink for Q1 and
nal to the board, they actually span sembled, it requires the addition of Q2, which is why thermal -switch TS1
across the board. They are positioned feedback coil, which, as shown in is installed on the frame. If the frame
about 3/4 -inch above the board and are Fig. 3-a, is nothing more than 10 turns gets excessively hot, TS1 opens and
located between Tl and C4. of No. 24 solid, insulated wire wound turns the power supply off. Since TS1
Note that although the leads from around Ti's core. Bear in mind that if is self-resetting, it automatically re-
Q2 are soldered to the PC board, dur- you substitute a different transformer stores power when the heat sink
ing final assembly Q2 will be folded for the model specified the required cools.
downwards so it can be heat-sinked to feedback winding might have more or Figure 4 shows the measurements
a metal frame. Be sure to leave suffi- less turns. Also, a substitute trans- for a metal frame made from '/16-inch
cient lead length-about 'h-inch-so former should have a primary induc- aluminum. The indicated holes are for
the fold can be made without stressing tance between 2 and 3 mH. If your Ti the mounting screws used for Q1, Q2,
the leads or the board. has pin connections that interfere with and Tl. The precise layout of the dia-
In reality, C6 -a and C6 -b do not its installation, simply cut them short. mond -pattern holes for Q1 will be de-
exist. There should be only one ca- Figure 3-b shows letter-coding for termined by the particular kind of
pacitor, C6, a 0.005-µF, 1 -kV tubular the connections of the particular socket you use; but regardless of the
capacitor connected across Ti's pri- model Tl specified in the Parts List. kind or design of the socket, make
mary winding. Unfortunately, that The letters only serve as a reference QI's holes 1/4 -inch, and deburr them
value isn't among the easiest to lo- when assembling the project; more on with a knife or deburring tool before
cate, so you can substitute the more that later. (The letters are the same as installing the socket.
easily obtained series -connected those used for identification by the kit Make certain you drill all holes be-
0.01-µF, 1 -kV capacitors, shown in supplier given in the Parts List.) fore bending the side flanges upwards
Figs. 1 and 2 as C6 -a and C6 -b. They Take note that since Ti's terminals on the fold marks.
are both end mounted, and are con- extend through its own support Figure 5 shows how the project is
 ment is unavailable we suggested con-
J1 12 TS1 C6 Q1 T1
necting a 60-watt light -bulb ballast in
series with the power cord. If there is
a catastrophic failure in the device,
the light bulb will turn on and drop the
voltage at PLI to a safe value.
Slowly turn the variac up to 120
volts and note that its ammeter should
indicate only 50-60 mA. Also note
that there should be only a faint glow
in the neon tube. CAUTION-if the
meter reads excessive current, a
fault exists that must be corrected
to prevent severe circuit damage.
Adjust R12 for a maximum sweep
reading of 200 mA. At 200 mA a neon
tube should energize out to 15 feet.
Adjust R13 counterclockwise and
note that the neon sweep speed should
increase to the point where it ceases.
Set S1 to its AUDIO input position.
Connect a transistor radio's earphone
output to J1 and note that the neon or
plasma display intensity should re-
spond to the audio sound level.
Cl Fl If everything checks out, install the
FIG. 6-THE ACTUAL PROTOTYPE. Notice that it is virtually
unit in its enclosure, using strain re-
a duplicata of the layout
shown in Fig. 5. lief clamps or devices where the line -
cord, high- voltage, and high -voltage-
assembled. Figure 5-a shows that TS1 enclosure is supplied with the kit.) return wires pass through the en-
is secured to the metal frame with Fabricate a cover from perforated closure. Figures 6 and 7 show the
screws and nuts. If you have somehow aluminum that will snap onto the top completed protype unit.
made the frame a smidgen oversize so of the cabinet, but be certain to drill
the mounting screws prevent the chas- access holes for R12, R13, and S1 Special Instructions
sis from being installed in its cabinet, before bending the sides of the cover. Although the unit can power up to
you can eliminate the screws and use Also, if you plan on using a plasma 30 feet of neon tubing, best results are
epoxy glue to cement TS1 to the chas- globe, assemble a base large enough obtained by connecting 10 -15 -foot
sis. Its location is not precise, but it to support the globe, and place the sections in parallel because maximum
should be reasonably close to the top power supply within the base box. sweep travel is usually limited to 15
of the enclosure (away from Q2). Do not pre -size a plasma -globe feet.
Figure 5-b shows how Q1 is in- base before you obtain the globe. The high-voltage -return wire is in-
stalled on the metal frame using an Since plasma globes range in size tended for connection to the end of
insulating socket. However, note from from 7 to 22 inches, you must be larger neon displays. It is not neces-
Fig. 5-c that Q2 does not use a socket; certain the base has the proper dimen- sary for single electrode -ended tubes
it is insulated from the frame only by a sions to fully support the globe. such as used for visual audio enhance-
mica insulator, so a Nylon screw and ment. Do not ground the high -voltage
nut must be used as the mounting Checkout return if unused; simply tie-wrap the
hardware. Before applying power, very care- wire and make sure there are no ex-
Finally, use RTV adhesive to ce- fully check the insulation between the posed strands.
ment the PC board to the metal frame. metal frame and the connections to Do not allow the power -supply unit
The board must be spaced off the Ql, Q2, and Tl. Also, check for con- to run without being connected to a
frame because one end is lifted by tinuity between PL1's ground lug (the display tube or globe.
Q2's mounting; use a stack of rubber larger one) and the circuit's common
grommets for the spacers. (ground) point. Make certain the cir- Neon displays
cuit ground is not connected to PL1's Set R13 fully clockwise, R12 fully
The enclosure "hot" terminal. counterclockwise, and S1 to INTERNAL
Although the project should not be Next, set R13 fully clockwise, R12 (so that Q3'is fed by Q4).
installed in an enclosure until tested, fully counterclockwise, and Si so its Lay out the intended neon sign on a
prepare the enclosure so it is ready as handle points toward R10. Then con- clear non-conductive bench. (Not
soon as the tests are completed. For nect Ti's output lead to a neon tube, necessary for pre -installed displays).
safety, the (41/2-inch wide x 43/4 -inch bank, or sign. Connect the high -voltage return
long x 23/4 -inch high) enclosure Plug the unit into a variable, cur- (the ground wire) to the far end of
must be made of plastic; 3/32 -inch rent -metered AC supply, such as a display. Note that the wire is only
thick will be ideal. (An appropriate metered variac. If that kind of equip- continued on page 68
52
 SOLID-STATE
TESLA COIL
Build an updated version
of Nikola Tesla's most -
famous experiment.

By Charles D. Rakes

NIKOLA TESLA IS CONSIDERED BY SOME TO BE THE

greatest inventor of our modern electrical age, and
many experts consider him to be the true father of
radio. However, today he is best remembered for his fascinat-
ing wireless power-transmission experiments, using his fa-
mous Tesla coil.
The high -frequency air-core, oscillating Tesla coil is just as
exciting today as it was back in 1899, when he used it to
successfully transmit electrical energy over 25 miles, without
wires, to light a large number of incandescent lamps. The
Tesla coil is ideal for demonstrating and exploring the un-
usual phenomena that occur with high -frequency high -volt-
age energy.
Most Tesla coils designed for educational and experimen-
tal purposes use a line -operated, step-up transformer-in
setups like that shown in Fig. 1-to generate the high voltage
needed for the coil's primary circuit. While there's nothing
technically wrong with that approach, it can place the oper-
ator in harm's way if the coil's primary circuit is accidentally :ifier circuit (cats_sting of Dl -D4), and filter capacitors (Cl
touched. A shock from the high -voltage winding could prove and C3) supply operating power for tha cJi_ zircui-ry
extremely dangerous and may be fatal. A 555 oscillaiodtimer (UI) is configured as a seL-cscilat-
Our version, the Solid-State Tesla Coil (see photos), elimi- ing pulse -genet-Mot circuit. Resistors R1 and R2 make 1p a
nates the line -operated, high -voltage transformer, making it a voltage -divider network, which is used to lover tre 24 -volt
safer project to build and to experiment with. Even so, wise DC output of the power supply to a safe operating level for
operators will keep their digits out of the wiring while the coil Ul. The 555's :arrow output pulse at pii 3 supplies crive
is under power. current to the base of Ql. Transistor Q2 surpplies suffic_ent

Solid -State Tesla Coil

The schematic diagram for the Solid -State Tesla Coil is
shown in Fig. 2. In that updated version of the Tesla experi-
ment, an 18 -volt, 2 -ampere transformer (Tl), a bridge rec-

117VAC SECONDARY
COIL
PRIMARY
COIL

STEP-UP
TRANSFORMER
Here s :he author's prototyae of the Solid -£tale Tesla Coil
Fig. 1-Shown here is a basic design for a Tesla Coil cir- with the 9 -inch circular deck removed. The -wa heavy wires
cuit, using a line-operated, step-up transformer to gen- runni ig the lencth of the top and bottom of the boarc serve
erate the high voltage needed for the coil's primary. as the ground arid -V bus.

53
 02 are about as common as Condor eggs, some other means
01
1N 5408
1N5408 must be used to tune L1. The simplest method is to tap the
117 SEC. primary coil on every turn and select the tap that produces the
VAC
Cl greatest voltage at the hot end of L2.
03 2200
1N5408 04
1N5408 C3 Perfboard Assembly
T.47
The author's prototype was built breadboard style on an 11
x 11 x -inch wooden cutting board (see photos), but any
1

similar non -conducting material (perhaps plastic) will do.

R3 R6 R7
02
The majority of the small components, as shown in the
10K 1K
R2
1K
10K R4 MJE34 photos, were mounted on a 3 x 5 -inch section of perfboard,
10K
and point-to-point wiring techniques were used to complete
7
the connections. Refer to the schematic diagram (in Fig. 2)
U1
555
01 and the photos for wiring and general parts -layout details.
253906
USC. IT IM ER Note: Components T1 and T2, C5, Q3 and Q4, Fl, and SI are
1 2 3 4 not mounted to the perfboard (see photos).
Figure 3 shows the positioning of the perfboard and off-
c4
R1 .33 R8 board components on the baseboard. Mount the fully -popu-
47052 1K lated perfboard assembly to the baseboard using four V4 -inch
R5
C2 plastic spacers and wood screws. The location of the sub-
T
+
47
2.2K
assemblies on the baseboard isn't too critical, so long as the
general layout is followed. Keep all wire leads as short as
possible, especially around the high -voltage circuitry.
A 2V2 x 2 -inch piece of aluminum is formed into an "L"
C5' SPARK bracket, which is used to hold SI and Fl (see photo), and is
1500pF GAP mounted on one corner of the baseboard. A 5 x 3 -inch piece
1-)I of aluminum mounts to the opposite corner and functions as
L1 L2 the heat sink for the two power transistors (Q3 and Q4). A
SEC.
ººº0ººººººQ_, simple band is formed from aluminum to hold T2 in place.
Recall that C5 is really three 500-µF doorknob capacitors.
R9
0(b'
PRI.
10052 PARTS LIST FOR THE
T2"
6S25 SOLID-STATE TESLA COIL
a3
253055
SEMICONDUCTORS
R11
U1-555 oscillator/timer, integrated circuit
10052 Q1 -2N3906 general-purpose PNP silicon transistor
Q2-MJE34, ECG197 (or similar) audio -frequency PNP
silicon power transistor
03, Q4 -2N3055 NPN silicon power transistor
D1 -D4-1N5408 3A, 100-PIV silicon rectifier diode
Fig. 2-Our updated version of the Tesla experiment uses an
18 -volt, 2 -amperetransformer (T1), a full -wave bridge rec- RESISTORS
tifier (consisting of D1 -D4), and filter capacitors (C1 and (All resistors are 1/2 -watt, 5% units, unless otherwise
C3) to supply operating power for the Coil's circuitry. noted.)
R1 -470 -ohm
current to transistors Q3 and Q4 to drive those components R2, R7, R8 -1000 -ohm
into full saturation. R3, R4, R6 10,000 -ohm
The primary winding of T2 (an automobile -ignition coil) is R5 -2200 -ohm
connected in series with Q3 and Q4, and across the power R9-R12-100-ohm, 1 -watt resistor
supply. Transistors Q3 and Q4 operate like a toggle switch,
CAPACITORS
connecting the coil across the power source at the rate and on - C1 -2200-µF, 50-WVDC electrolytic
time set by Ul. C2 -47-µF, 25-WVDC electrolytic
That high -current pulse generates a rising and collapsing C3 0.47-µF, 100-WVDC mylar
field across the primary winding of T2. The field causes a C4-0.33-µF, 100-WVDC mylar
current to be induced in the secondary winding of T2. The C5-1500-pF, 10K-WVDC (three parallel -connected
secondary output of T2 is fed across three 500-pF, 10 -kilovolt 500-pF doorknob capacitors, see text)
doorknob capacitors (collectively designated C5) that are ADDITIONAL PARTS AND MATERIALS
parallel connected and tied across the high -voltage output of F1 -1 -ampere fuse, 3AG
T2 as an energy-storage device. Those capacitors charge up L1, L2-see text
to TI's secondary voltage and are then discharged through the S1-SPST miniature toggle switch
spark gap and the primary (Ll) of the Tesla coil, producing T1 -117 -volt primary, 18 -volt 2 -ampere secondary
higher voltage in the secondary of the coil (L2). stepdown transformer
The secret of producing a successful Tesla coil is in the T2-Automobile-ignition coil (Ford #6S25, or similar)
tuning of the primary coil to the natural resonance frequency Perfboard, #12 wire, #26 wire, aluminum, Fahnestock
clips, spacers, solder, hardware, etc.
of the secondary coil. Because variable 10 -kilovolt capacitors
 03 & 04
ON ALUMINUM The Deck
HEAT SINK Figure 4 and the photos show the top deck of the author's
MOUNTING
prototype, where the two air-core coils (Ll and L2) are
STRAP mounted. The top deck consists of a 9 -inch diameter circle
cut from 1/2 -inch thick fiber board. Four 3 -1/4-inch lengths of 3/8
-inch dowel hold the 9 -inch coil base above the perfboard.
Select a drill bit slightly smaller than the dowel rod's
diameter and drill the four mounting holes in the 9 -inch circle
to match the illustration. Position the 9 -inch circle on the
baseboard at about the center, and mark the location of each
hole. Drill each location on the baseboard with the same bit to
a depth of about 1/2 -inch.
If the two-layer Tesla coil seems like too much bother to

HOLE
FOR
GROUND ROD

1/2

SPARK GAP
GUI MOUNTING
BUS DOWEL HOLE
HOLE
NO. 12 SOLID COPPER WIRE
CONNECTS TO L1 GND
5-1/2

Fig. 3-The author's prototype was built breadboard style

on an 11 x 11 x 1 -inch wooden cutting board, and most of the
components were mounted on a 3 x 5 -inch piece of perfboard.

Two brass strips, about 3/8 -inch wide by 3 -inches long, are
used to tie the three high -voltage capacitors together. If P
doorknob capacitors cannot be located (often they can be
salvaged from older black-and -white TV's), a substitute can
be made from window glass and aluminum foil.
9 -INCHDIAMETER, 1/2 -INCH THICK
To fabricate C5, take a 10 -inch square piece of glass, like FIBER OR WOOD CIRCLE
that of a picture frame, and glue a 9 -inch square piece of ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
aluminum foil to the center of the glass on both sides, leaving
Fig. 4-Shown here is the general layout of the top deck of
an equal border around each aluminum plate. Cut two 6 -inch the author's prototype, which supports coils L1 and L2. Four
lengths of #22 insulated stranded wire. Strip about 3 -inches 33/4 x 3/e-inch wooden dowel rods hold the 9 -inch circular
of insulation from one end of each wire and tape the stripped base above the perfboard and other components.
end to each of the aluminum plates.

Here is what L1 (left) and L2 (right) should look like once

Shown here is the 9-inch circular deck supported by four completed. Although winding L2 may appear difficult, it can
dowel rods, and an end cap positioned at its center. be done in an hour by hand or in 15 minutes by lathe.
 duplicate, then build a single-level unit on a larger wooden NO. 26 SOLID -COPPER
WIRE
base to suit your own needs. Actually, any good layout
scheme that respects the dangers of high voltage should do
quite well.
- [// 1
START WINDING

// /¡//
-ell 14--

8 l'llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllffllllllllllllllllll
Winding the Primary Coil
The primary -coil (L1) is wound on a form cut from a 4 -inch LAST WINDING

diameter, plastic sewer pipe to a length of five inches (see Fig. f- 24 /I

5). Take a 27 -foot piece of #12 insulated solid -copper wire ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
and strip away a %a -inch section of insulation at about every 12
inches, continuing for one-half the length of the wire (12 Fig. 6-Using #26 enamel -coated copper wire, L2 is wound
on a 24 -inch length of 11/2 -inch diameter, plastic
times total). Those stripped areas serve as tap points for water pipe, either by hand or (if available) using a lathe.
tuning the coil.
about 6 -inches of wire at both ends of the winding for making
connections.
3/8
Spray several coats of Krylon clear #1301 acrylic on the
coil for added insulation and protection against moisture.
TURN 25 Always let each coat dry completely before applying the next.
Two or three coats are sufficient.

It's Coming Together

Mount one of the 11/2rinch, plastic end caps to the center of
the 9 -inch circular deck with a -inch long #8-32 screw,
1

TURN 13
25 TURNS
NO. 12 SOLID T washer, and nut. Take two small metal "L" brackets and
mount the primary coil centered around the end cap on the 9 -
COPPER (WITH TAP
PLASTIC INSULATION) ON 13 AND inch base. Drill a small hole through the end cap and base-
ALL TURNS
ABOVE
board near the rim of the cap. Take the secondary coil and
push one end of the coil's lead through the hole in the end cap,
START
and then set the coil in the end cap.

INSULATED
ALLIGATOR
CLIP FOR
TAPPING
TURN 1
COIL (L1)
1-1/4

FAHNESTOCK
CLIP
NO. 12 COPPER NO. 26 OR 28
1 WIRE SOLID WIRE
COIL FORM (4 -INCH DIAMETER PLASTIC SEWER PIPE)
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
14-1-3/4-».1
Fig. 5-The form on which L1 is wound is a five-inch length 5/8
of four -inch diameter, plastic sewer pipe. A 27 -foot length DOWEL
1/2
of #12 insulated solid copper wire (with 12 quarter-inch ROD
sections of insulation stripped away at intervals of about
every 12 -inches) is then wound onto the form.
Wind the coil starting at the top of the coil form (see Fig. 5) 9 -INCH
RIM
1 7/8

with the end that has the 12 tap points. In other words, turn 25 LENGTH OF
OF TEST 6-32 SCREWS
9 -INCH
is the first winding to be made. That gives a tap on every turn WIRE CIRCLE TO C5
from turn number 13 to turn number 25. Drill two small holes
in the coil form where the winding starts and ends. Those ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

holes are used to secure the ends of the windings (see photos). Fig. 7-The spark gap is formed by mounting two fahnestock
clips to the 9-inch circular deck; one tied to the main
Winding the Secondary Coil grounding point, and the other connected to an alligator
clip, which is used to change taps on L1.
The secondary coil form (see Fig. 6) is cut from a section of
11/2-inch diameter, plastic water pipe (which actually mea- Take the other end cap and drill a hole in the center to clear
sures l7/8 -inches in diameter). So when seleçting your second- a #8-32 screw, and mount a feed -through insulator (see
ary coil form, take a ruler with you and be sure to come home photo) on top. Select a #8-32 screw long enough to stick
with the correct -diameter pipe. You'll also need two plastic through the top of the insulator by about 1/2 -inch, and grind
end caps that snugly fit the ends of the tubing. the end to a nice sharp point. Connect the top end of the
Make a mark on the coil form about one inch from each secondary coil to the bottom of the #8-32 screw with a small
end. That sets the starting and ending points for the winding. solder lug and tighten in place. Place the cap on top of the
Fill the space between marks with a neat solenoidal winding coil.
of #26 enamel -covered copper wire. Winding the coil by The spark gap is shown in Fig. 7. Two holes are drilled to
hand shouldn't take over an hour, and if a lathe is handy, you clear a #6-32 screw to match the drawing in Fig. 4. Two
should be able to complete the job in about 15 minutes. Leave (Continued on page 67)
56
 Make
Kirlian
Photographs
John lovine

In this article we explore the mysteries

of Kirlian photography and show you how you can
investigate the phenomenon yourself!

LABORING IN RELATIVE OBSCURITY, What is it? investigating the Kirlian aura at the
Seymon. Kirlian (pronounced keer- In Kirlian photography, a variable - Bio -Chemistry Laboratory at :he
lee-an) began his work in electro -pho- frequency high-voltage source is use Naval Air Development Center, in
tography in 1939. Over 40 years later, to produce images on photographic Warminster PA, felt that all sub-
that work is still the source of much film. It does so without the benefit of stances and, in particular, livrng
speculation and controversy. That's a camera, lenses, or light, so it can, in organic matter, contair and are sur-
because it has been claimed that some ways, be likened to X-ray pho- rounded by what can best be de-
Kirlian was able to use auras that sur- tography. The resulting photograph is scribed as a matter energy field.
rounds the objects in his electro -pho- a recording of the cold electron emis- When a high -voltage charge is intro-
tographs to detect illness in plants and sion created by the high -voltage duced into that field, it becomes or
animals before any other outward source. How the emission is modified behaves like a superconductive plas-
symptoms were visible. Whether by the subject or object used in mak- ma. The laws of physics that pertain
those claims are true or not, they spar- ing the photographs is the focal point to such a plasma are complex, involv-
ked a good deal of interest in the field of Kirlian photography. ing an extended form of Einste_n's
of electro -photography; so much so Many of the theories used to ex- Theory of Relativity. It's possible that
that electro -photography is today plain the effect read like excerpts the aura recorded around objects nay
commonly called Kirlian photogra- from a science-fiction novel. One the- be a physical manifestation of that
phy. ory put forth by Dr. F Cope, who was matter field. 57
 Despite the opposition to electro -
,_. S2
photographic research, Kirlian im-
ages have been used experimentally,
50V 4 AMP
12V
RECT as a diagnostic tool, in medicine, and
AMP
5
for non-destructive testing of mate-
fil rials in engineering. One interesting
BR1
25K aspect of electro -photography is that,
DOUBLE GANG 25K POT
R2 while all objects appear to produce an
22K
. ---
electro -photographic aura, the aura of
inanimate objects appears constant
C1 L_.__,
R5
2200µF over time, while living creatures give
V 35V off an aura that is time varying. In
22K
R3
humans, emotional stress, illness,
2.2K and alcohol or drugs all appear to have
Q1 R6
1K 4
an effect on the aura.
-ti1k-- One of the U.S. government's stud-
D1= C3 .. ClI ies in the area involved using the
555 Kirlian aura to ascertain the physical
6 I(
R7 Q3
2 C2
1

and mental health of military person-

51
10WATT
R4 1µF nel, and to determine their level of
Z 2.2K
fatigue. That was done by measuring
the diameter of the aura or corona, at
FIG.1-YOU CAN MAKE YOUR OWN Kirlian photographs using this circuit. Coil L1 is an the fingertip. At the end of the test, the
automotive ignition coil that can be obtained cheaply from an automotive junkyard. results were analyzed and two statis-
tically valid conclusions could be
But is the opposition justified? Is it drawn. One was that the corona of
possible that the procedure has no those suffering physical stress (exer-
merit whatsoever? I don't think so cise) was larger in diameter than the
and, to make my point, allow me to test average; the other was that those
draw a few analogies. We analyze suffering mental stress (fatigue, etc.)
light from stars to determine their had coronas that were smaller in di-
composition, and their doppler shift ameter than the test average.
to determine speed. Those two facts It may appear obvious than those
have created a foundation upon which test results could be due to the dilation
modern cosmology in the last century or constriction of the blood vessels.
stands. We typically perform spec- Another study proves that assumption
trographic and colormetric analysis to incorrect. Compounds given to indi-
determine a compound's composi- viduals to dilate or constrict blood
tion. It is therefore my belief that the vessels do not produce a statistical
Kirlian effect may provide a tool with difference in the corona diameter, ac-
which we can probe nature. cording to a report.

BACK
FIG. 2-THE "CABINET" for Li can be
SOCKET
fashioned from a cardboard tube. The end oiy,,
caps can be made of plexiglass. /II
TUBE

Unfortunately, when Dr. Cope

died, the research unit disbanded.
While Dr. Cope was alive, though, he
was one of a few scientists with the GND
courage to do research into what is FLEXIBLE
considered, at best, a fringe science. PLASTIC
It is that fringe -science category TUBE

that impedes research into the field, in

addition to quickly becoming associ-
ated with the quacks, psychics, and
pseudo -scientists that permeate the
field. It is easy to see that any scientist
HIGH
wanting to seriously investigate elec- VOLTAGE
tro -photography is going to be met
with serious opposition, and could FIG.3-THE AUTOMOTIVE IGNITION COIL is mounted inside its cabinet by gluing it to
possibly lose their standing in the sci- one side. Make the ground connection by soldering a wire to the side of the coil housing
entific community. and connecting the other end to the cabinet -mounted binding post.

58
 .010 INCH garnered the most attention, is the so-
TRANSPARENT called phantom -leaf phenomenon. In
SPECIMEN PLASTIC
that experiment, a small part (approx-
imately 2% to 10% of the total surface
f area) of a leaf is cut off. Electro -pho-
1 tographs subsequently taken will
sometimes show the energy pattern or
-FILM
aura of the missing section. The rea-
I
son for that is unknown, and it is the
COPPER CLAD BOARD subject of much speculation, and al-
(SEE TEXT) +V
though the effect is exceptionally
FIG. 4-THE SPECIMEN to be pho- rare, it has been demonstrated enough
tographed should be sandwiched be- times by different people to prove its
tween two sheets of thin (0.01 -inch) existence. One important fact must be
transparent plastic. kept in mind if you wish to attempt to
replicate the phantom -leaf effect. The
4" x 5 PLATE leaf must still be attached to the parent
COPPER SIDE DOWN
GLUE OR EPDXY TO CHASSIS
plant when shooting the photograph.
FIG. 6-ALTHOUGH THE RESULTS are not
PLASTIC CHASSIS Making your own visually striking, Kodalith film is easy to
There are probably quite a few work with. Here is a Kirlian aura captured
DISCHARGE doubters still out there. To those we on that film.
WIRE
TO L14%
e
' FREQUENCY offer the following challenge: Why
not build your own Kirlian-photogra- build a device that takes exceptional,
ON/OFF
NE1 phy unit and prove or disprove the beautiful, and exotic photographs of
existence of the effects yourself? The the most -common items lying
worst -case scenario is that you will around. In the balance of this article
we will present a simple set up that
PC BOARD will allow you to do just that. Al-
PARTS LIST though the equipment is not on par
FIG. 5-TO MAKE THEM EASIER TO FIND
in the dark, cluster the unit's operating with that used in research labs, it is
All resistors are 1/4 -watt, 5%, un-
controls around NE1. still more than sufficient to provide
less otherwise indicated.
R1-25,000 ohms, double -ganged startling results. The color pho-
While the results of the tests were potentiometer tographs that accompany this article
interesting, there is still not enough R2 -R5-2200 ohms showing the Kirlian aura of some
data to hail Kirlian photography as a R6-1000 ohms common leaves, were produced using
"fool -proof" diagnostic test. Al- R7-5 ohms, 10-20 watts the apparatus as described.
though other similar tests have been Capacitors The circuit for the setup is shown in
reported, the results have been in- C1-2200 µF, 35 volts Fig. 1. The heart of the circuit is a 555
complete. For instance, in one study, C2-0.1 µF timer in astable mode whose frequen-
C3 0.01 µF, 2000 volts cy is controlled by a double -ganged
the fingertip coronas of 120 adult hu-
Semiconductors pot. The output of the timer is fed into
mans were photographed. Of the IC1-555 timer
sample, 20% had a corona diameter Q1-TIP-120 NPN Darlington Darlington -transistor Tl. The
that was markedly below the average. transistor Darlington transistor controls two
It was later determined that 50% of Q2, 03-3055 NPN transistor TO -3 power transistors that switch the
that 20% suffered from some sort of D1 -2.5 -amp, 1000-volt silicon diode current on and off to a three -terminal
medical problem. BR1-4-amp, 50-PIV bridge rectifier automotive ignition coil, Ll.
There are several obvious flaws Other components Construction is straight -forward,
with that study. For one, no report was NE1-red neon -lamp assembly and the circuit is simple enough that a
made on the health of the 80% whose T1-720-volt/12-volt, 3 -amp PC board is not required-although
transformer you can use one if you wish. Note that
corona diameter was not reduced; it
S1-SPST pushbutton switch the transistors can get hot, so they
would have been informative to know S2-momentary N.O. pushbutton
what percent of those, if any, also L1-three-terminal, 12 -volt auto- should be heat sinked. The only other
suffered from some medical problem. motive ignition coil (see text) point that merits special mention is
Also, no follow-up appears to have Miscellaneous: Chassis, knobs, that a plastic chassis is essential, to
been done on those whose corona di- 4 5 -inch single -sided copper-clad provide adequate shock protection
ameters were decreased and who had PC -board plate, line cord, etc. from the coil and is also essential to
no ascertainable medical problems. It Note: Complete assembled and properly mount the exposure plate on
would have been interesting to see tested Kirlian unit available for top of the chassis (see Fig. 2).
how many of them developed some $187.50 from Images Co., P.O. Figure 3 shows the internal mount-
kind of difficulty, and in what time Box 313, Jamaica, NY 11419. ing of the components. The ignition
Plastic chassis $30.00 each plus coil is epoxied or glued to one side of
frame following the experiment. $2.50 postage and handling.
The most dramatic experiment in the chassis so that the high -voltage
Kirlian photography, and one that has continued on page 165
 If you've ever wanted a high -voltage
generator to create neat lightning effects,
perform Kirlian photography experiments or play
with neon lights, then this one's for you!

H GH
2jRBy Dale

Wewill describe a laboratory pulse generator using other hand, if - - urn circuit is not provided, an
an auto -ignition coil and capable of delivering a s ressing shock could be had by contact with the
train of pulses having a peak potent primary circuit. Because the ignition coil is an autotrans-
volts. With a couple of '. - . . construction vari- former, the return circuit for the high-voltage pulse includes
atio - is suitable for use as an electric -fence the power leads. Therefore, one side of the power supply
c arger, operating at a lower voltage, but capable of much should, if possible, be Earth grounded. That precaution,
higher output current. besides preventing shock by contact with the power leads,
Applications for a high -voltage spike are numerous: elec- also precludes arcing within the power supply itself as the
tromagnetic and radio -frequency interference studies, elec- high -voltage pulse seeks the shortest return path.
trostatic -discharge simulation; investigation of insulation break- Applying that reasoning to the fence -charger option, we
down; flammability experiments; strobe effects; etc. A DC can see why a fixed pulse rate is specified, as there is a strong
power supply or battery is required, and pulse potential may likelihood of accidental human contact with the fence wire;
be varied simply by changing the supply voltage. With a a rate of 60 pulses per minute or less being considered safe.
12.6-volt input, the ignition -coil model delivers its maxi- Also, since there is a good chance of personal contact with
mum pulse, but a unique multivibrator-driver circuit makes the power or battery leads, a good ground connection is
operation possible down to a supply voltage as low as 1.5 essential, as with any electric -fence system.
volts, yielding an output pulse of only a few hundred volts. For maximum safety, we recommend a battery supply for
Its pulse frequency is set by a front -panel control, with a the fence -charger system.
range from about 0.3 Hz to 20 Hz. If you should happen to reverse the power -supply leads
An ignition coil, however, is not well adapted to the fence - to either project, the current -limitation lamp, a large auto-
charger application since its output resistance is so high: motive bulb easily seen in the photos, lights brightly to warn
typically 10,000 ohms. Thus its output pulse is strongly you. However, the equipment must not be allowed to remain
dependent on loading. With a short fence, long sparks might in this condition for more than a few seconds. Even if you
be struck at risk of igniting brush; while on the other hand, never expect to make this mistake, the lamp should be in-
with a long fence, shunting by weeds or by dirt and moisture cluded because it limits excessive surge currents that could
may reduce its output voltage below an effective value. Hence otherwise occur under some operating conditions and which
for the fence -charger version the RATE prf control must be could blow the power transistor.
omitted for reasons of safety.
No-load output of the fence -charger option is typically 4 About the Circuit
Kv pk (kilovolts peak), or about half that value when con- As shown in Fig. 1, free -running variable multivibrator
nected to a -mile fence. A car battery powers the fence -
1 Q1 and Q2 drive Darlington power amplifier Q3, which
charger model for about four months before recharging is makes and breaks the primary current to coil T 1 as in an
needed (at recommended pulsing rate of 20 pulses/min.) auto ignition system. Duty, or "dwell" is a few miliseconds,
Two lamps mounted on the circuit board and visible through and the high -voltage pulse is generated at the end of the
the see-through front panel are important indicators of the period when the circuit is broken and the field of TI rapidly
unit's performance. collapses through the winding.
An unconventional multivibrator circuit was developed
Precautions to provide high saturation currents over a wide range of
While a single jolt from an ignition coil is itself rarely supply voltages. In this design both transistors Q1 and Q2
traumatic, the resulting -reflex muscle contraction could have conduct at the same time and both cut off at the same time.
unfortunate consequences. If a continuous train of pulses Another unique feature: For safety in the fence -charger ap-
causes you to involuntarily grasp the high -voltage conduc- plication, the circuit is designed to automatically shut down
tor, for instance, you might not be able to let go. On the if driver Q2 should fail to conduct for any reason (fluctuation
 zero volts. When Q1 begins conducting, and its collector
voltage has dropped far enough to start Q2 conducting also,
then a positive -feedback action is initiated, forcing both tran-
of supply voltage, intermittent connection, etc.) sistors into saturation. At the same time, power transistor
Starting with both transistors cut off; C3 is discharging, Q3 is turned on by the current supplied through R7.
its negative plate rising toward ground at a rate determined Dwell is determined by the time constant R6 x C3. When
by various series resistances; while its positive plate is held the charging current of C3 diminishes below the value which
near zero volts by a relatively low -resistance path through will sustain conduction of Q 1, then a regenerative action is
R6 and R7 and a resistor internal to Q3 across its emitter - again established, this time cutting off all three transistors.
base junction. It is at that moment the high -voltage pulse is generated.
The series combination of C5 and C6 (discussed later)
has negligible effect on the charging rate, which is therefore Further Details
determined mainly by C3 with the series combination of Capacitors C5 and C6 form a voltage divider which
RATE control R9 and resistor R2 (or R2 alone, in the fixed - ensures rapid cutoff of Q1; while C6 acts as a bypass to
frequency version). prevent Q from being retriggered by pickup of the high -
1

Capacitor C3 discharges fully, and then begins charging voltage pulse.

in the opposite direction as its negative plate rises above Dwell must be long enough to permit the field around
R9
2.5M EG +12V
'11
RATE
Ti R1
10052
1
(SEE TEXT) R2'
iE
C1
y'
470
R3 ( R4
. 10K 100K
C5
%F+ Q2
1000pF
2N3906
R5
~.._ -1E C2
1K 10
Q1
2N3904
Q2 2
1
1N914
C6
i1
C4
0.27 NE1 1+ Q -O OUTPUT
0.01
400V E T1 I

r
I

RB
1

i (SEE
--- TEXT)
C3tt" R6' 10K 3 4

277
CBE
2N3904,6 R7
10052

Q3
MJE5742
B C

MJE5742

Fig. 1-The pulse-generator version has a variable rate control and requires =
different values for C3 and R6 than does the fence charger version. The fence charger
version has a fixed rate and uses a conventional transformer instead of an auto coil (see dashed lines).
Ti to be fully developed to its steady-state condition un- The rapid collapse of its field when Q3 cuts off, as com-
der all anticipated conditions of loading. Although the pared to the relatively slow 60 -Hz sinewave for which it
period is not critical, it may be set for optimum results is designed, explains how several thousand volts can be
with a particular coil or transformer, as described later. developed across the 115 -volt winding (E = L di/dt). That
A higher capacitor value at C3 is specified with the winding will typically be found to measure 30 to 120 ohms
fixed -frequency, or fence-charger version, for reasons of DC, while the 12 -volt winding will have a resistance of
safety. It allows the use of a lower resistance value for around 1 ohm. The author has tried many such transformers
R2, reducing the shunting effect of dirt or moisture which for Ti, including the Stancor P-8392 and P-8393. (The latter
might otherwise cause a significant increase in the repeti- provides a somewhat bigger jolt although it costs more than
tion rate. That is the reason we specify an axial type for the former.) The problem, however, lies in the breakdown
C3, so that its pads are more widely spaced than they rating of the 115 -volt winding.
would be with a radial. In most transformers of the species, the winding is rated
for breakdown at 1500 -volts RMS (corresponding to 2100 -
volts pk), with a safety margin that may vary depending on
the manufacturer; the Stancor rating proving remarkably con-
servative. The author subjected the winding of a P-8393 to
40 million pulses of 4 -Kilovolt amplitude without break-
down. However, he does not guarantee equally good luck
in your application.
One way to preclude breakdown with such a transformer
is to always operate the fence charger with an appropriate
load. If your fence isn't long enough to load T1 to 2-3 Kv
pk, you could reduce the supply voltage: Say, use a 6 -volt
battery instead of 12 Volt. Or you could substitute for bulb
Il a type having a lower current rating, and therefore a higher
resistance. Either of those approaches, naturally, will some-
what reduce the effectiveness of the unit.
Otherwise, the author offers a transformer specially wound
The frequency control is mounted on the see-through front for the fence -charger option and rated at 5 Kv pk (see note
panel behind the ignition coil here. The auto lamp on the
at end of parts list).
circuit board limits current, and lights if the power leads
are connected backward. The chimney protruding through
the hole in the corner of the circuit board accommodates Other parts
the 1/2-in. pipe used in the fence-charger version. A type MJE5742 transistor is specified for Q3, rated at
400 -volts under heavy inductive load. However, you can at
Power Amplifier some risk substitute the cheaper MJE5741 (350 -volt rating)
Because the field of T1, as might be supposed, collapses or MJE5740 (300-volt rating), depending on Ti. In any case,
through the primary as well as the secondary, the inductive breaking the circuit to an inductive load is tricky and so if
"kick" comprises a positive pulse on the collector of Q3. you plan extensive experimentation you should obtain a few
Capacitor C4 is required, as in the conventional auto - spare Q3's.
ignition system, to prevent excessively rapid voltage build Potentiometer R9 for the variable pulse generator project
up. Nevertheless, that reactive voltage reaches several hun- can be any 2.5-megohm unit from the junk box. If you use
dred volts, and we take advantage of it to light neon indicator one with a linear taper, though, you will find the control
NE1. Thus, each flash verifies the integrity of the power - very touchy at the high end of the frequency range. The
amplifier circuit. simplest resolution of that minor inconvenience is to use an
If no arc is drawn, the positive pulse on the collector ordinary audio -taper potentiometer connected backward; that
of Q3 is followed by a negative -going excursion. Transis- is, with the high end of the frequency range at the CCW
tor Q3, designed for inductive loads, contains a shunt (counter clockwise) end.
diode which prevents that "backswing" from being ap- For reasons already mentioned, the time constant C3 x R6
plied to the base through the base -collector junction. That determines dwell, or "on" time. As we have said, dwell is
diode also protects Q3 if the power -supply leads are acci- not critical; but if the capacitor you use for C3 is a low -
dentally reversed. quality part with an excessively high equivalent series resis-
Automotive lamp I1, as we said, limits surge currents tance (ESR), then dwell may turn out to be greater than
occurring as a result of various normal operating conditions, necessary to serve the needs of T1. If in doubt, use a tanta-
as well as accidents, such as the reversal of power-supply lum type for C3.
polarity. Also, it absorbs the energy of the backswing.
The Incandescent Lamp
The Transformer We have emphasized the importance of I 1, the current -
Practically any 12 -volt ignition coil having a primary limiting lamp, and have specified a type 1156 auto bulb.
resistance of around 1.5 ohms will work as T1 for the The merit of an incandescent bulb as a protective device
high-voltage pulse generator, but there's a minor consid- lies in the dependence of its resistance upon the value and
eration in the choice of a transformer for the fence -charger duration of applied current. With a cold resistance of only
project. A common 12 -volt -amp transformer with 115 -
I about 1/2 -ohm, the Type 1156 degrades performance only
volt primary can be used here-hooked up backward of slightly; but in the case of a current surge or accidental
course, so that the 115 -volt winding serves as secondary. short circuit, its resistance quickly rises to a "hot" value
of around 6 ohms, sparing power amplifier Q3 from the
devastating requirement of breaking an excessive current
into an inductive load. Nevertheless, there is some leeway
in the selection of I1.
For instance, in the lab -generator version where the load
has a DC resistance of 1.5 ohms, a lower -resistance bulb
will give a slightly better spark at high frequencies. The
author has used a Type 1157 bulb here, connecting its two
filaments in parallel, with satisfactory results. On the other
hand, as we have indicated above, to prolong the life of T1
in the fence charger, you may elect a lower -current or higher -
resistance bulb. Try the smaller of the two 1157 filaments,
alone before experimenting further. After the unit is built
feel free to try others.

PARTS LIST FOR THE FENCE CHARGER

SEMICONDUCTORS
Dl-No D1 in project; please ignore
D2 -1N914 silicon diode or similar This is a top view of the circuit board. Note the ample
Q1 -2N3904 NPN silicon transistor or similar space provided between components. That is to prevent
arcing between the leads of high -voltage components.
02-2N3906 PNP silicon transistor or similar
03-MJE5742 8 amp, 400 -volt, NPN Darlington rower
transistor (see text) Circuit Construction
All parts for either version of the project are available,
CAPACITORS including the 2-piece plastic cabinet having provisions for
C1 -470-11F, 16-WVDC electrolytic
mounting at the end of an ordinary I/2 -in. water pipe or upon
C2-10 µF, 16-WVDC electrolytic a standard camera tripod. You may choose to build either
03-For lab model: 2-µF; for fence charger: 10-µF, version of the project in whatever kind of cabinet suits your
both 16-WVDC electrolytic, axial (see text)
needs. If you decide to use wire -wrap construction however,
C4-O.27 µF, 400-WVDC film
C5-1000-pF disc the ground bus and all connections in the power -amplifier
C6-0.01-µF disc
circuit should be made with wire no smaller than #24 gauge.
In the author's prototypes, power transistor Q3 stands off
RESISTORS the circuit board; but if space limitations permit, a slight
(All fixed resistors are'/4-watt, 5% ) margin of safety is affordable by bolting it down flat so that
R1, R7-100 -ohm
the circuit board provides a measure of heat dissipation.
R2-Selected (see text)
R3, R8-10,000 -ohm
Omit R2 from circuit board and don't connect the supply
R4-100,000 -ohm conductor to the plus end of T1 until ready to fire up.
R6-For lab model: 470 -ohms; For fence charger: Also, leave the secondary leads unconnected for the fence
150 -ohm charger.
R9-2.5-megohm pot (see text) In planning chassis layout, keep high -voltage output con-
ADDITIONAL PARTS AND MATERIALS ductors well away from the circuit board, especially in the
T1-For lab model: Wells C1819 or similar ignitiol coil; version using an ignition coil as output transformer. A me-
1.6-ohm primary, 10,000 -ohm secondary; For fence tallic or otherwise conductive cabinet must be connected to
charger: 12 -volt, 1 -amp transformer (see text) the circuit common. Since a 30 -kv pulse is capable of jump-
NE1-Neon glow lamp; Type NE -23 or equivalen: ing a 1 -in. gap, however, you may have some difficulty
11 -12 -volt 2 -amp automotive bulb, Type 1156 or
,
finding a feedthrough insulator big enough to handle the
equivalent high -voltage conductor. One way to meet that requirement
Cabinet or case; circuit board; solder lugs of various is to use a spark -plug wire, which may be passed through
gauge, with internal teeth; cable to power supply, #14 the cabinet wall using only a grommet to prevent chafing.
to #18 -gauge zip cord or whatever suits, spacers, screws, Or the neck of the coil itself may be used as a feedthrough
nuts, lockwashers, hookup wire, cable ties, solder, etc. device, as in the author's mode of construction.
Additional parts for the lab model only: 1 -in. to 2 -3/4 -in.
radiator -hose clamp to mount ignition coil; 7 -mm spark - Lab Cabinet Loading
plug wire, coil clip, coil nipple, alligator clip, al igator If you are using the author's recommended cabinet, situ-
insulator; knob for R9; two banana plugs or other suit- ate the circuit board in the left end of its bottom. The board
able terminations for cord to power supply. itself can be used as a template for drilling the four mounting
Additional parts for the fence charger only: two battery holes in the bottom of the cabinet. Mount the board assembly
clips, Mueller #46C or the like; 1/2 -in. pipe, 1112 -in large on four 7/16 -in. metal spacers. The conductive coating in the
nipple, coupling, etc., for grounding system. cabinet bottom may be grounded with a solder lug placed
All parts except water pipe, caulk, hookup wire, and under one of the screws securing the board to a spacer.
solder are available individually or in kit form from Maps For variable-frequency or lab model, situate the RATE con-
and Zaps, 1132 Roseta Dr., Topanga, CA 90290. Please trol R9 in the clear -plastic front panel. Bring the power cable
write for price list, sending self-addressed envelope with into the cabinet through the hole in the bottom rear, using a
450 postage. suitable grommet.
 The coil mounts on a platform toward the other end and The chimney referred to earlier provides the means for
is secured with a hose clamp. Using the coil called out in connection to an external ground. A pipe nipple and cou-
the parts list, some filing of the platform is required. The pling are required. First solder a length of hookup wire to
coil case must be grounded or internal arcing may occur. the inside of the nipple. A hot iron (say 200 watts) is required
Do not depend on casual contact between the coil case and for good wetting. Loosely engage the coupling to the nipple;
the conductive coating. A grounding connection can be made and passing the wire up through the chimney, screw the
by inserting an internal-tooth solder lug between the clamp nipple into the opening by turning the coupling. The nipple
and coil case. At its base, the coil is stopped by its neck may engage the coupling as it engages the chimney. Al-
passing through a hole drilled in the end of the cabinet top. though the chimney hole is not threaded, the nipple will
Hence, it's not likely to come loose with normal handling. nevertheless seat securely. Turn the coupling until it is tight
At the free end of spark -plug wire install an alligator up against the bottom of the cabinet. If desired, apply super
clip or other suitable connector. At the other end, first slide glue sparingly around top edge of the nipple, bonding it
the coil nipple onto the wire, and then install the coil clip. permanently to the chimney. Now, if you later need to re-
Important: To preclude arcing, solder the end of the wire move the coupling for any reason, the nipple will remain in
to the clip. Push it into coil neck and slip the nipple into place. Solder other end of the wire to common at the circuit
place. When the top is installed later, the nipple provides board or at one end of the lugs on the transformer flanges.
a tight seal.
High -Voltage Attenuator
Fence Charger Version Before proceeding with test and adjustment, you may wish
Construction of the fence -charger version is somewhat to provide yourself with some means for measuring voltage
simplified by less-stringent needs for insulation and by the pulses beyond the range of your oscilloscope. To that end,
more conventional mounting means for Ti. Whatever chas- you can build a 90-megohm attenuator, as shown in Fig. 2.
sis layout scheme you employ, however, the Earth ground- When used with a standard 10-megohm probe, the device
ing requirements described above also apply to this model: extends the vertical range of your scope by a factor of ten.
If you use a conductive cabinet, it must be connected to the The attenuator consists of nine 10-megohm resistors con-
circuit Earth, and so must the case of Ti. Don't forget that nected in series. A length of spark -plug wire provides sup-
a means must be provided to connect that common to an port for the resistor array and also serves to introduce distrib-
external ground. uted capacitance for AC equalization. To preclude arcing,
In the author's model of the fence charger, T1 is mounted each end should extend an inch or two beyond the terminal.
in the cabinet bottom. To ensure a good connection to the Once you have commissioned your pulse generator or
transformer case, first scrape any varnish or wax from the fence charger, you can fine tune the attenuator by adjusting
mounting flanges. Then mount with 1/2 -in. metal standoffs the bus -wire gimmicks at either end of the spark -plug wire.
and 8-32 hardware. Use two or three solder lugs as required That is most easily done by generating a high-voltage pulse
for various grounding connections. within the range of your oscilloscope (say 1600 volts peak),
Mount a ceramic feedthrough insulator in middle of the measuring with only the 10-megohm probe; then, trimming
platform for fence connection. The underside of the platform the length of the gimmicks to give the same defection with
comprises a recess which, in an outdoor installation, keeps the probe connected to the 90-meg attenuator (setting the
the output end of the insulator clean and dry. sensitivity 10 times higher, of course).
'GIMMICK" (2)
NINE 10-MEG
1-W RESISTORS
IN SERIES

3/8 IN.
MIN
7 -MM
SPARK -PLUG WIRE

HI -TENSION LEAD
FROM PULSE GEN

RETURN LEAD

CONVENTIONAL 10X, Fig.2-This is a high -voltage attenuator. Used with 10x probe, it extends
10MEG PROBE the scope range by a factor of 10. Spark -plug wire serves to support
resistors and provides distributed capacitance for AC compensation.
Selecting R2 2. Turn power off and ground the one which drew the
We had advised you during construction to omit one con- smaller arc. Connect the other to the output feedthrough.
nection to the primary of T1 so that you can now select R2 3. Reconnect scope, apply power, observe polarity of
without energizing the power amplifier. Using clip leads, output pulse. If you get a positive pulse, reverse the primary
first connect typical value shown in parts list. Then connect connections. A negative pulse jumps a longer gap from a
your 'scope to the junction of R6 and R7, and apply power. small object (the fence wire) to a larger one (the victim) than
For the lab pulse -generator version, now set the RATE con- does a positive pulse (believe it or not).
trol to maximum frequency and select a value for R2 which If you wish to view the current pulse, temporarily hook
gives a repetition rate of about 20 Hz. For the fence -charger 0.1 to 0.2 -ohm resistor in series with negative power -supply
model, select a value which gives the desired rate, but no lead, and connect a 'scope across it (being careful to avoid
higher than 60 times per minute. Remember that the slower ground loops, as can arise though test connections or via the
the rate, the longer between recharging. power -line safety ground). With fence -charger option, if
Now turn the supply off and add the missing wire to the possible, stimulate -mile wire by connecting 0.015-µF,
1

power -amplifier circuit. In the author's lab -generator chas- 2000-WVDC capacitor across its output. A rising waveform
sis layout, it is necessary to first loosen the coil in order characteristic of inductor charging should be obtained-the
to free the circuit board. If you plan to test the unit with abrupt drop at its trailing edge of course representing the
the circuit board loose, be sure to temporarily replace the cutoff of Q3 and the generation of the high -voltage pulse.
lugs grounding the coil case and cabinet. Place a cardboard With the lab -generator version, dwell is not critical thanks
sheet under the circuit board to insulate it from accidental to the relatively low inductance of the typical ignition -coil
contact with the cabinet coating, etc. The unit is now ready primary. In the fence -charger option, however, primary in-
for a performance test. ductance will probably be much higher and will vary consid-
erably depending upon your choice of a transformer. Fig. 3
shows the current waveform typical of such a primary. If it
ends too soon, that is before the field has reached its steady-
state value (A), then maximum output capability cannot be
attained. If it ends too late (B), then average current con-
sumption is higher than necessary. To get optimum results
(C), adjust the width by changing R6 as needed.

A B

The fence charger model has a nipple for mounting on a

C
length of water pipe. It effectively grounds the system.

Fig. 3-For the fence-charger option, this is a current

Testing pulse seen across the small resistor in series with the supply:
Connect the high -voltage output to the 90-meg probe or In A the pulse width is too short; in (B) The pulse width is
whatever instrument you wish to use to observe the high - too long; and in (C) the pulse width is correct.
voltage pulse. Turn the power supply on and gradually in-
crease the voltage (adjusting the lab -generator rate as de- If you know the exact value of the small resistor, given
sired), synchronizing the 'scope to display the largest excur- the peak voltage appearing across it you can now calculate
sion. (When you don't know exactly what to expect, it's peak current (I = E/R). A typical value is 4 to 6 amps.
easy to be fooled into syncing on the backswing or some
other minor lobe.) Buttoning Up
The unit should start working at a supply voltage of 1.5 Reinstall the circuit board, remembering to replace the
to 3 volts, but it will shut itself down down if you vary the lugs which ground the cabinet, pipe coupling, Ti, case,
voltage too abruptly. If that happens, just turn the power off etc., and to secure the coil. Test the unit once more, then
and then back on. assemble the cabinet.
At a 12 -volt input you should get a pulse of about 20 to If you're using the author's recommended cabinet with
30 Kv pk from the lab generator or 3.5 to 5 Kv pk from the the pulse -generator option, leave the high -voltage cable and
fence charger. In the latter version, proceed as follows to nipple connected to the coil, passing the other end through
decide which secondary lead should be grounded: the hole in the cabinet top as you bring the top into place.
1. Turn power off and disconnect scope from both ends. Slide the front panel up into the cabinet top. Now, close
Turn power back on, and using an insulated tool (to avoid the cabinet by swinging the left side down. Moderate force
getting zapped), bring each end in turn to the transformer is required to push the coil nipple into the hole. Make sure
case, leaving the opposite end free. One will probably draw tongues in the cabinet top engage the mating slots in the
a small arc and the other won't. bottom, and hold it together with one hand while installing
 the cabinet hardware with the other. Turn the five bottom that happens, high voltage settings give what appears to be
screws snug, but not tight. normal performance because the spark path is completed
Cabinet assembly of the fence -charger version is easier by jumping within the neck of the coil; while at the lowest
cause you don't have to cope with the coil neck or connec- voltage settings it appears not to be working at all. If that
tions to the front -panel potentiometer. For outdoor use, how- difficulty is encountered, pull the cable out, inspect the sol-
ever, you will have to caulk seams against the weather. der joints, then simply push it back into the coil.
Silicone rubber is good for that purpose because it can later
be peeled off if servicing becomes necessary. Acrylic rubber Fence Charger Ground
makes a better seal, but because it sticks more tenaciously, Using the author's cabinet and construction techniques,
it makes later disassembly more difficult. the fence -charger ground connection is made through the
Carefully apply a very thin bead first along the inside pipe fittings sticking out of the bottom end of the chimney.
edges of the opening in the top front, and install the front An Earth -ground means is provided by an ordinary '/z -in.
panel. Then, again very carefully and sparingly, apply a water pipe. The length should be chosen to permit the pipe
bead along the slot in the cabinet bottom; and finally, as- to be driven at least 3 ft deep, but the deeper the better,
semble the top and bottom. Depending on your skill in the depending on estimated conductivity of the soil; with enough
application, there may be some squishing around the seams. pipe rising above ground to place the unit at a comfortable
Surplus material around the outside can be peeled off later, viewing level. Thus a pipe of at least 7 ft is required. A
after the sealant has set. more effective ground can be had by adding salt to the soil.
Temporarily screw a pipe cap onto top end so as to
Installation and Operation protect the threads during hammering operation. Pound it
For maximum safety, you should, if feasible, connect one into the ground, remove the cap, and screw the fence -
side of the lab -generator power supply to Earth ground. If charger assembly onto the end. Connect the fence and bat-
not, then be sure to provide a return path for the spark to tery to the unit.
one of the power -supply leads. Set the RATE control to get The neon lamp flashes with each pulse to assure you that
the desired rate, and the power -supply voltage to get the everything is working okay, except in absolute darkness,
desired output potential. If the output is not excessively loaded, since a few photons of light are necessary to prime the
the small in -circuit neon lamp flashes with each pulse. The neon. That apparent drawback, however, has the definite
auto lamp may glow dimly when the rate is set near its upper earmarks of an advantage because when it's pitch black the
limit, but otherwise it should never light during normal op- unit cannot call itself to the attention of an interloper.
eration. It does light brightly to warn you when the power To test the battery it is only necessary to momentarily
leads are reversed or if there is an internal short. reverse the battery leads and observe how brightly the pro-
If you need one pulse at a time, or bursts of pulses, con- tective lamp lights. Again, however, don't leave it connected
nect a pushbutton or momentary switch in series with one backward.
of the power-supply leads. If you are cautious in building and using this project it
If you have trouble getting lower output voltages, but not can serve a wide variety of uses and provide many hours of
higher, the spark-plug cable may have pulled loose. When service. Be careful and use common sense.

"On the contrary, I'm quite impressed that you can change channels with your toes."

66
 mounted already. Solder the tab of J1 that period of about 100 µs. If that waveform is
STUNGUN
corresponds to the tip (not the barrel) of an not present, the switching circuit is not
continued from page 33 inserted plug to the indicated pad. Then operating correctly. Remove power and
mount CI and D7. Last, solder a I -1/4 -inch check your wiring again. Do not debug
board is shown in "PC Service;" alter piece of I8 -gauge wire to the barrel pin of the circuit with u battery connected!
natively, a PC board can be purchased JI, and connect the opposite end of that Resistor R6 controls the rate at which
from the source mentioned in the Parts wire to the appropriate pad beneath SI, the UJT (Q3) discharges, and R3 controls
List. If you build the circuit on a per- the FIRE switch. the rate at which C2 charges. You can
fboard, follow our parts layout closely; experiment with the values of those com-
otherwise you may have problems with Preliminary check-out ponents if you are not satisfied with the
arcing. WARNING: While measuring volt- circuit's high -voltage output. R3 can vary
Due to the critical nature of the three ages and currents, keep your face, from 2.2 to 4.7K. You can also experi-
transformers, we are not providing details hands, and all metallic objects away ment with the value of C2. See Table 1.
on winding them. They are available from from the high -voltage end of the stun After the circuit is operating correctly,
the source mentioned in the Parts List. gun. If if you want to prod a compo- attach JI to the board with high-voltage
Referring to the parts -placement di- nent, use a non-conductive rod such as potting compound or RTV. And before
agram in Fig. 2, and the photos in Fig. 3 a plastic TV alignment tool. High volt- you mount the circuit in a case, make sure
and Fig. 4, mount all components except age behaves very differently than low there's no arcing on the PC board. If there
C2, TI, T2, and T3 on your board. Note voltage. Any material that retains is, you can stop it with a liberal applica-
that several components mount on the foil moisture can serve as a discharge path. tion of RTV, paraffin, or epoxy.
side of the PC board: Cl, D7, and JI. Do THAT INCLUDES WOOD! Also, nev-
not install those parts yet either. er work on or use the unit when your Conclusion
After all components (except those hands are wet. The stun gun's discharge is very im-
mentioned above) are installed, check Connect a voltmeter (set to a 1000 -volt pressive. The spark is highly visible and
your work very carefully, especially DC range) to ground and to thè output of each discharge produces a sharp, resound-
DI-D6, RI, and R3, because TI will be the D3-D6 diode bridge. Then power up ing crack. The circuit can teach you much
installed above them, and there will be no the circuit using either a freshly-charged about voltage -multiplying circuits and
chance to correct errors later. After you're battery or an external supply capable of power supply design. But don't ever for-
absolutely sure that they're installed cor- delivering 9.8 volts at one amp. If every- get that the stun gun is not a toy. It can
rectly, install T1 with the black mark on thing is working properly, you should cause much damage to both you and
the windings mounted toward C2. measure about 400 -volts DC at the output others. Never leave it lying around where
of the bridge when you press SI. children, pets, or anyone unfamiliar with
Foil -side components If you don't measure that voltage, con- how to use it can handle it. It's a good idea
One of J l's tabs shares a hole on the PC nect an oscilloscope to the collector of Ql to remove the battery before storing the
board with resistor R8, which should be or Q2. You should see a squarewave with a stun gun. Above all: be careful! R -E

ing is in order:
SOLID-STATE TESLA COIL Do not touch or make any adjustments while power is
continued from page 56 applied to the Solid-State Tesla Coil. Remember that
you'll be dealing with high voltages, so caution is the
fahnestock clips are mounted to the board on 1/2 -inch alumi- watchword.
num spacers, using #6-32 hardware. A 13/4 -inch length of With the power off, set the spark gap for a %a -inch gap and
#12 solid-copper wire is fitted in one end of a l3/4 -inch piece connect the tap clip to turn 15 or 16. Plug in the power cord
of dowel rod to produce the adjustable terminal of the spark and turn Si on. A loud electrical discharge should be heard,
gap. The other gap wire must be made from a #26 or smaller and a blue brush discharge should be seen at the top of the
wire for the gap to perform properly. pointed screw that's connected to L2.
Place the four dowel rods in the baseboard, position the 9 - Turn the power off and move the tap wire (that's connected
inch deck on top, and press down until all four dowel rods are to Ll) up or down one turn at a time until the greatest blue
even with the top of the circle. Connect the bottom of Ll, discharge is obtained at the top of L2. Form a 11/2 to a 2 -inch
using a short length of #12 wire, to the main grounding point vertical gap between the ground rod and the top of the coil to
(see Fig. 3). Also connect the bottom end of L2 to the same aid in tuning up the coil. When the Tesla coil is properly
point. adjusted, it should produce a 2 -inch arc between the top of L2
A separate vertical ground rod can be positioned on the and the ground terminal.
deck (see photos) for additional experimenting. The vertical The coil discharge is most dramatic in a darkened room,
ground was made from a 29 -inch length of 1/4 -inch threaded and you should be able to light a fluorescent lamp at a
rod, and covered with a section of aluminum tubing to give a distance of about two feet from the secondary coil. A clear
neat appearance. At the top, a binding post was mounted for incandescent lamp moved to within a few inches of the
versatility. That allows the ground rod to accept a number of secondary coil will produce a beautiful blue lightning array
different experimental items. from the lamp's filament to the outer edge of the glass
envelope. Neon lamps glow around the coil without wires.
Checking It Out Experimenting with the coil can be an almost endless adven-
Before we start this stage of construction, a word of warn- ture. But remember, always put safety first!

67
 The length of the display that can
PLASMA DISPLAY be operated will vary considerably.
AMILÌING PRUOUCIS continued from page 52 The kind of gas, the diameter of the
glass tubing, and stray capacitance
EML1 Electronic Coil Gun Launcher. Pro-
can greatly effect operation. It might
pels a projectile using a pulse of magnetic energy.
used if the display does not com- be necessary to experiment when en-
EML1 Plans (kit or indv. parts available) ....8800
pletely ignite or is weak. ergizing larger displays.
GRA1 Gravity Generator. Electrical Connect the high -voltage output
phenomena produces effect of anti -gravity. Great (the black HV lead) to the beginning Modulation effect
for science fair. of the display. CAUTION: Always Set SI to its AUDIO position and feed
GRA1 Plans (kit or indv. parts available) ...81000
route that lead away from any con- in a signal from the 8 ohm output of a
RUB4 RubylGlass Laser. Portable unit ductive object. The lead must be short radio or a stereo. Adjust the radio's
generates up to a 3000 watt pulse capable of and direct. volume for a display that seems to
piercing the hardest steel. Set R13 fully clockwise (longest track the intensity of the sound.
RUB4 Plans (kit or indv. parts available) ..82000 trace time). Set R12 fully coun-
LC7 CO2 Laser. 35 watts continuous burning terclockwise (minimum display). Set Special note
or etching wood, cut plastics, drill, heat treat. SI to its INTERNAL position. The output energy of this device
LC7 Plans (kit or indv. parts available) ....s2000 Connect the device to a polarized is 25 kHz at approximately 10,000
power outlet and adjust R12 for a full- volts. For safe operation, adequate
BTC3 Easy to Build Table Top Tesla Coil.
Produces 10-14" streamers.
length neon display. (It will take sev- insulation of the output lead is man-
eral trace periods to obtain the correct datory for safe operation. Silicon or
Z BTC3 Plans (kit or indv. parts available)

TCC7 Tesla Coil. Engineering designs on 3

.... s10o0
setting.) tenon insulation having a rating of
Adjust R13 for the desired speed of at least 25 kV is recommended.
systems presently being operated in museums.
$2500
the trace time. Note that a point on the Route the output lead so it isn't
1CC7 Plans
control will cause the system to shut near any conductive objects, and
100,000 Volt Stun Gun down. Maximum speed occurs right splices should be sealed in high volt-
after that point. age putty or silicon rubber. R -E
Allow the unit to cycle for about an
Construct your own high energy personal pro- hour. Remove power and check the
tection unit. temperature of power transistor Ql. It University Microfilms
Intimidating affect up to 20 feet away
Research into muscle building
International reproduces this
publication in microform:
STG2 Plans...8700 STG2K Kit & Plans...$4950
microfiche and 16mm or 35mm film.
Miniature FM Wireless Mike For information about this pub-
Construct a device that transmits sound to your FM lication or any of the more than
radio, over considerable distances (up to 3 miles). 13,000 titles we offer, complete
Become your neighborhood disc jockey and mail the coupon to: University
Monitor children/invalids Microfilms International, 300 N.
Build a security system Zeeb Road. Ann Arbor, MI 48106.
FMV1 Plans 8800
Call us toll-free for an immediate
FMV1K Kit & Plans $3450
response: 800-521-3044. Or call
Invisible Pain Field Generator collect in Michigan, Alaska and
Build a pocket-size device capable of warding off Hawaii: 313-761-4700.
aggressive dogs, other animals and intruders.
E Please send information about these titles:
Uses complex sonic
shock waves as an in-
trusion deterent
Experiment in acoustical
ultrasonics (1110{1 Name

Deter rodents and other garden pests Company/institution

UAG1 Plans ..s600 UAG1K Kit & Plans .. $4950

Simulated Laser for Beginners Address

City

l State
Phone
Zip

Construct a low cost 3 color simulated-laser I 1

device, variable pulsed or continuous light.

Visible high intensity up to 3000 mcd
Small spot is excellent for pointer or
shooting gallery. FIG. 7-THE COMPLETED DISPLAY
University
Optical experiments and alignment.
LHPM1K Kit, Lens, & Plans (3 Emitters) ...05450
should resemble this author's prototype.
Be sure that the globe base you select can
Microfilms
CALL 1-800-221-1705 to order.
support the size of plasma globe that you
intend to use.
International
VISA, M/C, check, M.O. in U.S. funds Include 10%
shipping. Catalog of 100s more $100
should only be warm to the touch. If it
INFORMATION UNLIMITED
Box 716, Dept. ER Amherst, NH 03031 (603)673-4730
is running hot, it may be necessary to
decrease the setting of R12.
BUY BONDS
CIRCLE 15 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD
 L J Thr

THOMAS A. NERV after" is a function of the tape getting controls: It edits in a way similar to
up to speed before the video is output. some professional editors. First, it re-
The recorder, on the other hand, must winds the source -VCR for a fixed
EXCITING HOME VIDEOS USUALLY RE - synchronize itself to the source. To amount of time and then switches the
quire heavy editing-leaving the accomplish that, most newer VCR to the play mode. At the appro-
deadly -dull stuff "on the cutting - VCR's-as well as camcorders-use priate time, while the source -VCR is
room floor." Unfortunately, the com- a feature known as preroll. playing, the controller starts the re-
mercial video -edit controllers needed cording VCR. The recording VCR
for pro -quality editing are usually Preroll uses up its preroll, comes up to speed,
priced beyond the budget of most vid- Preroll means that the recorder is and then switches to the record mode.
eo hobbyists, which means that most rewound a predetermined number of If all the timings are correct, the
videos usually end up looking like frames, put into the play mode, and source -VCR is feeding the selected
just another home movie-or worse. then shifted into record at the point edit frame at the precise instant that
But there is a low-cost alternative to where the recording is actually to the -recording VCR switches :to the
commercial video editing. It's our start.. When editing by dual -pause record mode.
video -edit controller; a relatively sim- control, the additive "true start" de- Overall editing accuracy is depen-
ple device that requires the use of only lays of the source and record ma- dent on the ability of the source- and
two VCR's, or a VCR and camcorder, chines usually result in several recording -VCR's to consistently re-
to edit video tapes electronically like seconds of missed video from the peat their operations in exactly the
a professional. source. same time periods. Since the record-
Home videos are usually edited by There is also a synchronization ing- VCR's preroll is designed by the
pausing the recording VCR at the problem associated with the dual - manufacturer to always start the re-
point where recording is to begin, and pause method of editing. Specifically, cording after a fixed time interval, it is
pausing the source (player) VCR at the recorder is being asked to syn- the source -VCR that's the main syn-
the point where the new video starts. chronize itself to two different chronizing problem.
Once satisfied with the edit points, sources: the video prior to the source -
both pause buttons are released simul- VCR's getting up to speed, and then Review to time
taneously to allow the playback and the video once speed is attained. That But we can make the source -VCR's
recording to start. complicates the recorder's operation, rewind timing more or less consistent
Although the procedure for and can result in video-breakup at the if we use the machine's review func-
"pause -editing" is theoretically cor- edit point. tion-rather than the rewind func-
rect, real life proves that theory and tion-to back up the tape. That is due
practice are not one and the same, Pro -quality editing to the fact that review is a capstan -
because machines-particularly On the other hand, our video-edit driven function that always operates
when dealing with precise timing- controller does not depend on pause at a predetermined multiple of the nor-
don't necessarily function the way we
would like them to. The variations in
the pause -timing characteristics of
VCR's and camcorders usually result
in several seconds of lost picture at the
edit. VIDEO -EDIT
Editing controller
But use our video-edit controller
and you will eliminate the lost
snatches of picture when editing.
CONTROLLER
That's because our controller allows
video editing by frames, rather than
by time periods.
To understand the operation of the
video -edit controller, it's necessary to
understand why several seconds of
video are lost when using the simulta-
neous -pause -release method of video-
tape editing.
When the source (player) VCR's Here's a low-cost device for
pause is released, the machine starts professional-quality video editing.
playing slightly after the point where
the tape is positioned. The "slightly
69
 held in the review mode during ICI's
IN OUT 8V timing period. At the end of the tim-
°-"n I6- IC5 r

9VDC S01 S3 7808 ing period, RYI is released, its con-

WALL J1 220µF RECORD ADJUST
ADAPTER 35V C14ONO C15- COURSE FINE
tacts open, and the VCR automat-
-1- ically switches from the review to the
R7410K R8
play mode. Also at the end of the
a 1 1 250K
timing period, ICI triggers timer IC2.
R2 R4 4 8 R5 R6 t 8
Timers IC2-1C4 operate in a sim-
IMEG 47018
R Vcc 10K e 200K > R V cc ilar manner as ICI, the major dif-
=
6
R3
TH
- , 10MEG 2
ICI 3
D2 6
2
TH
IC2
ference being that IC2 and IC3 have
R' C2 7°
TR
555
OUT

C5
1N914 TR
555
OUT 3
coarse and fine adjustments for
1K .001 DIS
GND
Vc
.001
7 DIS Vc tweaking the time -period. Also, RY2
* C6 + GND
Cl .C3 `
C4- can be driven either by IC2 or 1C3,

-14--
100µF^ 11 C7
.001 10µF^ 1
.01
1 T .01 depending on the requirements of the
D1
1N4001 OPTION A
recording -VCR. If the recorder is
RY1 6 RY2 6
0' SI started by opening its remote control,
c_
1N4001
RY2 is installed at the OPTION A
-
p 2
location. If the recorder is started by
O
14
SOURCETO
REMOTE REVIEW
/p 14
8
1

PL2
. TO RECORDER
CAMERA
closing its remote control, then RY2
REMOTE
is installed at the OPTION s location.
The editor's timing constants are a
S.E.G. ADJUST COURSE FINE function of both the type and the
R11 R12
speed of the VCR's. While the princi-
250K 100K ples can be applied to any combina-
tion of VCR's and speeds, the
R9 R10
tOK D410K 7 R
4
Vcc
8 R13 R14
100K
4 8 prototype assumes VHS machines op-
1oK R Vcc
6 TH D5 TH
erating at the SP speed. Should a dif-
= ferent combination be desired, it will
--)I C8
1N914 2

7
IC3
555
OUT
5
)1
1N914 2
7
TR
IC4
555
OUT
3

be necessary to adjust the timing

Vc 5
DIS DIS Vc
.001
1+ ONO
1 001 GND components for the selected speed.
^
CO C10 +
C12
1 13

T .01 1µF
. .
1
TOI Construction
RY2 6 OPTION B RY3 6
Before building anything, you
D3 D6 must make certain that your source -
' 2
1N4001
___-_ c
C--).--
1N4001
VCR is compatible with the control-
N
1

g
PL2
TO RECORDER
CAMERA
REMOTE
/o o

o
ig
1

, 1

dS2o'"GENERATOR^^
TO SPECIAL
EFFECTS
ler. Place a tape in the VCR and start
the play. After about 30 seconds, de-
press the pause button. Once the VCR
has come to a complete stop-as indi-
FIG. 1-THE VIDEO -EDIT CONTROLLER basically consists of four similar timer circuits. cated by a frozen frame on the
Both the OPTION A and OPTION B circuits for relay RY2 are built into the PC board. Simply plug screen-press and hold the review (or
the relay into the appropriate socket. dual -function review/rewind) button
for about five seconds and then re-
lease it. The VCR is compatible with
mal play speed. During review, the mote -control circuits, relay RY2 can the video -edit controller if it rewinds
tape is always backed up the same be installed at the locations labeled and then automatically enters the play
length per period of time; whereas, OPTION A, Or OPTION B-more on that state when the review button is re-
during rewind, the actual amount of later. leased. If releasing the button did not
tape backed up per unit of time de- The edit operation is started by cause the VCR to switch automat-
pends on how much tape is left on the closing switch SI, which causes a ically into the play mode, then it can't
supply reel. rapid drop to ground of the voltage be used with the controller.
In addition to the edit function, the across capacitor Cl. Cl 's discharge If the VCR passes the compatibility
controller also provides a switching causes a negative -going spike through test, you must make a review -switch
circuit for a special -effects generator, C2, which triggers timer ICI. The modification. Disconnect the VCR
such as you might use to cause a fade triggering of ICI causes RY1's con- from the powerline, open the VCR's
from, or to, black at the correct time. tacts to close, and they remain closed case, and locate the review switch's
during ICI timing period. The timing contacts. Use a VOM to verify that
How it works period is determined from the equa- you have selected the correct con-
The edit -controller, shown in Fig. tion: tacts. (In some VCR's the review
1, consists of four monostable timers.
time = 1.1(R4 x C3) switch has DPST contacts that are
Each timer has the capability to drive wired in parallel.) Solder a pair of
a relay, although only three relays are The source -VCR's remote -control thin, insulated, stranded wires (i.e.
used to interface to the controlled de- review jack is connected to RY1's con- 22 gauge) to the switch's contacts.
vices. To accommodate different re- tacts through PLI. The VCR will be Then route the wire to an accessible
blank portion of the VCR's rear ap- Complete the modification by sol-
PARTS LIST
ron. Carefully drill a hole in the apron dering the wire pair to the phone jack.
for a miniature phone jack that will Then, replace the VCR's cover. At All resistors 1/4-watt, 10%, unless
mate with PLI. if the cabinet is metal, that point, the VCR should he tested specified otherwise.
use two contacts of a 3 -circuit jack for normal operation. Check the mod- R1-1000 ohms
and change PLI to a 3 -circuit mini- ification for a short-circuit if the VCR R2-1 megohm
ature phone jack. (The plug's sleeve doesn't operate correctly. R3-10 megohms
connection-which is connected to The controller is assembled on a R4-470,000 ohms
the VCR's grounded cabinet-should PC board, for which a full-scale tem- R5, R9,R13-10,000 ohms
not he used.) plate is provided in PC service. R6-200,000 ohms
R7, R11-250,000 ohms, multiturn
potentiometer
R8, R12-10,000 ohm, multiturn po-
tentiometer
R10-47,000 ohms
-C7 -C13- R14-100,000 ohms
R&
-Rg- +-C6- - R14-
+-C12-
All capacitors rated 10 volts, un-
IC2 p3 IC4
--D5
less specified otherwise.

-{
RY2
A
RY 3
C1, C2, C5, C8 ,C11-0.001 µF, disc
R7
ElD2 D5
C3, C9-10 p.F, tantalum
-i-
-R5 - - R13- C4, C7, 010, C13-0.01 µF, disc
C6-100 µF, tantalum
-05- -C11-
C12 -1µF tantalum
C14, C15 0.1 µF
-C4- -C10-
-R4 - - R10- +-C9- C16-1000 µF, 35 volts, electolytic
p
R12E1
Semiconductors
ICI D1
RY1 n IC3
RY2 IC1-104-555, timer
IC5-7808, 8 -volt regulator
-t--
R11
-C15- D4
B

-C14- -R3- D1, D3, D6 -1N4002, silicon rectifier

-R9 D2, D4, D5 -1N914, rectifier
IC5 C2 Other components
C8 J1-male power-supply mini -jack to
C16
' -R2- -R1- match SO1
-C1- PL1, PL2, PL3-miniature phone
9VDC
J1 WALL plugs to match VCR equipment
ADAPTER
s
RY1, RY2, RY3-SPDT DIP relay,
PL1 PL2 PL3 S2 GORDOS 831A-4
9 S1-N.O. momentary switch
sol S2, S3-SPST switch
FIG. 2 -THE CONTROLLER'S PARTS LAYOUT. Select only one location for RY2; the other S01-power socket, part of 9 -volt
remains empty. wall adapter
Miscellaneous
Printed -circuit materials, WA1-9-
volt DC wall adapter, DIP sockets,
cabinet, wire, solder, etc.

The parts layout is shown in Fig. 2.

Notice that there are two locations-
labeled A and B for RY2. If you use
DIP sockets for mounting the relay,
you will then he able to switch RY2's
location easily to conform with the
remote -control circuit of the associ-
ated VCR.
Figure 3 shows how the prototype's
fully assembled PC board looks when
it's finished, and also how it is in-
stalled in its cabinet.

VCR modification
The controller requires a special,
though quite simple, modification to
the source -VCR's review switch. But
be aware that opening the case of the
VCR and installing the modification
FIG. 3 -THE PRINTED -CIRCUIT BOARD is mounted in the cabinet using spacers at each
mounting screw. Make certain that there is some kind of wire between the PC board's will void the warranty (if it is still in
ground trace and the metal cabinet. effect).
71
 Remote jack commercial, and then five minutes of was inserted and press the pause but-
The recording -VCR or camcorder program. The commercial is only ton. Then release the pause button
should have a camera -controlled re- needed so that you can easily recog- and time the playing time from the
mote jack. Also, for best results the nize a scene transition-from pro- source -tape's entry point until the
recorder should also perform a preroll gram to commercial and vice versa. source -tape's commercial appears.
operation prior to initiating the re- The other tape is the recording Using the equation given earlier,
cording action. That feature can often tape. It should be pre-recorded with calculate the combined resistance val-
be verified by the recorder's user's about five minutes of programming. ue of R7 and R8 (or R11 and R12) that
manual. Connect PL1 to the review jack that is needed to eliminate the pre -com-
The recording -VCR will run -rec- was added to the source -VCR. Con- mercial timing. Set the coarse adjust-
ord when the camera -controlled re- nect PL2 to the recording VCR's cam- ment to that value.
mote jack is switched by RY2's era -controlled remote jack. Repeat the procedure until the edit-
contacts. The location of RY2 is deter- Roll the source tape, locate the start ing controller correctly locates the
mined by the requirements of the re- of the commercial as closely as possi- edit point within about one-half sec-
mote jack. If recording is started by ble, and place the source recorder into ond. At that point, the procedure
opening a contact, RY2 should be in- the pause mode. should be repeated once more, using
stalled in the OPTION A location, which Then play the second tape in the the fine adjustment, until the edit
is controlled by IC2. If recording is recording VCR. Locate the end of the point is "on the nose."
started by closing a contact, RY2 recording, set the recorder to pause, That completes the calibration. A
should be installed in the OPTION B then activate the record function. similar method is used to calibrate the
location, which is controlled by IC3. Set the coarse adjustment associ- switch -in of a special -effects gener-
ated with RY2 (R7 or R11) to its ator via PL3.
Calibration smallest value and the fine adjustment Now you're ready to edit some vid-
The only items required for calibra- (R8 or R12) to the center of its adjust- eo tapes, and it may take a few tries to
tion are two prerecorded tapes. One is ment. Press Si. Each of the recorders become familiar with the system.
a source tape, which contains a clean will do its thing-controlled by the However, in no time at all, you'll be
transition of scenes. The tape can video -edit controller. getting rid of unwanted commercials,
easily be made by making an off-the - After the recording VCR runs for splicing together your favorite movie
air recording of about five minute of about 30 seconds, stop and rewind its scenes, or removing scenes that you
program up to a commercial, the tape to the point where the recording don't want your kids to see. R -E

STARTER KIT-The perfect in-

...THE REST OF US troduction to PanaVise! Two heads

(Standard and Wide Opening)
interchange with our "tilt, turn
and rotate" Standard Base. Versa-
tile quality for all your electronics
projects. Ask for Model #302.

CIRCUIT BOARD HOLDER-Tilt,

turn and rotate circuit boards to
the exact position you want, then
lock them into place with a single
control knob! Moves work in ver-
tical, horizontal or circular planes
(perfect for front/back examina-
tion). Spring -loaded arm holds
boards up to 12" wide. Ask for
Model #372.

PORTABLE PANAVISE WITH

EXTRA-WIDE OPENING HEAD-
The weighted base mount (5
Ibs.) means you can move this
PanaVise with ease! The Self -
Centering Extra-Wide Opening
Head (opens a full 9") and full
"tilt, turn and rotate" capabilities
make this a truly portable, ver-
satile addition to any workbench.
Ask for Model #334.

See your local electronics

supplier or contact: PA AVISE
Phone: (213) 595-7621 Fax: (213)595-9539
® PanaVise Products, Inc.
2850 E. 29th Street
Long Beach, CA 90806

CIRCLE 10 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD

72
 c RV i i N BASICS
This quick six -step approach can help you to isolate VCR failures.

BRIAN PHELPS

PEOPLE OFTEN HAVE QUESTIONS DEALING 2-Check microprocessor the clock signal, and the frequency.
with VCR problems. One of the most 3-Servos (cylinder and capstan) The data inputs and outputs. We're
frequent is: "How can I tell which 4-Luminance mostly concerned that there is activity
circuit in my VCR is causing the 5-Chrominance on those lines, and that the activity
symptoms I see on my TV or 6-Audio changes when different functions of
monitor?" This article will provide the VCR are selected, rather than how
some of the answers to that question, Visual inspection the actual signals look.
and also discuss some valuable ser- Looking for the obvious includes The reset pulse; it usually occurs
vicing tips. things such as foreign objects that between 0.5 and 1 second after B + is
One reason why it's sometimes so may be jammed inside the VCR. (You applied to the microprocessor. If the
difficult to isolate a VCR failure is would be surprised what children reset pulse is absent, the micro-
that almost any circuit can cause might manage to stick inside an ap- processor may start its routine at any
many different problems, and, quite pliance). The tracking control may be point, yielding some strange symp-
often, the symptoms are misleading. out of the center-detent position, or toms-if anything at all.
Sometimes something unusual, such the consumer may have locked -up
as a shorted switching transistor or a their VCR in a program mode. At any Servos
capstan- or cylinder-servo problem, rate, failure to check for the obvious When troubleshooting servos, it is
may confuse a servicer into replacing problems first can send you on a wild often helpful to use a block diagram
a good component. Therefore, to goose chase. (see Fig. 1). Before you start, however,
avoid any unnecessary procedures, you must decide which servo or ser-
some kind of step-by-step process is Microprocessor analysis vos you should be looking at.
required. There are some very basic things to You can determine if the problem is
check that concern the micro- caused from the capstan or the cylin-
A step-by-step method processor. der servos by listening to the audio.
One way to isolate problems is by The B + supply for DC level, rip- The audio quality is dependent upon
checking out the unit in the following ple, and any high -frequency glitches. the rate at which the tape is being
order: The clock input for any DC voltage pulled by the capstan across the audio
1-Visual inspection that should be there, the amplitude of head. If the speed is incorrect, the
73
 CAPSTAN
MOTOR
PHASE SPEED
OC MOTOR
(FINE: (COARSE)
DRIVER
CONTROL CONTROL

DC

30Hz AUTO
SPEED
DETECTOR
i CONTROL
353MHz. DIGITAL HEAD
r-DIVIDEF
30Hz AMPS 30Hz
77,
SHAPER

DRUM
PHASE SPEED MOTOF
MOTOR
(FINE) (COARSE)
DRIVE
CONTROL CONTRO_
3)Hz
-7

PULSE
GENERATOR
SHAPER
C
iwrrrrrrrr-/ 30Hz
PULSE
GENERATOR
TRACKING
CONTROL

FIG. 1-THE BLOCK DIAGRAM of tie servo circuits inside a VC q. A block diagram is often
very helpful in troubleshooting because it shows you how the different sections of a
circuit are interconnected.

a C e

FIG. 2-THE PULSE -WIDTH modulator

signal is shown in (a). The capstan fre-
quency generator, shown in (b), has a fre-
quency that changes as the tape speed
changes. The cylinder pulse generator (c)
should have a constant frequency, the
control track logic (d) should have a 're-
quency of 29.97 Hz, and the 30-Hz re-er-
ence pulse (e) should have an extremely
steady frequency of 29.97 Hz.
b d

audio will sound distorted. But, if the When analyzing the servo circuits, lator signal (PWM), the capstan fre-
audio sounds good, you should look there are some key signals to check. quency-generator signal (FG), the
at the cylinder servo circuitry. Those include the pulse -width modu- cylinder pulse -generator signal (PG),
 VIDEO
HEADS
ROTARY
TRANSFORMER t PRE-
AMP
NB
HEAD
3MHz
FM LUMINANCE
WMI-
i..rrrr SWITCH
NANCE r'- RECOVERED
LUMINANCE

n)ü3 3MHz DROPOUT

.1
f PRE-
AMP
HI-PASS
FILTER
COMPEN.
(DOC)
FM
DET
DE-
EMPHAS.
AMP

SPINNING
YC
DISC
30Hz MIX
SERVO
PULSES

l RECOVERED
CHROMA

600kHz
CHROMA CHROMA

600kHz AUTOMATIC 3.58MHz

FREQ. COMB COLOR RF
LO -PASS COLOR BANDPASS
CONV. FILTER KILLER OUT
FILTER CONTROL FILTER RF
MODULATOR

4.2MHz
3.58 CHROMA
AUTOMATIC
COLOR
COLOR BURST
KILLER
CONTROL GATE
DET.
DET.
3.58MHz PHASE 3.58MHz
CRYSTAL

-1 DET.

PHASE CORRECTION
VXO

CONVERSIO
SIGNAL
AUTOMATIC CONTROL
COMPOSITE
VIDEO
OUT

MIX

JITTER CORRECTION
629kHz (VHS) 688kHz (BETA)

SYNC PHASE
PLL
SEP. SHIFTER 30Hz
I SERVO
PULSES

COMPOSITE VIDEO (WITH JITTER)

FIG. 3-THIS BLOCK DIAGRAM shows the video-processing circuitry inside a VCR. The
circuitry inside all VCR's is similar.

the control -track logic pulse (CTL), 3).Sencore's VC63 VCR test accesso- place the video heads-a procedure
and the 30 -Hz reference signal. Fig- ry provides a signal to inject into the that is costly and time-consuming.
ure 2 shows how those signals should video preamps. (You should use equal
look for proper servo operation. levels for both preamp inputs and if Chrominance
one of the inputs needs a greater sig- Defects in the chrominance and audio
Luminance circuitry nal level, that's the path to follow.) circuits can be detected by looking at
The luminance circuits typically That simple procedure tells you the color or listening to the audio.
produce failures ranging from noisy whether or not the preamps were re- Quick checks for the chrominance in-
video to a lack of video. However, ceiving a good signal from the video clude testing the 3.58 -MHz oscillator,
failures such as those can also be heads. If everything checks out after the 4.2 -MHz conversion signal, the 30 -
caused by anything from the video - the signal is injected, that would Hz and 15 -kHz reference signals, and
head circuitry to the RF modulator. probably indicate a bad video head. the 629 -kHz VHS color subcarrier.
A good approach to troubleshoot- If, after injecting a signal into the If you troubleshoot a VCR following
ing luminance circuits is to inject a preamps, there is still a problem, the the procedures in the correct order, you
signal that would be present at various chances are good that the video heads can quickly and accurately isolate de-
test points if the VCR were operating are all right. For example, suppose fective stages in the circuitry. After a
properly. That way you can determine that one of the playback/record couple of trial runs on known -good
which circuits are and aren't working switching transistors has a short. That VCR's, you should be able to tackle the
by checking every point where the would put 10 ohms between the play- "Tough Dog" problems that you may
signal is supposed to appear. back path for one of the heads and come across. Just be sure that you learn
One example of troubleshooting by ground. The resulting picture on the any new techniques and procedures on a
using signal injection is substituting a monitor is similar to that of a bad known good unit, so that you are not led
known good signal in place of the one video head, and many repairmen astray by erroneous readings and
coming from the video heads (see Fig. would prematurely clean and/or re- strange results. R -E

75
 Experiment. . . Build Projects. . . Generate New Ideas
with TAB BOOKS
STUDY GUIDES REFERENCES
The CET Exam Book -2nd Ed. Encyclopedia of Electronic
by R. Crow and D. Glass Circuits-Vol. 2 by R. Graf. 700+ cir-
The CET Study Guide -2nd Ed. cuits you'll use again and again! 744 pp.,
by S. Wilson. Pass the Associate and 728 illus. #3138P, $29.95
Journeyman Exams with Flying Colors with BENCHTOp
The Benchtop Electronics
This 2 -Book Set (#5300C) for $33.90 (regu- ELECTRO
Reference Manual by V.F.C. Veley.
larly $45.90)
MANUAL ES N Instant access to the information you need
Ne.l..< on any topic! 282 illus. #2785H, $39.95
General Radiotelephone Operator's
License Study Guide -2nd Ed. International Encyclopedia of
by T. LeBlanc, NX7P. Get the edge you Integrated Circuits by S. Gibilisco. The
need to pass this important test! 259 pp., ultimate resource to foreign and domestic
125 illus. #3118H, $23.95 ICs! 1088 pp., 4000 illus. #3100H, $59.95
(Regularly $75.00)

REPAIR GUIDES DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Practical Transformer Design Handbook
11111111111111111111111118mem -2nd Ed. by E. Lowdon. Build power, impedance,
VCRs .:all1111111111111111
PRACTICAL.
and current transformers for all your needs!
400 pp., 288 illus. #3212H, $34.95
PERSO'
COMPUï TRANSFORMER
DESIGN Build Your Own 80386 IBM° Compatible
HANDBOOK and Save a Bundle by A. Pilgrim. Get more power
at a. down-to-earth price! 232 pp., 84 illus. #3131H,
$24.95
How to Draw Schematics and Design
Circuit Boards with Your IBM PC°
Maintaining and Repairing VCR's by S. Sokolowski. Perform computer -aided engineering
by R. Goodman. A must -have guide for VCR owners for a fraction of the cost! 187 pp., 113 illus. #3034H,
and professional service technicians. 352 pp., 370 illus. $19.95
#31031-I, $27.95
Build Your Own Universal Computer Interface
Troubleshooting and Repairing by B. Chubb. Use your computer to control almost any-
the New Personal Computers thing! 285 pp., 224 illus. #3122H, $27.95
by A. Margolis. Save time ...earn hundreds of dol- The Master Handbook of IC Circuits
lars! 416 pp., 350 illus. #2809H, $27.95
-2nd Ed. by D. Horn. Build over 950 different cir-
Troubleshooting and Repairing cuits using 200+ popular ICs! 544 pp., 960 illus.
Compact Disc Players #3185H, $34.95
by H.L. Davidson. A money -making guide for techni- 600 Low-Cost Electronic Circuits
cians and money -saving guide for serious audiophiles! by D.M. Gauthier. Build these fascinating electronic cir-
368 pp., 428 illus. #3107H, $26.95 cuits for under $25 each! 350 pp. Illustrated. #3219H,
$27.95

PROJECTS TO ORDER, CALL TOLL FREE:

Customize Your Phone:

1-800-822-8158
(In PA and AK call direct 1-717-794-2191)
15 Electronics Projects
by S. Sokolowski. Inexpensive practical and or mail coupon to: TAB BOOKS Inc.,
fun projects. 176 pp., 125 illus. #3054H, Blue Ridge Summit, PA 17294-0840
$19.95
Please send me the book(s) below:
The Laser Cookbook by G. McComb. 88
has r°"Pro`e' No. Price No __price
inexpensive, fun -filled and useful projects!
401 pp., 361 illus. #3090H, $25.95 No Price No Price
CMOS Customize Your Home Entertainment System
TECHNOLOGY Li Check or money order enclosed made payable to TAB
by S. Sokolowski. Build audio and video enhancements BOOKS, Inc. In PA, NY, and ME add applicable sales
with 22 inexpensive projects! 288 pp., 100 illus. tax. (In Canada add $5.00 shipping and handling.)
#3234H, $24.95 Charge my: VISA MasterCard
American Express
50 CMOS IC Projects by D.T. Horn. Build these
practical projects fast in your workshop! 240 pp., 226 Acct. No Exp.
illus. #2995H, $25.95
Signature
Experiments in CMOS Technology by D. Prochnow and
Name
D.J. Branning. Experiment with the most advanced CMOS chips
8088 available! 304 pp., 249 illus. #3062H, $24.95 Address
Pt liixfi.
Experiments with EPROMS by D. Prochnow. 15 hands-on City
projects to develop your own unique EPROM applications! 240 pp.,
218 illus. #2962H, $24.95 State/Zip
Prices subject to change.
The 8088 Project Book Grossblatt. Design and construct an 8088
by R.
computer and 17 hardware and software enhancements! 264 pp., 125 illus. SATISFACTION GUARANTEED-If you are
#3171H, $27.95 not satisfied, return the books for a complete refund.

76
L REA9
 Th\
L J

POWERLINE
MONITOR
UNTIL RECENTLY WE SAFELY connects to solder pads on the
could give little thought to the PC board labeled A, a, and c.
quality of the AC power com- The power monitor is a sim-
ing out of our wall outlets. But ple, straightforward device
the world is changing, and so using an Intersil ICM71076
are the power requirements of digital voltmeter (IC2), which
electronic equipment. Noisy, reads 0-1.999 volts DC. For
fluctuating, line power may AC -voltage measurements,
not bother lamps, irons, or the applied voltage is simply
other appliances, but dirty rectified to DC before being
power can raise havoc with fed to the digital voltmeter. For
sensitive electronic devices noise readings, a high-pass fil-
such as personal computers. If ter and peak -reading rectifier
you have ever lost data or circuit are substituted for the
"trashed" a program running conventional AC rectifier. A
on your computer, you may regulated power supply, IC1,
have been a victim of a power provides the reference voltage
brownout or excessive line needed by IC2.
noise, without realizing it. The basic digital -voltmeter
That could cause you to waste circuit is built around IC1 and
time troubleshooting the unit IC2. DC inputs from the volts -
for an intermittent problem, or noise -measuring circuits
when all that was wrong was a appear across resistor R8 and
power glitch. capacitor C9. Those compo-
nents attenuate and filter the
Power monitors signal from the volts- and
A power monitor lets you noise -measuring circuitry.
keep an eye on the condition of The signal is then applied to
your AC power. At a glance IC2, pin 31, via resistor Rll
you can read the line voltage and is measured. (Resistor R1l
and be aware of brownouts and and capacitor C10 provide
surges that might damage your Solve those power problems overload protection for IC2.)
equipment. It even lets you with this power monitor! The applied voltage is convert-
monitor the relative noise level ed by IC2 into driving signals
on the line; a feature that helps for displays DSP1 and DSP2.
you spot high -noise condi- GARY McCLELLAN A key part of the digital
tions that cause equipment voltmeter is a reference volt-
problems. Also, as we'll show age source from IC1. It deter-
later, a power monitor's noise -level inch LED's displays make it easy to mines the overall accuracy of the unit
feature lets you test line filters quickly read the line voltage and relative noise because IC2 makes measurements by
and easily. levels at a glance. comparing a known reference voltage
Although a professional -grade with the unknown input. In this in-
power monitor having those features How it works stance the reference voltage is
is usually very clostly, this month The schematic of the circuit is provided by adjustable voltage reg-
we'll show you a hobbyist -grade ver- shown in Fig. 1. The dashed lines ulator IC1, a low-cost adjustable volt-
sion of the device that can be built for represent the edges of a printed -cir- age regulator. The regulated output
as little as $45. Even so, if precision cuit board. The lettered terminals on voltage of 1 volt appears at the wiper
components are used it can read the the dashed lines correspond to lettered of potentiometer R6 and is applied to
powerline voltage down to tenths of a solder pads on the PC -board to which IC2 pin 36. Because ICI will not reg-
volt with an accuracy that exceeds the external components are con- ulate the output voltage if too little
±0.5%. Also, relatively large 0.56- nected. For example, switch Sl -b current is drawn, resistor R4 ensures
77
 OFF PC-BOARD I ' ON PC -BOARD

IN 'We 4.1Ve 16
D1 R2 R3 40 A
4 15
1N4004 221K 221K R9 B
C2
100K 3 3
470pF C
2 2
IN D
8 COM
Cl D3 E
6 18
470pF R1 1N4148 F

>100K D2 I 100pF
17
G
1N4148 34 4
DP1
12 11 DSP1
C6 A
11 10
L__0.11( 33 B
10 8
R5 C
9 6
ICI -123V 3.32K D
IC2
LM317L O
C71 14 5
E
COM
0.047 13 12
F
R6 28 ICM7107
C 25 7
1K : G
R10
CAL' 470K if27 DP

F14 0.22 C
R7 36 23 16
A
47011
15K1 16 15
B
24 3 COM 14
35 C
15 2
D
18
32

-0 VOLTS 17 18 DSP2
R11

NOISE
St -a IM
31
22
19
17

15
G

B COM
1
0.01
T3 C
30 20

26 21

D4
áAC 1N4002 -4.7V C
N 410V.
R13
D5
22061
F1 1N4002
C3 O
0.25A
^0 cm
1C13
220µF C>
St -b O
A

PL1 + 10V
22088

3 D6 C12 C14
4)

1N4002- 220µF 10µF

OFF PC -BOARD
, C4 C11
10V 10V

-0.01 220µF D7 r 09
AC 10V 1N4002 -'1N4732
_
)i+ v:. R12
47011
-04.AS'8
D8
1N4002

FIG.1-THE POWER MONITOR INDICATES either the applied line voltage or the powerline
noise. The noise level is determined by passing the line voltage through high-pass filter
C1/R1/C2.

regulation by providing a minimum resistor. That is necessary because ue of the noise signal.
output current drain for IC1; the cur- small precision resistors are usually Understand that the noise readings
rent loading caused by R4 ensures rated at only 250 volts DC, which is are relative because they are deter-
that IC1 will provide a constant 1.23 - marginal for use in this application. mined by the duration, waveshape,
volt output. and peak value of the noise pulses. In
The AC-voltage circuit is simple Noise measurements normal use, that limitation should not
and easy to understand. Line voltage The noise -measuring circuit con- cause problems for the user.
appearing across the IN terminals on sists of a high-pass filter and a volt-
the PC board is rectified by diode Dl. age -doubler rectifier circuit. Capaci- The power supply
The pulsating DC output from D1 is tors Cl and C2, and resistor R1, filter Both regulated and unregulated
scaled down to the 1.2 -volt range by out the 60 -Hz hum component, leav- voltages are used. Diode D4 and ca-
resistors R2, R3, and R8. Capacitor ing only line noises to be measured. -
pacitor C13 provide 4.7 volts for the
C9 filters the pulsating DC so it can be Diodes D2 and D3 rectify noise com- analog circuitry inside IC2. Diodes
measured. For improved safety and ponents into DC values. The output D5 and D8 provide pulsating DC for
reliability, two separate resistors, R2 from D3 drives resistor R8 and powering LED displays DSP1 and
and R3, are used instead of a single charges capacitor C9 to the peak val - DSP2. Using pulsating DC for the
78
 NOISE VOLTS
PARTS LIST
S1 -b

-i
J
C12 C13 All resistors 1/4 -watt, 5%, carbon
D5*D8
II

II
D4
C141 .J film unless otherwise noted.
ICI R1-100,000 ohms
D7
R2, R3-221,000 ohms, 1/8 -watt, 1%
D9 Cc1'3U' C4-
v R I9
15; "-C3-
metal film
R6 R4 R7
C11
R4,R12-470 ohms
813
I i R5-3300 ohms, 1/8 -watt, 1% metal
DSP1
C9!
film
R 4IJ C6
R6 -1000 -ohm cermet trimmer po-
-R11- tentiometer (Digi-Key OFA13)
IC2
C1D-R8- Si R7-15,000 ohms, 1/s-watt, 1% metal
-R10- film
-C8- -C7-
R8-10,000 ohms, 1/2-watt, 1% metal
DSP2
film
R9-100,000 ohms
R10-470,000 ohms
R11-1 megohm
P3-
- P2- R13, R14-220 ohms
-C1- Capacitors
03 -C2- Cl, C2-470 pF, 1000 volts, ceramic
N disc
02
vDtTs C3, C4, C10-0.01 µF, 50 volts, ce-
O NOISE PLI
ramic disc
L
S1 _aj C5-100 pF, 500 volts, ceramic disc
C6-0.1 µF, 50 volts, polyester film
FIG. 2-USE A SOCKET FOR 1C2, E:nd do not install the IC itself until all other PC -board C7-.047 µF, 50 volts, polyester film
components are installed. C8-0.22 µF, 50 volts, polyester film
C9, C14-10 µF, 16 volts, radial
tantalum
C11 -C13-220 µF, 10 volts, radial
electrolytic
Semiconductors
IC1-LM317L, voltage regulator
IC2-ICM7107CPL, AID converter
DSP1, DSP2-Dual 0.5 -inch com-
mon-anode LED display (Digi-Key
P337ND or equivalent)
D1 -1N4004 rectifier diode
D2, D3-1N4148 switching diode
D4-D8-1 N4002 rectifier diode
D9 -1N4732 Zener diode
Other components
F1-Fuse, 1/4 ampere
PL1-Linecord plug
S1-3P3P rotary switch, see text
T1-Filament transformer: 6.3 VCT,
600 mA, Stancor P-6465 or equiv-
alent part
Miscellaneous: Cabinet, printed -cir-
cuit materials, IC socket, hardware,
wire, solder, etc.

buy in small quantities from local

sources, but several Radio -Elec-
tronics advertisers do stock them. In
a pinch, you can substitute the nearest
FIG. 3-FOLD THE CAPACITORS =LAT AGAINST THE BOARD to ensure clearance be- value 1/4-watt carbon -film resistors,
tween the board and the cabinet To prevent strain on the leads, bend them before but then the unit's precision will suf-
soldering. fer. The polyester capacitors are wide-
ly available from many sources, but
displays rather than using a steady DC Parts the electrolytic capacitors may prove
voltage lowers IC2's power dissipa- A few parts that might prove diffi- difficult to get. You may prefer to use
tion. Finally, a regulated + 4..7 -volt cult to get are the precision resistors 220-µF, 16 -volt units and mount them
source for IC2 is provided via Zener and capacitors, and the plastic case. on the foil side of the board where
diode D9. Precision resistors tend to be tough to there is more room. And finally, the
79
 plastic case is a product from LMB/ error, check the power -supply volt-
Heeger, Inc. Their products are wide- ages and the reference voltage at IC2
ly available from distributors, so ask pin 36. If the voltages are good, either
your local dealer if it can be special - IC2 is bad or installed wrong. Lastly,
ordered. Otherwise, you can sub- if displays continually show 000,
stitute any kind of plastic case and check the position of the knob on S1's
plastic mounting hardware. shaft, it is probably wrong.

Construction Operation
The circuit should be assembled on The power monitor is easy to set up
a printed -circuit board. The template and use. Simply insert a screw in the
is provided in PC Service. wall where you want it, then hang the
For ease -of-assembly, using Figs. 2 project on the screw. Connect the plug
and 3 as a guide, mount the PC - and you are ready to monitor power-
board's components in the following line conditions.
order: First, the socket for IC2, then So what line voltage limits and
all other semiconductors. (Do not in- noise levels are acceptable? As far as
sert IC2 into its socket until the entire voltage is concerned, all equipment
board is stuffed.) Next, all resistors will work on voltages from 110-125
and jumper wires; then the capacitors. VAC with no problems. But as you go
To ensure clearance between the beyond those limits, your chances of
FIG. 4-VOLTS-NOISE SWITCH S1 is
board and the cabinet's front panel, mounted on the foil side of the PC -board. problems increase tremendously.
install the electrolytic capacitors and Its connections are tack -soldered to the Understand that typically most ap-
the larger Mylar/polyester types so appropriate solder pads. pliances are erratic at 100-105 volts
they lie flat on the board. and run hot at 130-135 volts. As for
Finally, install the LED displays. cord, fuseholder, and transformer to noise levels, the values are highly
Position the displays so that their dec- the board. Double check your work to variable.
imal points (dots) are at the bottom. make sure that the green secondary Generally up to a few volts of noise
As shown in Fig. 4, switch S1 is wires from T1 go to the board's AC will cause no problems, but if the
installed on the foil side of the board solder pads and ground terminals, noise level exceeds 20 volts peak,
and its terminals are connected by while the AC linecord go to the IN which will cause the display to blank,
short lengths of insulated wire that are terminals. you will probably have operating
tack -soldered to the foils. Although Before closing the case, install the problems. (Exactly what happens due
Si can be any kind of DPDT switch, a fuse and cut a piece of scrap plastic so to an incorrect line voltage or high
3P3P rotary switch is recommended that it fits over the PC -board, between line noise depends upon the equip-
because they are inexpensive and gen- the switch and the sides of the cab- ment you are using.)
erally available. (One section of the inet. The material provides an extra You should be aware that the noise
switch is not used.) margin of safety by insulating the cir- circuitry will also respond to carrier-
cuit from any screw or nail passing current devices such as wireless inter-
The cabinet through the back of the case. Close up corns and X10 -type home -control sys-
Finally, install the PC board and its the case and you are done! tems or other communication devices
external components in a plastic cab- such as line carrier modems or wire-
inet. First, drill all the necessary holes Calibration less intercoms. However, the signals
in the front of the cabinet and smooth Plug the power monitor into an AC from those devices should not bother
the edges of the display cutout with a outlet and note that the display lights other equipment, despite the high
file. Then use press -on letters to label up and indicates some value. If the noise readings you get.
the project. Mark a location in the display doesn't light, quickly turn off As mentioned earlier, the power
center of the rear case half and drill a the power and check for a wiring er- monitor is useful in testing noise fil-
1/4 -inch hole that will be use for a ror, or a solder bridge. ters. The procedure is simple; here's
hanger bracket. For best calibration accuracy you how to do it. Plug the power monitor
To install the parts in the case, in- will need a high-quality digital multi - into a duplex outlet; then plug a noisy
stall threaded spacers on the compo- meter. Set the multimeter to the 200 - device such as a shop vacuum into the
nent side of the board and then push volt AC range and connect it to the same outlet. Turn on the vacuum and
the board into the case and secure it same AC outlet to which the power note the noise level's meter reading.
with nylon screws. Turn S1 fully monitor is connected. Insert a screw- Disconnect the power monitor and
counter clockwise and install the driver through the case hole that al- connect the noise filter between the
knob on its shaft so it's pointing to lows access to CAL control R6 and outlet and the power monitor. If you
VOLTS. Then install the fuseholder and adjust R6 until both meters read the see the same noise -level reading on
transformer T1 adjacent to the PC- same value. the meter as you did before you con-
board with nylon screws. Push the nected the noise filter, then some-
linecord through a hole in the bottom Troubleshooting thing's wrong with your noise filter.
of the case and knot it inside the case If the power monitor doesn't work The power monitor's reading will be
for extra security. at all, or is inaccurate, and the prob- lower if the noise filter is working
Finish the project by wiring the lem doesn't appear to be a wiring properly. R -E
 SPEECH SYNTHESIZER
Make your computer truly user-friendly: Teach it how to talk!

DAVID A. WARD

Computerized voice synthesizers are turning up every- parallel printer port. A simple BASIC program then uses
where. Perhaps you've heard one at the grocery store LPRINT statements to create speech output. A number of
check-out stand, in an automobile, or from an educational terms relevant to electronics are included: ampere, kilo,
toy. Other uses include text -to -speech converters for the milli, volt, circuit, connect, farad, hertz, meg, mega,
visually impaired, talking clocks, calculators, radar detec- micro, nano, ohms, pico, as well as letters of the alphabet,
tors, chess and other games, blood-sugar and pressure - numbers, and numerous others. The project can be built
monitoring devices, and automotive test equipment. for about $75.
It's a lot of fun experimenting with voice synthesizers;
in fact, the author has built and experimented with four Speech systems
different voice synthesizer IC's, and has listened to at least Most speech synthesis systems operate in one of two
ten different synthesizers in all. ways: the stored -speech method or the allophone method.
So that you can share in the fun too, we'll present theory The allophone method uses allophones, little chunks of
and construction details of a stored-word speech system sound that can be combined to form words. The stored-
that you can connect to any personal computer having a word system stores entire words and phrases.
Each system has advantages and disadvantages. Al-
lophone synthesis can offer an unlimited vocabulary and
2 8
DO DO yet require very little memory. However, allophone speech
3 9
Dl D1 synthesis is usually artificial sounding, monotone, and
4 10
02 D2 difficult for the untrained ear to understand. Probably the
best application for allophone synthesis is in converting
5 11
D3 D3
6 12
04 D4 text to speech. Text -to-speech conversion can be a great
7 13
PC D5 05 DIGITALKER aid for the visually impaired, allowing them to operate
8 14
D6 D6 word processors and other computer programs.
9
D7
15
07 By contrast, a stored -word synthesizer can offer excel-
17
STROBE
1

WR lent speech quality with intonation or feeling. However, a

BUSY
11 B
INT stored -word system requires tremendous amounts of
22
GROUND
18
GND memory for just a few minutes of speech. Typically, that
18
cs limits a stored-word system to a vocabulary of several
16
CMS dozen words. The best application for a stored -word syn-
thesizer is one that requires the clearest possible speech
FIG. 1-THE PARALLEL PRINTER PORT of any personal comput- and a limited vocabulary, such as in an automobile, or a
er can drive the Digitalker. supermarket check-out stand. A stored -word synthesizer
81
COmONMeto(OnCOmO,-NCJ
W m m m m M m m m m m 0 00 0 V
Cf)
N(OnComOr-NMa(nCOnCC1mO-NM
000000 NNNNV N Lo(OnCOmO
N N NN NM a
M
t t
W C)
a)
ß 3
m ó E

Sa
w

°~~Z _
C"\-,
w O m
f w>OíiU
OwJ CU '=OU OY ZZZ
C7 :

O
rnEDW
W:

CCW=Un
oWnn-

OU ZmoO0oa3nnZa
0H~ L.J
r =aWwaZaUUa

a. JOOCCOCCCCnnunnnnnnn U>N m
Ó

d C
_
d > ny
V tn(OnC6mO
v v v v a v to
NMeto(OnCOmO
tñ (n to to 0 tn (n tn (O
NM V to(OnCOmOn N NMeto(OnCC)m0
n n n n n nn n
(ó (O (o (o (D (o (o (O (o ao aó
NMct(n(On
Co 0o Co co co Co iö
ÿ
r
>.
. . . . .
.

r-.
X L_

nCCr
c7)
C)
y >.
`o C Y C
1- 3 O v,
3
0 : : :
Wwo
J 0
r0 ó ó
:[C rnw o 3"8 3 a0
°aHH= HO ZLLaHoww JLucl . .

aOwui
. . .

F-=- Urna a . v,L_ o

ácápw¢wÓ¢wwwÓUwwÓÓwwvÓÓQwwOÓÓÓÓ=zwwoQ
LLLN..LLLLLLLLLLLLLL(JC.7C.7====SZzJJJ2222ZZZZZZZZOOOOOn. em
OC
v
m
m

30 a) c
N(6 d
CUÑ
(9
OrNM7(o(OmOrNMetn(OnCDmON N Ne(o(OnCOmO
N N N N N N N N M
NMtto(OnComO NM
M M M M M M M M aeee
C7
C7
co
-0_ (31-j o
. . .
. . . . .
(
. . . . . .
. . .

0)
t a)

*m_ " 0r
c",33

_ }
03 =om 2E-
`(n
w
Uz :w w w . rrrU
.-.,-
w
Q
.

ZO
U21-
.

a[Mr_
.

a--->
Wm Wc Hzwp
Z zwH :wÚZ
OC7omw- w- : Ú
w wu) w
HHHHW
00000 CC}
WM
: :

0
w

m
9-17,5 f-
m

móógJJrná)Q»ÓÓÓÓÓCáwwJ05E1--ZZZZM
Óá0000ZZZo>xQQ z3 ó: a
a a a a a a a a a m m mU U U U U U U U U U U 0 0 0 o O O O w w w w w w w w w w ww LL LL
1-e
ó
z(n z
r
-c

(OnCCImO'-NM V to(OnCbmO-NMeU')(pnCOmOrNMe Ln(On COmO,-NMC(o(OnOmOrNM

m m m m 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 N N N N N N N N N N M M MM M M Ve M(`') M Me V

. . . .
w
=Z . .

W
HO
.

H m
ZW
:
:

w W Ow } H
F-rnU)H
LL LL
wYwwJOOwmu_WW-JZIZZ
LL
QwUaZZw 02ZO Lilo
w HO
óJJJ200ZZ00000áaaaaaaoa[[crnrnrnrnrnrnrnóHHHO
ComO-NM
7e V Ln(OnComOrNMRU)(OnComO-N('Metn(OncvmOrN(+)
n nn n n n nn nn O
V (()(OnCCmO-NMCto
mmmmmm
tn (n to to to to to to tn (n (O (O (D (O (O (O (O (O (O (O CO CO CO CCl CCl CD CO Cp CO
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

wwwUUWW
W UUUZZ
wZZZWW
Zw
w ZO J
:ÚwH=Nrnrnrn
W WW
cn cn
rn rn rn co
J_ _J

W
ÚgwCwQZQÓH3JOJZ QQw
O OC W
CC
LL
wm w
02ZHaaw00000(OÑW200aw000wWJOoaOCCCCCCa20 O
OocrnH» X}NaaaaUUUvaoNvao-MUUUUO00OWWLLLLLLC7C7C7C7C7222SZZ
O -NM V tn(OnCOmO--NM V(n(OnComO.-NM V to(OnCC)mOrNM
M M M M M V 7e V
N N N N N N N N N N M M M V(n(OnComO-NM to(On
V V V 7 . . . . .
C')
. . .
C)
. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CC
Z .

0 . . . . . . . . .

OZ
J ZwwWZZHWw} H}}WaZ:::::::: Ui

rn~WOW j=wZww_WHj=wwLLHj=WZÓóZ::::::'
=0` Z =O>XwC'3ZwJ 2OriXwC3Z2OLLXwC7Z0=Jw . . . . . . . . . .
:

.
H
0
H50i-HLLLL(nU)wZHwHLLLLrn(nWZHHLLLLrn(nWZ2H>NamUOwLLC7=-YZOa Z
 + 5V
8V
1 3
C5
EDGE 1

CONNECTOR 24

cc
AO
Vcc
DO

D1 Al
D2 A2
24
DATA D3 A3
Vc.c.
LINES D4 A4
24
D5 A5
Vcc
D6 A6
D7 A7
CMS A8
CS A9
IC1 A10 IC2
MIM54104 All MM52164
SR1
INT Al2
IC4
A13 SR5 IC5
DO SR6
D1

D2
D3
04
SP OUT 05
D6
D7

V
OSC1 CS GND
X
0 +8V
2

3 ---0 + 5V R1
Ci6
T 1.5K R2
1MEG
W CS GND
20 12

----IDI----
4.
XTALi 12

T 4MHz T
C6 C7
50pF 20pF

IC10-f IC10-d
5V 7404
Y6 /67404
R8
13 9
10K

1 4 14 15 6 14 13 12

PR V YO Vcc Y1 Y2 Y3

CLK C
2 2
D G1
IC7 G2A
IC6
GND 74138 G2B
7474
A GND

SPKR Y

<VOUT
VIN{

R4 {
+ 8V

C13

620K S

C9
-` .01 01 C15

6 220µF
R3 R5 R6
SPKR1 15V
50K 9.1K 10K IC9
8f IC8
2
VOLUME VM 1M
3
LM346
13 - C10
C121
LM386

4
10f
R7
C14
1
1` .05

FIG. 2-SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF THE DIGITALKER. The speech processor (IC1) reads data from the ROM's (IC2-105) and delivers speech
output via pin 39. 83
 is useless for text -to -speech conversion because of the
large amount of memory that would be required. + 5V
07
(FROM
The Digitalker 5V (COMPUTER)

National Semiconductor's Digitalker is a stored -word

speech synthesis system that produces an exceptionally RI D7 (PIN 151
clear "voice." In fact, the Digitalker's quality exceeds 10K
Texas Instrument's Speak & Spell speech synthesizer. The Cs1
15 SR5/SR6 CS (PIN 2)
Digitalker's voice has intonation or feeling, is not monoto- IP1N21 S1 q SRUSR2 S1
SR5/SR6
ne, and even uses a female voice for the phrase "This is
Digitalker."
The MM54104 SPC (Speech Processor Chip) is the o
AUTO
heart of the Digitalker system. It's a 40 -pin IC having 8
data lines (pins 8-15) that can be programmed manually a b

with switches, or by connecting the device to a computer.

FIG. 3-ROM-SELECT CIRCUITS: Use the circuit shown in (a) to
For best results, a computer should be used to control the select between ROM sets manually. The circuit shown in (b)
SPC so that sentences can be formed by stringing words allows manual or automatic computer control, but only the first
together rapidly. 128 words and phrases are accessible in the auto mode.
The SPC also has 14 ROM address lines (AO-A13, pins
25-38) that are to address ROM's containing speech data.
Through those 14 address lines, the SPC can directly 12V DC
access 128K bits of speech data, which is good for about INPUT
SV
Fi C2
one minute of continuous speech. The SPC receives its 1/2A 1µF
data from the ROM's through eight data lines (pins 16-19 125V 15V

and pins 21-24). A number of other lines (pins 3, 4, and 7)

are used for handshaking with a host computer, for con-
necting an external crystal oscillator (pins 1 and 2), and for 5V
speech output (pin 39)-which is connected to a filter and Cl
220011F
C3 R1
1µF 3301/
an audio amplifier. For more information on the SPC, see 25V 15V
National's 1982 Linear Databook. LEDI
POWER
The right words
One key to a good stored -word speech -synthesis system FIG. 4-POWER SUPPLY for the Digitalker. A + 12 -volt wall trans-
is to choose the right words to store, convert them from an former provides the raw DC input.
analog source, and then compress them into digital data
suitable for the SPC. been spoken before sending more data to to the SPC.
National Semiconductor will convert analog tapes into Two SPC pins provide options. First, cs is the chip -
custom digital data for customers, but that's an expensive select line;it must be grounded momentarily when the
proposition for hobbyists. However, the company has de- computer addresses the SPC. cs is provided to allow the
veloped four general-purpose 64K bit ROM's that contain SPC to share the data bus with other devices.
data for 273 words, phrases, tones, and pauses. National's Second, cos (command select) resets the interrupt and
Linear databooks list several different ROM sets, but the starts a speech sequence when it is low, and only resets the
SSR1, SSR2, SSR5, and'SSR6 provide the best selection interrupt when it is high.
of words and are easy to obtain. The four ROM's together The PC board layout brings both cs and CMS out to the
contain nearly two minutes of continuous speech; the edge connector. For normal operation from a parallel -
words contained in each ROM set are shown in Tables 1 printer port, it's most convenient to ground both pins at the
and 2. edge -card connector.
Now let's look at the circuit, shown in Fig. 2. The SPC's
Hooking it up speech output drives IC8, which buffers the audio signal
As shown in Fig. 1, the simplest way to use the Digi- and drives a volume control. Final audio output is provided
talker is to connect it to your computer's printer port. by IC9.
There are several advantages to doing so. First, handshak- Flip-flop IC6 and 3 -to -8 line decoder IC7 select the
ing between the computer and the Digitalker is automatic, speech ROM's, depending on whether SPC address line
so it isn't necessary to place timing loops in the software. AD13 is high or low, and on the state of the csl signal (edge
Second, most printer ports have a STROBE line that goes connector pin 2). AD13 picks the high or low ROM of a
low when data at the port is valid. The strobe line can be pair, and cs1 picks one pair or the other.
connected to the SPC's wR line. When it is asserted, the There are several ways to select which ROM pair you w

SPC reads the ROM data for the selected word over its want to use. If you have an extra output bit available on
eight data lines (D0-D8), and then delivers the word to the your PC (perhaps a bit from a second parallel port), you
audio output (pin 39). can program csi directly. Otherwise, you can use a manual
The SPC's INTR line (pin 6) goes high after the entire switch, as shown in Fig. 3-a.
word has been pronounced. By connecting the INTR line A combination approach is shown in Fig. 3-b. With
(or, if necessary, the inverted INTR) to the printer port's switch S1 in the Manual position, you can use S2 to switch
BUSY input, the host computer will wait until each word has between ROM's. But with S1 in the Auto position, you can
84
switch between ROM's using a single eight -bit port. The DIGITALKER PARTS LIST
upper data bit (D7) provides the switching function, so All resistors are 1/4 -watt, 5% unless otherwise noted.
only the first 128 words (0-127) in each ROM set will be R1-1500 ohms
accessible using that approach. R2-1 megohm
The power -supply schematic is shown in Fig. 4. An R3-50,000 ohms, potentiometer
inexpensive wall transformer provides the raw DC power. R4-620,000 ohms
Voltage regulators inside the project's cabinet provide the R5-9100 ohms
required voltages: + 5 -volts DC for the digital circuits, R6, R8-10,000 ohms
and + 8 -volts DC for the audio circuitry. The entire circuit R7-10 ohms
All capacitors are rated 15 volts or higher
draws about 300 mA when the volume is turned up, so use 0.1 µF, ceramic disc
C1-05, C10-C13, C16
a + 12 -volt DC, 500 -mA power supply. C6-50 ceramic disc
pF,
C7-20 ceramic disc
pF,
Construction C8, CO 0.01 µF, ceramic disc
PC board patterns are shown in PC Service. An etched C14-0.05 µF, ceramic disc
and drilled PC board is also available from the source 015-220 µF, 15 volts, electrolytic
given in the Parts List. Figure 5 shows how the parts are Semiconductors
mounted on the board. Note: six jumper wires must be IC1-MM54104, speech processor
soldered to the circuit board before the IC sockets are 102-MM52164-SSR1, speech ROM
installed. An additional jumper must be soldered from the IC3-MM52164-SSR2, speech ROM
IC4-MM52164-SSR5, speech ROM
center INT terminal to either INT or ,NT, depending on the IC5-MM52164-SSR6, speech ROM
handshaking requirements of your computer's parallel IC6-7474, dual D flip-flop
port. Most computers use an active -high BUSY signal, so 107-74138, 3 -to -8 line decoder
try the INT setting first if you're not sure which one to use. IC8-LM346, programmable op -amp
Observe normal precautions when handling the SPC IC9-LM386, audio power amplifiere
and ROM IC's.Leave the chips in their protective "rugs" IC10-7404, hex inverter
until they are ready for use. To protect the components Other components
against damage caused by static electricity, make sure to XTAL1-4.00 MHz crystal
ground yourself before removing the IC's from from their POWER SUPPLY PARTS LIST
rugs, or when handling or moving the PC board. R1-330 ohms
After mounting all components, check your work care- IC1-7808 8 -volt regulator
102-7805 5 -volt regulator
fully for solder bridges and cold joints. Fix any problems C1-2200 µF, 25 volts, electrolytic
before applying power to the board. C2, 03-1 µF, 15 volts, tantalum
Fl-fuse, 0.5 amp, 125 volts
LED1-light-emitting diode
Note: An etched and drilled PC board is available for
$15.95 from David A. Ward, 2261 W. Skyview,
e ,F.v4,<:.
Cedar City, UT 84720-2233. All orders add $2.00
shipping and handling; Utah residents add 6%
sales tax. Digitalker IC's are available from Jam-
Cl2 eco Electronics, 1355 Shoreway Road, Belmont,
CA 94002 (415-592-8097).

C3
R4 49

LISTING 1

C15 C2
C7 C6
n 1.9
10 REM This program will make the
XTALI
20 REM Digitalker pronounce all words
30 REM in SSR1 and SSR2 (CS1 is low)
I
Cl
40 FOR X = 0 to 143
R2 R1
50 LPRINT CHRS(X);
CB 60 NEXT X
70 END
ICl J R8
C11
LISTING 2
r.
Cl6r

10 REM This program will make the

20 REM Digitalker pronounce all words
UUUJt!UUU 30
40
REM in SSR5 and SSR6 (CS1 is high)
FOR X=0 to 130
50 LPRINT CHRS(X);
60 NEXT X
FIG. 5-PARTS LAYOUT: Note that six jumpers must be installed
on the component side of the board before installing the IC 70 END
sockets. (Sockets mount over five of the six jumpers.)

85
 time clock, pronounce the corresponding letter of the
alphabet as a key is typed (great for a small child learning
LISTING 3 his ABC's), pronounce phone numbers as names are typed
10 REM REAL TIME CLOCK PROGRAM
in, and prompt the user for input in various programs. The
20 CLS talking clock program is shown in Listing 3.
30 PRINT"HOW OFTEN DO YOU WANT. THE TIME ANNOUNCED?"
40 PRINT:PRINT There are a couple of things to be aware of when
50 PRINT"ENTER 1 FOR 1 MINUTE INTERVALS..." programming the Digitalker. First, addressing a word with
60 PRINT"ENTER 5 FOR 5 MINUTE INTERVALS..."
70 PRINT"ENTER 30 FOR 30 MINUTE INTERVALS.... a number higher than that listed in the word lists will
80 INPUT"",I
90 TIMES=TIME$ produce unintelligible speech, but will not damage the
100 TS=LEFTS(TIMES,2)
110 T1$=MIDS(TIMES,4,2)
120 HS=LEFT$(T$,1)
130 H1S=RIGHTS(T$,1)
140 H=ASC(HS)
150 H1=ASC(H1$)
160 H=H -48
170 H1=H1-48
180 H=H*10
190 HT=H+H1
200 IF HT>12 THEN HT=HT-12:P=47:GOTO 220
210 P=32
220 IF HT=12 THEN P=47
230 IF HT=0 THEN HT=12:P=32
240 MS=LEFTS(T15,1)
250 M1$=RIGHT$(T1$,1)
260 M=ASC(M$)
270 M1=ASC(M1S)
280 M=M -48
290 M1=M1-48
300 IF M=0 AND M1=0 THEN M=68:M1=68
310 IF M=0 AND M1>0 THEN M=46
320 IF M=1 AND M1=0 THEN M=10:M1=68
330 IF M=1 AND M1-1 THEN M=11:M1=68
340 IF M=1 AND M1=2 THEN M=12:M1=68
350 IF M=1 AND M1=3 THEN M=13:M1=68 FIG. 6-THE ASSEMBLED SYNTHESIZER with its cover removed.
360 IF M=1 AND M1=4 THEN M=14:M1=68
370 IF M=1 AND M1=5 THEN M=15:M1=68
380 IF M=1 AND M1=6 THEN M=16:M1=68
390 IF M=1 AND M1=7 THEN M=17:M1=68
400 IF M=1 AND M1=8 THEN M=18:M1=68 SPC or ROM chips. Second, the semicolons following the
410 IF M=1 AND M1=9 THEN M=19:M1=68 LPRINT statements are essential. If they are not present
420 IF M=2 THEN M=20
430 IF M=3 THEN M=21 the Digitalker will pronounce thirteen and then ten after
440 IF M=4 THEN M=22
450 IF M=5 THEN M=23
each word is spoken. That occurs because an ASCII 13 is a
460 IF M1=0 THEN M1=68 carriage return, and an ASCII 10 is a linefeed. The semi-
470LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(138);CHR$(67);CHR$(139);CHR$(67);
CHR$(96);CHRS(71);CHR$(HT);CHR$(69);CHR$(M);CHRS(M1); colon (;) eliminates the carriage return and linefeed.
CHES(71);CHR$(P);CHR$(44);CHR$(71);CHRS(71)
480 PRINT TIMES,;
490 GOSUB 510 Applications ideas
500 GOTO 90 Computer voice synthesis can be a very natural way for
510 IF I=1 THEN I=60
520 IF I=5 THEN 1=300 computers to communicate with people. For example, a
530 IF I=10 THEN I=600
540 IF I=30 THEN I=1600 synthesizer could be used to warn a pilot that the plane's
550 Z=TIMER
560 Y=TIMER
altitude is critically low, or that the fuel level is low. A
570 IF Y-Z<I THEN 560 visually impaired person could compose documents with a
580 RETURN -

word processor, or compute math problems with a cal-

culator.
Undoubtedly, there are many other uses for comput-
erized voice synthesis in cash registers, automatic teller
Making the connection machines, emergency warning systems, automobiles,
Connecting the Digitalker to your computer is as simple telephone systems, etc. Have fun finding them! R -E
as plugging it into your computer's parallel printer port.
For testing purposes, wire a ROM -select switch as shown
in Fig. 3-a.
It's easy to program the Digitalker. For example, simply
\
by typing

LPRINT CHR$(0);

the Digitalker will say the phrase "This is Digitalker" if

cs) is low, or "abort" if cs) is high.
1
Listing and Listing 2 are test programs that sequen-
1

tially pronounces all words contained in the selected ROM

set. Both programs were written in GW-BASIC; they were
tested on a Kaypro PC.
More sophisticated applications are not difficult. For
example, the author has written BASIC programs that do "The man at the pet shop said he can store up to 20 separate
the following; announce the time from the computer's real- commands.''

86
 L --I -LT
1
FOR CONVENTIONAL ALL-FREQUENCY SHORT-WAVE RECEP- over a decade of frequency coverage. Instead, the
tion, the general rule is "the longer the antenna the stronger input stage (Q1) is an FET source -follower, whose
the received signal." Unfortunately, between nasty neigh- high -impedance input successfully bridges the an-
bors, restrictive housing rules, and real-estate plots not tenna's characteristics at any frequency. Although
much larger than a postage stamp, a short-wave antenna many different types of FET's may be used-such
often turns out to be a few feet of wire thrown out the as the MPF102, 2N3819, or the 2N4416-bear in
window-rather than the 130 feet of long-wire antenna we mind that the overall high -frequency response is
would really like to string between two 50 -foot towers. set by the characteristics of the FET amplifier.
Fortunately, there's a convenient alternative to the long- Transistor Q2 is used as an emitter-follower to
wire antenna, and that's an active antenna; which provide a high -impedance load for Ql, but more
basically consists of a very short antenna and a high-gain importantly, it provides a low drive impedance
amplifier. for common -emitter amplifier Q3, which pro-
The concept of an active antenna is fairly simple. vides all of the amplifier's voltage gain. The
Since the antenna is physically small, it doesn't inter- most important parameter of Q3 is fT, the high -
cept as much energy as a larger antenna, so we frequency cut-off, which should be in
simply use a built-in RF amplifier to make the range of 200-400 MHz. A
up for the apparent signal "loss." Also, 2N3904, or a 2N2222 works
the amplifier provides impedance well for Q3.
matching, because most receivers The most important of
are designed to work with a 50 - Q3's circuit parameters is
ohm antenna. the voltage drop across
Active antennas can be built R8: The greater the
for any frequency range, but drop, the greater the
they are more commonly gain. However, the
used from VLF (10 kHz or passband decreases
so) to about 30 MHz. The as Q3's gain is in-
reason for that is because creased.
full-size antennas for those Transistor Q4
frequencies are often much transforms Q3's rela-
too long for the available tively moderate out-
space. At higher frequencies, put impedance into a
it is quite easy to design a rela- low impedance, there-
tively small high -gain antenna. by providing sufficient
The active antenna shown in Fig. drive for a receiver's 50 -
1 provides 14-20 dB gain at the popu- ohm antenna -input im-
lar short-wave and radio -amateur fre- pedance.
quencies of 1-30 MHz. As you would The antenna can be almost
expect, the lower the frequency the greater the anything; a long piece of wire, a
gain. A gain of 20 dB is typical from 1-18 brass welding rod, or a telescopic
MHz, decreasing to 14 dB at 30 MHz. antenna that was salvaged from an
old radio. Telescopic replacement
Circuit design antennas for transistor radios are
Because antennas that are much short- also available from most retail
er than ' wavelength present a very electronic -parts distributors.
small and highly re-

ACTIVE
active impedance that
is dependent on the
received frequency,
no attempt was made

ANTENNA
to match the anten-
na's impedance-it
would prove too diffi-
cult and frustrating to
match impedances

When fate or nasty neighbors prevent you from stringing a long-wire receiving antenna, you'll
find that this pocket-size active antenna will give the same, or even better, reception.

RODNEY A. KREUTER
87
 ANT C8 PARTS LIST
VR2 R4 ; R10 22µF
2212 22K
2212 S1
Resistors'/4-watt, 10%
_C7 R1-1 megohm
_ Cl
Q2
2N3904
`.1
¡ Bl R2, R10-22 ohms
'."`470pF G2 C6
01
9V R3, R11-2200 ohms
.0i
Ot R4-22,000 ohms
MPF102
2.7V
T R5-10,000 ohms
R6, R9-1000 ohms
R7-3300 ohms
2V OUTPUT R8-470 ohms
1.2V
n C9 Capacitors rated at least 16-WVDC
; R3 R5 R6
Cl, 03-470 pF
R1

1MEG >2.2K 10K 1K C2, C5, C6-0.01 µF

C4-0.001 µF
C7,09-0.1 µF
FIG. 1-THIS ACTIVE ANTENNA provides between 14- and 20-dB gain over the range of C8-22 µF, electrolytic
1-30 MHz. Semiconductors
Q1-FET, MPF102 or 2N3918 (see
text)
OUTPUT pS1 B1
lead is returned to the PC board, out- Q2, Q3, Q4-NPN transistor,
put -jack Jl has a connection to the 2N3904, or equivalent
cabinet ground. The ground connec- Other components
tion between the PC board and the B1 -9 -volt battery
cabinet is made through the metal J1-Jack to match receiver cable
standoffs or spacers that are used to Sl-SPST switch
mount the PC board in the cabinet. ANT-Telescopic antenna or wire
Miscellaneous: Cabinet, printed -cir-
Do not substitute plastic standoffs or
cuit materials, solder, etc.
spacers because they won't provide a Note: The following can be or-
ground connection between the PC dered from 0 -Sat, P.O Box 110,
board, the cabinet, and JI. If you de- Boalsburg, PA 16827: A printed -
cide to use a plastic cabinet to house circuit board, $6 plus $1 ship-
-CB -- the amplifier, make certain that J1's ping and handling; a complete
R7 ground connection is returned to the kit (less case, switch, battery,
ground foil running around the edge and connectors), $15 plus $2
of the PC -board. shipping and handling. Pennsyl-
c1 A telescopic antenna mounts in the vania residents must add appro-
priate sales tax.
center of the PC board. From the foil
side of the board, pass its mounting
screw through the hole in the PC
board and then solder the head of the which the antenna passes. In a pinch,
screw to its foil pad. For both insula- several turns of a good -quality plastic
tion and support, use a plastic or rub- tape wrapped around the antenna's
ber grommet between the antenna and shaft can be substituted for the rubber
the hole in the cabinet's cover through grommet.
If you decide to make provision for
a wire antenna, install a 5 -way bind-
ing post on the cabinet. Then, be sure
FIG. 2-THE GROUND CONNECTION for to connect a short length of wire be-
J1 is the metal cabinet. The cabinet is con-
nected to the PC board's ground by the tween the antenna's foil pad and the
metal spacers at each mounting screw. binding post.

Construction Modifications
The amplifier for the prototype unit If you are interested in a smaller
uses a printed -circuit board, for frequency range than 1-30 MHz, re-
which a template is provided in "PC sistor R1 can be replaced with an LC
Service." The amplifier can be as- circuit tuned to the center of the desir-
sembled on a perforated wiring ed range. The LC circuit will also
board, but because there is some sen- improve the rejection of signals out-
sitivity to the parts layout, we strongly side your range of interest, but re-
suggest that you use a PC board for FIG. 3-THE AMPLIFIER IS SO SMALL member that it won't improve the gain
best results. that it almost gets lost in a 4 -inch x 4 -inch of the amplifier.
metal cabinet. The battery is held in place If your particular interest is the
The parts -placement diagram is with a U -clamp. The output jack is any-
shown in Fig. 2. Take note that al- thing that matches the receiver's antenna very-low frequencies (VLF), the am -
though the battery's negative (ground) connection. continued on page 130
 T LJ-11r

AMPLIFIED
IF YOU WORK WITH AUDIO, THERE MUST BE
times when you wish you had an am-
plifier and speaker system handy. If
so, the amplified speaker described in
this article is the answer to your
needs. It is a low-cost, wide -range
amplified -sound system complete
with loudness, bass, and treble con-
trols. Just connect power, and a line -
SPEAKER
level audio source and you're in busi-
ness! Here are some common uses for
the project:
If you would like to share the sound
of your headphone stereo with your
friends, all you have to do is connect
the amplified speaker system. The
project provides over 5 watts into an
internal speaker, and the sound quali-
ty is great.
The amplified speaker system is
also a great addition to your workshop
because you'll no longer have to drag
out your stereo and speakers just to
check a tuner, tape deck, or other
audio component. You'll be able to
troubleshoot an audio component on
your workbench rather than where
your stereo is located. GARY McCLELLAN
Another possible use for the ampli-
fied speaker system is as an amplifier
for an electric guitar or other musical You can build this low-cost amplified speaker system
instrument. And, because the project that is useful for testing audio components, or
can be powered from a 12 -volt car
battery (we'll explain how later), you to amplify a walkman -type stereo for "ears -free"
can even use it outdoors. listening pleasure.
You should enjoy building the proj-
ect almost as much as you'll enjoy
using it. And, perhaps best of all, it's are a loudness -compensation net- bass and treble tones. Bass -control R7
not going to break your bank account; work, which boosts bass tones at low- is part of a voltage divider consisting
ours only cost $17.00 to build. Of volume levels. That circuitry corrects of R6 and R8. Turning the potentiom-
course, your cost will be determined for human hearing deficiencies at low eterclockwise puts more of the reac-
by the state of your junkbox, and your volume. tance of capacitor C8 across the
ability to track down bargains. From R2, the audio signal is ampli- potentiometer and R8, shunting most
fied by transistor Q1, which is a high - of the high frequencies to ground, and
How it works gain, low-noise device. That stage boosting the lows. Turning the poten-
The amplifier is based on a high - compensates for losses in the tone - tiometer counterclockwise puts more
quality audio -amplifier IC made by control circuitry. Bias -resistor R3 fur- reactance of C7 across the potentiom-
Sanyo. That particular part was ther reduces noise by providing nega- eter and R6, boosting most of the high
chosen because of its low distortion, tive feedback. Capacitor C4 is frequencies and cutting the lows.
high power output, and relatively low included to prevent RF pickup and to The output from the bass potenti-
noise. Additional circuitry is included roll off high -frequency noise. ometer (R7) goes to resistor R10,
for loudness, bass, and treble con- Basically, the circuit connected be- which reduces control interaction,
trols, which are always included in a tween capacitor C6 and resistor R12 is and then it goes to treble -control R11.
high -quality audio amplifier. a 20 -dB resistive attenuator network That potentiometer is in a series volt-
The schematic of the amplified - combined with adjustable low-pass age divider with capacitors C9 and
speaker project is shown in Fig. 1. (bass) and high-pass (treble) filters. C10. Turning R11 clockwise puts
Input signals to the audio -input termi- The potentiometers increase or de- more of the reactance of C9 in the
nals drive volume -control R2. Capac- crease the capacitive reactance across circuit, shunting high frequencies
itor C2, resistor R1, and a tap on R2 various resistors, boosting or cutting around the bass control, boosting tre-
 1M
R14
4700

R9
C13
4700 111F
R12 _L C17
16V T
IT
1K
vw )1-+
2

C7
C12
01 C9
001 3
.0022 ICI
R10 4
R15 SPKR
LA4460
4.7K C14 29>
2.25
¡ R11
100µF
Wti '100K
9
10V
5 R16

_ C10
-L C16 `+ C18
2.20
C8 's .022 100µF 1
81 C19
.1
1K
10V
1 T C

LOUDNESS BASS TREBLE

D2 D4
F1 1N5400 1N5400
111 u
D3
1N5400

+ C22 C23
2200µF 2200µF
C20 C21
16V
25V
1' T
I

.001 001

FIG. 1 -SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM of the amplifier board and its power supply.

and is coupled through capacitors C14

and C13 to the second amplifier in
{ SPKR

Ft
ICI. After being amplified, the phase -
inverted output drives the speaker
T1
from pin 9. Resistors R15 and R16,
-{ D4

---4
D3
-i4---
D2
C20 C21
lAMP
and capacitors C18 and C19, are in-
cluded at the output of ICI to prevent
+ + high -frequency oscillation. Note that
r I

C17 IC18 C23 C22 BR1 if you can't find the 2.2 -ohm resistors
R15Ri6 R14 -, specified for R15 and R16, 10 -ohm
C15 I I

units may be substituted. The exact

I

- C19 C11

+Ç14 R13 R9 Di value isn't critical, although 2.2 ohms

C12R12
IC16 is preferred.
C13 I Rounding out the circuitry is a fair-
-R10- -CB- C6+ R; C4R3-R5- 3FOOT ly conventional power supply, con-
Ci 0 C9 -C3- SHIELDED
I
C1 CABLE
sisting of bridge rectifier BR1; capaci-
R8 tors C22 and C23; and diodes D2,
HEAT 1
D3, and D4. Since the supply volt-
SINK age, after being rectified, is at about
17 volts, D2, D3, and D4 are required
in order to drop it down to about 15
volts. Note that power is also tapped
FIG. 2 -PARTS PLACEMENT DIAGRAM for the PC board. Close attention should be paid off capacitor C22 for Ql. That extra
to the polarities of the electrolytic capacitors.

ble. Likewise, turning R11 coun- Power-amplifier ICI is a bridging - 3.6 INCHES

terclockwise shunts high frequencies type amplifier. That means that there
t
away from the bass control to ground, are two power amplifiers inside the 2 INCHES
cutting treble tones. The tone -control package that drive the speaker in a
output drives resistor R12 and capaci- push-pull configuration for double the -47
1

BEND 90°
tor C12, which serve as a low-pass power output. The input signal to pin 0.5 INCH
filter. That circuitry is included to pre- 2 is amplified and then drives the MATERIAL 0.050 INCH ALUMINUM

vent oscillation in power-amplifier speaker from the pin -7 output. A FIG. 3 -YOU CAN MAKE A HEAT SINK for
ICI. phase -inverted output appears at pin 4 IC1 from a piece of scrap aluminum.

90
 self-oscillation). Resistors R14 and ganged unit mentioned in the Parts
R9 provide current limiting, while ca- List. That unit consists of two ganged
All resistors are 1/4 -watt, 5% unless pacitors C11 and C5 provide extra fil- potentiometers, but only one of them
noted tering. Zener diode D1 ensures that is used. Of course, if you can find a
R1, R6 10,000 ohms the supply voltage is stabilized at 9.1 single -unit substitute with same spec-
R2-100,000 ohms, potentiometer, volts, as required by transistor Ql. ifications, you should use that.
40°ró loudness contour tap (Radio
The semiconductors are available
Shack 271-1732)
Part selection from a wide variety of sources. Many
R3-2.2 megohms
R4. R10 4700 ohms Now that we have covered the cir- Japanese TV/stereo replacement -
R5, R9, R14-470 ohms cuit details, let's discuss the parts. parts suppliers carry the Sanyo
R7, R11-100,000 ohms, potentiom- The speaker system may be any LA4460 for IC1. And any 3 -amp di-
eter, audio taper (Radio Shack decent-sounding unit you can find. odes can be used for D2, D3, and D4.
271-1722) Chances are you will want to build The bridge rectifier specified is a stan-
R8, R12, R13 1000 ohms two amplified-speaker systems, so it dard 6 -amp, 0.6 -inch square -cube
R15. R16 2.2 ohms would be wise to get two identical unit. You can also cross-reference
Capacitors units for balanced sound. The Pan- those semiconductors with the Phi-
Cl, C3. C8, C17, C18, C19 0.1 µF
asonic two-way unit used for our pro- llips -ECG replacement line, as well
50 volts, radial -lead polyester
totype was purchased at a flea market as many others.
C2-0.047 µF 50 volts, radial -lead
polyester for $1.50; perhaps you can do better. Finally, transformer T1 is a plug-in
C4-100-pF, 500 volts, ceramic disc If possible, test out the speaker sys- 12 -volt AC 1 -amp unit. It is available
C5, C14, C15-100 µF, 10 volts, radi- tem you are considering, as you don't from several sources. If you prefer, a
al -electrolytic want to waste time on a unit that is standard 12.6 -volt AC, 1 -amp or bet-
C6, 013-1 µF, 16 volts, radial -elec- defective, or has poor sound quality. ter, filament transformer may be used.
trolytic You may have some trouble finding If you go with a standard filament
C7, C16 0.01 µF, 50 volts, radial - a tapped potentiometer that is re- transformer, remember to pick up a
lead polyester quired for R2. One alternative is the line cord and a 1/4 -amp fuse for Fl.
09-0.0022 µF, 50 volts, radial -lead
polyester
010-0.022 µF, 50 volts, radial -lead
polyester
C11-100 µF, 16 volts, radial -elec-
trolytic
C12, C20, 021-0.001 µF 50 volts,
ceramic disc
C22-2200 µF, 25 volts, radial -elec-
trolytic
023-2200 µF, 16 volts, radial -elec-
trolytic
Semiconductors
IC1----LA4460 linear power amplifier
(Sanyo)
Q1 -2N5088 NPN transistor
D1 -1N4739 9.1 -volt, 1 -watt, Zener
diode
D2-D4-1N5400 3 amp, 50 PIV, sil-
icon diode
BR1-6 amp, 50 PIV, bridge rectifier
Other components
S1-SPST potentiometer switch for
R11 (Radio Shack 271-1740)
T1-Plug in transformer, 12 volts AC.
1 amp (Jamenco AC1000 or equiv-

alent)
PL1-RCA plug
F1-1 amp. slow -blow, 3AG fuse and
holder
Miscellaneous-speaker, PC
board, 3 knobs. 3 feet of shielded
wire, scrap aluminum for heatsink,
hardware. Note: A PC board is
available from E2VSI, P.O. Box
72100, Roselle, IL 60172, for
$9.95 plus $0.50 shipping.

power-supply circuitry is required to

ensure amplifier stability, as it would
otherwise motorboat (low-frequency FIG. 4-YOUR BOARD SHOULD look similar to this one when it is completed.
91
 C23. Continue by installing 0.1-µF
capacitors at C17, C18 and C19. Now
move over to the righthand side of the
board and install 0.1-µF capacitors at
Cl and C3. Next, install a 0.047-µF
capacitor at C2 and install a 100-pF
disc at C4. Now install 1-µF capaci-
tors at C6 and C13, and a 0.01-µF
capacitor at C7. Next to that, install a
0.1-µF capacitor at C8. Now install a
0.0022-µF capacitor at C9, and in-
stall a 0.022-µF capacitor next to it at
C10. Finish up by installing 100µF
capacitors at C14 and C15, and check
everything before continuing.
Next, Q1 and ICl are installed.
Place the 2N5088 as shown at Q1, and
then install the LA4460 at IC1. Insert
the part with the metal side to your
left. Also, note that the pin -1 marking
on the board matches the pin -1 stripe
on the IC package. Double check be-
fore soldering the connections.
Continue by fabricating a heat sink
for ICI. Details are shown in Fig. 3.
FIG.5-A GOOD PLACE TO MOUNT the board is on the side of the cabinet, near the rear. We used a piece of aluminum sal-
Note the spacers that are used between the board and the cabinet vaged from an old chassis for the heat
sink, as it conveniently already had a
megohm resistor at R3 and a 4.7K 'h -inch lip on it.
resistor at R4. Next, install 10K re- Install the heat sink. Place it
sistors at R1 and R6. After that install against ICI with the lip over the
2.2 -ohm resistors at R15 and R16. board's mounting holes. Then mark
Continue by installing 1K resistors at and drill the two mounting holes for
TO POWER PADS 12.6v R12, R13, and R8. Finish up by in- ICI. Also, mark and drill the board's
ON THE BOARD 1AMP stalling a 4.7K resistor at R10. mounting holes. Put a dab of silicon
Modify the three potentiometers grease on the metal surface of IC1 and
Ft
next. If necessary cut the shafts to secure the heat sink to IC1 with 4-40
AMP length. Measure 1 inch from the bush- x 'h-inch screws. Tighten the screws
FAST BLOW ing, mark it, and cut it off with a just enough to hold IC1 in place, as
FIG. 6-ALTERNATE TRANSFORMER de-
hacksaw, and then smooth the edges overtightening may damage it. The
tails should be followed if a standard fila- with a file. We suggest using a poten- board is now complete, and it should
ment transformer is used. tiometer switch for Si, and an appro- look like the one shown in Fig. 4.
priate unit is listed in the Parts List. Set the assembled board aside for a
Construction The switch, by the way, should be moment and work on the speaker cab-
The amplifier should be built on a installed on R11. inet. Determine a suitable location to
PC board for best results. Either make Install the potentiometer and mount the board. A good location is
one using the pattern in the PC Ser- switch combination at the R11 loca- on the side of the cabinet, toward the
vice section of this magazine or you tion, and the tapped potentiometer in rear, as shown in Fig. 5. Using the
can buy one from the source given in the R2 location. Then install the last board as a guide, measure, and mark
the Parts List. potentiometer in location R7. Con- the holes for the four mounting
Start the assembly by stuffing the nect the potentiometer terminals to screws, and the three knob shafts. Do
amplifier PC board. Refer to Fig. 2 for the board by passing short lengths of that carefully, as mistakes will be hard
component locations and the Parts solid wire through the board and to fix later on. Note that the holes for
List for values. Starting with the di- through each potentiometer terminal. the screws must be smaller than the
odes, install bridge -rectifier BR1 with Leftover resistor leads are good for holes for the knob shafts. Drill all
the case, notch, or positive terminal that. Make sure that all connections holes and make sure the board fits.
as shown. Then install 3 -amp diodes are soldered, and check for mistakes You can, if you like, use rub -on letter-
at D2, D3, and D4 as indicated. Fi- before continuing. ing to label the controls for a profes-
nally, install the 1N4739 Zener diode Next comes the capacitors. Re- sional appearance.
at D1 near BR1. Double-check all member to pay attention to the polar- Return to the assembled board and
parts before continuing. ities of the electrolytics as you install refer back to Fig. 2 for final assembly
Next comes the resistors. Install them. Start by installing the 2200-µF, details. Start by wiring a shielded ca-
470-ohm resistors at RI4, R9, and R5 25 -volt capacitor at C22. Then install ble to the IN pads on the board as
as indicated. Then install a 2.2- the 2200-µF, 16 -volt capacitor at continued on page 130
BUILD A
SERIAL PRINTER
MULTIPLEXER

Build a serial printer multiplexer for a fraction

of what commercial units cost.

PAUL RENTON

Many a small business has more computers than How it works

printers. The reason why purchasing a separate To accomplish multiplexing the printer multiplexer uses
printer for each user is unjustified is because few users hardware handshaking. Handshaking is the term used to
actually print all day long. Besides, buying separate describe what prevents the computer from sending data to
printers can be expensive. the printer when the printer is not ready for it. Generally
The biggest problem of printer sharing is how to hook speaking, there are two types of handshaking: software
things up. Many people simply switch cables, but that's and hardware. There are several varieties of each type of
inconvenient, and wastes time. Others use some sort of handshaking, but XON/XOFF and busy line, respectively,
mechanical switch, but that's also inconvenient, because are the most common.
the user must get up and physically push a button or turn a In the XON/XOFF method, the printer sends control
knob. characters to the computer to indicate when it is able to
Another approach is to use a device called a printer accept data, and when it is not. To use that type of
multiplexer. The device connects the computer to the handshaking, the printer multiplexer would have to be
printer automatically, eliminating the need to switch ca- microprocessor controlled. We wanted a simple and inex-
bles or press buttons. pensive method of printer sharing, so software handshak-
The multiplexer presented here allows you to connect as ing is not used.
many as four computers to the same serial (RS -232) In the busy -line method, the printer controls the state of
printer. The multiplexer works by scanning each comput- its Data Terminal Ready line (which is usually pin 20 of a
er's output port sequentially. As soon as one computer 25 -pin D connector). In general, if DTR is high (+12
begins a print job, the multiplexer locks onto that comput- volts), then the printer can accept data. If DTR is low
er and allows data to flow from computer to printer. Mean- (-12 volts), then the printer cannot accept data. Unfor-
while, the busy lines to the other computers' output ports tunately, some printers interchange the meanings of high
are asserted. When the print job is done, the multiplexer and low. Our design does not allow for busy -line polarity
releases the busy lines, and resumes scanning. selection, however, modifying the multiplexer to do so is a
One special feature of our printer multiplexer is the relatively simple task.
PAUSE button, which can be used to halt data flow from the In the multiplexer, if the printer holds its own DTR line
computer to the printer. As long as that button on the unit is low (indicating that it's busy), then all DTR lines going to
pressed, no computer will be able to send data to the the computers are also held low. When the printer is ready
printer. to accept data, the DTR line of the currently selected
 R2
-- + +5V

100K 8 14 14 14 1 4 13 10
3 1 3 Vcc CLR PR CLR PR
2
CLK O D O
S3
IC3 IC7 IC6-a ICE -b
R3 6 2 6
555 74LS393 1/2 74LS74 1/2 74LS74
22K
12 13 D á CLK
GND
-Cl C3
C5
7
.1 .1 C4 1

CLEAR
(FROM
FIG. 2) C>
16 6
CHANGE
(TO
Q 17f
2 3

4
FIG. 2) LED 5 141-1-"1÷5V IC5
22052
1/4 74LS08 74LS138
+5V LED ,fi 3
IC4 a 1

2 YO Y1 Y2 Y3
1M
R10 O IC4-b 5 115 14 13 12

22052 1/4 74LS08

R9 1/4 74LSOB (TO
22012 FIG. 3)
LEO 11
IC4-c 12
`% 13
1/4 74LS08

We IC4-d 10
88 LED 2O
22051 1
FIG. 1-SEQUENTIAL SCANNING CIRCUIT: As long as no signal
is present at the CLEAR input, the outputs of IC5 are asserted one
after the other.

TX 1/4 1488 DATA TO

DATA PRINTER
(FROM C> IC1a o
FIG.3) R4
4.7 K
13
IC2 a
+12V We
12 VN
1/4 1489 R5
1/4 74LS32
10 4.7K oGND
CLEAR
(TO
FIG. 1)
a 8 ICB- 19
1014%.
1/4 741.532 R6
CHANGE 4.7K
(FROM
FIG. 1)
E> 20
- OTO
2 FROM
PBUSY PRINTER
(TO
FIG.3)
Q 1/4 74LS32
J5
S2 R7 OUTPUT
PAUSE 22052
RI
_ We . +5v
1K
+5V 1M -?-1\
Q LED1
PAUSE

FIG. 2-PAUSE GENERATOR: This circuit causes scanning to

stop whenever datais received at Tx DATA, when the printer is busy
(i.e.. pin 20 of J5 is low), when the PAUSE switch is pressed, or
when IC8 (shown in Fig. 1) changes state.

computer is released, and the DTR lines of the unselected switch is closed. Variable time delay was provided to
ports remain low. ensure that a computer was not cut off in the middle of a
Computer-port selection is done with a 555 timer and print job. If five seconds does not allow enough time,
three other IC's, as shown in Fig. 1. The 555 (IC3) runs in resistor values could be increased to further increase the
the astable mode; its rate determines how often the multi- time delay.
plexer switches ports. The values shown for R2, R3, and Whatever the delay, the timer clocks IC7, a 74LS393 8 -
C5 cause a pulse to be generated about once every second. bit counter. After 128 counts, pin 8 of IC7 goes high, and
One second should be enough time for most applications, that clocks IC6-a, half of a 74LS74, and it in turn drives
but the DIP switch (S3) allows additional capacitance to IC6-b, the other half. The Q outputs of both flip flops are
be added to the timing circuit; doing so increases the delay decoded by 105, a 74LS138 3 -to -8 line decoder. The
to two, three, four, and five seconds, as each section of the active output of that IC selects the current computer. The
94
outputs labeled (i through v3. are used to generate the DTR button. Thus, the counter will also be reset whenever the
signals and thereby to determine the active port. printer's DTR line goes low (indicating printer is busy); or
The selected computer port is indicated on the front the pause line goes high (indicating pause button is
panel via LED2-LED5. The 74LS138 outputs are simply pressed).
buffered by IC4, a 74LS08. As scanning continues, each In Fig. 3, IC9-a, IC9-c, and IC9-d combine the data
LED lights up in turn. inputs from each port into the single signal that drives TX
The preceding description shows how the multiplexer Data (shown in Fig. 3). The buffers in IC11 convert the
cycles through the four ports. But how does it select one incoming RS -232 signals to TTL levels; the buffers in
and stop the counting? IC10 convert the outgoing TTL signals to RS -232 levels.
An input port is selected by way of the clear inputs (pins The power supply, shown in Fig. 4, supplies ± 12 volts
2 and 12) of the 74LS393, which are used to inject a time to power the 1488 line drivers. The power supply also
delay in the switching sequence. If those inputs are provides + 5 volts for the remaining circuits.
brought high, then the counter resets and starts counting
from zero again. So if it's continually cleared, it will never Construction details
count 128 pulses, the flip-flops in IC6 will not change It's easiest to build the multiplexer on a small double -
state, and neither will IC5. sided PC board, patterns for which are shown in PC
Actually there are three reasons why IC7 might be Service. You can also purchase your own from the source
prevented from counting: when data is being sent from a mentioned in the Parts List.
computer, when the printer is busy, or when the pause If you make your own board, before mounting any
function is engaged. As shown in Fig. 2, that is accom- components install and solder jumpers in all feedthroughs.
plished by using several OR gates (and some inverters). Then, for ease of assembly, mount all discrete compo-
As the computer sends data, the first bit of that data, nents, except the power-supply capacitors, the voltage
which appears after buffering (by circuits discussed be- regulator, and the switches. Solder each on both sides of
low) at the TX Data input of Fig. 2, will cause the clear the board. Then install the IC's, either soldering them
lines to go high, resetting the counter. That signal is oRed directly to the board or with wirewrap sockets. If you use
with the DTR signal and with the output of the PAUSE sockets, mount them about % inch above the board, to

J1
INPUT 1
R13
4.7K
yy` 12V'
PC 3 11 13
DATA°INPUT
4 12 ICI -d
o 12V
7 R14 1/4 74LS08
O 10
4.7K
20
DTR o IC10-c 9
2

OUTPUT IC12a YO

J2 1/4 1488 Q (FROM

FIG. 1)
INPUT 2
1/4 74LS32
R15
4.7K 1/4 1489 TX
O We 12V
2
im DATA
PC 3 (TO
DATA OINPUT IC11 -a FIG. 2)
1/4 74LSOB
4
O yN% +12V

o 7
1 R16
4.7K
12
DTR 20 10aF 11

J3
OUTPUT
1/4 1488
13
Q Y1
(FROM
FIG. 1)
INPUT 3
1/4 741S32
817
4.7K 1/4 1489
O 1//y- 12V
PC 3

4
10
DATA °INPUT IC11-b
O 12V 9
nr
7 R18 1/4 74LS08
o
4.7 K 5
20
DTR o 4
Y2
J4
OUTPUT
1/4 1488
4
Q (FROM
FIG. 1)
INPUT 4 1/4 74LS32
R19
4.7K 1/4 1489
O 12V
PC 3 10

i
DATA °INPUT
o
4
W ' +12V
7 R20
O PBUSY
4.7K 12
(FROM
DTR O
OUTPUT
20 11
IC10-d 13
IC12c(10
9
Q FIG. 2)

1'4 1488 G3 Y3
1/4 74LS32 (FROM
FIG. 1)
FIG. 3-THE DATA INPUTS of the four channels are ArNoed to-
gether by IC9-a, IC9-c, and IC9-d to drive the pause generator that
is shown in Fig. 2.

95
 sequencer reaches the port that the computer is connected
SI
POWER to, it should lock onto that port, and the printer should
01
begin to print. Printing can be suspended at any time by
cf
-r-° 1N4001
12V simply pressing the pause button. Of course, if your
10
VAC OFF
C10
printer has any memory of its own, printing may continue
0>o' 2200µF
ON D2 + 25V for some time until the contents of that memory are ex-
1N4001 hausted. When the PAUSE button is released printing should
resume.
+12V
Start a print job from the second computer before the
C9
2200µF
first is finished. When the first computer is done the
25V multiplexer will resume scanning. As it reaches the second
computer's port, it should lock onto it and the printer
+5v should begin printing.
R12
C6
22052 Cable notes
C8 C7
01
2200 µF
LED6 The multiplexer should be located with respect to the
16V
1A/
POWER printer and the computers so that overall cable length is
minimized. If a print buffer is being used, for all comput-
ers to benefit from it, it should be connected between the
FIG.4-THE MULTIPLEXER'S POWER SUPPLY: Mount IC13 on a multiplexer and the printer.
small heatsink. Each of the multiplexer's input ports is configured so
that it appears as a printer port. Data is received on pin 3,
provide clearance for soldering. Now install the remaining and pin 2 (which would be used to transmit data back from
components, and then make sure that all polarized compo- the printer to the computer) is simply held at a low RS -232
nents are installed correctly.
The next step is to prepare the case. You'll need to
provide holes on the front panel for Si, S2, and the LED's,
and holes on the back for the five RS -232 connectors and PARTS LIST
the power jack. Label the case with dry-transfer lettering. All resistors are'/4-watt, 5% unless otherwise noted.
Connect (but don't mount) the power jack and the R1-1000 ohms
RS-232 connectors. Input jacks J1-J4 are wired identi- R2-100,000 ohms
cally; output jack J5 is wired differently, so be careful! R3-22,000 ohms
Solder all wires to both sides of the board. Then, after the R4-R6, R13-R20-4700 ohms
jacks are connected, mount them to the case, making sure R7-R12-220 ohms
the output jack is mounted in the correct location. Now Capacitors
wire and mount the switches and LED's. With all compo- C1-C5-0.1 µF, disk ceramic
nents installed, the PC board can be mounted. Secure it to C6-220 µF, 16 volts, electrolytic
C7,C8-0.01 µF, disk ceramic
the bottom of the case using 3/8 -inch standoffs. The com- C9,C10-2200 µF, 16 volts, electrolytic
plete assembly appears as in Fig. 6. Semiconductors
IC1, IC10-1488, quad RS -232 line driver
Testing and use IC2, IC11-1489, quad RS -232 line receiver
The first test is done before connecting the multiplexer IC3-555, timer
to a printer. Make sure the PAUSE button is disengaged, and IC4, IC9-74LS08, quad AND gate
then apply power. The POWER LED should light up, as IC5-74LS138, 3 -to -8 line decoder
should one of the four port -indicator LED's. If that does IC6-74LS74, dual RS flip-flop
not happen immediately, remove power and make sure all IC7-74LS393, 8 -bit binary counter
IC8, IC12-74LS32, quad OR gate
parts were installed in the correct locations, with the IC13-7805, 5 -volt regulator
correct orientation, and that all solder joints are good. D1, D2-1N4001 rectifier
When the board is debugged, resume testing. LED1-LED6, standard
With no printer connected, the first port -indicator LED Other components
should remain lit, indicating that the scanning circuitry is S1,S2-DPDT switch (Thorsen 35-491 or equivalent).
in the pause state, because the multiplexer's ready input S3-four pole DIP switch
(pin 20 of J5) is simply floating. J1-J5-25-pin D connector
Now connect a printer and one or more computers to the Miscellaneous
multiplexer. Be sure that the printer is on, has paper 10 -volt AC wall -mount power transformer, matching jack,
loaded, and is on line. The computer should be configured case, hardware, etc.
Note: The following are available from Renton Prod-
for the printer's baud rate, number of start and stop bits, ucts, P.O. Box 16271, Seattle, WA 98116: etched
and DTR handshaking. and drilled PC board, $19; complete kit of parts
The port -indicator LED's should light up sequentially (including PC board, power supply, all compo-
now, indicating that the multiplexer is checking the input nents, and hardware except for the case), $89.
ports for data to print. Engage the PAUSE button. The LED Washington residents add appropriate sales tax.
that is currently lit should remain so. Now release the All orders add $3 shipping and handling.
PAUSE button; scanning should resume.
Now try printing something from a computer. As the
96
 S1

LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6

O

-C7- C8-
CE C=J -C9 -C10++

o 10
VAC
o INPUT
} IC5

ICS D2

} IC12

, r
'CO
}

tw

3 5 6 7 8 20

0 00 0 0 0 O 0 0
J5 J1 J2 J3 J4

FIG. 5-MOUNT ALL COMPONENTS as shown here.

a "straight" cable could be used.

The port from the multiplexer to the printer should be
wired up with a straight cable. However, check your
printer's documentation just to be sure.

Problems and solutions

You may have problems using the multiplexer with some
software packages. For example, a CAD program might
output some data, do some calculations, and then output
some more data. During the calculations, the multiplexer's
timer may time out, in which case the multiplexer would
resume scanning. It might then lock onto another port and
mix up print jobs.
Another problem might be using a word -processor in a
single -sheet mode, wherein the software pauses after
printing each page and then allows you to insert a new
sheet of paper. Again, during the pause, the multiplexer
could resume scanning.
The solution in both cases would be to increase the
timeout period. First try closing the sections of the DIP
J5 J1 J2 J3 J4
switch; if that doesn't help, you can increase resistor
FIG.6-THE FINAL ASSEMBLY looks like this. values, capacitor values, or both, in the 555 circuit.
level. Pin 4 is the Data Set Ready signal; it is pulled high to Another less -desirable approach is to press the multi-
12-15 volts through a 4.7K resistor. Many computers plexer's PAUSE button when you need to change sheets of
require that pin to be high before they will transmit data. paper. You could also take the printer off line.
The serial port of the IBM PC (and compatibles) is Some programs may tell you that the printer is not ready
configured so that a cable with pin -for-pin connections if the DTR line is low. That could happen if a second print
(pin two to pin two, pin three to pin three, etc.) would be job were started before a first ended. In that case you may
used with a modem. To connect a printer to a PC, a "null find that it is necessary to instruct your program to print
modem" cable must be built. The wiring is shown in Fig. several times until the multiplexer gets around to checking
7. Or you could rewire the multiplexer's input ports so that your port. 4W$
 nd this is the picture of Mars at mid
century: a small planet which three -
fourths is cold desert, with the rest
covered with a sort of plant life (most likely
lichen) that our biological knowledge can-
not encompass...Mars is not the dead plan-
et...but neither can it be inhabited by the
kind of intelligent beings that many people
dreamed of in 1900" (The Exploration of
Mars by Werner von Braun, Willy Ley and
C. Bonestell, 1956).

Introduction
At 8 p.m. on June 20th, 1957, in the
Ballroom of the Hotel Diplomat in New
York City, a meeting was held to coordinate
an expected visit by "the Space People" to
Earth. The meeting was planned by three
people: George Van Tassel, author of /Rode
a Flying Saucer; George King, telepathic
contactee with the extraterrestrials and edi-
tor of Cosmic Force; and Margaret Storm,
author of an occult -oriented biography of
Nikola Tesla entitled Return of the Dove, a
book whose "transcripts (were) received on
the Tesla set, a radio -type machine invented
by Tesla in 1938 for interplanetary com-
munication." By July 1, it was assured, the
"Martians" would have "full scale opera-
tions" in Washington D.C., New York and
"general North American areas." It was
also revealed that "Tesla was a Venusian,
brought to this planet as a baby in 1856, and
left in a remote mountain province in what is
now Yogoslavia [sic]."

Througout his life,

inventor Nikola Tesla
was convinced that he
had received a
message from
beyond the Earth.
Was he right?

In attendance at that meeting was a man

who preferred to remain unnoticed. He was
an FBI agent assigned to continue the grow-

NIK0LA TESLA: ing file on the enigmatic Serbo/Croatian in-

ventor, Nikola Tesla. The Interplanetary
Sessions Newsletter from which the preced-

Interplanetary
ing information was taken came from the
Tesla FBI file released to me through the
Freedom of Information Act.
From this same dossier it is clear that

Communicator?
w Tesla had been watched in his waning years
¢ by J. Edgar Hoover, who wrote, on January
w 21, 1943, during the height of World War II,
xw "A review of the Bureau files reveals consid-
erable information concerning Nikola Tesla
t
w
BY MARC J. SEIFER and his inventions." It was just two weeks

98
after the inventor's death, and Hoover feared oughly practical apparatus." unnecessary, for proper apparatus could
that Tesla's creations, including his well transport huge amounts of energy from one
publicized "death ray," could get into the Tesla: Cosmic Star of the Gilded Age point on the globe to another without any
hands of "the Axis Powers" or the Soviet Kings of Belgium and Serbia, and upper wires.
Union as Tesla's nephew, Sava Kosanovich, echelons in England, France, Germany, The inventor's scheme was actually quite
ambassador to the newly created Commu- Austro-Hungary, Italy, and Russia knew the simple. Tesla realized that this giant elec-
nist country of Yugoslavia was demanding electrical genius intimately. Tesla was an tromagnet called Earth has resonant fre-
that his uncle's estate be shipped to a mu- international figure who moved among the quencies (which today are known as telluric
seum that was being erected there in his very pinnacle of social circles. At the turn of currents). By building giant broadcasting
honor. Hoover wrote that "Kosanovich the century, his American friends, enemies, towers to pump large voltages into the earth
might possibly make certain material avail- and associates included: Col. John Jacob and ambient medium, and by building iden-
able to the enemy." Astor, perhaps the greatest landowner in tically designed receiving stations, both in
New York City and builder of the Waldorf exact mathematical relationships to the size
The Teslascope Astoria, Tesla's lodging for over a decade; of the Earth and its period of frequency,
Margaret Storm's supposition that Tesla industrialists George Westinghouse and terrestrial carrier waves would abolish the
was born from another planet to give our John Hays Hammond; financiers Henry need for transmission lines. Once power was
world such devices as the induction motor, Clay Frick, builder of the Frick Museum, "jumped" that way from, say, a waterfall to
fluorescent and neon lights, remote control, Equitable Insurance director Thomas For- a distant city (i.e., from tower to tower) and
robots, the radio, and also our entire elec- tune Ryan, J. Pierpont Morgan, in restor in converted to more useable frequencies, en-
tric -power distribution system, stemmed many Tesla products and schemes and most ergy could be transported locally by means
from a colorful history of the inventor's ties powerful economic force on the planet, and of conventional wire transmission lines or
to the group -fantasy that life on Mars was a banker Jacob Schiff; editors Robert Under- via resonant receiving devices such as re-
virtual certainty. Storm was also influenced wood Johnson of The Century, T.C. Martin mote controlled clocks, telephones, tele-
by the times (e.g., the mid -1950's interest in of Electrical World who was the compiler of type, and lighting fixtures. At the same
UFO's; the general state of paranoia fueled the first Tesla collected works and a biogra- time, Tesla reasoned, even greater charges
by the fear of communist infiltration, i.e., phy of Edison, and Joseph Collier of Col- set up in such a way as to amplify the natu-
the McCarthy period), her readings in The- lier's Magazine; artists such as composer rally flowing Earth current could transmit a
osophical literature which linked Tesla to Dvorak and writers Rudyard Kipling and significant impulse from this planet to an-
the so-called sixth -root race, (the new spe- Mark Twain; and, of course, inventors such other.
cies of human that was evolving on the plan- as Oliver Lodge, Guglielmo Marconi, Elihu
et), and also to her friendship with Arthur Thomson, and Thomas Edison- Tesla's Interplanetary Communication
Matthews, a bizarre electrician, who as far employer from 1884-85 and arch -enemy/ To prove his wireless scheme and begin
as I know is still alive and still contends that competitor for the next 35 years. plans for inauguration of his World Telegra-
he and his employer, Tesla, had traveled Tesla's invention of the induction motor phy System, in 1899, Tesla moved his opera-
many times to nearby planets aboard a Ven- and alternating -current polyphase system, tions to Colorado Springs where he
usian spacecraft. sold to Westinghouse as a 40 -patent package constructed a laboratory and 200 foot trans-
Storm's choice of 1938 as the date for the for $85,000, plus royalties, in 1888, mission tower with plans of circumscribing
invention of the interplanetary commu- changed the course of history in a dramatic the globe with electrical impulses. One
nicator appears to be a year off. On Tesla's and intimate way. The electrical genius had summer night, while in his wireless labora-
81st birthday, he announced the invention of conceived a means of sending electricity tory high in the Rockies, Tesla was engaged
what has come to be called the more than one mile. in tracking thunderstorms within a radius of
"teslascope." Before Tesla, that was about the extent of 1200 miles with sensitive electrical devices.
An article in the July 11, 1937 New York the budding electric -utility industry's ability During that time he received "three fairy
Times quoted Tesla: "I have devoted much to transport energy, and then only to illumi- taps" on that radar-like apparatus. He spec-
of my time during the last year to the perfect- nate lightbulbs. After Tesla, power to run ulated in a series of articles, one in 1901 in
ing of a new small and compact apparatus by factories could be transported hundreds of Colliers Magazine, that those impulses
which energy in considerable amounts can miles-for example, from Niagara Falls to probably originated from intelligent sources
now be flashed through interstellar space to New York City. Tesla made impossible exterior to the Earth such as from Venus or
any distance without the slightest disper- dreams industrial realities and he was her- Mars.
sion." alded at the time for his brilliance. Re- In the Colliers article, Tesla said "I can
The article went on to describe "a new member that when you see a jewel -lit city never forget the first sensations I experi-
form of tube" able to produce potentials in and surrounding network of illumed surbur- enced when it dawned upon me that I had
excess of 18 million volts. "It is of ideal bia some night, it is a monument to the observed something possibly of incalcula-
simplicity...It will carry heavy currents, Serbian Aladdin who believed in interplane- ble consequences to mankind...the feeling
transform any amount of energy within tary communication. is constantly growing in me that I had been
practical limits, and permits easy control After changing the course of history from the first to hear the greeting of one planet to
and regulation of the same." a future envisioned by Edison backers, another."
Schemes and apparatus for an interplane- which would have required a power station Stating in the same article that he "could
tary communicator for the octogenarian, every square mile across the civilized con- feel the pulse of the globe as it were," the
however, were anything but new. For in- tinents, to one containing just a small electric sorcerer rejected the idea that he
stance, in a 1907 New York Times editorial, number of mighty transmitting sources, may have intercepted a mere earthly mes-
Tesla said, "My magnifying transmit- Tesla decided to go one better. In 1893 he sage from such wireless colleagues as Pro-
ter...can easily bridge the gulf which sepa- pieced the wireless puzzle together from his fessor Marble in Connecticut, Dr. Riccia in
rates us from Mars." Many years later own experiments in cordless vacuum lamps France, Professor D'Azar in Rome, or rival
(1921), Tesla published a short article in the and from research by Sir William Crookes, Guglielmo Marconi who two years later sent
Electrical World entitled "Interplanetary Sir Oliver Lodge, Heinreich Hertz, and Sir "3 fairy taps" across the Atlantic Ocean to
Communication." There, he restated that he William Preece. Tesla discovered that the capture the imagination of the world with
had received impulses stemming from Mars Earth itself could be used to transmit energy. the first transatlantic wireless message.
in 1899 and that since that time had de- Thus, the need for constructing hundreds of During the very months Tesla was per-
veloped "numerous designs...(for) thor- thousands of miles of transmission lines was fecting long-range wireless transmission

99
 (No l[odel.) 4 8heete-Sheet 8. much but disguises it as a denial:
N. TESLA. "I was naturally very much interested in
reports given out about two years ago
ELEOTRIOAL TRAN8M18810N OF POWER.
that...these supposed planetary signals were
No. 382,280. Patented May 1, 1888. nothing else than interfering undertones of
wireless transmitters, and since I announced
that fact other experts have apparently taken
the same view. These disturbances I ob-
served for the first time from 1906 to 1907.
At that time they occurred rarely, but subse-
quently they increased in frequency. Every
transmitter emits undertones, and these give
by interference long beats, the wavelength
being anything from 50 miles to 300 or 400
miles."
To further support the claim that Tesla's
reception of so-called Martian signals was
based upon self-delusion, it is clear that for
at least seven years prior to 1899, Tesla desir-
ed to transmit and receive impulses with
nearby planets. For instance, in 1896, fully
three years before Tesla's alleged ET en-
counter, the New York Sun published a Tesla
interview under the spectacular title "Tesla
May Signal to Mars." The inventor said: "If
there are intelligent inhabitants of Mars or
F1 4 any other planet, it seems to me that we can
do something to attract their attention."
rig Three years later when he arrived in Colo-
r rado, after announcing to the reporters once
again that he could signal Mars, Tesla
fulfilled his own oft-stated boast by being
the first human to hear from the space peo-
ple. Rather than accept the more likely hy-
pothesis, that deep within himself he
probably/possibly knew was the correct one
(i.e., undertone receptions from Marconi),
Tesla opted for the more exotic scenario of
space communications. With each succeed-
ing year, the event became slightly more
exaggerated as it took on more and more
symbolic importance.
The reclusive Balkan inventor clung to
the extraterrestrial motif throughout his life,
repeating the speculation publicly on many
occasions such as in 1931 for a Time Maga-
zine cover story celebrating his 75 birthday:
"Nothing can be more important than in-
tF1TNE88E8: terplanetary communication. It will cer-
I) .!-1 sgwvrnc.,.,.. tainly come some day, and the certitude that
there are other human beings in the universe
8r working, suffering like ourselves will pro-
44179 duce a magic effect on mankind and will
ATTnqM£TSS. form the foundation of a universal broth-
erhood that will last as long as humanity
Tesla's invention of the induction motor and the AC polyphase system changed the course itself."
of world history. His inventions made it possible to transmit electrical power over wires for In no way was Tesla alone in his belief in
long distances. Previously, the maximum distance possible was limited to about one mile. the existence of extraterrestrial intelligence.
The theme of space beings wishing to com-
and radar tracking devices, Marconi was his home at the Waldorf, having received municate with Earthlings can be traced to
experimenting with pirated Tesla oscillators messages from outer space. biblical tales of burning bushes, aerial
in broadcasting the Morse code for the letter A few years later, the awful truth dawned wheels of electrum, cosmic command-
S (i.e., dot-dot -dot) over hundreds of miles upon Tesla: he had received the electromag- ments, and bright stars traversing the sky to
in Europe and across the English Channel. netic echo of Marconi's experiments; how- point out the birth of Christ; or to the my-
Modifying the extraterrestrial encounter, re- ever, that realization was too painful and thological gods of ancient Rome or Greece
cent biographers such as Hunt and Draper, Tesla defended vehemently against it in a such as Zeus, Thor, Hermes, Venus, and
and Cheney, have suggested that Tesla may classic psychoanalytic way: he rationalized Apollo. However, it was modern "scien-
have picked up the vibrations from a stellar by seeking alternative hypotheses and re- tific" and literary fiction that inspired the
quasar. In either case, however, Tesla was gressing to a more -primitive belief struc- more apparent basis for Tesla's supposi-
perceived as returning to New York City and ture. In a 1921 article, Tesla admitted as tions.

100
The Plurality of Worlds
As anyone who has stared at the star-lit
night sky knows, the belief that we are not
alone is a very plausible hypothesis. With
millions of galaxies each containing billions
of stars, there are virtually an infinite
number of potential star systems with satel-
lites similar to our own probably capable of
sustaining life. This idea, called the plu-
rality-of-worlds hypothesis, is a concept that
through the ages has counted numerous sci-
entists among its ranks. Early astronomers
such as Bruno, Kepler, Newton, Laplace,
and Herschel took that position, along with
such modern-day astrophysicists as Willy
Ley, Werner von Braun and Carl Sagan.
Naturally, at the same time, numerous
artists and authors also have seized that no-
tion and fashioned tales of extraterrestrial
travel and intrigue. Two thousand years be- Tesla's experimental
fore Steven Speilberg's movie "ET" earned laboratory in Colorado
over $300,000,000, and the phrase "ET Springs, Colorado.
phone home" became embraced by the pub- Here, while working on
lic, Lucian of Samoa, a contemporary of the his theory of
Greek philosopher Plutarch, wrote The True worldwide power
transmission, he
History, a fable about a sailing ship that was received "three fairy
hurled to the moon by a whirlwind. That taps" he felt were
theme of planetary travel was also echoed by sent by intelligent
Bishop Goodwin in 1638 when he authored life on Mars or Venus.
a story about a man who was towed on a
sleigh to the same heavenly body, and by Camille Flammarion (1873). were written after his more mystical tale,
Cyrano deBergerac 20 years later in his The year 1877 was a watershed for Mar- entitled Stories of Infinity, about a con-
books Empires of the Sun and Voyage to the tian influence on Earthlings. During a par- versation the author had with a comet named
Moon. ticularly close pass to our planet that year, Lumen was published.
In 1835, Richard Adams Locke, of the two fabulous discoveries were made: Mars Flammarion's belief that Mars housed life
New York Sun created a series of front page had its own moons and its surface was stemmed not only from his daily studies
articles on astronomer Sir John Hershel and adorned with a matrix of symmetrical fur- with his own telescope of the mountains and
his alleged discovery of advanced life forms rows. craters of the planet, but also from the more
on the moon. Locke's hoax, which spread The first discovery by Professor Asaph detailed observation supplied by Italian star-
around the world before it was exposed, was Hall confirmed Kepler's supposition of 1610 gazer Giovanni Schiaparelli, who an-
predicated on the fact that Herschel was in that two small satellites circled the "Planet nounced to the world that the Red Planet was
South Africa at the time, and therefore out of of War." That find was of particular impor- etched with geometrical and parallel trails
contact with the press. Hershel's supposed tance because it also supported claims for which he named "canali." Renamed "ca-
discoveries of unicorn -like animals and two Martian moons put forward by novelists nals," instead of the more literal translation
winged humanoids were made via a mar- Voltaire and Johnathan Swift, the former in of "channel," Flammarion boldly sug-
velous (and fictitious) telescope that a philosophical treatise on the Solar System gested that: "these canals may be natu-
weighed 15,000 pounds, was 150 feet long, and the latter in his classic tale Gulliver's ral...or they may be grooves excavated by
and could magnify the heavens 42,000 Travels. In the December 1887 issue of Cor- the inhabitants for the distribution of
times. nhill Magazine, Astronomer Hall wrote dra- water..."
In 1865, Jules Verne reawakened the idea matically that the path of one of the moons After discussing the size of the oceans,
of journeying to the moon, but by the late across the zodiac: "passes...the feet of the (which were no larger than the Mediterra-
1870's, focus shifted to Mars. That planet Herdsman, the body of the Serpent...over nean), the changing climates, and a snowfall
became the most likely candidate for the the Bow of the Archer...the head of the photographed by Professor Pickering of
home of higher beings for fiction writers and Crane, and along the Southern Harvard in 1890, Flammarion concluded "it
astronomers alike, not only because of its fish...Thence the Martian moon passes ath- is obvious...that the world of Mars is...vig-
similarity to the Earth in size and position, wart the Sea Monster and the River orously alive." He also suggested that due
but also because of the dynamic and Eridanus...(and) very near the celestial to the lightness of the atmosphere: "the in-
changeable nature of its surface as seen by equator of the Martian heavens." habitants of this planet may have received
the astronomers. For instance, Mars has ice The widely read monthly concluded that the privilege of flight... May they not rather
caps that grow and diminish with the sea- "Martian moonlight is but small in amount, be like dragon -flies fluttering in the air
sons. and certainly can not go far to compensate above the lakes and the canals?"
The first attempts to create a map of Mars the Martians-as compared with us ter- Influenced rather dramatically by those
and delineate those lines can be traced back restrials." However, no real evidence re- bold words and scientific observations,
to Bernard de Fontana, Christain Huyghens, garding the prevailing theory of the plurality which appeared in Review of Reviews and
and Mr. Cassini in the mid -1600's. More of worlds was obtained. North American Review, the Time Magazine
detailed drawings were done by the dis- That theory was championed by the flam- and Saturday Evening Posts of the Gay
coverer of Uranus, the well-known astrono- boyant French astronomer and psychical re- Nineties, the hypothesis that Mars was in-
mer Sir John Herschel in 1830 and by searcher Camille Flammarion in his classic habited by an advanced civilization was
numerous other scientists such as Mr. works The Plurality of Worlds and Mars and given further observational corroboration by
Schmidt (1862), R.A. Proctor (1867) and Its Inhabitants. Both "scientific treatises" Percival Lowell, discoverer (30 years later)

101
 of the planet Pluto, and builder of a magnifi- interplanetary communication. Tesla dabbling with interplanetary devices.
cent telescope in Flagstaff, Arizona. In an article entitled, "And How Will The year 1938 may actually have been
A descendant of the prestigious Bosto- Tesla Reply To Those Signals From Mars?" chosen by Storm for quite another reason, as
nian Lowell family and brother of the presi- Hawthorne wrote: "Mars, for example, is that was the year John Houseman and Orson
dent of Harvard University, Percival several millions years older than this little Welles terrified America by broadcasting on
captured the front page of the New York dot of an Earth of ours... How we stare at the the radio an updated version of H.G. Wells'
Times with "Mars Inhabitated" headlines Neanderthal skull and try in vain to recon- classic tale, War of the Worlds.
on a number of occasions as he published struct for ourselves a mode of existence the A Gallup poll taken just a few days after
the results based upon his detailed Martian date of which in contrast with the superiority the authentic -sounding broadcast about a
maps in the prestigious science journals in age of Mars over us, is but as yester- Martian invasion, estimated that upward of
such as Nature, and in a magnificent text day...Think what prophecies we are hazard- two million people were psychologically
published by Macmillian entitled The Ca- ing as to the miracles we will achieve before shaken by it. Perhaps fired up by the recent
nals of Mars: "Suggestive of a spider's web the year 2000...Measuring against that stan- success of the Nazi invasion of Austria, nu-
seen against the grass of a spring morning, a dard, then, to what height shall we have merous people huddled by their radios and
mesh of fine reticulated lines over- attained this day in a million years?... waited for Armageddon.
spreads...the globe from one pole to an- "The other day, there happened to Mr. "When the Martians started coming north
other...That Mars is inhabited by beings of Tesla the most momentous experience that from Trenton we really got scared," said
some sort or other we may consider as cer- one listener. Where another person assumed
tain as it is uncertain what those beings may God was finally punishing humans for their
be...Girdling their globe and stretching evil deeds, a third radio buff said in resigna-
from pole to pole, the Martian canal system tion to her nephew, "Well, we might as well
not only embraces their whole world, but it eat this chicken-we won't be here in the
is an organized entity...the first thing that is morning."
forced on us in conclusion is the necessarily Tesla's attachment to the Martian hypoth-
intelligent and non -bellicose character of esis in the short run fueled controversy and
the community which could act as a unit notoriety from admirers and vehement anger
throughout its globe." from competitors and critics. However, in
Not to be undone, novelists and news- the long run, those spectacular claims only
paper columnists embraced this group fan- served to undermine the inventor's cred-
tasy with ardor, In 1896, George duMaurier, ibility and make it more difficult for him to
grandfather of Daphne, wrote the novel The raise the necessary capital for his quite se-
Martian in which he described the tele- rious inventions in the wireless telegraphy
pathic winged beings "that descends from of light, voice, pictures, and power, a project
no monkey," but are able to excavate, adorn which even to this date has yet to be realized.
with marble statues, and irrigate the entire Eventually and steadily, Tesla's well de-
planet. H.G. Wells went one better with in served fame for his patented inventions dis-
his serialized 1897 horror story War of the appeared from the public eye, as the name of
Worlds, when he had terrible extrater- Tesla became associated with the flying
restrials invade and destroy the Earth. saucer crowd, which transformed the Ser-
George Lathrop, son-in-law of gothic writer bian mystic into an extraterrestrial messiah
Nathaniel Hawthorne, combatted the Red whose secret inventions provided the key for
Planet's warriors on the pages of The New direct communication with the "Great
York Journal in 1895 with disintegrating Beings" above.
Located in Shoreham, NY, this tower was
death rays invented by the Wizard of Menlo built by Tesla for experiments in world-
Park, Tom Edison. wide telegraphy and power transmission. Epilogue
Other scientists such as Lord Kelvin sug- The tower never became operational. On May 22, 1983, the batteries on the
gested that the light from New York City Viking probe that landed on the Red Planet
created a clear signal of progress to the Mar- in 1976 burned out. However, the satellite
tians; Elihu Thomson of General Electric has ever visited a human being on this Earth. had served humanity well: Its robot arm,
brought his telescope to his factories in Three soft impulses travelling with the speed affectionately named Mr. Badger, which
order to show his workers the canals of Mars of light were received by Tesla in Colorado scraped up Martian turf and fed it Earth
with their own eyes! from some Tesla on the planet Mars! food, had recorded rather astonishing re-
"...No thoughtful man can have much sults. Expecting an effect which would have
Tesla and the extraterrestrials doubt then, that little as we are aware of it, either increased or decreased the amount of
Quite naturally, Tesla, who like the we must for many ages have been subjected organic material presented, the Martian soil
others, had followed the interplanetary de- to the direct inspection and familiar ap- reacted in such a way that both increases and
velopments for decades, did not want to be proach of the men of Mars and of the other decreases were achieved. As quoted in the
eclipsed by such competitors as Thomson or older planets. They visit us and look us December, 1976 issue of Science, that was
Edison. Therefore, he proclaimed boldly over...year after year; and report at home: called "extraordinary behavior" by NASA
that the time finally arrived: communication They're not ready yet! But at length a Tesla scientists Crofton Farmer and Hugh Kieffer.
with our extraterrestrial neighbors had is born, and the starry men are on the watch Although no organic material was dis-
(probably) begun. for developments. Possibly they guide his covered and the scientists "warrent(ed) ex-
Perhaps due in part to a friendly sparring development; who can tell?" treme caution in reaching a conclusion
match of spectacular articles, the brother-in- Thus, when Margaret Storm suggested concerning the existence of life," Farmer
law of George Lathrop, Philadelphia North that Tesla was a space being, it is clear that and Kieffer were forced to conclude "de-
American columnist Julian Hawthorne her hypothesis was deeply rooted into a spite all hypothesis to the contrary, the dis-
came to Tesla's aid and authored a series of well -ingrained belief that extraterrestrial life tinct possibility remains that biological
rather detailed treatises on the inventor's was a certainty. Her choice of the year 1938 activity has been observed on Mars." Was
philosophy, laboratory, and fabulous elec- was somewhat arbitrary in terms of pin- Tesla, as he usually had been in all his work,
tronic experiments...and also his work in pointing a specific date for over 40 years of simply ahead of his time again?

102
 Thr

MICRO -SIZED

AMPLIFIER
Because it uses surface -mount technology,
this micro -size amplifier is not much larger than
your thumbnail; but it can make your ears super-sensitive.

FRANK POLIMENE

BECAUSE THEY'RE SO TINY THAT THEY CAN using conventional -size, or even min- your own heartbeat. However, if
be tucked directly inside the ear, high - iature amplifiers. you'd like to experiment with a
gain micro -amplifiers add greatly to As a general rule, commercial micro -amp that's so small that it can
the quality of life for the hearing -im- super-gain micro-amps are usually a almost hide behind a quarter, you can
paired. For others-those who can component part of a larger, relatively build an SMT (Surface -Mount Tech-
still hear the TV without cranking up expensive device, such as a hearing nology) version of the amplifier
the volume so high that it can be heard aid, a long-range Big Ear-type micro- shown in Fig. 1 for under $20.
down the block-micro-amps can be phone, or a surface -microphone If the amplifier was assembled
lots of fun, because they make possi- super-snooper device that you can use using standard technology it would
ble projects that couldn't be done to listen through walls or to monitor occupy a space of approximately four
square inches; but, by using surface -
mount technology we will build the

B1
1.5V
R1

1K
Ci
1µF
C2
01
e
R3
150K
C3
33pF
R7
2.7K i 1,
amplifier, including through-hole de-
vices Si and R6, on a 3/4 x -inch PC
1

board. Then we'll show you how to

3V METAL CHASSIS use the micro -amp for both a home -
yW e (IF USED) brewed Big -Ear type microphone and
R2 R5
2K 220K a super-snooper.
6 C4 O1
3
MICI
J
INPUT
3
1µF
6.3V
3904 Really small
8
Rs . The operational amplifier (IC1) and
Si
R4
150K
--
4
tOK. »+
t
J1

1
OUTPUT transistor (QI) shown in Fig. 1, as well
J t L.,

J
as all the capacitors and fixed -re-
sistors, are available in both con-
F.G. 1-THIS AMPLIFIER CAN BE BUILT using either SMD or conventional components. ventional and SMD (Sur-
Even IC1 and Q1 are available in both SMD and conventional sizes. face -Mounted Device) versions.
103
 the front of a Big Ear -type micro-
phone, or carried in a shirt pocket.

The amplifier
Sound detected by the electret mi-
crophone (MIC1) is fed to ICI's input
through resistor R2, and capacitors
Cl and C2. Resistors R2 and R5 deter-
mine the overall stage gain, while C2
partially determines the amplifier's
frequency response. To ensure proper
operation using a single -ended power
supply, R3 and R4 simulate a null
condition equal to half the power sup-
ply's voltage at ICI's non-inverting
input.
FIG. 2-THE SMT AMPLIFIER on the right and the conventional amplifier on the left have The output of IC1 is transferred to
the same performance, although the conventional amp's PC board has room for a battery emitter-follower amplifier Ql via vol-
holder and an output jack. The 20 -DIP IC also serves to illustrate the small size of the SMT ume control R6. The high-Z-in/low-
amplifier. Z-out characteristic of the emitter-fol-
lower matches the moderately high -
fier and a single conventional inte- impedance output of IC1 to a low-
grated circuit. impedance headphone load.

Why so small? Stop and think

While most of us can understand One note of caution on the SMT
the reasons for using surface -mount amplifier. There is a practical limit as
technology in commercial equip- to how small the battery can be. While
ment, it's logical to ask what real val- N -size and larger batteries work fine,
ue or purpose there is for the hobbyist the small 1.5 -volt button cells don't
to use SMT to build what is essen- have sufficient ampacity (current -ca-
tially a simple electronic circuit. pacity) to provide a low -distortion
First, it gives you a chance to build a output. So when figuring how you'll
practical device that could not be easi- house the amplifier, keep in mind that
ly done using conventional -size com- the battery will be about the same size
ponents. Second, using SMT pro- as the amplifier, or larger. Also, the
vides both acquaintance and experi- battery's life depends on the type that
ence with the latest manufacturing you use. You can expect about 12-24
technology used in consumer and pro- hours of continuous use from a small
fessional equipments. watch battery, and two months or
The complete amplifier assembly more from a D -type Alkaline flash-
(Fig. 3) that is used for for both the light battery. Keep in mind that the
=1r, 4-THF rnMPI FTF C1UT AMPI ICIER
including an N -battery and an earphone
Big Ear-type microphone and the distortion is a good indicator of the
jack, can be assembled in a small plastic super-snooper is a good example of battery's condition: A dramatic in-
pill box. why a hobbyist would use SMT con- crease in distortion means that the
struction. The entire amplifier, in- battery is pooped out.
SMD -type capacitors and resistors are cluding its battery and headphone
called chips; hence, an SMD-type re- jack, is so small it can be assembled in Construction
sistor is called a chip resistor. a plastic pill box that can be glued to The most important part of both the
Figure 2 shows the SMT amplifier long-range Big Ear microphone and
on the right and the same circuit, the super -snooper is the SMT micro-
made using conventional miniature amplifier, so we'll cover the amplifier
components, on the left. Note that construction first.
when using conventional parts, the It is almost impossible to create an
PC board gets so large that's its easy SMT foil pattern "by hand," so we
to install the battery holder and an suggest that you use the double -size
output jack for the headphones di- PC -board template shown in PC Ser-
rectly on the board. Obviously, for the vice. Just make certain that you scale
SMT amplifier the battery (B1) used it down by a factor of 0.5. We suggest
for the power supply and the micro- that a professional photographic
phone (MIC1) must be external to the positive or negative be used. Most
amplifier. The 20 -pin DIP IC, also FIG. 4-DROPS OF SOLDERING PASTE copy houses and photographic dealers
seen in Fig. 2, shows the relationship are applied only to the components' sol- can use the PC Service template to
in size between the entire SMT ampli- dering pads. prepare a negative or positive "stat."
104
 also available in syringe -type dispens- shallow aluminum pan or a skillet-
PARTS LIST ers for precise paste delivery. by preheating the pan or skillet with
Most electronic supply stores now the hot plate's temperature control set
Resistors are 1/s-watt chip -type un- carry some variation of SMT solder to HIGH. (Solder melts at approximate-
less otherwise noted. ly 400°F) Pick up the completed
paste as a stock item. But a note of
R1-1000 ohms
R2-2000 ohms caution: Solder paste has a relatively board with tweezers and place it on
R3,R4-150,000 ohms short shelf-life -6-12 months after the pan or skillet with the board's flat
R5-220,000 ohms it's been opened-so purchase the side down (component side up).
R6 -10,000 -ohm miniature control, minimum amount possible and store It will take from 20 to 50 seconds
Mouser ME322-9400 or equivalent it in the refrigerator when not in use. for the solder to melt. Then remove
R7-2700 ohms Mix the solder paste thoroughly. the board quickly to prevent the com-
Capacitors are chip -type rated at Place a small amount on a piece of ponents from overheating. Set the
least 6.3 volts. aluminum foil and allow it to reach board aside to cool. Next, using a
C1, 04-1 µF room temperature. Stir the paste with low -wattage soldering iron, install
02-0.01 µF a toothpick until it reaches a smooth switch Si and volume-control R6.
C3-33 pF Microphone MIC1, battery B1, and
Semiconductors consistency; then, as shown in Fig. 4,
1C1-ICL7611DCBA, operational place small drops of the paste only on output -jack J1, are connected through
amplifier (Intersil) the soldering pads that will be used wires that are hand -soldered to their
Q1-MMBC3904, PNP transistor for the SMD's. respective PC -board terminals.
Other components If in the process of applying the Finally, as shown in Fig. 3, install
B1 -1.5 -volt battery, see text paste to the PC board you mess up, the amplifier, along with B1 and J1, in
J1-Miniature phone jack simply use a toothpick to move or a small plastic pill box.
MIC1-electret microphone, Mouser remove the paste. If the mess is
25LM042 or equivalent beyond control, use a tissue to mop up The reflector
S1-SPDT, miniature switch, Mouser all the paste and start over. Details for building the prototype
10SP018 or equivalent
Miscellaneous: printed -circuit Using tweezers, position an SMD Big Ear-type reflector are shown in
board materials, 1 -oz. solder paste, over its pasted pad and gently press Fig. 6. The reflector is an 11 -inch alu-
32 -ohm stereo headphones, sol- the SMD into the paste. The paste will minum bowl. Actually, unlike a para-
der, etc. hold the part in position until it's sol- bolic reflector-which is really
Note. The following components dered. If positioning the components what's needed-the bowl -shaped re-
are available from BCT Elec- causes the solder paste to slop onto flector used for our prototype Big Ear-
tronics, 8742 Belair Rd., Bal- adjacent traces, use a toothpick to type microphone doesn't sharply
timore, MD 21236: clean the area between the traces. focus the arriving sound into the mi-
Etched and drilled printed -circuit crophone. But the back of the bowl
board, $3.95; IC1, $3.95; com- Soldering does have the approximate shape of a
plete kit including solder paste,
$14.95. Add $1.50 postage and
Position the parts on the PC board small parabolic reflector, and the tube
handling for each order. Mary- as shown in Fig. 5. The SMD's don't that supports the microphone and its
land residents must add 5% have to be perfectly centered on the amplifier housing can be positioned
sales tax. Visa, Am. Exp., MC, pads because the paste will pull them for optimum sound pickup-so the
Discover, call 301-256-0344. into position during the soldering pro- assembly really can function as a
cess. After all the SMD's have been moderately sensitive Big Ear.
placed, prepare the soldering de- The amplifier's cabinet is cemented
If you don't want to go through the vice-a hot plate that's topped with a to the back of a 7 -inch length of 'h-
hassle of making the board yourself, it
can be ordered from the source given
in the Parts List.
Although commercial SMT
printed -circuit assemblies are made
using a variety of methods, most use
some kind of solder mask and/or auto-
matic adhesive dispensing, and a
pick -and -place machine to put the
parts on the board. But you'll have to MIC1

put the parts in place one at a time by

hand, so you'll have to provide a way
to position the component, hold it in
place, and ready it for soldering.
The positioning, holding, and pre -
fluxing is done with a special kind of
solder paste that contains tiny balls of
solder mixed with flux. (The mixture
forms a paste that's similar in con-
sistency to smooth peanut butter.) It is FIG. 5-THE SMT AMPLIFIER'S PARTS LAYOUT. Keep in mind that you're dealing with
usually supplied in jars or cans, but is chip components that are all soldered in place at the same time.

105
 inch copper tubing. Microphone ele- is attained. The actual Big Ear-type
ment MIC1 is secured inside a 3/8-inch microphone prototype is shown in
rubber grommet that's cemented in- Fig. 8.
side the tubing with silicon rubber
adhesive or hot -melt glue. The front Snooping
of the microphone should be flush A super-snooper's amplifier is built
with the front of the grommet, which the same way as for the Big Ear, with
is set back about %a-inch from the in- the exception that the microphone is
put end of the tubing. The details for not installed in a pipe that's attached
the amplifier assembly and the micro- to the amplifier. Instead, using the
phone installation are illustrated in same mounting arrangement shown
Fig. 7. in Fig. 7, install the microphone in a
As shown in Fig. 6, the micro- 1 -inch length of 1/2 -inch plastic tub-

phone assembly is supported by three ing, PVC, or ABS pipe. Connect the
bands formed from 1/4 -inch copper microphone to the amplifier's input
tubing. One end of each band is through approximately two feet of
screwed to the bowl; the other end is shielded cable. Since the amplifier is
soldered to a 1/2 -inch solder-type cop- intended for listening to weak sounds,
per coupling. The microphone's pick- expect to hear considerable distortion
up is optimized by sliding the ampli- if someone speaks directly into the
fier assembly back and forth in the microphone, or even nearby. As a
coupling until the best sound pickup general rule, use the super-snooper
FIG. 8-THE PROTOTYPE BIG EAR -TYPE
microphone. The tubing containing the
1/2 -INCH COPPER TUBING microphone and the amplifier is posi-
AMPLIFIER
tioned for optimum sound pickup.

for monitoring weak sounds, such as

SCREW your own heartbeat, and adjust vol-
Yz -INCH COPPER COUPLING ume -control R6 for the minimum usa-
SOLDERED JOINTS
ble gain.

Unusual snooper
Y INCH COPPER Figure 9 shows an unusual kind of
ALUMINUM--- TUBING snooper; one that you can wear in a
BOWL crowd and no one will be the wiser. A
complete circuit, including the micro-
phone, and a power source, is built

WOOD DOWEL HANDLE

FIG. 6-THE BIG EAR -TYPE MICROPHONE'S REFLECTOR is actually an aluminum bowl,
so it does not have the sensitivity of a parabolic -reflector long-range microphone.

R6 Si

SILICON RUBBER ADHESIVE MICRO AMP

Va OR HOT -MELT GLUE

FIG. 9-USING BUTTON POWER, you can

Jl install the micro -sized amplifier in place of
ig..
MIC1
rig
I 2 PLASTIC PILL CASE
a headset radio.

into both "headphones" of a radio

RUBBER Y -INCH COPPER TUBING,
headset; one of those listen -while -
BATTERY AND
GROMMET PUC,OR ABS TUBING
HOLDER
you -jog radios. Simply strip out the
(SEE TEXT) guts from both earpieces-taking
care not to damage the headphone
unit itself-and install our micro-
FIG. 7-THE SAME TYPE OF MICROPHONE ASSEMBLY is used for both the Big Ear-type
microphone and the super -snooper. The only real difference is the length of the tubing amp, a microphone, and a button -
used to hold the microphone element. cell. R -E

106
03 7
BREAKING AND ENTERING TO PLANT A LIS-
tening device is one way to "bug" a room.
But criminals have turned to high tech-

LASER nology and now use laser beams to

eavesdrop on a window from across the
street.
The sound waves generated by nearby
conversation will cause the glass in a win-
dow to vibrate very slightly. If a laser

LISTENER beam is bounced off the window, its re-

flection will be modulated by the vibra-
tions. All that's needed to hear what is
being said is a demodulating device that
extracts the audio from the reflected laser
Our simple hobbyist circuit beam. That technique is used by sophisti-
cated "surveillance experts," but you can
demonstrates how you can use a light beam to listen in easily duplicate that feat by using a hob-
to anything, anywhere, any time. byist's laser and the inexpensive Laser
Listener demodulator shown in Fig. 1. If
RICHARD L. PEARSON you need something a little more sophisti-
cated, it can be made part of the rifle -
scope aimed laser -bug system that is
shown in Fig. 2.

Early light -wave communications

Communication using a modulated
beam of light isn't a new idea. In the
1880's, Alexander Graham Bell experi-
mented with something he called a photo -
phone; a device that modulated a beam of
sunlight. It had a mouthpiece that concen-
trated sound energy on a reflecting di-
aphragm, which, in turn, modulated a
beam of sunlight that was aimed at the
diaphragm. When a remote receiver con -

WARNING

Extra precautions must be taken be-

cause of a laser beam's intense concen-
trated energy. Among other factors, the
hazards presented depend on the power
density, the frequency of the beam, and
the time of exposure. Guidelines have es-
tablished the classification of lasers. A
brief description of the classification is as
follows:
Class I: Low-power beam. Not known
to produce any biological injuries to the
eye or skin,
Class II: Reserved for visible -light
lasers only. They are limited to less than 1-
milliwatt output. Eye damage will result if
stared into for longer than 1 second. The
normal blink response of the human eye
will provide protection. Eye damage will
occur if the beam is viewed directly by
optical instruments. Direct (specular) re-
flection, as from a mirror, should be con-
sidered to be the direct beam. Diffuse
reflection of the light may be viewed.
Class Ill: Instantaneous eye damage
will occur if exposed to the direct beam.
Class IV: Both direct exposure or direct
and diffuse reflections will produce eye
damage. Exposure of the skin to the beam
is hazardous. The beam is considered to
be a fire hazard.

107
 J1
the laser is operated carelessly by the
C6 OUTPUT user.
R2 330µF
220s2 16V
MM --o Laser basics
C10
SI Although the details underlying the
e RI
C4 $ R6
10µF
generation of laser light are beyond the
2.2K 10µF +16V
16V
I> 22K scope of this text, an understanding of
61
8 7 61 14 12 117101 C9 7 9V
some of the characteristics of a laser beam
C12
10µF as compared to ordinary light will be help-
T1000µF «Z"
Cl IC2 16V IC3 ful in assembling a laser-listener system.
16V
SK3891 LM380 74
C3 Light is considered to be comprised of
001
1 2 3 4 3 41 51 61 7 2 3 4 packages of energy particles called pho-
+1C tons. However, light is also electromag-
C5 R8 netic radiation and behaves like radio
., .
10µF
16V
68µF
16V { R4 R7
'25K waves, although at a much higher fre-
1052 22K
quency. The perceived color of visible
D1 light is determined by the radiation's

in
Q1
RS276--. SK3090 wavelength, which is usually given in mi-
145 ; R5 R3
crometers (one micrometer = 10-9
10K 33K
C8 ._ Cl C7
D C11 meters). The shorter wavelengths are per-
047 330µF,
;IK .047 SK3090 4.7µF
250 ceived as violet, the longer wavelengths as
16V
16V
µal red. The spectrum below the visible
portion is called infrared; the spectrum
above is called ultraviolet.
FIG.1-THE LASER RECEIVER has extremely high gain, so be sure to keep the wiring of Q1 and IC1 The light emitted by a conventional in-
separated from IC2's output and the connections to J1. candescent or fluorescent source contains
a wide range of frequencies, and the pho-
silting of a photovoltaic cell and a sen- trically-generated noise, laser-listening tons are emitted randomly and spon-
sitive earphone was positioned in the devices have an advantage: They can taneously in all directions. On the other
beam, the voice could be heard clearly seemingly hear through walls or closed hand, in a laser light source the photons
from the receiver. The aiming problems windows, and even selectively monitor are released in one direction, at one fre-
presented by the movement of the sun, only one window of a building from sever- quency, making the laser light highly di-
and the interruptions due to clouds and al hundred feet away.) rectional and pure in color. (An analogy
night, probably prevented the commercial Commercially -available laser sound would be to liken ordinary light to the
exploitation of the device. pickups use a laser device having an out- white noise, while the laser is likened to a
But by using coherent light-such as put in the infrared region. Because in- sinewave-a single pure tone.) Since all
that produced by a continuous -wave frared is below the visible portion of the of the light emitted by a laser is coherent
laser-the principles used by Bell's de- light spectrum, it cannot be seen by hu- (has the same frequency), constructive or
vice may again be applied in a meaningful mans. However, some commercial de- destructive interference occurs when two
way. After all, terrestrial lasers aren't in- vices have a power output rating as high as beams of laser light meet at the same place
fluenced in any way by sunlight or clouds. 35 milliwatts. At such a power level and time (Fig. 3).
And perhaps more important, unlike there is clear potential for eye damage if As shown in Fig. 3-a, the beams cancel
acoustic sound-detection devices, lasers someone in the target area un- each other when out of phase (destructive
aren't usually subject to interference ori- knowingly stares into the beam, or if interference). As shown in Fig. 3-b, the
ginating between the sound source and the
receiver.
For example, remote sound-pickup de-
vices in the form of directional micro-
phones have been available for many
years. Unfortunately, any sound gener-
ated between the listener and the sound
source usually renders the device useless
because the interference is heard at the
receiver, and it can be even louder than the
source. On the other hand, lasers are not
sensitive to sound of any kind between the
source and the receiver. However, lasers
may be subject to other kinds of inter-
ference: For example, AC -powered incan-
descent lights can produce a hum; gas
discharge devices such as fluorescent,
mercury, sodium vapor, and neon lights
might produce a buzz; and direct sunlight
might swamp the laser detector device.
Also, where unusually long distances are
involved, air currents can add flicker to
the laser beam, which on windy days can
result in a noise that is similar to that of
blowing into a microphone. (But even w. z-r-vrt LvrIu-rranut Ubt me raser ana me receiver snouia be combmea into an integral u rot so
though sensitive to some kinds of elec- both are aimed together. The telescopic signal provides precision aiming on the target.

108
 WAVE X interferometer, the laser, and the reflective speaker, which permits just about any
target. For super -snooping, a direct reflec- high-fidelity or Walkman -type headphone
tion from the target is preferred because to be used for monitoring. The circuit
the collimated nature (parallelism) of shown in Hg. 1, uses a photo transistor
laser light also allows modulation of the (QI) for a sensor, and has a meter (M1)
ZERO OUTPUT
+ CANCELLATION
beam to occur just as Bell's photo -phone that indicates the relative signal strength
modulated the sunlight. of the reflected laser beam. Because the
meter responds only to the amplitude
The prototype's laser modulation of the reflected laser beam, it
Regardless how we choose to eaves- is unaffected by ambient light and the
WAVE relative intensity of the laser beam. An
Y
drop, we must start out with a laser, so
OUT OF PHASE LIGHT
we'll cover the prototype laser-bug's laser adjustable polarizing light filter can be
a
unit first. It's a Heathkit model ETS -4200 installed in front of Q1 to avoid swamping
WAVE X Laser Trainer, a Helium Neon (HeNe) of the phototransistor by very high am-
unit having an output power of 0.9 milli - bient light.
watts. It has a beam divergence of 1.64 Phototransistor Ql is an inexpensive
milliradians, which produces a spot of type usually called an !R detector, which
light 11/2 -inches in diameter at 200 feet. means that it is specifically sensitive to
Although 0.9 milliwatts doesn't appear to infrared light. Tests comparing the unit
be much power, it can cause extreme eye specified in the parts list with other less
damage if allowed to shine or be re- readily -available and more-expensive de-
REINFORCEMENT flected directly into the eye, or if viewed vices show no measurable differences in
direc'ly through any optical device performance in the prototype receiver. No
WAVE Y such as a telescope, binocular, etc. The base connection is used for Ql because the
IN PHASE LIGHT beam may be safely viewed only if proj- reflected laser light controls the collector
b ected onto a non -reflective surface such current. The audio signal developed
FIG. 3-SINCE LASER LIGHT IS COHERENT, re- as a white sheet of paper. across collector load -resistor R1 is cou-
flections can both cancel and reinforce the di- If you want to keep costs at rock -bot- pled by C2 to voltage -controlled at-
rect beam. tenuator ICI, which has a greater than 30 -
tom, or just want the excitement of a com-
plete home-brew project, another alter- dB gain variation; It serves as both a pre-
beams are additive when in -phase (con- native is to assemble the helium -neon amplifier and as an electronic volume
structive interference). It is the inter- laser shown in the June 1986 issue of Ra- control.
ference between the beams that enables dio -Electronics. Also, if you want to Resistor R2 and capacitor Cl decouple
the movement of any reflecting surface to build a laser from your own design, he- (filter) the power supply voltage to Ql and
be sensed by a device called an inter- lium -neon tubes are often available from IC1. Be sure to take extreme care not to
ferometer. An interferometer is a beam "surplus" distributors. eliminate or accidentally bypass the filter
splitter-usually a piece of partially -mir- because that will cause unstable opera-
rored glass-that deflects only a small The receiver tion. The gain of Ql and IC1 is too great to
part of a beam aimed through the glass. The Laser Listener's receiver is rela- permit non-decoupled operation from the
As shown in Fig. 4, it can be used to tively easy to build and adjust. It is de- power supply.
reflect both the source and reflected laser signed to drive a 4-20 -ohm headphone or The output from IC1 is fed through C4
beams so that their phasing or amplitude
can be compared by a receiver.
The major problems with using inter-
ferometry for eavesdropping is that only a
part of the laser's energy is directed at the
target, limiting the working range, and
the interferometer is sensitive to the diffu-
sion of the sound target's reflections
caused by tremors in the mountings of the

TARGET REFLECTOR

BEAM
SPLITTER

SOURCE

-®
REFERENCE { yiwa osai
REFLECTOR ...,..,,
,,,,,,.

RECEIVER

FIG. 4-AN INTERFEROMETER DIVERTS part of

the laser to the target. Its chief advantage is that
it can sense any kind of movement at all four
points: the source, the reflector, the target, and FIG. 5-A COMPONENT-POSITION TEMPLATE cemented to the pre -drilled PC board will simplify
the receiver. assembly.

109
 potentiometer R5, and the meter are
mounted on the side of the cabinet so as to
INNER FILTER MOUNT GWE FILTER MATL.
encourage the user to face at a right-angle
TO MOUNT to the source of the laser light, thereby
lessening the chance of looking directly
Ot into the reflected beam.
The board is mounted in the enclosure
with four' inch 6-32 machine screws.
#6xY Use %s inch insulated spacers between the
SHT.MTL. board and the enclosure to insure ade-
OUTER FILTER MOUNT
SCREWS quate clearance between the enclosure
INNER MOUNT THRU 1/4 OIA HOLE and the board's foil side. A ground lug
OUTER MOUNT CONCENTRIC WITH INNER
SECT A -A
SOLDER AT BASE ONLY BEFORE ASSEMBLY
located at one mounting screw is soldered
to the circuit -board's ground foil to
provide the ground connection between
FIG. 6-THE OPTICAL ATTENUATOR assembly fits directly over phototransistor Ql. The front is the board and the cabinet. The connec-
painted white to help in aiming the reflected laser beam.
tions between the board and the panel -
mounted components can be #18-22
to amplifier IC2. Resistor R4, and capaci- The enclosure is a 6' x 2' x 15/s inch stranded, insulated wire.
tors C5 and C7, tailor IC2's frequency aluminum cabinet. Phototransistor Q1
response and ensure stable operation with protrudes from one end of that enclosure Optical attenuator
varying drive levels and output loads. and is mounted with a dab of household The optical attenuator assembly, for
The output of IC2 is split into two cement. Position Ql correctly before glu- which construction details are shown in
paths: One goes to output -jack JI via C6; ing it in place and be very careful to not Figs. 6 and 7, mounts over phototransistor
the other feeds voltage -follower IC3, get glue on the surface of the lens. Do not Q1. Figure 6 shows how it's installed over
which drives the meter circuit consisting use cyanoacrylate-based instant glue be- QI; Fig. 7 shows the individual details for
of Dl, D2, C11, R8, and M1. The time cause it might cloud the transistor's plas- each component in the assembly. The
constant created by the values of R8, C11, tic lens. Output -jack J1, gain -control front of the assembly is painted flat white
and MI's DC resistance was selected to
provide a comfortable damping of the
meter pointer's gyrations. The value of
13/6
C11 may be varied to change the pointer's
90'
response. Increasing the value of C11
provides a smoother response; decreasing
5/3.D
Cl l's value will cause the pointer to more
closely track the variations in the laser
beam's modulation.
SAW SLIT 4 PLACES AS SHOWN 3/B .1
Construction PRESS'METAL INWARD FOR SNUG FIT

The prototype receiver was assembled OUTER FILTER MOUNT OUTER FILTER BASE
on a modified Radio Shack type 276-170 MATL r1%2OlA TELESCOPE TUBE, BRASS MATL=1A6 DIA BRASS TELESCOPE TUBE
a
pre -drilled PC board, which has strips of
copper foil on the underside that connect
the component mounting holes. (A board
with a parts -placement template in place,
9%Ifi- o

as shown in Fig. 5, is available from the

source given in the Parts List.) Nothing
about the layout is critical as long as you
follow the usual precaution of keeping the
9/320.0.
.i
¡4
input and output connections reasonably 9/32

separated. INNER FILTER MOUNT INNER FILTER BASE

Check your parts layout against the foil MATL--=9/32 DIA TELESCOPE TUBE, BRASS MATL=1/40.D. TELESCOPE TUBE, BRASS
b
strips on the underside of the board. If it
appears that any will be too long, cut them
FILTER BASE MOUNT
to size before mounting any components. MATL-Y32 SHEET BRASS
Cut each foil strip exactly as long as
needed so that a foil carrying the input
signal doesn't end up running adjacent to
an output connection.
For best results when making connec-
tion to the foils, use a small pencil -tipped
soldering iron and .040 diameter rosin -
core solder. If your layout requires jum-
pers between component mounting holes, r
use #22 solid, bare wire. Insulated jum-
pers are #22 solid, insulated wire. Con-
nections between the copper foils should 2"
be #18 insulated wire because it's a pre- C

cise push -fit for the holes in the specified FIG. 7-All
PARTS OF THE OPTICAL ATTENUATOR are made from brass sheet or tubing. Both the
prototyping board. inner and outer filter bases are soldered to the brass mounting plate.

110
so that the reflected laser beam can be
easily seen. The attenuator is built in such
a way that the phototransistor can see the
laser beam directly, or through a combina-
tion of one or two polarizing filters. When
both filters are in place, rotation of the
large -diameter filter-mount will cause a
gradual decrease in light transmission (to
almost total blockage within 900 of rota-
tion), which allows the receiver to be used
over a wide range of light intensities with-
out swamping the photo detector. Figure 8
shows the installed assembly and the two
filters.
The attenuator has an inner filter and an
outer filter made from brass telescopic
tubing. Each filter consists of two sec-
tions: a filter base that is soldered to small
mounting plate made from brass sheet
(the painted target), and a filter mount that
slips over the base. Polaroid filters cut
from neutral -tint polarized sunglasses are
cemented to one end of each filter mount FIG.8-THE ATTENUATOR'S mounting plate is installed directly over photoresistor Ql. The inner and
to complete the attenuator. When com- outer filters are slipped into position when needed.
plete, the entire optical attentuator's
mounting plate is secured on the en- Testing Due to the varying reflectivity and dis-
closure over phototransistor Q1. We advise that a small speaker be used tances of the targets, the intensity of the
rather than headphones for the initial light falling upon the detector may vary
tests; then, if a wiring error or a defective considerably from setup to setup. That
PARTS LIST component has created an audio oscillator will be readily apparent if the collector
rather than an amplifier, your ears will not voltage of QI is measured while the il-
All resistors are 1/4 -watt, 5% unless be assaulted by a high-level tone or lumination level on QI is adjusted. At
otherwise noted. squeal. some point of increasing illumination, the
R1-2200 ohms With the volume control fully coun- collector voltage will fall sharply and the
R2-220 ohms terclockwise and power -switch SI set to audio output from the receiver will drop or
R3-33000 ohms off, install the battery and connect the disappear. The small -diameter polarized
R4-10 ohms speaker. Turn the unit on and point it to- filter should then placed over Q1. If more
R5-10,000 ohms, miniature ward a source of daylight (not direct sun). light attenuation is required, slip the
potentiometer with SPST switch
R6, R7-22,000 ohms
Advance the volume control to maximum. large -diameter filter in position and rotate
R8-25000 ohms, trimmer potentiometer Correct operation is indicated by a frying it for maximum sound output.
Capacitors noise that sharply diminishes when the
C1, C6, C9, C10-330 µF, 16 volts, light is blocked. The meter-sensitivity
electrolytic control, R8, should then be set so that the
C2, C4-10µF, 16V volts, electrolytic meter's pointer just begins to move off the
C3-0.001 µF, 50 volts, ceramic disc zero calibration. Decrease the gain and
C5-0.68 µF, 16 volts, Tantalum point the receiver toward an AC -powered
C7, C8-0.047 µF, 50 volts, ceramic disc
light source, such as an incandescent or
Cii-4.7 µF, 16 volts, electrolytic
fluorescent light, or even an LED driven
C12-1000 µF, 16 volts, electrolytic
Semiconductors by an audio oscillator. Those sources
IC1-SK-3891 attenuator should produce a loud hum or tone.
IC2-LM380 audio amplifier Sound will be heard if the LED is driven
IC3-LM741 op -amp from an audio amplifier at the correct
Q1-TIL414, NPN phototransistor (Radio level. If everything checks OK, assemble
Shack 276-145 or equal) the enclosure.
DI, D2-SK-3090 germanium diode, or
equivalent Remote sound detection
Other components B1 -9 -volt tran- To use the receiver as a remote sound
sistor -radio type battery
J1-miniature phone jack pickup, you will need a laser and a reflec-
M1-250 µA meter, panel mounting tive surface that sound waves will cause to
S1-SPST switch, part of R5 vibrate; the receiver must be positioned so
Miscellaneous-Cabinet, Pre -drilled PC it can "catch" the direct reflection of the
board, brass sheet and tubing, wire. laser beam (Fig. 9). A particularly effec-
solder, etc. tive reflector for experimental use is a
The following is available from Dirijo small piece of mirror (about %4 x 'A inch)
Corp., Box 212, Lowell, NC 28098. A cemented to the center of a speaker cone
drilled prototype -board with a com-
ponent layout overlay in place, (see Fig. 10). There is no connection made
model LXVR-1. $5.00 plus $3.00 to the speaker. The movement of the
postage and handling. NC residents speaker cone caused by sound waves is FIG. 9-A WIDE RANGE of reflection angle is
please add appropriate sales tax. transferred to the mirror-reflector, which possible. The laser source and the receiver can
in turn modulates the laser beam. even be at the same location.

111
 SCOPE MOUNT BASE

OVERSIZE HOLE ,IIII', WASHER

LASER CASE

FIG. 12-DETAIL FOR THE RECEIVER mounting

plate. An oversize hole mounting base allows
coarse adjustment of the scope assembly. Use
an oversize washer on both sides of the hole,
and a lockwasher at the laser's case.

FIG. 10-FOR EXPERIMENTAL USE, an effective reflector can be made by gluing a small piece of
mirror to the center cone of a speaker. Also shwon are Mylar, at left, and glass, at left, reflectors.

Thin is in remove the modulation to listen in. Dou-

The thinner and more responsive to ble -pane glass and storm windows tend to
sound the reflective medium is, the great- greatly reduce sound transmission to the
er the laser bug's sensitivity. Most win- outer glass. It is possible, however, to aim
dow panes will work. Moving the beam to through the glass to an object within the
different spots on the glass can make a room, such as the glass front of a china
dramatic difference in the sensitivity. cabinet or a hanging picture. The returned
For testing, no additional optics are reflection is usually modulated.
needed for the receiver, Set up any conve- FIG. 13-THE AIMING TARGET for the scopes
nient reflector-the mirrored speaker, or At long range laser assembly should be made of dull -finish
even an embroidery hoop holding plastic At ranges greater than 100 feet or so, or paper or cardboard. Dimension "A" is the mea-
wrap or Mylar film (see Fig. 10)-aim the when a high ambient light level obscures sured distance between the laser beam and the
laser at the reflector, and then position the optical center of the scope. Dimensions "B" and
the reflected beam, a means must be "C" are whatever you think will be convenient.
reflector so that the beam bounces back to provided to accurately aim the receiver to The aiming cross -marks should be made with a
the receiver. If you speak in the room, or the reflected laser. As shown in Fig. 11, soft pencil or a medium -point marking pen.
play a radio or a tape recorder, the sound the receiving unit of our prototype laser-
will be heard in the receiver's head- bug system uses a telescopic gunsight; tails for the prototype mount are shown in
phones. Another test can be done by mod- and that assembly is, in turn, mounted Fig. 12.
ulating the laser with a 1 -kHz tone while directly on the laser housing as shown in The scope -to-laser alignment is done in
having an assistant move the target reflec- Fig. 2 so both the laser and receiver can be two stages. First, the distance from the
tor for maximum tone reception-as indi- aimed as a single unit. center of the laser beam to the center of
cated by maximum volume in the highest The design of a combination receiver the scope is measured and used as the
meter reading. and laser mounting bracket will depend spacing for the cross marks of the target
A non-adjustable target, such as a win- on the particular laser and scope that's shown in Fig. 13, which is made from
dow pane, requires that the operator select being used. In general, the mounting dull, white cardboard. Then, the target is
a site where a direct reflection can be bracket should be sturdy and have provi- taped to a wall about 50 feet away from the
caught. That can be done from hundreds sions for coarse elevation and azimuth ad- laser assembly. Next, with the scope's
of feet away if conditions are right. Use justments; all gun scopes have provisions cross -hair adjustments at the center of
the modulated beam for setup, and then for fine adjustments. The adjustment de - their range, position the laser beam at the
center of the lower cross. Looking
through the scope, adjust the scope's
mounting bracket so that its cross -hairs
are close to being centered on the target's
upper mark. Making sure that the laser
beam stays centered on the lower mark,
tighten the mounting bracket's nuts and
use the scope's fine adjustments for the
final alignment. In this instance, the di-
ffuse reflection of the laser beam from the
card should present no eye hazard.
When using the laser/scope assembly,
remember that at a range of under 300 feet
you must compensate for the aiming error
introduced by the offset between the
scope and the laser beam centerlines.
Again, let us stress that under no
circumstances should the laser beam or
its direct reflection be viewed through
FIG.11-AT LONG DISTANCES, a telescopic gun sight is used to accurately aim the receiver. That optical devices of this type because se-
assembly is then strapped to the laser, as shown in Fig. 2, so that both units can be aimed together. vere damage to the eye can result. R -E
112
 Control the environment with your PC and our simple interface.

STEVEN J. FRICKEY

PC's aren't just for word processing, spreadsheet analy- and power -distribution center, and one or more control
sis, and database management. In fact, when a PC can nodes connected in parallel over a four-conductor bus. The
collect data from remote locations it can make decisions conductors carry power and ground, and the transmit and
based on that data, so it becomes a powerful tool for receive signals.
controlling the environment. The problem is that special I/ A control node is shown in Fig. 2. Each node has a
O cards might be required, and they typically cost hun- unique 7 -bit address that is set via DIP-switch Si, which
dreds of dollars. Also, I/O boards usually require installa- connects to the seven address lines (A0-A6) of IC3.
tion within the PC, taking up yet another slot. To communicate with a node, the software on the host
In this article we will describe the hardware and soft- PC must first transmit an address byte, over the common
ware of an I/O control system that can be implemented for receive line (RI). Each node on the bus then compares the
less than $50.00, will interface to any personal computer received address against its own address, which is set by
through an RS -232 port, is modular, and has full duplex the DIP switch. If the values match, then that node will
operation for both input and output. accept the control byte that follows
The heart of the system is a little-known special-pur- The control byte is latched until a new address and m
pose IC made by Motorola, the MC14469. The MC14469 control byte are received by the node. The control and m
X
is an addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter that is address bytes are distinguished by the value of the most m
especially well -suited for remote data collection and con- significant bit.
trol. The control data may be used in conjunction with two m
The control software is written in Microsoft "C" for the other MC14469 control signals to direct the activity of the z
IBM PC and compatibles. Adapting the software to other node. The other control signals are Valid Address Pulse m

compilers and computers should be easy. (VAP), which is generated after a valid address is detected, cn

and Command Strobe (CS), which is generated after a _

D
z
System overview valid control byte, has been received.
co
Figure 1 shows an overview of the system. It's composed Data transmission back to the host PC is initiated by
toggling the SEND input (pin 30) from low to high. The Ó
of a PC, control software, a combination RS -232 interface
113
 WINDOW SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
PASSIVE IR

ON/OFF
OPERATION
ANALOG PUSH
INPUT BUT-ON

NODE
A147

NODE
2

PERSONAL COMPUTER
RS -232 INTERFACE
AND
AND POWER SUPPLY
CONTROL SOFTWARE

NODE
N

FIG. 1-THE RS -232 INTERFACE buffers communications be-

tween the host PC and all nodes.

data that is present on the sixteen input pins (IDO-ID7 and voltage to +5 volts for powering the logic circuitry. Be-
SO-S7) will be transmitted back to the host after SEND is cause the + 12-volt line is also available at J4, you can
toggled. Data is sent one byte at a time; we'll discuss the attach off-the -shelf alarm -system components, such as
details shortly. passive infrared detectors, buzzers, beepers, etc.; all of
After receiving the data from the selected node, the host which typically operate at + 12 volts.
software could compare that value against the previous The MC14469's baud-rate clock can be generated inter-
value from the same node, perform some action based on nally across pins and 2, or an external clock can be fed
1

the comparison, and then continue on, polling the next directly to pin 1. The maximum baud rate (4800) is re -
node.
By creating an appropriate interface between external
devices and any given node, the software can be tailored to NODE -CIRCUIT PARTS LIST
a number of monitor and control situations. For example, a
IC1-74ALS161, synchronous 4 -bit counter
IC2-74ALS05 or open -collector hex inverter
number of inputs could be connected to door and window IC3-MC14469, addressable asynchronous receiver/
switches. If one of those switches were opened before a transmitter
master switch, an alarm might be sounded. IC4-7805, 5 -volt regulator
IC5-4-MHz TTL crystal oscillator
Node circuit RP1, RP2-4700 ohms, 10 -pin SIP
Connector J3 provides eight pulled -up input lines S1 -8 -position DIP switch.
(S0-S7) that may be driven by reed switches, pushbut- C1-0.33 µF, 12 volts, tantalum
tons, mercury switches, tilt switches, relays, and other C2-22 µF, 25 volts, electrolytic
mechanical -switching devices. That connector also pro- C3 0.1 µF, monolithic ceramic
vides eight ground lines for attaching lead wires. J1 -9 -pin D, female
Connector J4 provides access to the seven output-con-
J2 -9 -pin D, male
J3-16 -pin, PC -mount, screw terminal block
trol lines (C0-C6) of the MC14469, eight more input lines J4-26 -pin dual -row header strip
(IDO-ID7), and various control signals. To use the node in RS -232 INTERFACE PARTS LIST
its basic configuration, jumpers should be installed across IC1-1488, quad RS -232 line driver
pins 9 and 10, 11 and 12, and so on, through pins 25 and 26. IC2-1489, quad RS -232 line receiver
Later on, we'll show how J4 can be used to interface an 8 - R1-4700 ohms, 1/4 watt, 10%
bit A/D converter to a node. J1 -25 -pin D, male
As shown in Fig. 2, the four-conductor bus runs straight J2 -9-pin D, male
through each node from J1 to J2. One line is for ground, J3 -4-pin power connector
Miscellaneous: Power supply with -±12- and + 5 -volt
another for + 12 -volts DC, one for the common transmit outputs, cases, interconnecting cables, etc.
0 line (TRO), and another for the common receive line (RI). The following are available from Steven J. Frickey,
0 The overall length of the bus (from the RS -232 interface to 3661 North Lena Ave., Boise, ID 83704 (FAX:
0 the last node on the bus) depends on the degree of elec-
z 208-377-9410); MC14469P with spec sheet and ap
z trical noise in the operating environment. The author has note, $15.47; Node PC board, Rev 2.0 with assem-
rn successfully operated three nodes, using 20 -gauge un- bly notes, $19.40; Interface PC board, Rev 2.0 with
w shielded cable, at a cumulative length of 200 feet. assembly notes, $19,40; Monitor V2.0 software
I-
zw With a seven -bit address, the possible number of nodes with source code for IBM PC's and clones, $10.00;
in a system is 127, but that is not a practical limit. Real- Node kit Version 2, $56.37; Interface kit, Version 2,
E istically, the number of nodes is limited by the amount of original option, $28.29; Interface kit Version 2,
w MAX232 option, $34.19; Prototyping board Kit,
a current supplied by the + 12-volt power source. Each node
xw $25.56; DC -DC converter kit, $15.97. All orders
w (with no expansion circuitry) draws 50 mA. should include $3.50 for shipping and handling.
IC4, a 7805 voltage regulator, drops the + 12 -volt bus
114
stricted by the + 5 -volt supply. The required clock rate is A local reset is generated by each node at power up by
64 times the baud rate, or in this case, 307.2 kHz. an RC circuit consisting of 22-µF capacitor C2 and a 4.7K
Because that's a non-standard frequency, the circuit resistor inside RP1. The reset signal is also provided at J4,
uses a readily available 4-MHz TTL clock oscillator should your expansion circuitry require access to that
(IC5), a 74ALS05 (IC2) open-collector inverter, and a signal.
74ALS161 (ICI) four-bit counter to divide the 4 -MHz The 7 -bit address for each node is set on pins 4 through
signal by 13, thereby providing a 307.69 -kHz signal. The 10 (A0-A6) of IC3. Table 1 shows the relationship be-
communications protocol is fixed at one start bit, eight tween switch settings and node numbers.
data bits, an even parity bit, and one stop bit. So at 307.69 The voltage supplied to IC3 can range from 4.5-18
kHz, the maximum sampling time error over the entire 11 volts. At five volts, the output drive current of each pin
bits is 35.7 µs, well within one-half of a data bit period, (hH) is typically 0.35 mA, providing a fan -out capacity of
which is 104 µs at 4800 baud. 17 ALS devices. The output -high voltage (VoH) is typ-
A second gate on the 74ALS05 (IC2-d) inverts the serial ically 5.0; the low voltage (VOL) is typically 0.0. The
data from IC3 and drives the common transmit line (TRO). input high voltage is typically 2.75; the input -low voltage
The pull-up resistor for IC2-d is actually located in the is typically 2.25. For more information on the MC14469,
RS -232 interface circuit (shown in Fig. 3 as R1). The open - consult CMOS/NMOS Special Functions Data, Motorola
collector outputs of all nodes are pulled up by that resistor, Inc., 1984, and Application Note AN806A, Operation Of
which makes it a wired -OR circuit. The MC14469, Motorola Inc., 1984.

12V
2
TRO
3 3
RI
4
GND

J1 IC4 5 15 J2
+ 18
BUS IN 7805 IC2-c CO OD 11 BUS OUT
OUT o D
/s 74ALSO
Cl C3 5 12

I` .33
GND
j3
+ 5V
C

B
IC1
74ALS161
OC
13

IC2-d
A
GAIL_
%6 74ALS05
1
14 CL
5V ET 9
IC5 cc D C EP
4 -MHz 2 101 71161
TTL CLK
+ 5V
1 GND OSCILLATOR
RP1
4.7Kx9 C2
J4
CONNECT PINS 1, 3, 11, 13,
+ 5V 22µF 19 21
o O r +12V
ANO 14 OF IC2 + 5V
TO +5 VOLTS
Si
NODE
# # #1* 25V

OSC1
RI TRO
VAP
3

5
o 0
o o-6
4
GND
CLK
112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Voo 40 7 8 RESET
ADDRESS
OSC2 0 0
9 10 IDO
RESET CO 39
CO
0 0
OO Cl
38 Cl 11
o 12 101
15
J3 Cl/O 37 C2 13 14 102
AO C2 O O
DATA IN 3 CO Al C3
36 C3 15
O O
16 103

1
4 UO 13
6
A2
IC3
C4
35 C4 17
0 o 18 104
2 ----(Y/O 12
A3
MC14469
C5
34 C5 19
o o 20 105

3 6 CO 11
8
A4 C6
33 C6 21
0 o 22 106

4 7 Cf/0 10
9 32 + 5V . 23
0 0 24 107

5
-4 8 0' <
10
A5

A6
CS

VAP
31 CS 25
0 0-26 SEND
6 29 30
SO SEND
7 28
S1 IDO
8 27 12
S2 IDI
9 -0 26
S3 102
13
rn
10 25 14 m
S4 103 X
11 15
24
S5 ID4 m
12 23 16
S6 1D5
13 22 17 m
S7 106 Z
14 +5V 20
Vss 107 m
15
RP2
16 4.7K x 9 S
D
Z
FIG. 2-THE HEART OF A NODE is the MC14469, an addressable W
O
UART. When a node is addressed, data present on pir s 11-18 and O
22-29 is transmitted to the host. The address is set of pins 4-10.
115
 5V 12V -12V 5V

J1 RI J2
TO PC
1 yW-4_7K TO BUS

IXo- IC1
1488
r.

9
5V
p 12V
2 2
RXO O TRO
7 3
ONO o o RI
2 5V
DIR 0 GND
12V
J-
14

J3
10
POWER
-12V +12V 5V

11

FIG.3-THE RS -232 INTERFACE routes 12 -volt power to the

nodes, and buffers data between the nodes and the host PC.

25-P1N 9 -PIN
occur within eight bit times after the generation of either
XT -STYLE
J1
AT -STYLE VAP or CS. At 4800 baud, eight bit times provides a

-
CONNECTO CONNECTOR
maximum of 1.667 ms.
o- 2

RX
3
0 Receipt of a control byte generates a Control Strobe
3
O (CS) pulse on pin 32. In our circuit, CS is normally
TX
o
7 7 5
o connected to SEND through J4. In this configuration, data
GND
o- 20 20 8
o will be transmitted to the host as soon as a control byte has
DTRO
-
o L been received.
RS 232 What is the minimum interval between events that this
INTERFACE
system can detect? The time it takes to transmit and
FIG. 4-CONNECT AN XT TO J1 of the RS -232 interface as shown receive data from the same node twice, which works out to
at left, and to an AT as shown at right. (1/4800) X 11 bits/byte x 8 bytes, or about 18 ms.
Realistically, the minimum time is much longer, at least
Node operation on the order of hundreds of milliseconds, because of the
The communication software first transmits a seven -bit amount of time the software processing takes, especially
address that is received simultaneously on pin 19 (RI) of all when relatively slow I/O devices (disk, BIOS video rou-
MC14469's in the system. Each node then checks the state tines, printer) are being accessed. Just don't try to detect
of the most significant bit. If it's high, then the remaining more than three events per second.
seven bits are compared against the address set on A0-A6.
If the values are identical, then VAP is generated on pin 31. RS -232 interface and power supply
VAP is not used in the node circuit shown in Fig. 2, but it is Figure 3 is the schematic for the RS -232 interface,
used internally by the MC14496 to latch a control byte on which uses a 1489 (IC2) for the line receiver and a 1488
output pins 33-39 (C0-C6). Control-byte data is latched (IC1) for the line driver. Pin 2 of J2 is the common transmit
only after a valid address has been received, and it remains line (TRO) that receives data from the open -collector
latched until another address byte is received. output of each node, and RI is the pull-up resistor.
Transmitting data back to the host PC is accomplished Power is supplied to the system via four-pin connector
by toggling pin 30 (SEND) high. After receiving the J3. As stated earlier, a single node draws about 50 mA
SEND pulse, the MC14469 will transmit, via pin 21 from the + 12 -volt supply. Low-current sources of + 5 and
(TRO), the data present on pins 11-18 (IDO-ID7), fol- -12 volts are also required.
lowed by the data on pins 22-29 (S7-S0). The only stip- Figure 4 shows the cable wiring required to connect the
ulation is that the rising edge of the SEND pulse must RS -232 interface to a 25 -pin XT-style port (on the left),
and to a 9 -pin AT-style port (on the right).
TABLE 1-NODE ADDRESSES
Assembly and testing
Node
127
A6
HHHHHHH
HHHHHH
A5 A4 A3 A2 Al AO Figures 5-a and 5-b show how to mount the components
on the PC boards. The Node board, shown in Fig. 5-a, is a
126
125
124
HHHHH
HHHHH LH L
L

L
double -sided board. You can use the patterns shown in PC
Service to build your own, or you can purchase the board
from the source mentioned in the Parts List. The pattern
2
1
L
L
LHL
LLH L
L
L
L
L
L
for the RS -232 board is also shown in PC Service, but
because it is so simple, a commercial product has not been
L L L L L L L
made available.
0
After you assemble the system, test it using the sample
116
 messages corresponding to the state of the input lines of J3
at startup, and it should also include messages indicating
that it sensed the shorts.

A/D expansion example

--.--- Figure 6 shows how to interface an eight -bit analog -to-
digital converter (the ADC0801) to a node via connector
J4. The component labeled Input Transducer is shown as a
5K potentiometer, but in real life it might be a temperature
sensor, a pressure sensor, etc.
113
In this circuit, CS initiates the analog -to-digital con-
version (WR), and the end -of-conversion (INTR) pulse
from the ADC initiates data transmission to the host by
ICI
toggling the MC14469's SEND input.
The ADC uses the 307 -kHz node clock. At that rate, a
-RI- single conversion will take at most 240 µs, which is well
25
J2= within the 1.667 -ms time limit between the CS and the
).)))
13
b SEND pulses.
a
The software
FIG. 5-MOUNT ALL COMPONENTS on the node circuit board as
shown in 5-a and mount all components on the RS -232 circuit Because of space limitations, we are unable to print the
board as shown in 5-b. 600-line C source listing here. However, we will give an
overview of how the software works. In addition, both
executable files and the full source code have been posted
J4
5V
on the RE-BBS (516-293-2283). Download file
0 0--2- CS Vcc
20 RS232MON.ARC at 300 or 1200 baud, eight data bits,
so one stop bit, and no parity. (Source and executable files of
1

4 ONO
RD CLKR
5 0 6 CLK 3 an additional program that demonstrates use of the A/D
0 0 WR CLKIN
converter is also included.)
7
9
o o
0 0
=
10 IDD
5

18
INTR

VIN
The program is a simple event -logging system that
101 17
DO
continually polls a single node, logs the date, the time,
11 12
0 DI VIN and the input device(s) that changed state since the last
102 16
13
0
14
D2 VREF time that node was polled. Execute it by typing the name of
103 15
15
0 16
D3 AGND the program followed by the number of the serial port
104
17
0
18 14
04 DGND being used (0 = COMI, 1 = COM2, etc.).
19
0- 20 ID5 13
D5 The program communicates directly with the serial port
21
0 o
22 106 12
D6 INPUT through BIOS interrupt 14h. That means the program can
5V 2-0 24 ID7 11 TRANSDUCER reconfigure the port -communications protocol, read a
0 D7

'.S 250 o
26 SEND ICI byte, write a byte, and check the status of the port. Several
ADC0801 error conditions can also be determined when using the
J interrupt. If an error does occur during execution, the
program stops and a message is displayed on the screen
indicating the type of error.
IC2 a
IC2 b 4
2
74ALSO4 In the program, each node is represented by a data
74ALSO4 structure that contains the node address, the initial value of
the control byte, a mask value indicating which bit values
to respond to, a copy of the last data values returned from
the node, and sixteen other fields that correspond to the bit
FIG. 6-THE OPTIONAL AID CONVERTER is shows here. CS
from the Node board starts the conversion process; INTR from values returned from a node. The sixteen fields contain
IC1 here informs the Node that the process is complete. names that identify what a bit represents, what its on state
is, and what its off state is.
program that will be discussed shortly. Apply ± 12- and When the program starts, each record is accessed se-
+ 5 -volts DC to the RS -232 module, and connect it to your quentially, and the corresponding node address and con-
PC and to a single node configured as address O. Then run trol byte are sent. For each node, required functions are
the test program. If you receive any error messages (es- initialized, communications checked, and initial condi-
pecially a time-out error), check your cabling carefully- tions logged in a disk file called MONITOR.LOG.
the chances are that the RS -232 module hs not been After initialization the program begins to loop, sequen-
connected to your PC properly. tially polling each node and checking the return values
When the software seems to be running correctly, tem- against the previous values from the same node. If a new
porarily short several of J3's even -numbered pins to value is different from a previous value, and if those
ground, one at a time. Then terminate the test program particular bits that indicate a difference are not masked,
according to the directions given on the screen. An ASCII then the event is logged in the log file with the date and
text file called MONITOR. LOG should be present in your time. Polling continues in that way until the user termi-
current directory. That file should contain a number of nates the program by pressing a key..CD«
117
 L J
o L

COPING
WITH
COILS
Coils of any kind can be
hard to dig up. So design and
build your own by using our BASIC program.

DAVID E. POWELL, KA4KNG

BACK IN THE "GOLDEN AGE" OF ELEC- es through a wire it creates a circular In a sense, the coil stores electrical
tronics projects, even the local radio - magnetic field around the wire. Since energy in the magnetic field. Remov-
repair shop often stocked an extensive the magnetic field is weak and spread ing the source of electricity from the
assortment of RF coils. And most cer- out along the entire length of the wire, coil causes the magnetic field to col-
tainly, the major mail-order dis- we would have a hard time putting the lapse around the coil. As the field
tributors, such as Lafayette and Allied field to a good, if any, use. collapses, the magnetic lines of force
Radio, stocked almost every inductor But if we wind the wire into a coil, cross the wires of the coil, converting
used in the civilized world. Today, we still have the same amount of over- the stored magnetic energy back into
however, there is little available in all magnetism; only now, instead of electrical energy. The net result is that
stock RF coils, and those that do exist being distributed along the length of the current developed by the collaps-
can take a lot of effort to locate. wire, the magnetic field is concen- ing magnetic field tries to keep flow-
Although we have yet to develop an trated into an area equal to the length ing through the coil for a short period
inexpensive solid-state substitute for and diameter of the coil. By con- of time after the electrical source is
coils, you don't necessarily have to centrating the magnetic field into a removed. Reconnecting the source
give up on a radio-frequency project smaller space, we have created a mag- voltage has the opposite effect; that is,
because your local parts distributor no netic field that is sufficiently strong to as the magnetic field builds up, the
longer stocks RF coils. Simply design be useful. lines of magnetic force cross the wires
and build the needed inductor your- But a coil having a specific length, of the coil in the opposite direction to
self! If you have access to a computer, and shape produces a specific mag- the current developed by the collaps-
designing the coil shouldn't be any netic field (see Fig. 1). To increase the ing magnetic field. That creates an
more complicated than typing your magnetic field, it's necessary to in- opposing force to the current flowing
name if you use the BASIC program crease the current flowing in the wire through the wire. In other words,
shown in Listing I. by increasing the voltage applied when the applied voltage is either AC
In fact, the only problem you might across the coil. or interrupted DC, the coil (also
have will be to locate the needed wire called an inductor) resists a change in
type or size-because certain wire b electrical current, but not the actual
sizes can be hard to locate. But even current itself.
that problem is easily resolved by our From the previous discussion, it
program, because you can keep plug- would seem that the single most im-
ging in the data for available wire portant thing we can measure about an
types until the computer comes up inductor is the strength of its magnetic
with the needed design. field. In a sense, that is true. However,
the strength of the field depends on
Electricity and magnetism FIG. 1-THE INDUCTANCE of a coil is de- conditions external to the inductor,
It is a basic characteristic of elec- termined by its physical parameters (a, b, namely the amount of voltage applied
tricity that when electric current pass - and c) and the number of turns to it. For this reason, the term Hen -
118
ry-named after the American phys- The inductor more turns means more wire, which
icist Joseph Henry-was coined to But conditions other than the ap- means a greater concentrated magnet-
describe the electrical characteristics plied voltage can affect the strength of ic field.

of inductors. The inductance of a coil the magnetic field. If we want to in- Increase the diameter of the coil,
is one Henry when a current variation crease the strength of the field without because a larger diameter means more
of one ampere -per-second induces increasing the applied voltage, we wire, etc., etc.
one volt of electrical opposition to can: Decrease the length of the coil, be-
current flow. Add more turns to the coil, because cause this would have the effect of
concentrating the magnetic field into
a smaller area, thereby making it
LISTING 1 stronger.
Wind the coil on an iron or ferrite
100 'program to calculat the number of turns for an inductor.
core, because ferromagnetic mate-
rials such as those tend to attract and
110 cls:pi=3.1415926545
inch of area of copper
concentrate magnetic lines of force.
120 k=1473061.855 'mhos per square
+'
All of the ways in which the mag-
130 print +
netic field can be increased can be
"

140 print Inductor Design Calculator

"
merged into a comprehensive equa-
150 print by David E. Powell, KA4KNG
"
tion for calculating the inductance of
160 print +":print:print
"
a coil. However, to both simplify our
210 input "Desired inductance in microhenries";L equation and eliminate the research
220 input "Gauge or diameter of wire in inches";diameter necessary to obtain ferromagnetic
230 input "Diameter of coil form in inches";form values, we are going to ignore fer-
240 if diameter >= 1 then diameter = .46 / 1.1229283027"(diameter +3) romagnetic permeability and such.
250 print:print "calculating The equation for calculating air-
260 layers=l 'Single layer starting out core inductors, as stated by the Radio
500 a=diameter*layers+form 'Average coil diameter to center of thickness Amateur's Handbook is:
505 print ".";
L = 0.2a2n2/(3a + 9b + 10c)
510 gosub 2000 'calculate :he number of turns
where:
520 if prob =1 then layers = layers+1:if layers < 100 then goto 500
L = inductance in microhenries
530 if b > i then layers=layers+1:goto 500
and as shown in Fig. 1:
540 if n > 9999 then print "ERROR - turns count larger than 10000":system a = average diameter of the coil in

550 n=cint(n):b=n*diameter/layers:ltry = (0.2 * a"2 * n"2)/(3*a+9*b+10*c) inches

560 w. length = n*a*pi b = length of the coil in inches
570 'calculate the resistance of coil c = radial depth of the winding in

inches
580 w.area = (diameter/2)"2*pi
n = total turns of wire
590 r = 1/(w.area*k)*w.length
800 'show the results Quality factor
810 print:print Besides the inductance value, there
815 print "Overall coil diameter ";diameter*layers*2+form;"inches" is another important characteristic of
820 print "Average coil diameter ";a;"inches" a coil that we need to know about. An
830 print "Depth of coil ";layers*diameter;"inches" inductor can be thought of as an AC -
840 print "Length of coil ";b;"inches" only resistor, whose reactance (which
850 print "Length of wire (approx) ";int(w.length/12)"feet,"; can be considered as AC resistance)
855 print int (w.length-int(w.length/12)*12+.5);"inches" depends on the inductance of the coil
860 print "Number of layers ";layers and the frequency, of the applied AC
870 print "Number of turns ":n voltage. However, copper wire has a
880 print "Number of turns per layer ";n/layers DC resistance, determined by its di-
890 print "Actual inductance ";ltry;"microhenries" ameter and length. The ratio of AC
900 print "Coil DC resistance ";r;"ohms"
reactance to DC resistance is known
1000 system 'Exit the program and BASIC
as the quality factor, or Q. For exam-
2000 'subroutine to calculate the number of turns
ple, if an inductor has a reactance of
100 ohms at kHz, and a resistance of
1
2010 min.n=l:max.n=10000:c=layers * diameter:prob=0
2 ohms, then it has a Q -factor at 1 kHz
2060 n=(max.n-min n)/2+min.n
of 100/2, or 50. Of course, the Q will
2070 b=n*diameter/layers 'length of coil
change with the applied frequency. To
2080 ltry (0.2 a'2 n"2)/(3*a+9*b+10*c)
= * *
determine reactance, use the formula:
2090 if cint(max.n) = cint(min.n) then goto 3000
2100 if min.n => 9999 then prob=l:goto
XL = 2nfL
3000
2110 if ltry < L then min n=n:goto 2060 where:
2120 if ltry > L then max.n=n:goto 2060 XL = the inductive reactance in ohms
3000 return = 3.14
f = the applied frequency in hertz
L = the inductance in Henries

119
 diameter of the coil; the program does
not calculate each layer of the coil
Inductor Design Calculator independently.
by David E. Powell, KA4KNG Lines 570 through 590 calculate
the approximate resistance of the coil,
based on the length and diameter of
the wire.
Lines 800 through 900 display the
results of all calculations. Keep in
Desired inductance in microhenries? 28 mind that electronics is not neces-
Gauge or diameter of wire in inches? .008 sarily an exact science, and that for a
variety of reasons all of the displayed
Diameter of coil form in inches? .375
values could be slightly off the "true"
value.
calculating.
Winding the coil
The primary advantage of having a
Overall coil diameter .391 inches computer calculate the specifics of a
Average coil diameter .383 inches
coil is that we can experiment with the
materials that we have on hand, trying
Depth of coil 8.000001E-03 inches different combinations to see how
Length of coil .6640001 inches they affect the results. Recalculating
the values is so easy that we should be
Length of wire (approx) 8 feet, 4 inches
able to get a size and shape that suits
Number of layers 1 us just right.
Number of turns 83 Let's use a 28-microhenry inductor
as our target value. Let's also use part
Number of turns per layer 83 of that jumbo -sized spool of 32 -gauge
Actual inductance 28.05109 microhenries wire that you purchased at the last
Coil DC resistance 1.348764 ohms hamfest. For a coil form, we can use
an ordinary ballpoint pen.
FIG. 2-THIS IS WHAT THE SCREEN or a printout will show when the program is tested by Run the program. The screen
calculating the design of a 28-microhenry inductor. should clear and ask for the needed
inductance value. Enter 28.
The BASIC program of the coil at the center of its thick- Next, the program will ask for the
Listing is the BASIC program for
1 ness. (The diameter changes as the size wire to be used. Enter either the
inductor design. Although written program adds more layers during its gauge (32), or the diameter of the wire
specifically for the IBM PC, it should calculations.) Line 510 calls the sub- in inches. Since we bought this wire
run on any version of BASIC. The routine that actually figures the at a hamfest and don't really know for
program text is available on the RE- number of turns necessary to have the certain what gauge it is, we wind an
BBS (516-293-2283). The full name specified inductance at the current inch -long close -wound coil on a pen-
is COILS.BAS. number of layers. If it can't get there cil and count the number of turns. It
Lines 110 and 120 are used to set up within 10,000 turns, line 520 adds turns out that our "unknown" wire
constants for later use in calculations another layer. Line 530 will add an- requires 125 turns to fill one inch.
to determine the overall resistance of other layer if the length of the coil Dividing one -inch by 125 turns gives
the coil. exceeds one inch. us 0.008 inches. Enter .008.
Lines 210 through 230 input the Line 540 will print an error mes- The last prompt asks for the diame-
values you specify for the desired in- sage if the required number of turns ter of the coil form. We measure the
ductance value, the size wire you have exceeds 10,000 and the number of thickness (the diameter) of our pen
on hand, and the diameter of the coil layers is 10,000 or greater. (You really and find it is 3/8ths of an inch. Since 3
form you're going to use. The wire don't want to wind an inductor that 8 = 0.375, we enter .375.
size can be specified in inches or its big anyway.) If your computer has been set for
AWG wire gauge. Line 550 rounds the number of printer output, you should get a hard -
Line 240 decides whether or not turns to the nearest full turn. It then copy that resembles Fig. 2. If the re-
you entered a wire diameter or a wire calculates all of the other parameters sults you attain do not match Fig. 2,
gauge. If you entered a number of 1 or based on that rounded number. The re -check the program for typing errors
greater, it figures it must be a wire inductor should be close enough for or a misplaced decimal point.
gauge (who would want to wind a coil all but the most critical applications There are a few things to note at this
with six- inch thick wire?) and con- without having to worry about frac- point about the output of the program.
verts it to a diameter. tional turns of wire. First, notice from Fig. 2, that there are
Lines 500 through 530 are the meat Line 560 calculates the approxi- two coil diameters given, an overall
of the program. It starts by assuming mate length of wire needed to wind and an average.
that you're designing a single -layer the coil. The length is approximate The overall diameter is given so
coil. Line 500 calculates the diameter because it is based on the average continued on page 140
120
 O 0O o
000
00 00
060
0
o
0000o
0
o 0 O
o
O O ° ° _0O
.
p o0 0 00
o
O
E\000 O
o a 00
0Oo0
0
°0 0
0°0 0á O
00 0
00
I

00 O
ó
0000 O 0 a o 0
00 0 0
0 0s0 0 0o O óO
o
aá o000
U
mo 0

I d,
0n
NQ
a
ó ó
o0 do

o
Ooo 0
I

o00
_1

o
6 %z INCHES
THE COMPONENT SIDE of the line carrier modem board is shown here.

FULL SIZE FOIL PATTERN for the video -edit controller.

121
 1
o°a
o 0
a:\ O O

000o
O

o
O
O
O
O

o
0-0

o
00

0n`io
O 0
0
O

C
oo
0
e
ºQ 0 0
Oo O
tO 0

0
ó

5 %z INCHES

THIS IS THE SOLDER SIDE of the line carrier modem board.

3 INCHES

5 INCHES

HERE'S THE PATTERN for the Surround -Sound decoder.

('1
O00
K
1
i + .

O
0
.

0
De
>I
-.
+

o o o

6-37411.
00.1»

ó 8

-Or,
o
4 % INCHES
POWER MONITOR
o
THIS IS THE FOIL PATTERN for the power monitor.

5 INCHES

THE GATED SYNC experimenter's descrambler board.

 Z. o 0 o b 0 0 0 0
MM54104 fi.__1P 0 0 010101101010100000101410 0
0 0 o
00
O
T4Io101010 0 0IOIOIO ó
J2
O J3 SSR1 SSR2
0
SSR5
O O O O
SSR6
o
O O 0 O
o 1 o 04 oo 1
4
o oo l
4
ó
0 0

1
l
J2
p
1

J1 O J6

o 01010 0 ö o OIiiololo 0910101A1

INT O O INT

o IÓ OÌ101010 10101010101010 0101010101010

74LS74 74LS138 i 74LSO4 COMPONENT SIDE
A

53A Inches

a
THE COMPONENT SIDE of the voice -synthesizer board.

o-0 0 o o p
1010100f00101010I0101010 4 o0-4: p

I1Q10041010101g101 f>0
o
0o 0
0 O-20

o _ _ --o
o
o s .
o . o
_e _
- 40
ó4 ó 1 0 1

ob
DAW

l 0

010101 141

0101010101010
01 OIOIOIOIOIOI01

101 1 1
o

111 10
o
o
010101010101

101 10101 10
SOLDER SIDE

5J/8 Inches

THE SOLDER SIDE of the voice -synthesizer board.

124
 I15/8 INCHES
THIS IS THE COMPONENT SIDE
of the RS -232 interface board.
PLASMA DISPLAY power -supply PC board.

23/4 INCHES
ACTIVE ANTENNA foil pattern.

2 3/s INCHES
THIS IS THE PATTERN for the electronic
thermometer.

125
 O

+
O 1210
ia
atro
O O
Oripnd

O
2

O
3

O
1.1 O
4
OO
O
s

O 00
6

O
25
00 0
1

00 00000000O O 0 000
+ +
2
000000
I
po
. . .
0

O O O
4

3% INCHES 3% INCHES

THE SOLDER SIDE of the RS -232 node circuit board is THE COMPONENT SIDE of the RS -232 node circuit board
shown here. is shown here.

4 5/s INCHES

BUILD THE AMPLIFIED SPEAKER SYSTEM using this pattern.

126
F GSBE
P
M LASER POWER SUPPLY

l>411Ofeeme
o

o e
% e
0
0 000000C 6'h INCHES
USE THIS FOIL PATTERN for the laser power supply.

THE AC POWER SUPPLY for the high -power audio amplifier.

127
 0

O
O
co
oz
I
Q
co
Q
w
H
Z
w
2
c7
Lu
a_
X
w
w THE HIGH-POWER audio amplifier's foil pattern.
c[

128
 o

BECAUSE OF THE DANGEROUS

VOLTAGES that the stun gun
develops, be extra careful when
laying out and etching this
PC pattern for that circuit.

113Ás INCHES

WIRELESS FM transmitter.

a m
m
X
m
L -
IINCH -1
m

THE SMT AMPLIFIER pattern m

is shown here at twice its
z
m

ei
actual size.

L 2
D
z
O
CO
12 -VOLT DC power supply for the audio amplifier. O
O

129
 NEW FROM ETT ACTIVE ANTENNA AMPLIFIER
continued from page 88 continued from page 92
TELE -THE INVEN- plifier's low-frequency response can
TION OF TELEVISION
$9.95. How television came
be improved by increasing the values shown. After that, install an RCA
to be. Packed with history. of capacitors CI and C3. (You'll have plug on the other end for PLI. Then
36-pages of photos and il-
lustrations of early equip- to experiment with the values.) install two short wires at the pads
ment. A collector's delight. Although a 9 -volt battery is the rec- marked SPKR for the speaker. Con-
ommended power source, the ampli- tinue by connecting a 6 -inch wire be-
PCP105-MAKE fier should work well using 6-15 tween Si and the power pads
MONEY FROM HOME RE- volts. The inside of the cabinet of the (unmarked). Finish up by connecting
CORDING $10.00. Now
that you've spent a fortune completed prototype, using a 9 -volt transformer T1 and fuseholder be-
on all that recording gear, battery as the power supply, is shown tween S I and the other unmarked pad.
MIDI and all, wouldn't you
like to get some of it back? in Fig. 3. Snap a -amp slow -blow fuse into the
1

This book shows you how.

holder when you are finished.
Troubleshooting Note that if you substitute a stan-
PCP106-SYN-
Circuit voltages for a 9 -volt power dard filament transformer for T1, the
THESIZERS FOR MUSI- supply are shown in Fig. 1. If the wiring is a somewhat different, as
CIANS $10.00. All voltages in your unit differ by more
current popular forms of shown in Fig. 6. Wire the trans-
synthesis explained. LA, than 20% from those in the sche- former's secondary directly to the un-
additive, phase distortion,
FM and sampling. Get the
matic, try changing resistor values to marked pads, then wire the primary to
sounds you want. get the voltages in their proper range. Si and Fl as shown. Also, be sure to
For example, if the voltage drop use a 1/4 -amp fast -blow fuse for Fl.
MIDI
Projects
across R8 measures only 0.3 volt, you All that is left to do now is to install
BP182-MIDI PROJ- must decrease R4's value (the exact the board in the cabinet with 4-40
ECTS $6.95. How to in-
terface popular home com- value is up to you to figure out) in hardware, using spacers between the
puters with MIDI systems.
Also covers interfacing
order to increase Q3's base voltage cabinet and the board, as shown in
MIDI gear to analog and and collector current. Fig. 5. Now connect the speaker
percussion synthesizers.
The only critical voltages are those wires, attach the knobs.
across R3 and R8. Performance
should be fine if they are even close to Operation
D BP255-INTERNA- the values on the schematic. Now set all controls fully coun-
TIONAL RADIO STA- Since it's almost impossible to
TIONS GUIDE $8.95.
terclockwise. Plug the unit into a
Essential reference work for measure the voltage from the gate to nearby AC outlet, then turn it on by
the casual listener, amateur
radio DXer and the profes-
the source (VGS) of an FET, you can advancing the treble control. You will
sional radio monitor. measure the voltage that is present hear a brief "pop" from the speaker,
across R3, because it is the same as then silence if all is well. Turn up the
VGS. Adjust R3's value accordingly, volume and touch the center terminal
Internatkmat
BP85-INTERNA- Transistor
extuivatents
if the voltage is not within the range of of PLI. You should hear a hum. If you
TIONAL TRANSISTOR
EQUIVALENTS GUIDE
Guido 0.8-1.2 volts. are successful so far, you should con-
$7.50. Find possible sub- nect a signal source, such as a tuner,
stitutions for a popular user-
oriented selection of mod-
Limitations and adjust the controls.
ern transistors made by Use of the amplifier above 30 MHz If you have any problems, check
more than 100 manufac-
turers. is not recommended because of some voltages. From ground, you
sharply reduced gain. While opera- should read about 17 volts on C22, 15
tion above 30 MHz can be accom- volts on C23, and 9.1 volts on Dl. The
plished by using tuned circuits in collector of Ql should read about 4.9
MAIL TO' Electronic Technology Today, Inc. place of the resistive loads, that modi- volts. Start troubleshooting where the
P.O. Box 240
Massapequa Park, NY 11762-0240 fication is beyond the scope of this voltages are seriously off. Integrated
article. circuit IC1 is more difficult to check,
SHIPPING CHARGES IN USA AND CANADA
Take care when handling the FET but start by measuring the voltages on
O $0.01 to $5.00 ... $1.25 $30 01 to $40.00 $5.00 (Q1). A common belief is that FET's the SPKR pads with the speaker discon-
C) $5.01 to 10.00 ...$2.00
o $10.01 to $20.00 $3.00
$40
$50
01 to
01
$50.00 $6.00
and above $7.50
and CMOS devices are safe from stat- nected; expect 7.5 volts on each pad,
$20.01 to $30.00 $4.00 ic damage after having been installed and if that voltage is not present, try
Z
= SORRY, No orders accepted outside of USA and in a circuit, or after being mounted to replacing ICI.
rn Canada
CC
a PC board. Although it's true that The project also works well from a
Total price of merchandise $
I- Shipping (see chart) $
they are better protected from static 12 -volt battery. Simply short out di-
w Subtotal $ electricity when installed in a circuit, odes D2, D3, and D4 with a jumper
2 Sales Tax (NYS only) $ they are still susceptible to damage by wire, and then connect the + 12 volts
E Total Enclosed $
w static; so never touch the antenna be- through fuse Fl and switch Si directly
CL
Name fore discharging yourself to ground to the positive terminal of BR1. Wire
w Address
by touching some grounded metallic
w City State Zip
the negative side of the battery to the
CI. object. R -E negative terminal of BR1. R -E
a
130
Radie-
Elecrronìcs
Surround Add some excitemert

Sound to your TV viirvig!

Decoder Our eesy-to-buird

surround-saund decoder

AS STARFLEET COMMANDER, YOUR STARFIGHTER HAS THE LATEST

brings movie -theatre sound
in weaponry. From above and behind you hear the dull
thwup-thwup of the laser pom-poms as the ball -turret to your living room.
tracks the incoming enemy spacefighters, whose energy
bolts zing past your ship into the void behind. From your
ship's right and left energy pods the phasor cannons fire a
staccato stream whose roar fades off into a darkness that
can be seen only by your ship's time -transporter. NORMAN M. HILL
But turn off the sound effects and once more the inde-
fatigable starfleet commander is just another viewer in a
movie theater. Without the imagery created by multi-
directional sound -what we call surround -sound-even
the most thrilling sci-fi adventure flick is not much better
than an "olde-tyme" silent movie.
Just try to imagine Star Wars or Top Gun without
surround -sound: They would be deadly dull. In fact, the
lack of video -movie surround -sound is what turns many of
the great action movies into a dull night at home on TV.
Surround -sound brings scenes to life by wrapping you
in a sound environment that's as good as being there. If the
picture is a forest, you become surrounded by wind and
wildlife. In auto chases, cars roar out of the back of the
room and onto the screen. In crowd scenes, you actually
sense yourself in the center of the crowd. Surround -sound
creates such a sensation of being there, that once you hear
it, you'll lose interest in video and movies without it.
Here, we'll show you how to build a low-cost surround
decoder. In the next article, we'll show you how to add
even more excitement to your TV sound with a subwoofer
simulator.

Concealed sounds
Every modern home video -movie now contains high-
fidelity stereo tracks, which are output on the back panel of
a modern VCR as left and right channels. When connected
to a stereo system, they provide a wide-screen (semi -
stereo) sound rather than the mono heard from a con-
ventional TV or video monitor.
But wide screen, even genuine stereo, isn't surround -
sound because it's still two-dimensional. The three-di-
mensional effect of surround -sound requires, at the very
least, a rear channel, which might be provided by one or
 more additional sound tracks in the two stereo tracks, and uses quad-
original theatrical release print; or, the raphonic weighting to encode/decode
rear sounds can be encoded within the the stereo signal into four outputs.
stereo tracks. As far as home videos However, the need in a theater is not
are concerned, there is only the stereo for 360° quadraphonic coverage. A
tracks, so the rear channel that creates theater needs only a single rear track
the illusion of surround -sound is con- *2700 -700 to generate spectacular effects. There
cealed by a special encoding within is no need for side sound because the
the left and right sound tracks. The primary sound placement is almost
encoded signals either blend into the G 14e/6N 5/NCz ) always on the screen, which is in front
front stereo channels or cancel each .P ivEi6HT-- COsCe)
of the viewer. The needed speaker ar-
other; either way, they are not heard as rangement is shown in Fig. 2.
distinct sounds when the sound you Unfortunately, that's far from a
hear is played through a conventional
stereo system.
oo
.97Z. -1:26,P
ró
..26L-,t.97R
complete solution because the limited
3 -dB channel separation of movie sur-
It takes a special kind of decoder, round -sound is a real problem for all
such as our surround -sound decoder, f2700 but the good seats at the center. Seats
to extract the rear sounds from the close to the rear will be swamped by
stereo signal, and it is the decoded the 3 -dB leakage from front left and
rear sounds that cause the home view- front right. Up front, better separation
er to be enveloped by a surround - is also desired so that audio sources
sound that is very similar to what is FIG. 1-THE EARLIEST OF MULTI -DIREC-
TIONAL sound systems used the unusual
heard in a movie theater. speaker arrangement in a which fore- CENTER
(MON0) RIGHT
closed true stereo listening.
Broadcast movies
What happens if the movie is tronic enhancement of 4 -channel
broadcast by a TV station? The same sound was necessary in order to create
thing, but only if the station is broad- the spectacular effects expected by
casting MTS stereo. If you decode the the listener. Basically, it was done by
MTS stereo signal you will again de- electronic gain -riding. A monitor cir-
rive the rear audio channel. If you cuit determined which sound position
record the TV signal on a VCR, you (location) was dominant and adjusted
SEATING ARFA
can either decode the station's MTS the gain of the various channels so
stereo, or have the VCR do the stereo that the listener would perceive a
decoding (if it is so equipped). stronger signal at that position. As a
general rule, the electronic enhance-
How it began ment added 3 dB to the already exist-
The early 1970's saw the develop- ing 3 -dB separation. The total of 6 -dB
ment of a technique (patented by Peter separation was sufficient to trick the REAR
Scheiber) of encoding four channels brain into believing it was sensing a
into two stereo tracks. When de- precise sound location. FIG. 2-THIS IS THE SPEAKER AR-
coded, the stereo signal produced four For various reasons, among them RANGEMENT for movie-theater surround -
distinct outputs. By adjusting the being the extra cost of the rear ampli- sound. Notice that a center speaker
phasing and relative levels of the sig- fiers and speakers, and the eventual provides direct mono, rather than a mono
image that's derived from left and right
nals blended into the stereo tracks, it deployment of several kinds of en- speakers.
was possible, by using the speaker code/decode circuits, 4 -channel
placement shown in Fig. 1-a, to create sound, usually referred to as quad- track with the image on screen.
the illusion of sound coming from the raphonic or quadriphonic sound, met For those reasons, the quad-
front, the sides, or the rear. Effec- with little success in the marketplace. raphonic concept of gain -control po-
tively, the sound could be located any- But it did establish that a multi -direc- sitioning of the dominant audio
where within a 360° field. tional sound could be encoded within direction was incorporated into Dolby
The technique was later modified conventional stereo tracks. Stereo, and the smashing 1977 suc-
so that a conventional stereo -front/ About that time, the movie indus- cess of the Dolby -Stereo encoded Star
stereo -rear speaker placement could try was searching for a blockbuster Wars entrenched the system as the
be used; that is, left and right speakers technology that would bring in more industry standard.
in front of the listener and left and patrons; something more attractive The gain -control circuitry is a se-
right speakers behind the listener. Un- than just another form of wide-screen rious complication, necessary to
fortunately, the stereo -type technique projection. The blockbuster was to be make all the seats in the house good
eliminated wide stereo separation. In Dolby Stereo. ones. Home decoders loaded with
fact, left -to -right and front -to -rear such circuitry, such as the Shure
separation was often reduced to as lit- Dolby Stereo HTS5000 are available for around
tle as 3 dB. Since 3 dB is the minimum The Dolby Stereo system was intro- $750. Units that incorporate gain
change in program material that can duced for movie theaters in 1975. Un- control are identified by the Dolby
be sensed by the human ear, elec- der that system, 35 -mm film carries Surround Pro Logic logo.
132
The Dolby home decoder
LEFT
In 1981, Dolby Labs acknowledged ON
FRONT
a need for a low-cost, no -gain -control J
LEFT
decoder for home video and recom-
mended an appropriate circuit. De-
coders without gain -control carry the R GHT

Dolby Surround logo. -

IN
J2
FRONT

Those lower-cost units are available RIGHT'

from various licensed manufacturers - REAR

for $200-$400, and to carry the Dolby 20ms 7kHz NOISE F. LEFT

DELAY LOW PASS REDUCTION REAR

Surround logo they must process au- RIGHT
dio according to the block diagram
shown in Fig. 3. FIG. 3-DOLBY'S RECOMMENDED HOME DECODER includes a 20 -ms delay and a noise -
reduction system.
Dolby's decoder.
All processing is performed on the with a rear filter, many tapes and the struction of a home decoder, reduces
-
(L R) difference signal, which is equipment they are played on have its cost, and also eliminates the noise
concealed within the left and right cohered high -frequency phase perfor- and distortion that might be caused by
stereo tracks. While only a single rear - mance, and they sound better-at a delay unit.
channel is decoded, it is intended that least more natural-without the filter.
two speakers will be positioned at the If you're finicky about sound quality, Noise reduction
rear of the room, hence, the rear out- the 7 -kHz cut-off should be switch In the Dolby system shown in Fig.
put is shown as REAR LEFT and REAR selectable so that you can enjoy the 3, the rear-channel information is
RIGHT, even though they both carry the best in sound when the tape and supposed to be encoded with a noise -
same signal. Two traditional stereo equipment make it possible. reduction that is similar to the Dolby
speakers provide the front sound. Notice that Fig. 3 indicates a 20 -ms B processor used for cassette record-
As shown in Fig. 3, Dolby restricts time delay. The delay serves two pur- ers. Listening tests and inspection of a
the rear channel's high -end frequency poses. First, since 20 ms represents frequency/gain table indicate that we
response to 7 kHz. When the standard the time it takes the sound to travel could probably do without it as far as
was being developed, the high -fre- about 20 feet, it allows the rear speak- surround -sound is concerned, so we
quency coherence between the two ers to be positioned close to the seat- left it out of the prototype.
channels of home -video equipment ing, yet the sound appears to originate Note, in particular, that Fig. 3 does
wasn't consistent. Directional place- from farther back, more closely sim- not show signal processing to the
ment could become random if high - ulating theater sound, where the rear front speakers:' Differential signals
frequency phase -coherence were to be speakers are located considerably be- driving the rear speakers pass to the
lost on a wide -band signal; for exam- hind the viewer. The time delay also front unchecked. If we add some of
ple, an actor's voice might be re- proves useful when there is accidental each front channel to the other, we
produced with the lower frequencies leakage of the front -left or front -right attenuate to the leakage of the rear
from the front and the sibilants from sound to the rear. Since the 20 -ms signals while reducing the front stereo
the rear. However, the likelihood of delay causes the sound to arrive after separation. The reduction in separa-
that happening depends on the equip- the front sound, it reinforces the per- tion is desirable because it helps view-
ment used for recording and play- ception that the sound is up front. ers in off-center seats hear a stereo
back. While some tapes sound better Fortunately, the positioning of spread without resorting to a center
home rear speakers can usually be channel. (Note the center mono
juggled so that the delay isn't really speaker used in the movie system
WHICH IS WHICH?
necessary, which simplifies con- shown in Fig. 2.)
The type of circuits used in a home
Dolby Surround decoder is identified
by the kind of Dolby logo used. If the RIO-IT IN FRONT
97L r 26R
decoder includes an adaptive matrix BUFFER 1M LEFT
stage to provide left, center, right, and R1

surround outputs, along with the BLEND

stages shown in Fig. 3, then it is
R3
e
called a PRO LOGIC model and has LEFT IN R2
26L +,97R FRONT
this logo shown. o BUFFER WA RIGHT

00 DOLBY SURROUND
P R O LOGIC SOL SOR
7kHz
LOWPASS - FILTER
50L-.50R REAR
LEFT
FILTER
O
If the decoder is the less expensive
design that processes the signals ac- 50L-.508 REAR
FLAT
cording to the block diagram in Fig. 3, RIGHT
it is identified by this Dolby logo.
FIG. 4-OUR SURROUND-SOUND DECODER ELIMINATES both the time delay and the
DOLBY SURROUND noise reduction, which doesn't seem to degrade how the three-dimensional effect
DO sounds in the home.
133
 R3
36051
LEFT IN

J1
C1
1µF Ri
FRONT LEFT
47K

FRONT RIGHT

R4

ICIb 36011
RIGHT IN 347

(47i2-71( R8 R6
2
1µF e R2
15K 15K

47K FILTER
RI R10 011 012
6.2K 3.3K 12K
. . _
6.2K 1 ,SURROUND J5
"í32_b
S2-6 REAR LEFT

C3 .-. C4
R13 REAR RIGHT
01 01
36052 JO
BYPASS
ICI -c
347 R14
OS 2
10
-Pt- + 18V

R9 1 D2 D3 C6 C7
iN4001 6.2V 330µF i.330µF
6.2K D1
117V iii 1N4001 35V 35V
R16
1K
C8 +
....
7
LEDI ::"-z 330µF Cy
35V
330µF
R15 35V
10052
vur, r 18V

FIG. 5-THE DECODER'S CIRCUIT. Virtually nothing is critical because R3 and R4 isolate
the buffer amplifiers from the capacitance of the shielded cables connected to J3 and J4.
with no need for level adjustments. In
LEFT OUT (p J3 Ji LEFT INPUT
practice, however, the rear speakers
LED /, FRONT
RIGHT OUT
S_
riii J J2 RIGHT INPUT
are different and the level is adjusted
on the rear amplifier.
If any one speaker sounds at full
volume, the other two sound half as
loud (-6 dB), 1/4-power. A separation
of 6 dB is a lot better than the 3 -dB
separation of a four-channel system,
SURROUND and such a decoder is easier to build
o BYPASS than a "true" Dolby type, yet it
sounds as good or better when it is fed
from a Dolby surround-sound signal
source.
Notice that the system actually puts
out only three sound channels (the
SI rear-right and rear-left are the same);
FILTER it does not use a 20 -ms delay, nor
noise reduction, and although it lacks
REAR OUT
J5 J6
REAR OUT any form of gain control, the separa-
tion between channels is maximized.
FIG. 6-THE COMPONENT LAYOUT for the printed circuit board. Double-check the polar- In a typical home environment, the
ity of all diodes and electrolytic capacitors. front speakers should just about flank
the screen, because we want the
A surround decoder and a switchable low-pass filter. The sound to appear to originate up front,
Figure 4 shows the block diagram rear levels are such that, if all four at the screen, just as it does in a the-
for our surround -sound decoder. It speakers are identical, and the driving ater. The rear speakers should be lo-
consists of input buffers, a front amps have identical gain, the system cated as far behind the viewer as the
blender, a rear difference decoder, would be balanced for proper level front speakers are forward.
134
 PARTS LIST
All resistors are 1/4-watt, 5%. C5-680 pF, polyester Sl-SPDT switch
R1, R2-47,000 ohms C6-C9-330µF, 35 volts, electrolytic S2-DPDT switch
R3, R4, R13-360 ohms T1-Power transformer: 120 -volt pri-
R5, R16-1000 ohms Semiconductors mary; 12.6 -volt, 300 -mA secondary
R6, R8-15,000 ohms IC1-LF347N, quad op -amp Miscellaneous: Printed -circuit ma-
R7, R9, R12-6200 ohms D1, D2 -1N4001 silicon rectifier terials, fuse clips, enclosure, etc.
R10-3300 ohms D3-1N4735A, Zener, 6.2 volts
R11-12,000 ohms LED1-Light-emitting diode An etched and drilled circuit board
R14, R15-100 ohms is available for $10.25 postpaid
Other components from Fen -Tek, P.O. Box 5012,
Capacitors Fl-Fuse, slo-blo, 0.5 ampere Babylon, NY 11707-0012. NY resi-
Cl, C2-1 µF, 100 volts, polyester J1-J6-Phono jack dents must add appropriate sales
C3, C4-.01 µF, 50 volts, polyester PL1-Power plug tax.

The circuit
I TUNER,
VCR
The complete circuit is shown in
CD PLAVER,ETC.
Fig. 5. Components Rl, R2, Cl, C2,
F
IC1-a, and IC1-b buffer the left and
L VIDEO
right channels at unity gain over the
MONITOR
audio band. The front channel blend-
PREAMP
ing described earlier is attained when
switch S2 -a connects R5 across R3
and R4. When S2 is set to the BYPASS
RL mode, R3 and R4 isolate IC1-a and
DECODER ICl-b from the capacitance of the
RR
shielded cables that are connected to
FL FR
J3 and J4.
Resistors R6-R9, and integrated
POWER AMP circuit IC1-c, make the L -R dif-
ference signal the correct level if all
speaker/amplifiers are equal. Re-
sistors R1O-R12, along with capaci-
RR
tors C3-05, and amplifier IC1-d,
REAR AMP
form a 3 -pole Chebychev 7 -kHz ac-
tive filter. When the filter is selected,
FIG. 7-THE MOST FLEXIBILITY IS ATTAINED if the decoder is used in a component R13 isolates the capacitive cable load-
system. This kind of arrangement also allows tuner and CD -player signals to be decoded. ing from IC1-d.
The power supply is not regulated
because precise voltage values are not
critical. Diode D3 is used to slow the
power-off loss of the positive -voltage
output, reducing "turn-off" pops.
Our prototype decoder is as-
sembled on a printed -circuit board;
the template for the board is provided
in PC service. There are no unusual
assembly considerations other than
insuring that there is isolation be-
tween Ti's ground lead and C6-C8
(there should be only one power-sup-
ply ground, as shown). Also, ceramic
capacitors should not be used because
their tolerance varies with tem-
perature and the applied voltage,
thereby possibly creating distortion.
Polyester capacitors are recom-
mended.
The PC -board's component layout
is shown in Fig. 6. Nothing is unusual
FIG. 8-THE PROTOTYPE USES PhIONO JACKS for all input and output connections. or critical as long as the polarity of all
Grouping them on the rear apron allows the decoder to be easily connected into any kind diodes and electrolytic capacitors is
of component arrangement. continued on page 140
135
 L JZj
.

SUBWOOFER SIMULATOR
NORM HILL

Build a sub woofer simulator and fill your living room with movie -theater sound
you can actually feel.
A MOVIE THEATER CREATES REALISM BY thing for frequencies in the deep -bass because conventional woofers, even
projecting a large picture, using sur- range of 20-50 Hz; many persons 12 -inch and larger, roll off below 50
round sound, and by extending the cannot hear frequencies within that Hz, deep bass sounds are rarely heard
sound's low-frequency response with range, although they can feel and unless some kind of deep -bass com-
subwoofers so that the viewer can ac- sense them as vibrations. pensation is provided. The usual solu-
tually feel the special -effects. When a In a theater, special effects are often tion to providing deep bass in both
movie contains explosions, jet rum- exploited by enhancing the deep -bass theaters and the home is to add a
ble, thunder, galloping horses, or frequencies, so that when the jets monaural subwoofer that is driven off
other heavy-duty action, the sub - rumble, they rumble so powerfully the front channels by an active filter
woofer adds realism by literally shak- that you can actually feel the runway and a separate amplifier.
ing the floor. vibrating under your feet. (And a flat
Although it is generally accepted frequency response ceases to be desir- Not that perfect
that a healthy ear can hear a frequency able once your feet become the listen- Unfortunately, there are some
range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz, in fact, ing transducers.) Below 20 Hz, sound drawbacks to using a monaural sub -
some of that range is not so much is neither felt nor heard; at best there woofer. It is commonly assumed that
heard, but sensed. For example, is a strange sensation of changing air deep -bass information has such a long
many people cannot hear frequencies pressure.. wavelength that it will be summed by
higher than 15 kHz, although they can But although most people can per- the room to a mono signal, and that
sense that they exist. It's the same ceive sounds in the 20-50 Hz range, therefore a single transducer can be
136
 INPUT AMP LOW-PASS FILTER SUMMING AMP

JI J2
INPUT [O OUTPUT

10Hz 60Hz 50Hz

FIG. 1-TO ENSURE THAT ONLY THE DEEP-BASS FREQUENCIES are enhanced, the
simulator's first stage amplifies the frequencies below 60 Hz before the low-pass filter
attenuates all signals above 50 Hz.

N 18V 4 16V 015 R19

We-
fl3 R5 R23
C3 680.9 1.6K
56K 9 13 9 10K
J1 270K .047 4 4
LEFT
R1
VM ICI -c IC2-d 14 IC2-c 8
INPUT R7 R9 R11, 813
47K LM347 LM347 + 22dB LM347
11K 68K 36K 68K
yV it1 12 O 10 R25

Cl 14 7 7
+19dBO+1-0
S2 -a
36051 J3
.33µF
C5 C7
-18V C9 M C11 -18V +16dBQ
BOOST ó
LEFT
OUTPUT
.47 .01 R17 a
.47 .1
1.2K BYPASS
R21
10K

lul
CQr STEREO R16 R20
R24

4.
84 R6 S3
68052 1.6K
56K 270K 041 MONO? 2 10K
J2 *Mr V1ti
RIGHT
R2 08 012 R14 7
INPUT 010
+ 22dB

T
11K 68K 36K 68K
O =vi
'
5
VN 3 o R26
We
_ C2 6 0--0S2-b 36011 J4
- 33µF C10 7g C12 íT. ++1196dd
RIGHT
BOOST OUTPUT

i
.47 .01
.1 R18
1.2K
BYPASS O+'ó ©
R22
S1 -b
10K

01 R27
1N4001 10050

PLI

FIG. 2-THE LEFT AND RIGHT CHANNELS ARE IDENTICAL. Switch S3 blends the two
channels when only mono deep -bass sounds are wanted. Switch S2 provides three levels
of deep -bass amplification.

used. A simple comparison of mono Another concern is the type of filter Price is another objection to a
and stereo bass -boosting calls that used to feed the subwoofer. All filters mono-subwoofer system that includes
into question. Jet rumble, such as in have substantial phase shift at the roll - a filter and separate amplifier: You'll
the movie Top Gun, takes on a flatter, off frequencies. It can easily turn out have to spend a lot before your floor
quieter, less spacious sound when that the high -band and low -band starts to shake, rattle, and roll.
boosted monaurally instead of ster- speaker cones will end up out of phase
eophonically. A quick check of the during the transition region, causing a A cheaper way
low -frequency information (measured loss of response over, say 60-90 Hz, A less expensive way to simulate
using a dual -trace scope and active which will produce a peculiar bass the "feelie" effect of the movie the-
50 -Hz stereo filters) shows that the quality. It is likely that many sub - ater's deep -bass system is to simply
two channels have little in common woofer systems suffer that problem, boost the bass signal delivered to your
during jet rumble or numerous other especially those using simple passive existing front speakers. (Most home-
situations. Only in music are the two crossovers for which 180° is a com- stereo systems are overbuilt, at least
channels similar. mon roll -off phase angle. when listening to a video movie at the
137
 - 30

+ 20 + 22dB
+19dB SWITCH POSITIONS
4-16dB

+10

10 100 1000

FREQUENCY-Hz 11<

FIG. 3-MAXIMUM DEEP -BASS BOOST IS ATTAINED AT approximately 12 Hz. Note that
the curves shown are unattainable with conventional tone controls.
PARTS LIST
RIGHT LEFT
INPUT INPUT All resistors are 1/4 -watt, 5%.
PLl
0 0 R1, R2-47,000 ohms
J2 J1
R3, R4-56,000 ohms
R5, R6-270,000 ohms
R7, R8-11,000 ohms
-F1 R9, R10, R13, R14-68,000 ohms
+ -R27- R11, R12-36,000 ohms
CC
C3 Cr R15, R16-680 ohms
+ V O I
R17, R18-1200 ohms
Ci5
D3 I I I

-C12.
1 1 1

C6
ICB R19, R20-1600 ohms
-I R21-R24^--10,000 ohms
-R29- IC2 IC1 1 R26, R26-360 ohms
T1 R27, R28-100 ohms
DD--i- C5
R29-1000 ohms
U2'4 C7 ;5 Cl
Capacitors
U
Cl, C2-0.33 µF, 100 volts
C3, 04-0.047 µF, 50 volts
Cí4 C5, C6, C9, C10-0.47 µF, 50 volts

-R28- -R18- C7, C8, C17, C18-0.1 µF, 50 volts

C11, C12-0.01 µF, 50 volts
C13-C16-330 µF, 35 volts, elec-
LEDI STEREO
R15 trolytic
LEFT J3 BOOST Wh O
Semiconductors
OUTPUT O, -O o
S1 -a S2 -a S3 MONO IC1, IC2-LF347N, Quad JFET op -
BYPASS O amp
R16
22dB D1, D2 -1N4001 rectifier diode
1N 4

D3-1N4735A, Zener diode, 6.2

RIGHT J4 o O O +19dB
OUTPUT O S1 b S2 -b
+16dB
volts,
LED1-Light-emitting diode
Other components
FIG.4-THIS IS THE PARTS LAYOUT for the printed -circuit board. Take note that resistors F1 -1/2 -amp slo-blo fuse
R15 and R16 are mounted on switch S2, not on the board. J1-J4-Phono jack
S1-Switch, DPDT
usual living-room volume level.) Al- Figure shows the block diagram
1 S2-Switch, DPDT, center off
though home -speaker systems having of a subwoofer simulator that can be S3-Switch, SPST
a IO- or I2 -inch woofer may be rolling used for either the left or right chan- T1-Power transformer, 117 volt pri-
off between 20 -50 -Hz, that doesn't nel. The first stage is a buffer-ampli- mary; 12.6 -volt, 300 -mA second-
ary.
mean that they can't radiate energy in fier that provides gain below 60 Hz to
Miscellaneous: PC -board mate-
that range. We merely need to provide compensate for the fact that most rials, fuse clips, wire. linecord, sol-
compensation so that they get more speakers roll off in that range. The der, enclosure, etc.
power in the deep -bass frequency buffer is followed by an active low-
range. An analogy is hitting the loud- pass filter that removes everything ex- An etched and drilled PC board is
ness switch or turning up the bass, cept the deep -bass frequencies. The available for $10.25 postpaid from
except that the boost must be more output from the filter is summed with Fen -Tek, P.O. Box 5012, Babylon,
selective to create the illusion of a its input so that the total bandwidth is NY 11702-0012. NY residents must
subwoofer's sound & feel. add appropriate sales tax.
at a substantially higher level than it

138
 diately before your front power ampli-
fier-after any surround -sound de-
coder. If you have a receiver, your
only option is to connect the sim-
ulator before the receiver's AUX input,
or within the tape -monitor loop-
which isn't quite ideal because the
simulator will be receiving a line -
level -volt rms signal
1

Since the bass boost can exceed a

factor of 10, the subwoofer sim-
ulator may occasionally output
more than 10 -volts rms, so to avoid
blowing out your speakers, be care-
ful when first trying the subwoofer
simulator.
Increase the amplifier's gain slow-
ly. Back off the amplifier's output
power if you hear distortion. The au-
thor developed the circuit using a 200 -
watt -per-channel amplifier and speak-
ers rated for 250 watts. If your system
is more modestly powered, you may
not want to use S2's higher boost posi-
tions. Also, if your amplifier is rated
for less than 60 watts per channel, or
if your woofers are smaller than 10 -
inches, you may not attain sufficient
deep -bass output to create the sense of
feeling.
Clipping within the simulator is
possible, although we have seen no
FIG.5-TO AVOID NOISE PICKUP the simulator should be enclosed in a metal cabinet.
Cabinets that are partially metal and partially plastic aren't suitable. problems because of the device's rela-
tively high DC supply voltage. A big-
ger concern is an audio amplifier that
would be if only the deep -bass fre- to accommodate either a pigtail -lead wasn't built to handle an unusually
quencies were filtered. fuse (FI), or individual fuse clips large deep-bass signal. For example,
Figure 2 shows how the block di- (which take two holes per clip) Use one time we absent-mindedly in-
agram becomes the schematic for our whatever is most convenient for you. stalled the simulator between a VCR
stereo-subwoofer simulator. The parts layout for the PC -board and a Trinitron monitor, which has an
and the connections for the panel - audio switching function. It took
How it works mounted components are shown in quite a while to figure out that the
Both channels are identical. Buffer Fig. 4. For simplicity, an on/off power sound's distortion was caused by the
amplifier ICI -a has unity gain above switch was not included so that the Trinitron monitor's inability to handle
60 Hz, and a rising gain characteristic unit would be switched on and off by more than a few volts of input. Mov-
below 60 Hz to compensate for the the master power switch for the entire ing the simulator so that it was in-
speaker's deficiency in the deep -bass system. If you want separate power stalled after the monitor, between the
range. Active low-pass filters, ICI -b control for the subwoofer simulator, TV and preamplifier, completely re-
and IC2-a, pass the frequency compo- simply install a SPST switch in series solved the problem.
nents below 50 Hz. Amplifier IC2-b with one leg of the power cord.
sums the input and output signals of Although the circuit will accept The payoff
the filters. Switch S2 -a provides three conventional part tolerances for the Once your system is wired for sur-
levels of bass summation-a fancy resistors and capacitors, for best re- round sound you'll discover that some m
way of saying "bass boost." The sub - sults we suggest you use 5% capaci- movies have effects that you can liter- m
x-a
woofer simulator's frequency -re- tors for the active -filter components. ally feel, while others don't. There is m
sponse curves for the three switch As shown in Fig. 5, the prototype is a wide variation in the quality of the
positions are shown in Fig. 3. mounted in a metal enclosure; do not effects, usually from one studio to the m
use a cabinet that is part metal and next, not from one movie to the next. z
m
Construction part plastic. Some outfits put in plenty of enjoya-
The project should use printed -cir- ble, surround -sound and "feel-
cuit assembly to avoid introducing Hookup ie"effects, while others put in few _
z
noise. A foil template for the PC If your sound system has a separate sound effects. Unfortunately, the only
board is provided in PC Service. pre-amp and power -amp, the sub - way to find which is which is through o
o
You'll find that the template has holes woofer simulator connects imme- trial and error. R -E

139
 FREE! COPING WITH COILS SURROUND SOUND
New Catalog of continued from page 120 continued from page 135
Hard -To -Find that you can determine (before you correct. Note that there is no power
Precision Tools wind it) whether or not the coil will
physically fit in your project. The
switch between power plug PLI and
Ti's primary winding. That was done
average coil diameter is listed just in because the power to the prototype is
case you don't believe the computer switched with the rest of the system to
and want to re -calculate the induc- avoid turn -on pops.
tance value by hand. Second, there
appears to be something amiss about Setting up
the depth of the coil windings. We Figure 7 shows how the surround -
entered .008 for the wire thickness, sound decoder can be set-up in a com-
and it is a single -layer coil, so the ponent video -sound system. Notice
depth should be .008 inches, right? that by having the decoder connected
Well, the .000001 discrepancy comes between the preamplifier and the
from the way computers represent power amplifier it can also be used to
Jensen's new catalog is jam-packed numbers internally. The coil -length decode signals that originate in a con-
with more than 2,000 quality items. calculation suffers from the same ventional tuner, a CD player, or what-
Your single source for hard -to -find
precision tools used by electronic
malady. Suffice it to say that the error ever. Also note the use of left -rear and
technicians, scientists, engineers, is small enough to be safely ignored right -rear speaker signals even though
schools, instrument mechanics, without affecting our end result, the left and right decoder outputs, as
laboratories and government agen- which is, we hope, a 28-microhenry previously discussed, are the same.
cies. This popular catalog also con-
inductor. Obviously, your particular video -au-
tains Jensen's world-famous line of
more than 40 tool kits. Call or write Speaking of 28 microhenries, Fig. dio system will be different, but Fig. 7
for your free copy today! 2 shows that our inductor is actually will give you a good idea of the vari-
28.05109 microhenries, instead of an ous ways in which signal sources and
JENSEN 7815 S. 46th Street
Phoenix, AZ 85044
even 28. That is the result of rounding amplifiers can be combined with the
TOOLS INC. (602) 968-6231 the turn count to the nearest whole surround -sound decoder. As shown in
number. Fig. 8, all of the decoder's inputs and
CIRCLE 20 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD The DC resistance of the inductor outputs are made through phono jacks
is given so that we can calculate the that match the conventional phono -
Q -factor of the coil after we decide at plug patch cords that are used for all
ATTENTION! what frequency the inductor will be
used.
home video -sound connections.
If your system doesn't use compo-

E LE HÑe Winding the coil

To make the coil, peel off about
nine feet of wire from that jumbo -
nents, and the stereo outputs of your
your VCR or TV normally drive an
integrated amplifier or a receiver, sim-
ply connect the decoder between the
i
K
sized spool and start winding it on the VCR or TV and the amplifier's or
EARN YOUR \ ballpen. Make sure that the windings receiver's AUX or VIDEO -SOUND
are even and closely spaced. inputs.
B.S.E.E. A couple of strips of hot-melt glue
across the length of the coil will hold
If all four speakers were identical,
and if their driving amplifiers had
DEGREE the windings in place. If you don't identical gain, and if the front and rear
THROUGH HOME STUDY have a glue gun, epoxy adhesive will speakers were equidistant from the
Our New and Highly Effective Advanced -Place-
do if you don't mind wait. viewer, no level balancing or adjust-
ment Program for experienced Electronic Tech- After the glue sets (or cools, or ment would be necessary. But that's a
nicians grants credit for previous Schooling and whatever), you should carefully slide lot of. ifs. More than likely, you'll
Professional Experience, and can greatly re-
duce the time required to complete Program and the coil off the pen. (It would be a spend some time fiddling with the
reach graduation. No residence schooling re- good idea to apply some glue to the amplifier controls. R -E
quired for qualified Electronic Technicians.
Through this Special Program you can pull all of inside of the coil to help hold the
the loose ends of your electronics background windings in place. That way you can
together and earn your B.S.E.E. Degree. Up-
grade your status and pay to the Engineering be sure that the coil won't come apart
Level. Advance Rapidly! Many finish in 12 on you when handling it.)
months or less. Students and graduates in all 50
States and throughout the World. Established That's really all there is to making
Over 40 Years! Write for free Descriptive Lit- your own coils. From now on, not
erature.
only will you save money, but you can
also avoid the aggravating and time-
COOK'S INSTITUTE consuming task of having to search
OF ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
high and low for a parts supplier that
CTEE 4251 CYPRESS DRIVE has the exact coil you're looking for-
JACKSON, MISSISSIPPI 39212
and you won't have to wait for it to
CIRCLE 19 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD come in the mail. R -E

140
L, J
1111 CCD

IIGH EFINITION
5 CELE- \7ISION
The many ways of HDTV

LEN FELDMAN

AT LAST COUNT THERE WERE NEARLY 20 preferred aspect ratio of either 5:3 or tion television systems might well be
separate and distinct proposals for 16:9. Present NTSC picture displays described as semi -compatible or
high -definition television systems. have an aspect ratio of 4:3. That ex- "backwards compatible." Such sys-
They generally fall into three major plains why many wide-screen motion tems will deliver a standard NTSC
categories: fully compatible, semi- or pictures, when broadcast by TV sta- picture for those owners who tune in
backward -compatible, and those not tions, often have the edges of the pic- with older NTSC sets. Transmission
compatible. ture cut off, forcing motion picture of those types of HDTV signals, how-
There are systems that are fully producers to concentrate the major ever, would require additional band-
compatible with our presently used action of their stories towards the cen- width beyond the standard 6 MHz-
NTSC TV standards. Such systems ter of the screen. Those systems that anywhere from 8 MHz to 12 MHz,
display a conventional picture when claim full compatibility with NTSC which is two full channel widths. As
tuned to on an older television re- require no additional bandwidth or was true of the first category, the bene-
ceiver. Tuned to on receivers of the spectrum space, beyond the 6 MHz fits of such semi-compatible systems
future, such systems would, gener- presently assigned to over-the -air- will only be realized by owners of new
ally speaking, offer increased resolu- broadcast TV stations. sets designed specifically for those
tion or picture detail as well as a new, A second category of high-defini- systems.

The drastic difference in size and clarity between an

NTSC TV's picture (inset) and the HDTV picture sur-
rounding it, spells the demise of the aged NTSC format.
 aspect ratio of 14:9, as opposed to the
present 4:3. As a side benefit, the
HD-NTSC system creates 69 hori-
zontal lines per frame that are no lon-
ger needed for the transmission of
483 ACTIVE LINES picture information. That new "data
window" might well be made avail-
able for other information, such as
encoded stereo digital audio!
440 ELEMENTS
ACTV
Originally introduced through the
joint efforts by RCA, NBC, GE, and
The David Sarnoff Research Center,
FIG. 1-THE NTSC PIXEL is represented as a rectangle of 1.46:1 ratio, corresponding to ACTV was another system that was
the present 4:3 NTSC aspect ratio.
fully compatible with NTSC, in that it
required only a single 6 -MHz channel
The third category of the HDTV width for its implementation. Since
system is one that can be best cate- then, the system has been divided into
gorized as the "no compromise" ap- PIXEL PIXEL PIXEL two systems, ACTV-1 (the original 6 -
proach. That is, systems in this MHz wide channel proposal) and
category are totally incompatible with ACTV-2, a system that remains com-
PIXEL PIXEL PIXEL
the existing NTSC system used in this patible with NTSC but requires two
country. Generally speaking, these full 6 -MHz channels of bandwidth for
systems require extended bandwidth, its implementation. Here is how
but provide the greatest number of ACTV works: An original wide -
scan lines (1050 or 1125) and the
greatest picture detail, both horizon-
tally and vertically.
Any attempt to describe fully all of
the proposed systems in all three cate-
gories would require more pages than
are in this entire magazine. To give
you some idea of the complexity and
diversity of the ongoing HDTV de- FIG. 3-ONE WAY TO INCREASE the
number of addressable points of an image
bate, we will instead describe, briefly, is to subdivide the pixels into smaller
one or two systems in each category. units, which might be called sub -pixels.

H D-NTSC FIG. 2-A PIXEL does not have to be rec- 42 LINES

An interesting and fully compatible tangular or square in shape. It could be VERTICAL INTERVAL
triangular, or even diamond shaped.
system for a new high -definition
NTSC broadcast system was pro-
posed more than two years ago the pass. After completing that frame '''/ o
525
The Del Rey Group, of Southern Cali- th of a second later, the camera scans NTSC 4:3
LINES
ASPECT RATIO
fornia. The system, dubbed HD- again, this time hitting only sub -pix-
NTSC, can best be understood by re- el -2 areas, and finally sub -pixel -3
garding the smallest resolvable area areas. That approach is called a "Tri -
of the NTSC picture as a "pixel," Scan" technique. At the receiving (.---11.1 µSEC
much as that term is used in referring end, a conventional NTSC receiver
63.5 SEC
to computer-screen resolution. In Fig. would not be aware of "sub -pixels" 35
INES
1, the NTSC pixel is represented as a and would simply paint areas 1, 2 and
rectangle of 1.46:1 ratio, correspond- 3 on top of each other as they come
j_
ing to the present 4:3 NTSC aspect across in successive frames. A new,
ratio. A pixel, however, does not have specially designed HD-NTSC TV set DATA
HD-NTSC 14:9
to be rectangulàr or square in shape. It would reconstruct the same, higher ASPECT RATIO WNDOWS
could be triangular, or even diamond detail image seen by the camera,
shaped as shown in Fig. 2. One way to placing the sub -pixels in their correct
increase the number of addressable offset positions on the CRT. To
points of an image (and therefore the change the aspect ratio, The Del Rey
34
image detail) is to subdivide the pix- Group would simply "chop off" a few LINES
els into smaller units, which might be lines at the top and bottom of the
FIG. 4-TO CHANGE THE ASPECT RATIO,
called sub -pixels, as shown in Fig. 3. existing NTSC line format, as illus- The Del Rey Group would chop off a few
Now, suppose a TV camera is able trated in the comparison of Fig. 4. lines at the top and bottom of the existing
to scan only sub -pixel during its first
1 That arrangement would result in an NTSC line format.

142
 TIME COMPRESSED
SIDE PANEL LOWS
STANDARD NTSC RECEIVER
F_
INTRAFRAME
_TIME EXPANDED AVERAGE ENTE
CENTER PANEL
ABOVE 1.5 MHz
_
COMPONENT - MAIN NTSC SIGNAL
1 NTSC
525 -LINE 2:1 INTERLACED COMPATIBLE
4.2MHz
INTRAFRAME BASEBAND
AVERAGE SIGNAL
R

QM WITH QM WITH NTSC

COMPONENT 2 - TIME EXPANDED
ALTERNATE RF PICTURE COMPATIBLE
NTSC ENCODED SIDE PANEL HIGHS
SUBCARRIER CARRIER 6MHz
RF SIGNAL
\
ORIGINAL WIDESCREEN
SIGNAL INTRAFRAME
AVERAGE

COMPONENT 3 - HORIZONTAL LUMA

DETAIL BETWEEN 5.0 AND 6.2 MHz

750 kHz
LOW PASS

COMPONENT 4 - VERTICAL-TEMPORAL WIDESCREEN RECEIVER

LUMA "HELPER" SIGNAL

FIG. 5-THIS IS HOW ACTV WORKS: An original wide-screen signal is digitized and
encoded into the four components shown.

screen signal, provided from any

high -definition source, is first digi- RF SPECTRUM

tized at the studio and encoded into PICTURE SOUND -

the four components shown in Fig. 5. CARRIER CARRIER

1: The first component is a main,

NTSC-compatible, interlaced signal NTSC LUMA CHROMA
with the usual 4:3 aspect ratio. It con-
sists of the central portion of the pic-
ture that has been time -expanded to
nearly the entire active line time plus -1.0 00
I

1.0
/
2.0
!

3.0 4.0 MHz

the side panel low-frequency horizon- 6 MHz
tal information that has been time
compressed into left and right hori-
zontal overscan regions, where they PICTURE SOUND
CARRIER
would be hidden from view on most CARRIER

standard home receivers. This signal

is color encoded in standard NTSC
LUMA
format.
2: There is an auxiliary 2:1 inter-
laced signal consisting of side panel
high -frequency horizontal informa-
V -T HELPER SIGNAL SIDE PANEL HIGHS AND
tion that has been pre -comb -filtered, EXTRA HORIZONTAL DETAIL
NTSC encoded, and time expanded to
half the active line time. The time FIG. 6-A 4.2 -MHz BASEBAND SIGNAL is RF modulated into a standard 6 -MHz NTSC
expansion reduces the horizontal channel.
bandwidth of this component to a lit-
tle over MHz.
1 shifted downward to the range of from would otherwise be lost in the down
3: The third component is an aux- 0 to 1.2 MHz. conversion to 525 -line interlace. On
iliary 2:1 interlaced signal consisting 4: The fourth and last component is new, wide-screen receivers, this sig-
of horizontal luminance detail be- an auxiliary 2:1 interlaced "helper" nal helps to reconstruct missing lines
tween approximately 5.0 and 6.2 signal, consisting of vertical -tem- and to reduce or eliminate line flicker
MHz. This band of frequencies is first poral (V -T) luminance detail that artifacts.
143
 lution, which, in ACTV-1 is no better
than in standard NTSC. The photos in
the opening of this article show how a
typical scene, transmitted in
ACTV-2, would be viewed on a stan-
dard NTSC receiver (left) and how it
would be seen on a new receiver
equipped for ACTV-2 (right).

Philips HDS-NA
The abbreviation stands for High
Definition System for North America,
and the system, developed specifical-
ly for NTSC-TV based countries,
would be usable on an equal basis for
over-the -air broadcasting, CATV, di-
rect-broadcast satellite or even fiber-
optic transmission. The signal suit-
able for broadcasting or CATV has
been dubbed HDNTSC and it consists
of two major components. The first
component carries the standard
NTSC signal, while the second car-
ries the additional information re-
quired to create the HDTV viewing
experience.
As pointed out by Philips and
others, an ideal HDTV system with
double the present horizontal and ver-
tical resolution and an increased as-
pect ratio would require about five
times the bandwidth or spectral space
of the current NTSC signal, or as
much as 300 MHz! To reduce those
impractical bandwidth requirements,
FIG.7-A WIDE -SCREE V RECEIVER recovers and equalizes the picture components and various signal -processing schemes
reconstructs the original wide-screen progressive scan signal. have been proposed by the various
HDTV proponents. One class of sig-
Signal -components 1, 2 and 3 are nal has left and right side panels nal processing is based upon combin-
passed through a special time -variant offering standard NTSC resolution ing several picture frames from both
filter to eliminate V -T crosstalk be- and a central portion with superior the "past" and "present" in the scene
tween the main and auxiliary signals horizontal and vertical luminance de- captured by the video camera. In our
on a wide-screen receiver. The main tail in the stationary sections of the article last month, we discussed such
signal is intra -frame averaged over all picture. basic picture -enhancement schemes
horizontal frequencies. Components While ACTV-1, just described, is under the general heading of IDTV, or
2 and 3 are amplitude -compressed in delivered within the existing 6 -MHz Improved Definition TeleVision sys-
a non-linear manner, quadrature mod- broadcast channel, a second version tems. Philips has chosen a second ap-
ulated on a phase -controlled subcar- of the system, known as ACTV-2 is proach that applies signal processing
rier at 3.108 MHz, and added to envisioned as well, when and if addi- without the need for inter-frame pic-
component 1. The result is a 4.2 -MHz tional spectrum space is allocated. ture information. The HDS-NA sys-
baseband signal that is RF modulated ACTV-2 would require an additional tem can deliver 1.5 times the normal
into a standard 6 -MHz NTSC chan- 6 -MHz channel of bandwidth. As il- horizontal and vertical resolution of
nel, as shown in Fig. 6. Component 4, lustrated in Fig. 8, a TV station might NTSC, wide aspect ratio, plus multi-
the VT "helper" signal, is modulated someday transmit both ACTV-1 and ple channels of CD -quality digital
in quadrature with the main RF pic- ACTV-2 signals. Both systems would sound.
ture carrier. offer an aspect ratio (on new sets) of The main HDNTSC signal carries
When received on an existing 5:3 or 16:9, and both would have 1050 NTSC and is a standard 6 -MHz chan-
NTSC receiver, only the central lines per frame and 29.97 frames per nel. The extra information needed to
portion of the main signal is seen. A second. However, ACTV-2 would of- create the HDTV viewing experience
wide-screen receiver, such as that fer still greater improvements in lumi- can be transmitted eventually as a dig-
shown in Fig. 7, recovers and equal- nance resolution (650 horizontal and ital bit stream with a bandwidth of 3
izes components 1-4 and reconstructs 800 vertical, as compared to 410 hori- MHz (or one half the extra width of a
the original wide-screen signal. Rela- zontal and 480 vertical for ACTV-1) present-day NTSC channel). Philips
tive to NTSC, the reconstructed sig- and a doubling of chrominance reso- has suggested that the signal energy
144
 Y

WIDESCREEN
HDTV ACTV NISC
SOURCE ENCODER MAIN RECEIVER

ACTV 1
ACTV
DECODER WIDESCREEN
SINGLE -
EDTV
CHANNEL
DISPLAY
DECODER
L

COMPRESSION
INTO 6 MHz
AUX
AUGMENTATION
CHANNEL

N Y
ACTV
1 WIDESCREEN
TWO-
DIGITAL AUDIO, ETC... HDTV
CHANNEL
DECODER DISPLAY

TRANSMITTER

DIGITAL AUDIO

FIG.8-A TV STATION MIGHT SOMEDAY TRANSMIT 30TH ACTV-1 and ACTV-2 signals.
Both systems would offer an aspect ratio (on new sets) of 5:3 or 16:9, and both would have
1050 lines per frame and 29.97 frames per second.

of that extra augmenting channel can Philips system is "backward compati- standard for a no-compromise HDTV
be well below the main NTSC signal ble." Owners of older NTSC TV sets system. That problem arises pri-
level. That being the case, the extra will continue to receive "normal" marily because of the fundamental
signal might even be transmitted via pictures while owners of newer sets difference in TV frame rates between
the so-called "tabu" channels in each designed for the HDS-NA system will U.S. (and Japanese) NTSC and Euro-
geographical area. receive the benefits of higher defini- pean PAL. The European frame rate is
By "tabu" channels, we mean the tion and a wider aspect ratio. 25 frames per second while the NTSC
TV channels that normally remain frame rate is 30 frames per second.
unassigned in a given area because Battle Of Incompatibles That difference is a throwback to
they are adjacent to used channels. Finally, we come to the group of the early days of TV, when scanning
For example, if Channel 2 is assigned HDTV systems that are totally incom- fields were synchronized to the
in a given city, Channel 3 remains patible with our present day NTSC power-line frequencies used (50 Hz in
unassigned. The same holds true for system (and, for that matter, with the Europe, 60 Hz in North America and
Channel 5 and 6, etc. (Channels 4 and PAL and SECAM systems used in many sections of Japan). Today, much
5, in the New York area, for example, other parts of the world). Aside from more sophisticated systems of vertical
are not really adjacent, as there is a 4- the incompatibility problems of these synchronization are in use, but, unfor-
MHz space between them.) If Philips systems, there is also the problem of tunately, the standard frame rates are
is correct about that, then in the New attempting to establish a world-wide well entrenched in their respective
York area, for example, both Channel counties. Thus, it may well be that
2 and 4 might "share" Channel 3 for 11 two "world" standards may evolve
10
their augmentation channel; each 9 for no -compromise, incompatible
using one half (3 MHz) of the other- 8
7
HDTV. The European proposal is for
wise unassigned channel spectrum. 6 a 2:1 increase in number of lines per
5
Using the tabu channels is not a nec- 4 picture and a doubling of the pixel
3
essary requirement for the Philips sys- 2 density or horizontal resolution with
tem-it is just one possibility. The D
1
respect to their present broadcast sys-
augmentation channels could just as -1 tems. The Europeans would retain
-2
easily be positioned at other, non- .1 10
3 their present frame rate of 25 Hz.
However, much work has already
1

contiguous frequencies which would FREQUENCY -MHz

have to be assigned for that purpose FIG. 9-ALL FORMS OF MAC, including
been done to reduce the large area
by the FCC if the Philips system were MUSE, employ various amounts of pre - flicker problem that is so noticeable to
to prevail. As was true of ACTV, the emphasis for the video signals. those of us who travel to Europe and
145
 watch TV there. It is planned that The missing samples of the line are
future displays would be refreshed transmitted next, followed by alter-
You Can Be
ISCET from the frame storage memory at a nate samples of the missing lines and,
CERTIFIED
75- or 100 -Hz rate. finally, the samples previously omit-
One Of The The HDTV system that seems to be ted. MUSE has two resolution specifi-
20,000 Technicians favored for North America has a more cations. One resolution is for static
complex relationship to NTSC. The pictures where the full information
Certified BY ISCET line ratio would be 15:7. A down - content of the 1125 -line system is de-
conversion from HDTV to broadcast livered via one 8.1 -MHz baseband
NTSC would require either a digital video signal. The other is the resolu-
The International Society Of Certified interpolation of 15:7 or the cropping tion that is provided when the picture
Electronics Technicians offers permanent
certification by administering the CET of 69 lines at top or bottom or both to contains motion; that is the resolution
exam with the FCC recognized communi- give 966 active TV lines, so that a of current NTSC pictures. All forms
cations option for $20. A second exam
on FCC regulations for a $10 fee is re- simple 2:1 digital interpolation could of MAC, including MUSE, employ
quired for a Radiotelephone license.
Upon passing, technicians receive both a yield 483 active lines per the NTSC various amounts of pre -emphasis for
permanent Radiotelephone Operator Cer- standard (the remaining lines of the the video signals, as shown in Fig. 9.
tificate and a CET Certificate issued by
ISCET. so-called 525 line NTSC system are In MAC systems, the 0 -dB crossover
not visible on screen, but are in the frequency for the emphasis curve is
vertical blanking interval). Many of much higher than for NTSC, and the
the HDTV systems that are currently low-frequency gain reduction is only
ISCET Offers License Renewal
under consideration are known as about 3 dB for the B -MAC and D-2
ISCET has developed a program for regis- MAC systems, which is an acronym MAC systems. MUSE employs a very
tration of those who currently hold a that stands for Time Multiplexed Ana- elegant form of pre -emphasis that
valid Radiotelephone Operator License.
By sending a completed application, a log Components. MAC systems, it provides substantial improvement in
photocopy of your FCC License, and $10 should be noted, are inherently free of signal-to-noise ratios. The MUSE
your license will be renewed with the
assurance of a recognized national tech-
the color artifacts that have always pre -emphasis characteristic applies a
nicians association behind it. plagued both NTSC and PAL broad- large high -frequency gain boost for
cast pictures. small -amplitude high -frequency
For More Information Contact:
In Europe, the consensus seems to components, and much less emphasis
ISCET 2708 W. Berry, Ft. Worth, TX
be that the HDTV production stan- for large high -frequency compo-
76109. (817) 921 - 9101 dard used in studios will be fully com- nents. That is possible only with a
patible with a version of MAC called signal format that has no color subcar-
D-2 MAC which is intended to be rier mixed in with it.
LEARN VCR, used shortly as the Direct Broadcast
Satellite (DBS) transmission signal of
There are other variations on the
MAC HDTV idea, but by now it
CLEANING/MAINTENANCE/REPAIR
EARN UP TO $1000 A WEEK,WORKING the European Broadcast Union should be clear that the path towards a
PART TIME FROM YOUR OWN HOME! (EBU). The emphasis there is on com- standard is going to be a long and
patibility with D-2 MAC, and not tortuous one. There seems to be an
Íri Vi_
I Secrets
Revealed!
NOSpecial
Tools or
Equipment
Needed.
necessarily with PAL or SECAM.
Some see the eventual use of D-2
MAC for terrestrial transmission with
the eventual replacement of the exist-
ing PAL and SECAM.
increasing tendency, in this country at
least, to favor some sort of NTSC
compatible approach to enhanced def-
inition TV, so that millions of TV's
don't become obsolete. It is entirely
B -MAC, a system developed by possible that the first delivery of
Scientific Atlanta, while not a true HDTV may not be via broadcasting or
HDTV system in that it transmits an cable TV at all. It could well be that
THE MONEY MAKING OPPORTUNITY
OF THE 1990'S
interlaced 525 -line picture and is we will see first examples of HDTV
IF you are able to work with common small hand therefore limited in vertical resolu- delivered to us in the form of software
tools, and are familiar with basic electronics (i.e. able
to use voltmeter, understand DC electronics)... .
tion, might more properly be called (new laser optical -disc formats or
IF you possess average mechanical ability, and have a an Enhanced Definition System. even new VCR formats based upon
VCR on which to practice and learn. ...then we can
teach YOU VCR maintenance and repair!
NHK, the Japanese government - Super VHS or ED -Beta technology).
FACT: up to 90% of ALL VCR malfunctions are due to sponsored broadcast authority, has Of course, such software will require
simple MECHANICAL or ELECTRO -MECHANICAL
breakdowns!
taken a totally different approach to new video monitor/receivers and
FACT: over 77 million VCRs in use today nationwide! the transmission of HDTV pictures. other new hardware. Still, you should
Average VCR needs service or repair every 12 to 18
months!
Since their 1125 -line picture is not hold on to those NTSC receivers for
Viejo's 400 PAGE TRAINING MANUAL (over 500 pho- designed to be compatible with any the moment, since the current multi-
tos and illustrations) and AWARD -WINNING VIDEO
TRAINING TAPE reveals the SECRETS of VCR mainte-
existing broadcast standards, they plicity of HDTV systems could well
nance and repair-"real world" information that is have developed a special form of delay over-the -air HDTV for many
NOT available elsewhere! MAC for HDTV transmission. It's years to come. R -E
Also includes all the info you'll need regarding the
BUSINESS -SIDE of running a successful service op- called MUSE, which is an acronym
eration! for MUltiple Sub-Nyquist Encod-
FREE INFORMATION
CALL TOLL-FREE 1-800-537-0589 ing." MUSE sub -samples the 1125 -
Or write to: Viejo Publications line picture, transmitting every other
3540 Wilshire BL. STE 310
Los Angeles, CA 90010 Dept REHB pixel of every other line in a first field.
146 CIRCLE 21 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD
 HIGH-POWER
HI-FI
AUDIO AMP

FOR YOUR HOME OR CAR

With rock -n -roll power, here's a stereo amplifier that you can build.

L.K. ROSS and AMP WATTS

EVERY SO OFTEN A NEW IC COMES ONTO The LM12 power -amp has many monitor amp. or guitar-practice amp.
the market that excites the experi- features that make it ideal as an audio
menter's imagination with all sorts of amplifier. You'll first notice the ex- How it works
possibilities. One such IC is National tremely low parts count that permits The Opto -Amp has two identical
Semiconductor's LM12 power op - compact size, reliability, and ease of channels (for stereo), so we'll analyze
amp: And when we say power, we assembly. All kinds of circuity are in detail the right channel only. The
mean power. That single IC can pump built right into the LM12 IC: con- LM381 (IC3) pre -amplifier has an in-
out 100 -watts RMS of audio into 4 - trolled turn -on, thermal limiting, put -voltage range of 0.75 to 1 volt,
ohms; twice that amount of power is over-voltage shutdown, output -cur- with a voltage gain of about 10; the
available if you use two LM12 IC's in rent limiting, and complete protection LM12 (IC1 and IC2) power-amps will
a bridge configuration. against overloads including shorts to provide a voltage gain of about 4
Today,-especially with compact - the supplies! each. In keeping with the design goal
disc audio, and its wide dynamic Table 1 shows the complete Opto - of low parts count, the LM381 is an
range-even moderate levels of sound Amp specifications. Notice the excel- ideal choice. It's easy to operate, and
reproduction require a power ampli- lent distortion specification (THD requires only a single positive supply
fier that won't clip the peak inputs. less than .01%, slew rate as high as with simple filtering provided by R9
The LM12 can supply those peak - 9V/µs), which should appeal to se- and C9. Audio goes to the inverting
power demands-and so the Opto - rious audio buffs and sound profes- input, while the non-inverting input is
Amp idea took shape from that begin- sionals. Possible applications of our at AC ground through C10. Resistors
ning. Two separate power supplies amplifier include just about whatever R6 and R3 determine the gain, and R5
were also designed: one for 110-volt your imagination dreams up: car-ster- provides bias. Coupling -capacitor
AC home operation, and another for eo booster amp, sub -woofer amp, PA Cll isolates the audio input from the
12 -volt DC car operation. system, yacht -stereo amp, stage - amplifier biasing.
147
 C13
J1
RIGHT 1 100V .- JUl
INPUT l500pF
POWER AMP R
is
L2
1K
3.32K
4µH J3
C12
R1
IC1 OUT
5K JI
100V
1µf
R14
LM12
,,w
1.1K 4 R16
INPUT R5 JU3 SPEAKER
SENSITIVITY 10K )I 2.252
JACKS
RIGHT OUT
PRE -AMP D4
J2 CUT MR856
LEFT IPADS TO N D3
INPUT BRIDGE = MR856
JU2
Cl +
C2
50V
4700µF
T+ 50V
R2 4700 p. F
5K
R8 C5
INPUT
10K ; 100V
SENSITIVITY JU6
1500pF
POWER AMP R12
3.32K LIq
4µH

NOTE: FOR BRIDGE CONFIGURATION:

Rit IC2 OUT
1N jjjjj
+ Q
1.1K LM12 Rl7
1. INSTALL JUMPERS JU2 AND JU4 SPEAKER
2.252
JACKS
2. REMOVE JU3 R10
1K
3. REMOVE R10

4. REPLACE R13 WITH JUMPER WIRE

Z D2
MR856
LEFT OUT
It
D1
5. REPLACE R15 WITH 4.53K OHM 1°1°
C4
1} C3 = MR856
6. REPLACE R14 WITH 1.13K OHM 1% 50V 50V
7. CUT FOIL BETWEEN PADS FROM R14 AND GROUND 4700µF 4700µF

8. INPUT BECOMES LEFT CHANNEL INPUT HE-

9. TAKE + OUTPUT FROM LEFT OUTPUT
J4
TERMINAL BLOCK ®®
10. TAKE + OUTPUT FROM RIGHT OUTPUT
+35V COMMON -35V

FIG. 1-THE OPTO -AMP IS NORMALLY SET UP FOR STEREO, but can be re -configured
for monaural-with twice the output power.

power-supply filtering requirement.

TABLE 1: OPTO-AMP SPECIFICATIONS Examine the PC -board layout and
note some of the design features that
POWER RATING: CONTINUOUS are not seen in the schematic. For
example, all grounds are returned to a
STEREO: 60 WATTS RMS PER CHANNEL CONTINUOUS INTO 8 OHMS
100 WATTS RMS PER CHANNEL CONTINUOUS INTO 4 OHMS single point for each amplifier, and
the + V and -V supplies are kept
BRIDGED: 120 WATTS RMS INTO 8 OHMS separate for each IC amplifier.
200 WATTS RMS INTO 4 OHMS
WILL DRIVE 2 OHM LOAD LIMITED TO 150 WATTS PER CHANNEL
TOTAL POWER DISSIPATION IS 150 WATTS MAX EACH CHANNEL. Bridging to mono
The Opto -Amp is capable of being
DISTORTION: THD IS LESS THAN .01% bridged for twice the power, namely,
for monaural applications. To convert
SLEW RATE: 9V, µs
the opto -amp from a stereo to mon-
SIZE: 10.2" x 2.6" x 5" aural (bridge) operation, you'll have
to perform some PC -board surgery
o INPUT: LINE LEVEL WITH INPUT SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENTS like moving jumpers around and cut-
o
ting copper lands. That's because IC2
o
z stays in the non -inverting configura-
_ The pre -amp output is AC -coupled the amplifier to drive capacitive tion, while IC3 is changed to an inver-
m through C12 to IC2, which is set up as loads, which audio power amplifiers ting amplifier. Both amplifier outputs
w a non -inverting amplifier. The gain is must be able to do. Capacitor C13 is are then equal in magnitude, but op-
I-
zw equal to (R14 + R15)/R14. Diodes D3 in the feed-back loop for frequency posite in phase. Any speaker con-
2 and D4 are necessary to clamp the stability. Large supply -capacitors Cl nected between the two outputs will
ír output to the supply rails in case the
Lu and C2 are located close to the IC to have twice the signal amplitude of
a speakers (which are inductive loads)
X
w
prevent changes in load current from either amplifier referenced to ground.
w kick back. Inductor L2 and resistor returning to the amplifier's input-a (When two amplifiers are bridged
r± R16 provide output isolation enabling precaution that also reduces the across a speaker, the output ground of
148
 MASTER THE NEW ELECTRONICS WITH McGRAW-HILL'S

po 11

Bectunics Series
The fast, easy and low cost way to
meet the challenges of today's
electronic innovations. A unique
learning series that's as innovative as
the circuitry it explains, as
fascinating as the experiments you
build and explore.

From digital logic to the latest

32 -bit microprocessor, the McGraw-
Hill Contemporary Electronics Series
puts you into the electronic picture
one easy step at a time. Fifteen
unique Concept Modules, sent to you
one every 4-6 weeks, give you a
handle on subjects like optoelec-
tronics, robotics, integrated circuits,
lasers, fiber optics and more. wants
Each Concept Module goes an update in con-
right to the heart of the matter. temporary circuits...a
You waste no time on extraneous manager or supervisor in an electronics
material or outdated history. It's a Perform plant...a doctor, an engineer, a chemist
fast, efficient, and lively learning Experiments who fmds electronics playing an
experience... a non-traditional in Contemporary Electronics increasingly important role in your
approach to the most modern of Throughout your series, lab- work. It's even for electronics engineers
subject matter. oratory experiments reinforce every or technicians who feel their training
significant point. This needs freshening up. It's the quickest,
Unique Interactive Instruction most convenient,
essential experience
With each module, you receive probably least
a McGraw-Hill Action Audio ...dynamic, hands-on
demonstrations of expensive way to
Cassette. Each tape is a dynamic «111Je do it. And the
discussion that drives home the key theory in practice.. .
will help you master only one that gives
facts about the subject. Your learning you hands-on
principles that apply all 1

With your first

the way up to tomorrow's . experience.
module, you
get this
solderless
latest VLSI (Very Large 15 -Day No -Risk Trial
breadboarding Scale Integrated) circuitry. To order your first module
system. You'll
use it through- In your very first module, you'll without risk, send the card today.
out the series to
build elec- use integrated circuits to build a digital Examine it for 15 days under the
tronic circuits
and bring oscillator, verifying its operation with terms of the order form and see how
concepts
to life.
a light emitting diode (LED). You'll the Contemporary Electronics Series
learn to identify passive and active gets you into today's electronics.
components, understand concepts If card has been used, write us for
experience is reinforced through common to all electronic circuits. ordering information.
interaction with vividly illustrated For Anyone Interested in Electronics
text, audio cassettes, and actual The Contemporary Electronics OFI McGraw-Hill
electronic experiments. Indexed Series is designed for anyone from Continuing Education Center
binders preserve backup material, hobbyist to professional. It's for you 4401 Connecticut Avenue NW
notes, and tapes for convenient if you're looking for new fields of I IMI il Washington, D.C. 20008
referral. interest...if you're a teacher who
151
 each amplifier is no longer used for that has two center-tapped primary
the audio's return path through the windings. Transistors Ql and Q2 are PARTS LIST OPTO -AMP
speaker.) hefty 30 -amp transistors that switch
12 volts through the primary -windings
All resistors are 1/4 -watt, 5%, un-
But there's more: The values of the less otherwise noted.
gain -setting resistors in IC2 must be No.1 and No.3. The center-tapped R2 -5000-ohms trimmer potenti-
changed, because the gain for an in- winding No.2 is connected to 12 ometer
verting amplifier is R15/R14 with R14 volts, while windings No.4, No.5, R3, R4, R5, R8-10,000 ohms
no longer connected to ground at one and No.6 are the base-drive windings R6, R7-100,000 ohms
end. The right input pre -amplifier is for Ql and Q2. Power-resistors Rl and R10, R13-1000 ohms, 1%
no longer needed, so remove JU3. R2 provide bias. The base -drive R11, R14-1100 ohms, 1%
The input to IC2 is from the left input windings are connected out of phase R12, R15-3320 ohms 1%
pre -amplifier, so install JU4 and JU2. with the main primary windings, so R16, R17-2.2 ohms, 2 -watt
The positive input of IC2 is connected Q1 and Q2 switch on and off to alter- Capacitors
nate the current into the transformer Cl -C4-4700µF, 50 volts, axial
to ground by replacing R13 with a electrolytic
jumper wire. Refer to the note in Fig. primary. The secondary winding has a C5, C13-1500 pF, 100 volts, poly-
1 for bridge conversion. turns ratio of approximately 5 times ester foil
the primary, which yields after rec- C6, C7, C11, C12-1µF,100 volts, ce-
Power supplies tification and filtering an output volt- ramic monolithic
There are two different power-sup- age of ± 35 volts for a 12 -volt input. C8, C10-0.1µF, 50 volts, axial ce-
plies depending on where you want to The 12 -volt supply is ultra simple ramic monolithic
use the opto -amp: one for 110 -volt AC and ultra reliable. The tape -wound Semiconductors
home operation, and another for 12 - toroidal -core transformer is custom- IC1, IC2-LM12CL, 150 -watt power
made and available from the source in op -amp
volt DC car or boat operation.
the Parts List. Other types of cores lC3-LM381N, audio pre -amp
Figure 2 shows a 12 -volt power sup- Dl-D4-MR856, rectifier diode, 3-
ply that you can use to operate the will not work; this is one of those amp, 300 -volts
Opto -Amp in your car or boat. The 12 - times when the exact part must be Inductors
volt to 70 -volt (± 35 volt) converter used. The supply will pull about 2 L1, L2-Inductor, 4µH
uses a toroidal -core transformer (Ti) amps under no load, and can supply 5 Miscellaneous :Thermalloy 6421B
heat -sink, AW-12 PC board, en-
closure, hardware, phono jacks,
II -4 speaker terminals, power terminal
D1
C2
strip, rubber feet, hookup wire,
+ 50V
MR856
4700µF magnetic wire, 14 -pin DIP socket.
C3

\
D2
50V * R3

--j+---n'
k MR856
4700.µF 2.2K
amps with the output voltage drop-
ping down to ± 30 volts when heavily
01 D4 -
= LEDI
loaded.
R4 R5
2N5302 MR856
1K Figure 3 shows the 110 -volt AC
1: R2
6 9 power supply that uses a toroidal
7.552
D3
MR856
J6 COM AUX +12V power transformer to supply 70 volts
= cl
(± 35 volts) at 5 amps; traditional
16V `s' laminated -core transformers can be
1000µF
. used as well. The advantage of the
toroid transformer is that it's self-
perfect for operating the opto -amp from a car
shielding because the flux lines stay
FIG. 2-THE 12 -VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY is
or boat battery. inside the core. The AC -line input
uses an RFUEMI filter, a power on/off
switch, and line fuse. (A nice feature
C2 is the detachable AC line cord with
50V
4700µF
standard plug that mates to the EMI -
filter module.) The transformer sec-
ondary is rectified by diodes D1 -D4
Ti

F1 and filtered by C2 and C3 to provide

o
z -II two output voltages (± 35 volts) with
EMI FILTER
a common ground. Each output is
U)
I
J5 fused for 5 -amps.
TERMINAL BLOCK
w F3
Notice that the supply outputs are
w
INPUT 110 VAC unregulated. Bleeder resistors R2 and
2 R3 serve two functions. First, the
E bleeders maintain a minimum load to
w
Q-
xw -35V COM +35V prevent a large increase in output volt-
w FIG. 3-THE 110 -VOLT AC POWER SUPPLY is perfect for operating the opto -amp from age when the amplifier is discon-
your household AC current. nected. Second, when the power is
152
 SPEAKER CONNECTOR J3
turned off, the resistors bleed the cur-
rent off the filter capacitors, thereby
eliminating the possibility of a shock TERMINAL BLOCK
hazard from a charged capacitor. J4
OUT2
+
OUT1
+35V COMMON -35V
LEDI functions as an on/off indicator -R16 - COMMON - -- R17 -
that operates from secondary voltage. -D1i--
The PC board for each power sup- -1+02 --
+-
CC ,
ply is single -sided and available from WHT
the source in the Parts List, or you can
etch your own using the PC Service
layout. Component polarity is critical JU1 z
for the electrolytic capacitors and the -R15- C C3 Rg R12_
C13- Ç9 i._.....1--, C5 C4
diodes, so make sure that you double-
-
.1

. .._.... -R14- R11_

check them prior to soldering. i....../ -__.

+IN R13- -R10-
-IN 35V (CASE) zd -C12
C10 CB
f
C6-,¡
JU2 R5 R8
R3 R4 *JU4
Construction tips -C7
As shown in Fig. 4, inductors Ll Ç1 C11"
JU3 iuJR2 JU5
-t Rl + *SEE FIG.1, AND TEXT
and L2 are simple to wind by hand
with 10 turns of magnet wire on a RIGHT LEFT

ferrite core. The core type is not crit- CHANNEL CHANNEL

INPUT 2 INPUT 1

ical; indeed, any 1" -diameter ferrite -

core will work just fine. Use 4" tie - FIG.4-PARTS PLACEMENT FOR THE OPTO -AMP. The inductors should be wound
wraps to secure the wound inductors exactly as shown.
to the PC board. Before you solder
magnet wire to the PC board, scrape
off the varnish and tin the bare copper
with a hot soldering iron.
Take extra care when installing the
IC amps on the large heat sinks. Mod-
ify the IC insulator with a knife to
accommodate the two extra pins on
the LM12, and remove any burrs from
the heat -sink. Make sure that you use
tubing on the four IC leads to prevent
shorts to the heat -sink. Apply heat -
sink compound on both sides of the
insulator to facilitate heat transfer.
When you install the LM12 on the
heat sink, tighten the mounting
screws before soldering the IC pins to
the PC board. CAUTION: Note that w
cc
the heat -sink will ultimately be at CONTINU TY BETWEEN GND AND
ground potential, that the case of COM IS THROUGH THE CAR'S
BATTERY GROUND AND CHASSIS.
-35V COM +35V AUX GND +12V

PARTS LIST-12 -VOLT POWER - FIG.5-PARTS PLACEMENT FOR THE 12 -VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY. Notice the place-
SUPPLY ment of the torodial transformer T1.
01, Q2-2N5301, NPN transistor
LED1-(Light Emitting Diode) green
with panel mount
the LM12 is the 35-volt supply, - insulated heat sinks, and heat -sink
and that none of the pins are at compound is a must. The transformer
D1-4--MR856, rectifier diode, fast, ground potential-so be careful leads must be formed until they line
3 -amp, 300 volts.
R1-75 ohms, 10 -watt, 5% and double-check your work with up with the holes in the PC board, or
R2-7.5 ohms 5 -watt, 5% an ohmmeter. else they might pull up the copper
R3-2000 ohms, 1/4 -watt, 5% The amplifier inputs and outputs foil. The LED power indicator is con-
R4-1000 ohms, 1/4 -watt, 5% are clearly labeled on the artwork. nected between 12 volts and ground
R5-1000 ohms, 1/4 -watt, 5% Use No.16-gauge bus wires on the using a 2000 -ohm current -limiting re-
C1 -1000µF, 16 volts, axial outputs. The power supply and sistor R3. The terminal strip JU4 has
electrolytic ground wires are brought out to a ter- outputs for the + V, V, and COM -
C2, C3-47000, 50 volts, axial minal strip JU4. Lastly, install capaci- connections. The AUX terminal is
electrolytic tors CI-C4 about''/" above the board wired to + 12 volts to power a cooling
T1-T1270, custom transformer on the solder side, with the polarity as fan, and the remaining two terminals
Miscellaneous
PS -1270 PC board, chassis assem-
indicated on the artwork. are 12 -volt DC input and GND.
bly, hardware, 6 -terminal power Figure 5 shows the Parts Placement Figure 6 shows the custom trans-
strip, hookup wire. for the 12 -volt DC supply. Mounting former (T1) for the 12 -volt DC power
the 2N5301 power transistors using supply. Anyone wishing to build it
153
 PARTS LIST-AC POWER -
SUPPLY o
D1-D4-MR856, rectifier diode, Si. ON
F1

EMI FILTER
fast, 3 -amp, 300 volts
LED1-(Light Emitting Diode) green LEDI

with panel mount

C1-C4-4700µF, 500 volts, radial
electrolytic
R1-2200 ohms, 1/4 -watt, 5%
F3
- R3 -;
R2, R3-1000 ohms, 1/4 -watt, 5%
T1-Toroidal transformer, 110 -volts -R2 ---
primary, 70 -volts, center-tapped )U2
YEL
secondary
Miscellaneous: EMI line -filter Jul
YEL

(Standex, LR57454, 3 -amp 250 - BLKo

TO Ti
volt), 3 -prong AC line -cord, SPDT RED TOROIDAL
switch, PS110/70 PC -board, PC - TRANSFORMER
GRN
mount fuse clips, 5 -amp fuses,
C2 CI
chassis -mount fuse -holder with 3 -
amp 250 -volt fuse, chassis assem- F2 N DI
bly, hardware, 6 -terminal strip, and
hookup wire.
will want detailed information about D3
C3
the transformer that uses a standard
02
tape -wound core. As you might have
already guessed, tape -wound cores
are not very common, and it is un- RED

likely that you will find an equivalent BLK

core-except from the manufacturer, WHT

Magnetics, Inc., and their minimum

order is $100. In addition to that hur- G G G
dle, the transformer is somewhat dif- -35V COMMON +35V

ficult to wind because of the large - FIG. 7-PARTS PLACEMENT FOR THE 110 -VOLT AC power supply.
wire sizes involved; therefore, Op-
toelectronics, Inc. will supply the Windngs: Preimary 14 -turns center - 1/4" spacers and No. 4 hardware.
complete T1270 custom -wound trans- tapped, base -drive 6 -turns center- Check to make sure that nothing is
former. (For ordering information, re- tapped, secondary 38 -turns center- shorted to the chassis under the PC
fer to the Parts List.) Should you want tapped. board. The output terminal strip is
Wire: Primary uses 12 -gauge, base - wired as indicated on the chassis art-
drive uses 16 -gauge, and the second- work with two terminals for + V, two
ary uses 14 -gauge. for -V, and two for ground. Use a 3 -
Mount the transformer to the chas- amp 250 -volt fuse in the line -fuse
sis using plastic ties with the trans- holder, and 5 A fuses in the outputs.
former resting on plastic tie downs. Figure 7 shows the 110 -volt to
Mount the PC board to the chassis on ± 35 -volt power supply. Assemble
the PC board and make sure that the
ORDERING INFORMATION
polarity of the diodes and filter capac-
The following are available from
Optoelectronics, Inc. 58821 N.E. itors is correct. Install all hardware in
14th Ave., Ft. Lauderdale, FL the chassis and wire the transformer
33334; phone (800) 327-5912, FL secondary to the PC board as indicat-
residents phone (305) 771-2050; ed in the schematic. Solder one trans-
include 5% shipping and han- former-primary lead directly to one of
dling; FL residents add 6% sales the insulated terminals on the EMI
FIG. 6-HERE'S THE TORODIAL trans- tax. Master Card and Visa OK for filter. (Use heat shrink tubing over all
former used in the 12 -VOLT DC to ±35 - orders over $200. Opto -Amp am-
VOLT DC power supply.
primary connections to prevent elec-
plifier complete kit $149; 12 -volts trical shock when servicing.) Con-
power supply model 1270 for nect the other transformer-primary
to build your own transformer, here
$99.95; AC power supply model
are the specifications you'll need: 110/70 for $119. Individual parts: lead to the center terminal of the tog-
Description: 12 -volt input, 64-volt any PC board $25; LM12CLK $29 gle switch. The bottom terminal of
center-tap output, with 6.8 -volt cen- each; heat -sinks $9.95 each; the toggle switch gets wired to the
ter-tap base -drive winding. T1270 tape -wound power trans- chassis -mount fuse holder, while the
Core: 1 mil tape-wound with case former for 12 -volt DC supply $30; fuse holder's center terminal gets
dimension of 1.460" x 0.915" x send self addressed stamped en- wired to the other insulated terminal
0.345". Magnetics, Inc. part number velope for a complete price list of on the EMI filter.
52029-1D. all parts. continued on page 157

154
 J -L^
L .

OUR BATTERY -POWERED WIRELESS FM

transmitter that can transmit an audio
signal over a short distance (about a
hundred feet), to any frequency in the
WIRELESS FM
standard FM band. The transmitter
itself is assembled on a PC board that
measures less than 4 square inches
MICROPHONE
(34 x 46 millimeters). The fully as-
sembled unit is shown in Fig. 1. Here's a wireless FM transmitter that's
The transmitter conforms to the so versatile, we shouldn't even have
FCC's regulations regarding wireless
microphones. Its emissions stay with- to tell you what you
in a band of 200-kHz, and its output is can do with it!
between 88 and 108 MHz. The field
strength of the radiated emissions do
not exceed 50 µV/m at a distance of
15 meters from the device.
The small size of the transmitter is
what gives it its versatility. The trans-
mitter can be used as a wireless mi-
crophone, it can be concealed in a
room and used a "bug" for a good
practical joke, or perhaps placed near
a baby's crib and used as a child
monitor. The wireless microphone in
Fig. 2 used the case of an old micro-
phone that was found in a junkbox. A
small on/off switch was added to the
circuit. It can be used to talk to some-
one in another car on a long road trip, MARC SPIWAK,
or to anyone wearing a walkman -type ASSOCIATE EDITOR
radio.
a tank circuit that, in combination
The circuit with Q1, C2, and R1, oscillates at a
The schematic for the transmitter frequency on the FM band. The center
circuit is shown in Fig. 3. Adjustable - frequency is set by adjusting C10. An audio signal that is
capacitor, C10, and the coil, Ll, form electret microphone, M1, picks up an amplified by transistor
Q2. The audio signal is
coupled via C9 to Q1, which
frequency -modulates the tank
circuit. The signal is then radiated
from the antenna. (A piece of solid
wire can be used as an antenna if you
don't want to use a telescopic one.)
The circuit can operate from 9-12
volts DC. It's easiest to use an ordi-
nary 9 -volt transistor battery, but if
you have to conserve space in a small
case, you may prefer to use small 12 -
volt batteries that are about half the
size of a AA cell. If you are going to
use the transmitter as a child monitor
or for some other similar application,
you may want to use an AC adapter as
a power source.

Parts
FIG. 1-THE FULLY ASSEMBLED PC BOARD. This FM transmitter board is so small, All of the parts, including an
measuring 15/46 x 113A6 inches, that it will fit inside almost anything. etched, drilled, and silk-screened PC
155
 PARTS LIST 7

All resistors are 1/4 -watt, 5%, un-

C10
11
C3 - R5 R7

less otherwise noted. ANT

10-40pF
(SEE TEXT) 330pF 47K-1 47K B1
9V
S
R6
R1-100 ohms 22MEG
R4
R2, R4-10,000 ohms Cf 10K 4 C9 +- Wr-
R3-1000 ohms 1.5pF 1

R5, R7-47,000 ohms ,

IE.... C6
R6-2.2 megohms C2
f00pF"r
.),L)
001
R8-4700 ohms MiCt2
BF199
f-- BC183C
1

Capacitors C4
(

t
01-1.5 pF, ceramic disc 330pF

02-100 pF. NPO R1 R2

C3, 04-330 pF, NPO

oos t 10K
S1
1
C5, CO 0.1 F. NPO
C6-0.001 µF, NPO
C7-22 µF, electrolytic FIG. 3-THE FM -TRANSMITTER circuit has few components, but it can still transmit a
C8 6.8 (IF. electrolytic clear audio signal up to a hundred feet.
010-10-10 pF trimmer capacitor
Semiconductors
Q1-BF199 or NTE229, or equivalent
NPN transistor
Q2-BC183C or NTE199, or equiv-
alent NPN transistor
Other components
L1-coil, approximately 1 µH (see
text)
M1-electret microphone
S1-SPST switch
Miscellaneous: 9 -volt battery and
connector, wire, project case, sol-
der, etc.
Note: The complete TSM kit for the
FM transmitter is available for
$13.85. Contact Prospect Elec-
tronics, PO Box 9144, Allentown,
PA 18105.

FIG. 4-HERE IS THE COMPLETE PARTS KIT. You shouldn't have any trouble building
this one, and it's sure to work when finished.

FIG. 2-THIS WIRELESS MICROPHONE

was made out of an old, gutted micro-
phone. A transmitter and a 9 -volt battery FIG. 5-PARTS-PLACEMENT DIAGRAM. Solder the components to the board in the order
fit inside. of the Parts List.

156
board are available as a kit from TSM should be no problem. It might be
(see Fig. 4). If you look at the PC easier to receive a clear signal on a
board's foil pattern in PC Service, dial -tuned radio, rather than a digi-
you'll notice that there's a small tally tuned one.
square -shaped spiral -like trace on the
board. That is actually the coil, Ll. The case
So, whether you buy the kit, or if you You can really go wild on the case
can find all the parts in your junkbox for this one. You can install the board
and make your own PC board, you'll and battery in practically anything.
already have LI. But if you want to The microphone is very sensitive, so
build the circuit on a breadboard, you it will pick up an audio signal from
might be able to get away with an inside an empty cigarette pack, as
adjustable coil centered around 1µH. shown in Fig. 6. You can put the trans-
FIG. 6-AN EMPTY CIGARETTE PACK
The only other things you'll need is a makes a good home for the FM transmit- mitter in any small box that will blend
battery and battery clip, a small case, ter. into the particular surroundings-it
and a piece of wire for the antenna. can be from cough drops, paper clips,
there are no bad solder joints or sugar, or inside an empty vitamin jar!
Construction bridges before connecting power. There's probably enough room inside
Building this kit is no different than most portable radios to install a trans-
building any other, once you have the Get it working mitter, and you might be able to tap
PC board. A Parts -Placement di- After you apply power to the board, power from the existing batteries.
agram is shown in Fig. 5. The compo- all you have to do is set an ordinary Then you'll have a portable radio/
nents should be soldered to the board FM radio on an unused station on the transmitter, that can easily be moved
in the order that they're listed in the lower portion of the dial-around 88 to any room in your home.
Parts List. To avoid damaging the MHz. Then just speak into the electret Another idea is to hollow out the
electret microphone, make sure that microphone while adjusting C10 center of an old book and put a trans-
the lead connected to the micro- using a plastic trimmer tool. at some mitter and battery in there. The wire-
phone's case is the one that you con- point you should hear your voice on less transmitter is so versatile, that
nect to ground on the PC board. And the radio. Once you find the approxi- you'll surely want to build one-or
of course, as always, make sure that mate setting of C10, fine tuning it two! R -E

volume control to prevent damaging Both the Opto -Amp and power sup-
HI-FI AMPLIFIER your speakers and ears. ply are compact enough to mount
continued from page 154 For 12 -volt operation, the wire size wherever space is available. If there is
going to the battery must be a mini- no air flow-such as in the vehicle's
mum of 12 -gauge for up to 8 -foot trunk-then use a 12 -volt fan to move
Checkout lengths, and larger gauge for longer air over the heat -sink fins in the power
Use an ohmmeter to check for distances. A 30 -amp in -line fuse must supply and Opto -Amp. One final note
shorts from the LM12 to the heat - be placed near the source of the power about bridging: If you are planning to
sink. Check all diodes, capacitors, (battery); after all, we're dealing with bridge two amps in your car then
and IC's for correct polarity. Stuffing significant amounts of power that you'll need at least two power sup-
components in backwards is the most could cause severe damage to the car's plies.
frequent mistake in construction, and electrical system, the Opto -Amp The 110 -volt AC power-supply op-
can be a fatal error-so check thor- power supply, or worse. Even a fire eration is straight forward. Keep in
oughly. The next step is to check the could occur if the 12 -volt supply line mind that there should be nothing to
power supply for correct output volt- is not properly fused. hinder air movement over the Opto -
ages. Keep in mind that, unloaded, Use a 30 -amp relay to switch the Amp. If there is any question about
the voltage can be 100-150% higher power off and on. You can mount a overheating, then add a quiet fan. The
than the nominal voltage. switch under the dash, or use the Opto -Amp can be mounted apart from
Now let's connect the Opto -Amp to power antenna output from the car it's power supply or right next to it.
the power supply, but with no output radio to enable the Opto -Amp. You Several Opto -Amps can be bolted and
speakers or audio inputs connected. will want to make sure that the relay stacked into a rack mount. You can
Nothing should get very hot and fuses can not be energized unless the key is operate the Opto -Amp bridged from
should not blow. Center the sen- turned on to prevent draining your car one power supply, but the fuses will
sitivity potentiometers (R1 and R2) on battery to death. At full power, the blow if the 5 -amp limit is exceeded; to
the PC board and then connect the load on the car electrical system is the prevent that from happening, use two
speakers. Use a source input with a same as leaving the headlights on. power supplies for extra power. R -E
157
 BUILD A PAIR OF

ll..-CAßßIEß
MODEMS
guild a pair of modems that communicate over the AC lines!

KEITH NICHOLS, CRC ELECTRONICS

How do you connect two PC's together? Solutions range transmit files from the PC in your study to the kids' PC in
from "Sneaker Net" (wherein the user carries a dis- the basement. You might also use a pair of LCM100's to
kette from one machine to the other) to complex and transfer data between dissimilar machines-an IBM PC
expensive proprietary network systems. For occasional and a Macintosh, for example.
use, Sneaker Net is easy and reliable, but as usage in-
creases, a more efficient means of data transfer becomes Background
necessary. The problem is that a full networking system The LCM100 operates in much the same manner as the
requires dedicated wiring, expensive network servers, and familiar telephone modem, but sends its signals via elec-
lots of user training. Clearly, a midrange solution is re- tric -power wiring instead of telephone lines. Each module
quired. translates serial asynchronous data between RS -232C and
The line-carrier modem presented here is one such frequency-shift -keying data formats.
solution. The LCM100 is inexpensive (about $100 for a A normal telephone modem translates the voltage levels
oPo pair of modems), easy to build and use, and uses existing of the digital input signals into two distinct audible tones,
z AC wiring to transmit and receive signals. The LCM100 one of which represents a logic 0, and the other, a logic 1.
= can operate at any baud rate up to 9600, and relies on your The process of shifting the frequency of the output tone as
cncc communications software to transmit and receive data. the logic levels change is called Frequency Shift Keying,
For example, you could use a pair of modems to trans - or FSK. The pair of frequencies representing the two logic
w mit files between two PC's in an office. You'd use your states are conventionally called "mark" and "space".
normal communications software (Crosstalk or Pro - The LCM100 converts RS -232C signals into FSK form,
áComm, for example) to send files in Xmodem or Kermit but the mark and space frequencies are above 100 kHz,
format. Another possibility would be to transmit manufac- which is well above the audible range. To permit com-
W
w turfing data from a factory floor back to the central office munication in two directions simultaneously (full duplex
oh for processing. At home, you might use the LCM100 to mode), two pairs of frequencies are used, one called
158
 J2 J2
R5232 R5232
DATA DATA
IN 3 FSK FSK 2
IN

DATA
o MODULATOR DRIVER t DRIVER
ft MODULATOR
DATA
OUT LINE COUPLER LINE COUPLER OUT
o OUTPUT OUTPUT
DRIVER -1 JAI DRIVER

GND GND
FSK AMP FSK

CD =
DEMODULATOR
115 VAC
DEMODULATOR 1
(OUT)
WIRING 4
a CARRIER CARRIER
DETECT LCM100-01 LCM100-02 DETECT

FIG. 1-BLOCK DIAGRAM of the LCM100 data -communication

system. The AC -power wiring of the building is used to carry the
FSK transmission.

TO 12V 12V
115VAC

Q1
R15
4.7K
5 330pF C9
T1
MJE 180
C C

u
4 13
Cl SOR
1µF D1 C4
// 110
GND
135V 11N4148 R14 R19

R7 = D2
C8 IC1
XR2207
3 O IC2
4.7K
LM311N 8
1M <
1

4.25! 1N4148
V
C2
7
1µF IN OUT R20 D3
GND
135V 12V 10K 1N4148
11 V
R10 R3 BIAS 444.**,-
2
R13 4
17 4K
R4
-v N
R12
5.1K
121 8 R17 C15
360K 3.9K R18
150K?
R3
- 12V 220K
5K
F1 ADJUST
R6 MA,+12V
200K R16
F2 ADJUST J'10K

FIG. 2-TRANSMITTER SECTION of the LCM100. Op -amp IC2

shapes RS232 data and presents it to the FSK modulator, IC1.
After amplification, the signal is coupled to the AC line by Ti. highband, and the other, lowband. (The two frequency
pairs are also known as the originate set and the answer set.
Those terms designate only the frequencies that each unit
C2 is using and do not imply the source or content of the data
111
R3 itself.)
1M - .- +v The LCM1O0 system consists of two modules, the
1
2 3
LCM10O-01 module, and the LCM10O-02. The designa-
tion is arbitrary, but it shall be assumed herein that the
XR-2207
BINARY
13 SQUAREWAVE LCM10O-01 module transmits on the highband and re -

-
9 OUTPUT
KEYING o 12
ceives on the lowband, and the LCM1OO-02 module trans-
INPUT mits on the lowband and receives on the highband. The
8 14 TRIANGLE WAVE frequencies that are used by each of the modules are shown
A2 OUTPUT in Table 1.
C3
.1
R1 The AC -power line is similar in some respects to the
5.1K
)I
10 11
telephone line. However, although the telephone line has
CURRENT
SWITCHES R2
well-defined characteristics (a nominal impedance of 600
3.9K ohms, relatively little noise, etc.), the AC line can be a
4 5 6 7
harsh environment for data signals. With an impedance as
low as 2 ohms and occasional thousand -volt noise spikes,
R3 R4 it is less than an optimum communications medium. The
LCM1OO system must be able to impose an FSK carrier of
sufficient strength onto the low-impedance power line, as
well as filter out the 60-Hz signal and any other noise
FIG. 3-BLOCK DIAGRAM AND PIN -OUT of the XR2207. The components that may be present, thus demodulating only
binary keying inputs (pins 8 and 9) determine output frequency. the transmitted signal.
159
 '
12V TP2 TP3
R34 4-12V C22
C19 100K
O 035 C31
C30I( 470pF 470pF
1¡¡

.1 C29
135V 3900pF
l = l
K
4
T3
b 1 1
+ R28 R30 C20 + Vcc
4.7 K T6 .01
10K
i b2
o
T5
3t ,AA C
14

3lt K -L C33
-Ci
C15
C32 3
FILI
13
T 330pF
1
á1 3900pF e""
1

13áV
C26 1r
D5
1 R21
470K
3900pF

C20
1 Eie- R29 C27
`Z 1N4728 021
3900pF 106 R26
3 00K
R27
249K

.
R33 XR2211 1%
.i 4.7K
-12V .1 D6
ó2 100K 1N4728
135V 11
0 DET ODET
6 R32

C16 DET COMP 8+--

117 .1 R25
TUNE
VAC 135V 100K
DATA REC.

GND
4
REF
10
L
T
C24
100pF
TO FIG. 6

-12V
R22
10K
R24
510K - C23
.1
C25
330pF

FIG. 4-RECEIVER SECTION of the LCM100. Signals coupled

from the power line are conditioned by IC7 and then demodulated
by IC6. an FSK demodulator.

Circuit description lator ICI are above the threshold voltage required by the
Figure 1 is the block diagram of the LCM100 line-carrier oscillator's binary keying input.
modem, which consists of four basic functions: modu-
lator/driver, line coupler, amplifier/demodulator, and out- Exar XR2207 modulator
put driver. The XR2207 (ICI) is a monolithic voltage -controlled
The modulator/driver and its associated line coupler oscillator. It can produce simultaneous triangle- and
comprise the transmitter stage, and the amplifier/demod- square -wave outputs over frequencies ranging from 0.01
ulator, together with its line coupler, defines the receiver Hz to MHz. It is ideally suited for FSK applications
1

stage of the modem circuitry. Each stage is discussed in because it can be set for two (or four) different time bases
detail as we continue. and digitally switched among them. A block diagram of
the XR2207 and a typical hookup are shown in Fig. 3.
Transmitter stage Four main functional blocks comprise the XR2207: A
Serial input signals are fed via RS -232C port (J2) to the Voltage -Controlled Oscillator (VCO), four current
input -conditioning circuit surrounding IC2 (See Fig. 2). switches (which are activated by binary keying inputs),
Negative -going pulses are clipped by D3, and positive - and two buffer amplifiers for the triangle- and square -wave
going pulses are conditioned by voltage -comparator IC2. outputs. The VCO is actually a current -controlled os-
That signal shaping ensures that the input signals to modu- cillator that gets its input from the current switches. Out-
put frequency is proportional to input current; four discrete
frequencies may be selected by two binary inputs (pins 8
TABLE 1-LCM FREQUENCIES and 9). Those input currents are set by timing resistors
connected to pin 4-pin 7. The values for those resistors can
LCM100-01 LCM100-02 be seen in Table 2.
f1 (mark) 150.00 100.00 The LCM100 uses only two of the four FSK levels. The
f2 (space) 156.50 106.50 unused timing inputs (pins 4 and 5) are left unconnected,
and the second binary-keying input, pin 8, is tied to
ground. The mark and space frequencies are set by the
values of timing -resistors R3 and R4 and timing -capacitor
TABLE 2-TIMING RESISTORS
Cl between pins 2 and 3. The FSK input signal is applied
Frequency (kHz) R3 (K) R4 (K) to pin 9. A low applied to pin 9 (with pin 8 tied low)
150 20.20 produces a signal with a frequency f7 determined by:
100 30.30 f1 = 1/(R3 x C1)
156.5 466.2
106.5 466.2 A high applied to pin 9 produces a signal f2 with a
frequency determined by:

160
 PARTS LIST
Note: Component values in parentheses are for the C26, C29, C32, C36-3900 pF (1800 pF)
LCM100-02 board; other values are for the C28-0.01 µF, disk
LCM100-01 board. C31, C35-470 pF
All resistors are'/4-watt, 5% unless otherwise noted. C34-6.8 pF
R1, R2, R4, R5, R15, R19, R28, R29 4700 ohms Semiconductors
R3-5000 ohms, PC -mount trimmer potentiometer BR1-50 volts, amp1

R6-200,000 ohms, PC -mount trimmer potentiometer D1, D2, D3, D6 -1N4148

R7-4,2 ohms D4, 05-1N4728 (3.3 -volt Zener)
R8-300 ohms LED1-standard red
R9-not used LED2-standard green
R10-17,400 ohms, 1% (24,900 ohms. 1%) IC1-XR2207, FSK modulator
R11-360,000 ohms IC2-LM311 N, op -amp
R12-3900 ohms IC3-1488, RS -232 line driver
R13-5100 ohms IC4-78L12ACZ, precision +12 -volt regulator
R14-3000 ohms IC5-79L12ACZ, precision -12-volt regulator
R16, R20, R22, R30, R31-10,000 ohms IC6-XR2211, FSK demodulator
R17-150,000 ohms IC7-LM318N, op -amp
R18-220,000 ohms Q1-MJE180, NPN power transistor
R21-470,000 ohms Q2-PN2222, NPN switching transistor
R23-620 ohms Q3-2N3906, PNP switching transistor
R24-510,000 ohms Other components
R25-100,000 ohms J1 -115-volt AC receptacle J2-25 -pin D connector P1,
R26-300,000 ohms P2 -3 -pin header strip P3-2 -pin header strip MOV1-
R27-24,900 ohms, 1% (16,200 ohms, 1%) 150-volt varistor Tl -RF coil, TOKO RAN10A6729HK
R32-5000 ohms, PC -mount trimmer potentiometer T2 -24-volts, 180 mA, PC mount (Dale PL-13-07)
R33, R34-100,000 ohms (47,000 ohms) T3 -T6-RF coil, TOKO RAN10A6729
R35-820 ohms
Capacitors Miscellaneous
Cl, C2-1 µF, 135 volts Note: The following are available from CRC Elec-
C3-1800 pF (3900 pF) tronics, 13547 S. E. 27th Place, Suite 3D, Bellevue,
C5-330 pF WA 98005, (206) 747-9636: Etched and drilled PC
C6-1000 µF, 35 volts, electrolytic boards with plated -through holes, $34.95/pair; Par-
C4, C7 -C10, C13, C18, C22, C23, C27, C30-0.1 µF, 25 tial kit (includes PC boards, all transformers, coils,
volts, monolithic jacks, and high -voltage capacitors) $69.95'pair;
C11-100 p.F, 25 volts, electrolytic Complete kit excluding case and power cords,
C12, C17-10 µF, 25 volts, tantalum $129.00/pair; Assembled and tested PC -board as-
C14, C25, C33-330 pF sembly without cases and power cords, $179.95r
C15, C16, C19, C20 0.1 µF, 135 volts pair; Complete assembled and tested system,
C21-3900 pF $159.95/pair. Individual components are also avail-
C24-100 pF able.

Receiver Stage
f2 = fl+Of1
As shown in Fig. 4, the parallel line couplers, T3/C29
f
where Afl = 1/(R4 X C1). In both equations, is specified and T4/C26, are capacitively isolated from the AC line by
in Hz, R3 and R4 are in ohms, and Cl is in farads. protective capacitors C15, C16, C19 and C20. One of the
In an actual circuit, R3 and R4 can have values between LC circuits is tuned to the "mark" frequency of the line -
2K and 2 megohms, and the timing capacitor should be carrier signal, and the other is tuned to the "space"
polycarbonate, polystyrene, or mylar, for optimum tem- frequency. The line couplers effectively present a high
perature stability. Table 2 shows the resistor values used to impedance to the 60 -Hz power-line signal while present-
obtain the highband and lowband frequencies, in both ing a low-impedance path to the tuned frequencies.
cases using a 330 -pf timing capacitor. Note that the value Next, the received signals are amplified by IC7, an
of R4 is the same for both the frequency bands. That is LM318N high -slew-rate op -amp. The output of IC7 is fed
because the difference between the mark and space fre- through a bandpass filter network composed of C35 and
quencies is the same for both frequency pairs. Because R31, T5 and C36, C31 and R30, and T6 and C32. Those
non-standard values are obtained, a series combination of components shape the signal and reject noise; Zener-
a fixed resistor and a potentiometer permit fine tuning the diodes D5 and D6 clip the peak -to -peak signal voltage to
mark and space frequencies. 6.6 volts to avoid damaging the demodulator (IC6).
The square wave output of the XR2207 (pin 13) is an Exar XR2211 Demodulator
open -collector stage that drives power transistor Ql. Re- The XR221I is a Phase -Locked -Loop (PLL) IC de-
sistor R15 is a pull-up resistor for the IC's output. signed especially for data communication and particularly
Power transistor Ql drives the tuned line coupler (Tl suited for FSK-modem applications. It operates over a
and C3) that effects the impedance transformation neces- frequency range from 0.01 Hz to 300 kHz and can accom-
sary to impose the FSK carrier onto the 60 -Hz power line. modate analog input signals between 2 millivolts and 3
Protective capacitors Cl and C2 isolate the modulation volts. A block diagram of the XR2211 and a typical FSK-
circuitry from the power -line voltage. demodulator hookup are shown in Fig. 5.
161
 CF = 3/data rate in bits per second
+v;
OR-2211 where CF is in microfarads. Since the LCM100 is designed
nC3
SIGNAL for operation up to 9600 bps (bits per second), a value of
PRE AMP Co

p V
FSK
330 pf is acceptable.
INPUT Ä C2 V
The final area requiring calculation is the lock -detect
QUAD LOOP
section of the XR2211, which is used in a carrier -detect
2
3
0-D ET 0-0ET
Rx function. The open -collector lock -detect output (pin 6) is
Co7C R1
70K

LOCK
1(
5K
connected to the data output (pin 7). That disables any
DETECT
INTERNAL o
Cl
output created by noise, unless a carrier signal is present
COMP lt
REFERENCE
C4 within the detection passband of the PLL. Presuming a
í1K
R2

6
_J 9 parallel resistance of 470 kilohms, the minimum value of
V

the lock -detect filter capacitor, CD, is:

C
DATA
OUTPUT 0
FSK COMP CD = 16/(f1- f2)/2
RN
The LCM100 uses a 3900 -pf capacitor for CD.
510K

FIG.5-BLOCK DIAGRAM and basic hookup of the XR2211 FSK

demodulator. See the text for information on calculating resistor
R4
and capacitor values.
4.7K

+ 12V V1ti
Frequency -shift-keyed input signals are fed to pin 2 of 12V
R2

the IC through a 0.1-µF coupling capacitor. The internal 4.7K

impedance is 20 kilohms and the minimum recommended 1C18 P1. R1

input signal is 10 mV. Q2 OUTPUT 4.7K
The center frequency of the demodulator's passband 14

3
PN2222
AO
must be set at the center of the frequency band that is to be FROM IC3-a
detected. In the LCM100 the passband is set halfway FIG.4 /a 1488 C14 1 OB

between the frequency pairs: (106.5 + 100)/2 = 103.25 + 17V 1

330pF

kHz for the LCM100-01 demodulator, and LED2

GREEN
12V = Ao
(156.5 +150)/2 =153.25 kHz for the LCM100-02. ¡T, CARRIER
C10 OB
Co
In Fig. 5, the oscillator's center frequency is calculated ,,Ijj(11 DETECT
P2
as follows: INPUT
R35 820 D6
1N4148
fo = 1/(Ro-Co)
Q3 t4 14
where Ro is in ohms and Co is in farads. Using a 330 -pf 2N3906

capacitor for Co, the computed values for Ro are 29.35K P3 .

=
o
CARRIER
and 19.77K for the LCM100-01 and LCM100-02 modules
respectively. With a 5K trimmer wired in series, I% re-
FROM
FIGA E TO FIG. 2 © DETECT
J2
R5232

sistors with values of 24.9K and 16.2K are used. Capacitor

Co should be mylar, polycarbonate, or polystyrene. FIG. 6-OUTPUT AMPLIFIER AND CONNECTORS. Transistor Q2
System bandwidth is set by R1, and Cl sets the loop - amplifies the output of the XR2211. Line buffer IC3-a then con-
verts the signal to RS -232C form.
filter time constant and damping factor. The value of R1 is
determined by the mark/space frequency difference: Output driver
Referring to Fig. 6, the data output of the XR2211 (pin
R1 = (R040)/(f1 -12)
7) is amplified by NPN-transistor Q2, which drives IC3-a,
The calculated values for R1 are 395 kilohms (fo = 103.25 one section of a 1488 quad RS -232C line driver. It pro-
kHz) and 382 kilohms (fo = 153.25 kHz). However, in duces the positive- and negative -voltage levels required by
order to increase the detectable bandwidth, both LCM100 the RS -232C interface.
modules use a 300K value for R1. The carrier-detect output of the XR2211 (pin 5) drives
The equation for computing the loop -damping factor the base of transistor Q3, which controls LED2, the car-
associated with Cl is complex, but there is a convenient rier-detect LED. The LED provides a convenient means of
rule of thumb. The damping factor should be approximate- verifying that the two modems are "talking" to each other.
ly 1/2, and a value of Cl = C0/4 will produce that. With
Co equal to 330 pf, Cl equals 82.5 pf. Because the loop Power supply
low-pass filter time constant T equals Rl x Cl, the The LCM100's power supply, shown in Fig. 7, consists
LCM100 uses a 100 -pf value for C1 in order to compensate of power-transformer T2, bridge -rectifier BR1, precision -
for the lower value of R1. voltage -regulators IC4 and IC5, and other associated filter
Resistor Rs provides positive feedback across the FSK capacitors. Regulators IC4 and IC5 produce the ± 12 -volt
comparator and facilitates a rapid transition between out- supplies required by the various IC's. In addition, fuse F1
put states. A value of 510K is normally used. and MOV1, a 150 -volt varistor, provide protection from
Components CF and RF form a single -pole post -detec- short circuits and voltage surges.
tion filter for the FSK data output (RF generally = 100K).
Capacitor CF smoothes the data output; its value is calcu- Construction
lated roughly as: The line -carrier modem system is built on two identical

162
PC boards, one of which is designated as the LCM100-01 red LED (D9) should light, indicating that power is on.
module and the other, the LCM100-02 module. Each The green LED may flicker momentarily; however, it
circuit board contains a power-supply, a transmitter, a should not remain lit.
receiver, an output driver, an RS -232C interface, and 3) Now connect a temporary switched jumper between
carrier-detect circuitry. All components on the two boards the data-input pin of J2 (the DB25P connector) and one of
except C3, C26, C29, C32, C36, R10, R27, R33, and R34 the + 12-volt sources (pin 4, 5, 6, or 20 of J2). A conve-
are identical. nient way to do that is to use a spare DB25P male con-
Begin assembly by installing the resistors, including the nector with an SPST switch wired across the pins to be
variable potentiometers. Use the parts -placement diagram jumpered. If you haven't already done it, install the jum-
shown in Fig. 8. Keep in mind that R10, R27, R33, and pers on headers P1, P2, and P3 as follows. On the
R34 have different values on the two boards. Note that R9 LCM100-01 board: PI, P2 -A and B jumpered; P3-not
is not used. jumpered. On the LCM100-02 board: P1, P2 -B and C
Next, install all jumper headers, test pins, J1. J2, and jumpered; P3 jumpered.
the fuse clips. Note that the fuse clips must be oriented 4) The next step is to adjust the mark and space frequen-
with the indented ends away from the fuse. Connectors Jl cies of modulator ICI. Begin with the LCM100-01 board.
and J2 should be secured to the board with 4-40 hardware Attach the input lead of a frequency counter to TP1 (the
before soldering. collector of Q1), and the ground lead to pin or pin 7 of the
1

The capacitors and diodes are installed next, except the DB25P jumper. With the jumper switch on, adjust R3 until
electrolytic capacitors, C6 and C11. Be sure to observe the the meter reads 150 kHz. That is the "space" frequency
polarity of the diodes and the tantalum capacitors, C12 and (fl) of the FSK modulator. Next, turn the jumper switch
C17. Again, note that capacitors C3, C26, C29, C32 and off and adjust R6 to get a reading of 156.5 kHz. That
C36 have different values on the two boards. represents the "mark" frequency (f2). Switch between fl
Next, install ICI, IC2, IC3, IC6, and IC7. The use of IC andf2 several times while fine tuning R3 and R6 until both
sockets is recommended to minimize the possibility of frequencies are correct.
damage to the IC's from excess heat. 5) The transmitter line coupler can now be tuned to the
Transistors Q1, Q2, and Q3, varistor MOV1, and IC4 modulator's FSK band as follows: Attach a high -imped-
and IC5 are installed next. Use care not to interchange IC4 ance oscilloscope probe ( 10 setting) to TP1, and clip the
(78L12A) and IC5 (79L12A), the + 12- and -12-volt ground lead to pin or pin 7 of J2. Set the sweep time and
1

regulators. Note that transistor QI should not be secured to amplitude controls to display a sine wave. Adjust the
the PC board with a screw and nut. Use extreme care not to tuning slug of RF-transformer T1 until maximum ampli-
overheat the transistors and IC's when soldering. tude is obtained. Now flip the DB25P jumper switch to the
The tunable RF coils are installed next. Note that TI other position and observe the change in amplitude as the
(TOKO RAN I0A6729HK) has a different part number frequency changes. Adjust T1 's tuning slug until the am-
than T3, T4, T5 and T6 (TOKO RAN 10A6729). When plitudes of fl and f2 are equal. Repeat steps 2 through 5
installing the RF coils, be sure to solder all 5 pins plus the with the LCM100-02 board, using 100 kHz and 106.5 kHz
two housing tabs to the PC board. as the fl and f2 settings respectively.
Next, install the power transformer (T2), bridge -rec- 6) The receiver-stage line couplers are similar to the one
tifier BR1, electrolytic capacitors C6 and C11, and the used in the transmitter except that two of them are config-
LED's. Be sure that the correct polarity is observed when ured in a parallel arrangement. That permits precise tuning
installing the electrolytic capacitors and LED's. The cath- to the mark and space frequencies individually, rather than
ode (or flat side) of the LED's goes toward the center of the using an average of the two. The result is greater receiver
PC board. Transformer T2 must be installed with leads 1 sensitivity and superior noise rejection.
and 2 (120 V) toward the AC receptacle (J1). Bend the Tune the receiver line couplers as follows: Attach a
mounting tabs against the board and solder them, as well scope probe (x 10 setting) to TP2 (pin 6 of IC7) on the
as the six transformer leads, to the board. Also, be sure LCM100-01 board. Be sure to clip the ground lead to the
that bridge -rectifier BR1 is installed with the (+) lead signal ground, as before. Connect the power cords to both
closest to pin 2 of T2. boards and plug both cords into the same 115 -volt outlet
Last, carefully insert the IC's in their respective sock- box. The volts/division setting of the scope should be
ets. Figure 9 shows the final assembly. increased a couple of notches from where it was set for
TP1. Adjust the tuning slug of T3 or T4 until an increase in
Testing and tuning amplitude of the waveform is seen on the display. Continue
1) Begin testing by thoroughly inspecting both boards adjusting the slug until maximum amplitude is obtained.
for missed or inadequate solder joints, solder bridges, etc. You may need to adjust both T3 and T4 in order to do that.
Caution! Working directly with AC power is When the amplitude exceeds a certain point you will see
dangerous, so be careful! Before applying power the peaks of the sine wave flatten out as the Zener diodes
to the circuit, be sure to place the board on a non- (D6 and D7) chop the voltage at ± 3.3 volts. Flip the
conductive surface, and do not touch any ex- DB25P jumper switch on the LCM100-02 board to shift
posed leads or traces on the line -voltage side of the frequency, then readjust T3 or T4 (on the LCMI00-01
the circuit! board) until the maximum amplitude is seen on the scope.
2) With the assembled board on a non-conductive sur- Now, toggle the LCM100-01 jumper switch several times
face, install Fl (% amp) in the fuse clips, then connect a while fine tuning T3 and T4 until both fl and f2 frequencies
three -wire power cord to receptacle J1 and apply power to appear to have equal amplitude on the scope display. The
the circuit. Keep your hands away from the high - waveform should look like a symmetrical sine wave with
voltage components and traces on the board! The flattened peaks. Repeat step 6 for the LCM100-02 board
163
 R32 until the green LED lights, then continue turning in
+17
2V the same direction until it turns off again. Set the adjust-
F1
78L12ACZ
ment screw of R32 halfway between the two points and
A

,. C17
10µF
mark the position of the screw slot with a pencil. Now flip
BR1 Z5V the jumper switch on the opposite board to change the
KBPC1005 frequency, and repeat the previous step. You should have
J1 L1
two pencil marks on R32 a few degrees apart. Turning the
117VAC
RECEPTACLE LED1
IN 105 OUT
_
12V
o
adjustment screw halfway between the two marks should
79L12ACZ
117VAC
R35
RED
POWER END
result in the correct setting. Repeat for the other board.
C11
820(1 100µF C12
105F
8-a) A more accurate method of setting the VCO of the
25V
1 25V XR2211 is as follows: Configure a function generator to
11V
produce a 4800 -Hz square wave with a voltage swing of
FIG. 7-THE LCM100's POWER SUPPLY. Regulators IC4 and IC5 zero to +6 volts. Use that signal to adjust your os-
are precision types; don't interchange them! cilloscope to display a symmetrical square wave. Next,
attach the function -generator output lead to the DATA -IN pin
of J2 on the LCM100-01 board. Make sure the jumper
switch is in the off position. Attach the scope probe to the
DATA -OUT pin of J2 on the LCM100-02 board. With the
power on to both boards, adjust R32 (on the LCM100-02)
until a symmetrical square wave is displayed. That indi-
cates the correct setting of the oscillator at the "center
frequency," the midpoint between the detector mark and
space frequencies. The green LED will, of course, be on at
that setting.
Repeat the previous step, reversing the two boards, to
complete the "tuning" process. The final step is to test the
modems by transmitting actual data.
9) To do so, you'll need a serial -data output source. A
video terminal, in full -duplex configuration, will do nic-
ely. A simple loop-back circuit is the easiest test. The
FIG. 8-INSTALL ALL COMPONENTS as shown here. terminal is connected to the LCM100-01 modem that is
plugged into the power line. The LCMI00-02 modem,
with pins 2 and 3 of J2 jumpered together, is plugged in
some distance away. As you type on the keyboard, the data
is transmitted to the LCM100-02 modem, looped back
through the jumper, and re -transmitted to the LCM100-01
modem where it appears on the terminal's screen. Depend-
ing on your terminal's configuration (DTE/DCE), you
may need to transpose the two modems or switch the
internal jumpers on the LCM100-01 modem board to get
things working properly.
The LCM100 will successfully transmit data over dis-
tances of several hundred feet, or more, at rates up to 9600
bps. In general, the greater the distance, the lower the baud
rate should be for error-free transmission.
FIG. 9-THE FINAL ASSEMBLY looks like this. The ultimate range is limited by the power company's
step-down transformer and the cross -coupling between the
115 V legs of a 230-volt distribution system. You can
(using the DB25P jumper switch on the LCM100-01 board arrange communication between the latter by attaching a
to shift the frequencies). fused capacitor (a 1-µF, 400-volt capacitor in series with a
7) The next step is to align the bandpass-filter network. -amp fuse) between the two 115 -volt legs in your elec-
The procedure is the same for each board. Attach the scope trical panel box..m$
probe (x 10 setting) to TP3 (the ungrounded end of T6).
Adjust the tuning slug of T6 until maximum amplitude of
the sine wave is displayed. Toggle the jumper switch (on
the opposite board) and fine tune T6 until an equal ampli-
tude is obtained for both frequencies. Next, adjust T5 in
the same manner as T6; note that T5 affects the amplitude
very little.
8) The final tuning step is to adjust the free -running
frequency of the VCO in the XR2211. The simplest way to
do that is to adjust R32 while observing the green LED
(D8) on the board (the opposite board, of course, must be "Well, at least we saved the computer."
plugged in and transmitting). Turn the adjustment screw of
164
 KIRLIAN circuit uses two ON/OFF switches, S1
and S2. Switch S1 is the unit's main
MARKET
continued from page 59 power switch; when it is in the ON
position, power is supplied to the CENTER
terminal is lying underneath the cop- neon lamp, NEI, and the circuit is
per-clad board on top. A single -sided placed in standby mode. The neon Motorless Motion!!
copper -clad board measuring lamp does more than give a visual Award Winning Kits &
4 x 5-inches is mounted on top of the indication of the state of the unit. Electrically Activated Space
unit (see photo), copper side down. Since we are working with pho- Memory Metal Wires! Wings !:
Before gluing the board in place, sol- tographic film, the circuit must be Send biz size SASE to:
Mondo-tronics, 1014 Morse Ave #11-E
der a wire to the copper side, and then used in a relatively dark, light -tight Sunnyvale, CA 94089 408 734-9877
drill a hole through the top of the room. Obviously, that can present
chassis for the high -voltage terminal problems in using the unit. If the con-
FOR SALE
on the ignition coil. trols are clustered around the lamp (as
LOW prices ICs, sockets, transistors, switches, ca-
Three -terminal ignition coils can shown in Fig. 5), the lamps gives off pacitors. Special: 27128-25 $3.25, 7805/7812-.25,
be obtained from any automotive sup- just enough light to make identifica- PIC7001-4 $5.00, mixed 1/4W resistors $5/M. Flyer
SASE. SANTECH ELECTRONICS, 11 Revere
plier or an automotive junkyard. Just tion of the controls possible in a dark Place, Tappan, NY 10983. (914) 359-1130.
about any 12 -volt, three -terminal coil room without adversely affecting the DESCRAMBLERS. All brands. Special: Jerrold
will work. Kodalith film. When you use color combo 400 and SB3 $165. Complete cable de -
scrambler kit $39. Complete satellite descrambler
The most-costly component in the film, you should block the light from kit $45.00. Free catalog. MJG INDUSTRY, Box 531,
Bronx, NY 10461-0531.
assembly is the plastic chassis. The the film. Switch S2, the discharge
GREAT buys! Surplus prices, ICs, linears, transfor-
overall dimensions are 3.25 inches switch, is a normally open momen- mers, PS, stepping motors, vacuum pump, pho-
high, 6.25 inches deep, and 8.0 tary. It is used to control the balance totransistor, meters, LSASE, FERTIK'S, 5400 Ella,
Phila., PA 19120.
inches wide. If you wish, the chassis, of the circuit.
PARTS for RE projects. Low prices, no minimum.
as well as wired and tested units, can To make a Kirlian photograph, turn Inductors, transformers, diodes, semiconductors,
be purchased from the supplier men- on the unit using Si, turn out the chokes, capacitors, ferrites, etc. Catalog $1.00 (re-
funded first order). JS PRODUCTS, Suite H, Box
tioned in the Parts List. lights, place the film and specimen on 160113, Cupertino, CA 95016.
The setup used in making a Kirlian the top plate as discussed previously, PROTECT yourself from electronic eavesdropping
photograph is shown in Fig. 4. The and make the exposure using S2. As a and information intercept. Our company specializes
in fax encryptors, phone scramblers, transmitter de-
film is placed on the board mounted to guideline, start with an exposure time tectors, and countermeasures equipment. Send
$3.00 for our complete catalog. DIVERSIFIED
the top of the unit, and the specimen of 10 to 15 seconds. It is likely that WHOLESALE PRODUCTS, PO Box 1275-EH, Re-
is placed on top of the film. If the you will do a lot of trial -and -error dondo Beach, CA 90278.
specimen to be "photographed" is experimentation with both the ex-
inanimate, such as a leaf or a piece of posure time and frequency (which is
metal, it should be grounded for best PLANS AND KITS
adjusted using R1) before you will
REVERSE utility meters! Phone phreakingl Hack-
results. Any earth ground that you can obtain satisfactory results. ing! Descrambling! Forbidden knowledge! Popular
connect a wire to will work fine. In
any event, the specimen is placed be-
The author has had good results
with two types of film: Kodak 6118
$1.00 -
Mechanics refused our advertisements! Catalog
ALTERNATIVES, Box 4-R, Carthage, TX
75633-0004.
tween two sheets of thin (0.010 -inch) Ektachrome and Kodalith 2556. The CATALOG: Hobby/broadcasting/HAM/CB: Ca-
transparent plastic, and the "sand- Ektachrome film will give you spec- ble TV, transmitters, amplifiers, surveillance de-
vices, computers, more! PANAXIS, Box 130-Z,
wich" is then placed on the film. tacular color transparencies, such as Paradise, CA 95967.
Never ground a living creature, in- the one accompanying this article. PRIVACY problem - Need information? New elec-
cluding yourself. Doing so can sub-
ject the "specimen" to a very nasty
However, it can be difficult to work
with and to develop. Unless you have
$5.00 kits -
tronics surveillance, debugging protection catalog
assembled. TECHNOLOGY SER-
VICES, 829X Ginette, Gretna, LA 70056.
shock. When dealing with living a photographic darkroom and are
creatures, take special care to prevent equipped for developing that type of
any contact with a ground. film, you will probably want to take it BUSINESS OPPORTUNITIES
INVENTIONS, ideas, technology wanted for pre-
One note about the ignition coils to your local photo -developing store. sentation to industry/exhibition at national innova-
high voltage terminal: To the uniniti- Kodalith 2556 ortho film type -3 is a tion exposition. Call 1 (800) 288 -IDEA.
ated, the location of that terminal may high -contrast, black -and -white LET the Government finance your small business.
Grants/loans to $500,000 yearly. Free recorded
not be apparent at first glance. It is graphics -art film that may be familiar message: (707) 449-8600. (KS2)
located within the tube -like pro- to those who make their own PC EASY work! Excellent pay! Assemble products at m
tuberance at the top of the housing. boards. The results are less spec- home. Call (504) 641-8003. Ext. 2677. m
When the coil is used in it's normal X
tacular, as shown in Fig. 6, but that -13
m
application, a spark -plug wire is film's light requirements are less ex-
DIGITAL CAR DASHBOARDS
placed in the opening at the top of the acting (a photographic safelight or the m
BUILD yourself a complete electronic dashboard.
tube so that it makes contact with the red neon lamp on the unit can be left Free details, $1 P&H. MODERN LABS, 2900 z
-I
terminal inside; the wire is held in on when handling the film), and the Ruisseau, St -Elizabeth, QC, JOK 2J0, Canada. m
3:1
place by friction. For our application, processing is much simpler, requiring cn
the lead from the copper-clad board just three basic chemicals. The author _
D
must make good contact with the
FOR INVENTORS z
found the right exposure using the
INVENTORS! Confused? Need help? Call IMPAC
vco
high-voltage terminal. Kodalith first, and Ektachrome for the for free information kit. Toll free in U.S. and Canada, p
You will note from Fig. 1, that the final exposure. R -E 1 (800) 225-5800. O

165
 tiLL
ELECTRORICS
CALL OR WRITE FOR A
FREE 60 PAGE How to live
CATALOG CONTAINING with someone

\
who's living
OVER 4000 PARTS!!! with cancer.
OUTSIDE THE U.S.A. SEND $2.D0
POSIAGE FOR A CATALOG

1/4 WATT RESISTOR KIT When one pers, in gets

Ideal for the workshop, An ETCHED cancer. evervune in the family

surfe,
Nob/ dy knows better than
this 1/4 watt resistor kit
contains 10 pieces each of circuit board we du how much help and
understanding is needed. That's
42 of the most popular
from a why our service and rehahili-
values (420 pieces total).
Includes a divided box and
a parts locator.
v^:
ÿ...e...ti
M Printed PAGE
tauun programs emphasize
the whole family nos just the
cancer patient
Among our regular services

VALUES in this kit are: in just 3 Hours we provide information and

guidance to patients and families.
transport patients tu and from
1 ohm, 10 ohm, 39 ohm, 47 ohm, 51 ohm, 68 ohm, treatment. supply home care
100 ohm, 130 ohm, 150 ohm, 180 ohm, 220 ohm,
AM,. and assist patients in their
return tu everyday life.
330 ohm, 470 ohm, 560 ohm, 680 ohm, 1K, 1.2K, Life is what concerns us The
1.5K, 2K, 2.2K, 2.7K, 3K, 4.7K, 5.1K, 5.6K, 10K, 15K, life of cancer patients. The lives of
their families. tiu vuu can see we
22K, 30K, 33K, 39K, 47K, 56K, 68K, 100K, 120K,
The ER -4 PHOTO ETCH KIT gives you the tools, materials and chemicals are even more than the research
150K, 220K, 470K, MEG, 5.1 MEG, 10 MEG
1
to make your own printed circuit boards. The patented Pos-Neg' process urganizution we are so well
The resistors alone would sell for $21.00. known to he.
copies artwork from magazines like this one without damaging the page. No une faces cancer alone
Complete kit CAT/ REKIT-14 $17.00 Use the circuit patterns, tapes and drafting film to make your own 1X
artwork. Or try the Direct Etch' system (also included), to make single
LED'S circuit boards without artwork. The ER -4 is stocked by many electronic
STANDARD JUMBO DIFFUSED T 1-3/4 size parts distributors, or order direct, postpaid. IAMERICAN CANCER SOCIETY

RED CATS LED -1 10 for $1.50 100 for $13.00 ER -4 PHOTO ETCH KIT (NJ and CA residents add sales tax) $38.00
GREEN CATS LED -2 DATAK'S COMPLETE CATALOG lists hundreds of printed circuit products
10 for $2.00 100 for $17.00 and art patterns. Also contains dry transfer letter sheets and electronic title
IIII sets for professional looking control panels. WRITE FOR IT NOW!
YELLOW CATS LED -3
10 for $2.00 100 for $17.00 The DATAK Corporation 3117 Paterson Plank Road -
FLASHIN LED North Bergen, NJ 07047
with built in flashing circuit operates on 5 volts... CIRCLE 17 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD
RED $1.00 each
CATI LED -4 10 for $9.50
Gernsback Publications, Inc.
GREEN
CATS LED -4G
$1.00 each
10 for $9.50
ADVERTISING INDEX 500-B Bi -County Blvd.
Farmingdale, NY 11735
BI -POLAR LED EXPERIMENTERS ELECTRONICS HAND- 1-516-293-3000
Lights RED one direction, BOOK does not assume any respon- Fax 1-516-293-3115
GREEN the other. Two leads. sibility for errors that may appear in the President, Larry Steckler
CATS LED -6 2 for $1.70 index below. Vice President. Cathy Steckler
LED HOLDER For Advertising ONLY
ae Two piece holder. 1-516-293-3000
Fax 1-516-293-3115
CATS HLED 10 for 65¢ Free Information Number Page Larry Steckler
10 AMP SOLID STATE RELAYS publisher
ELECTROLS S2181
9 All Electronics 166 Arline Fishman
advertising director
CONTROL: Rated 5.5 to 10 Vdc 12 C&S CV2
(will operate on 3-32 Vdc).
Shelli Weinman
Command Productions advertising associate
LOAD: 10 amp @ 240 Vac 30
Lisa Strassman
2 1/4" X 1 3/4" X 7/8" CATI SSRLY-10B
19 Cooks Institute 140 credit manager
$9.50 each QUANTITY DISCOUNT Christina Estrada
10 for $85.00 25 for $175.00 17 Datak Corp. 166 advertising assistant
50 for $300.00 100 for $500.00
Electronics Bk. Club SALES OFFICES
3
EAST/SOUTHEAST
MAIL ORDERS TO: Electronic Tech Today .... CV3, 130 Stanley Levitan
Eastern Sales Manager
ALL ELECTRONICS CORP. 14 Heath CV4 Radio -Electronics
P.O. BOX 567 259-23 57th Avenue
15 Information Unitd. 68 Little Neck. NY 11362
VAN NUYS, CA 91408 1.718.428.6037. 1-516-293-3000
ISCET 146
MIDWEST/Texas/Arkansas/
ORDER TOLL FREE 16 J&W 5 Okla.
800-826-5432 20 Jensen 140
Ralph Bergen
Midwest Sales Manager
INFO: (818) 904-0524 McGraw Hill (C.E.) 151
Radio -Electronics
540 Frontage Road-Suite 339
FAX (818) 781-2653 Northfield. IL 60093
DISCOVER Mondo-Tronics, Inc. 165
1-312.446-1444
MINIMUM ORDER NRI Schools 19 Fax 1-312-446.8451
PACIFIC COAST/ Mountain
$10.00 Pacific Cable
QUANTITIES LIMITED BEM 21 States
Marvin Green
CALIF. ADD SALES TAX 10 Panavise 72 Pacific Sales Manager
USA: $3.00 SHIPPING Radio -Electronics
RE Reprint Bkst 38
5430 Van Nuys Blvd. Suite 316
NO C.O.D. L.. TAB Books 76 Van Nuys, CA 91401
1-818-986-2001
CIRCLE 9 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD 21 Viejo 146 Fax 1-818-986-2009

166
 AIM ectronics Paperback Books
GREAT PAPERBACKS AT SPECIAL PRICES

RADIO'S FIRST flL},

IMO tIECAnEß vealP 0

...O1101401180011MIre

M . l' e

reees,
8 J

J 8P173-COMPUTER n BP239--GETTING
THE MOST FROM YOUR
MUSIC PROJECTS .....
TELE-THE INVEN- MUfLIMETER $5.95.
$9.95. 91nm.s tow to use
your
paroodd
computer to
electronic musk El BP233-ELEC- Ma . L] 96-
TION OF TELEVISION
$9.95. Everything you
Covers basics 01 analog
and digital meters.
PCP103--PRACTICAL never learned about tele- Methods of component
Many circuits MostlyJar- TRONIC HOBBYISTS MIDI HANDBOOK .... INTRODUCTION TO vision from its slaty as a
$995. testing (includes
HANDBOOK 59.95. $9.95. Explains whet HF 13-RADIO'S PCP102- SATELLITE TV dream in the 1800'5 lo the
Single sourced easty
I

A definitive introduction to transistors. dlyristors.

MIDI the Musical FIRST TV/0 DECADES INTRODUCING promise of tomorrow. resistors. Capacitorsand
located info that the e - Digital Interlace) can do 53.30. This story of DIGITAL AUDIO .... the subject wean for the
Ironies hobbyist needs in Na professional engineer, other active and pennon
put it radios early days $6.95. CD. DAT, and
his day-to-day pursuit of electronics enthusiast. or devices.
b watt. makes for asCÍrgglaaahppng sampling. What o
mis fascinating hobby Keyboards, drue firleading.srnMerrS, numbed in the dgeal others who went to know
machines. sequencers. KDKAS part 01 audio sgnals. more before they buy. B o
mixers guitars and beginnings, and much Pnnciples and practices 10 m.
computer music. ngre. of digital audio
techniques.

DIGITAL
LOGIC GATES
AND FLIP-FLOPS

n PCP107-DIGITAL
LOGIC GATES & FLIP
BP1e3-MITRO TO RADIO -100 RADIO BP152-INTRO TO BP105-ANTENNA L I BP199-AN INTRO-
k
BP144-FURTHER
PRACTICAL ELECTRONICS
-

'IRONIC CIRCUITS FOR

j EC -

PROGRAMMING THE HOOKUPS $3.00. Z-10 MACHINE CODE DUCTION TO ANTENNA THE COMPUTER CON-
FLOPS $10.00. What ATARI 900100 XL Wonderful reprint of this heydotuapyyour Practical radio antenna THEORY $0.95 CALCULATIONS AND TROL OF ROBOTS
they do and how to use 1924 book that presents designs that deliver good Basic concepts relevant to FORMULAE $9.00. $7.50. Data and drMJis
$5.95. Perfect comple- pro.p1r5.95.
them. You II probably ment b the Atari users 100 schematics of radio horde W Twrilee... bot i s performance rat -
rnt- receiving and transmitting Compenan YOkxne to for interlacing the com-
never need another book manual. Ewen slows how circuits of that era. The worth leaning how. Wisely simple aannd antennas BP53. Book carriers on puter to the neon)
on this subject. to use animated graphics. antique radio lover will Some demo programs nexpenshe to build. with new data not found rr Vs and »more.
label this one a "must Ne included. in earlier edition. 450 pagan.
BP130-19ICRO IN- U BP131-MICRO IN- PCP105-MAKE
TERFACING own" book.
TERFACING BP125-25 SIMPLE MONEY FROM HOME
CIRCUITS-BOOK I CIRCUITS-BOOK
ua ity aper
2 ..... AMATEUR BAND AN- RECORDING $10.00.
$5.75. Practical add-ons $5.75. Interlacing sound TENNAS $5.59. AN For recording enthusiasts
transform your computer and speecgaper kinds of antennas for all and musicians. Packed
into control or measure- re and optical kinds of amateur radio with money making
ment equipment. sensors. motor control- reception ideas.
lers and more
MlnareMSHu
°^N rar rw
Mee eeMen e...r
skew
YGw
nono aMrw
nhm Pce+ iiee
laiavrpwMwiiw
Lostleneak.r.
w.mo
ane1.rr eGGwe .w

Ïii
'.. Yew

PCPIO6-SYN- D BPI27-HOW TO DE- D BPI10--HOW TO fJ BP121--DESIGN a BP256-INTRO TO BPe5-INTERNA- ;J BPI17-PRACTICAL , BP118-PRACTICAL

SIGN ELECTRONIC GET YOUR ELEC- MAKE YOUR OWN PC LOUDSPEAKERS AND EN- TIONAL TRANSISTOR ELECTRONIC BUILD- ELECTRONIC BUILD-
THESIZERS FOR ING BLOCKS. Book ING BLOCKS. Book 2
MUSICIANS $10.00. PROJECTS $5.75. TRONIC PROJECTS BOARDS ..... $5.75. Ev- CLOSURE DESIGN EQUIVALENTS 1

mod- How to use standard cir- WORKING 55.75. erything You need to $5.95. Explore all the aspects $7.50. Locales possible $5.75. Build the $5.75. Amplifiers for
synthesis near cuit elements to make How to find the huffs in know before you make of speaker design including substitutes bra popular blocks and then combine all kinds to add 10 the
emCovers
custom electronic prof your projects. repair them printed -circuit boards for speakers, enclosures, and user -oriented seledbn of them b form almost any circuits horn Book of 1

anthmetic, phase distor- custom project d your this series

tion, frequency acts. and get them working. you projects. crossovers. Wnd up with a modern transistors. Japa-
modulation, sampling. description of a state-of-the- nese, European and Brice. BPt$0-NOW TO
art speaker system. American types. BerT-MICRO- GET YOUR COMPUTER
BP104-ELEC- 13P92 ---CRYSTAL PROCESSNO PROGRAMS RUNNING
TRONIC SCIENCE SET CONSTRUCTION SYSTEMS AND CIR- $5.55. Haw you ever
PROJECTS $5.75.
Simple to Complex. a
group of projects with a
strongly scientific Savor.
-... $5.50. A variety of
Crystal radio receivers for
the experimenter as
hobbyist.
or a e - rices CUITS $5.95. Sude
b the elements of micro -
processing systems.
Teaches all the funda-
mentals.
written your awn pro-
graree only to find that
Vey do not work? The
book shows you law to
find errors.
Sec orvlBo. or Odwpfdr
CMOs IC /MM..ti i

,
ELECTRONICS We
BUILD AND
I EARN
r
BP248-TEST BP10O-MODERN '1 BP59-SECOND BP-IQ-MIDI PROJ- BP95-SINGLE IC D BP49-POPULAR D BP97-IC PROJ- BP9O-POPULAR
EQUIPMENT CON- OP-AMP PROJECTS ..... BOOK FOR CMOS IC ECTS ._.. $6.95. Details PROJECTS $5.75. ELECTRONIC PROJ- ECTS FOR BEGINNERS ELECTRONIC CIR-
STRUCTION $5.95. $6.00. Includes a Slide PROJECTS $5.50. of how b interface many A projects in this book ECTS $5.96. A $5.50. Written es-
Details the construction Timer. AF Signal Gen. Mumviaaors, ampNrrs, popular Horne computers we booed on one IC and collection of a wide range pecially /or the less Mae circuits for hoD-
of simple, inexpensive, Mike Pre -amp. Some, 0g9e1 6 gales: special with MIDI musk systems. are simple to construct of electronic projects and experienced Audio. radio. lest.
yet extremely useful test Fiter, and much mom. deces
vi including reac- Great way to get started ancuns for the experi- meoten Complete pans TUSK, household and
.

equipment, 10 ifferent tion timer. simple with ICs. menter. layouts and wiring di- more
Instruments are included. electronic organ, and agrams.
BPI95-ELEC- more BP9t--POPULAR
PCP104- TRONIC SYNTHESISER n BP290-CONCISE ELECTRONIC CIR-
INTRO TO OS/2 CUITS. Book 2
ELECTRONICS BUILD CONSTRUCTION
AND LEARN $9.95; starts
cif with consiruceon details
$6.95. Shows how lo
build a monophonic syn-
CHECK OFF $5.95. Learn how the
OS/2 operating system is
and how to
$5.95. More useful cir-
cuits. None o1 these
or a circuit demonstrator
and show a variety d
thesizer, Section by
selon. Replaces BP81. se It effectively. Wn0en
structured =12,122°,.."
circuits for experimenters. THE BOOKS YOU WANT with the non -expert they
person in mind.

SHIPPING CHARGES IN
ELECTRONIC TECHNOLOGY TODAY INC. USA AND CANADA
PO. Box 240, Massapequa Park, NY 11762-0240 SORRY, No orders accepted Number of books ordered I I

$0.01 to $5.00 ... $1.25 outside of USA and Canada

$5.01 to 10.00 ... $2.00 Total price of merchandise $
Name
$10.01 to $20.00 $3.00
Sales Tax (New York State Residents only)
.
$
Addlass
City _ State Zip
$20.01 to $30.00
$30.01 to $40.00
$40.01 to $50.00
.$4.00
.55.00
.$6.00
.$7.50
Shipping (see chart)
All payments must
be In U.S. funds
Total Enclosed S
$

EH 90 $50.01 and above

IL
 Hy.tthhit

I: 9B. 3 PM 0- I'

a
e

TEMPERATURE ` Ì 5y
7 J.b L=
BAROMETER L

ab LÌ L
HUMIDITY
., L12 S
WEATHER

FREE
Catalog

Track The Weather With Your O

Personal Weather Station
Don't let the weather catch you off guard. Plan The ID -5001 features: High accuracy digital
your activities using the precision -crafted Heathkite barometer Display of indoor and outdoor
ID 50011 Adva-d Weather Computer. temperatures Push-button display of minimum and
Powerful enough fo: commercial use, the maximum readings 32 -point wind direction
ID -500í's striking cobalt blue liquid crystal display resolution Display of indoor and outdoor relative
indicates wind s-peed, humidity, rainfall, high and humidity Digital clock/calendar and much more!
low temperatures, and more. You'll find at your Attractive enough to display in your home, the
fingertips everything you need to keep you up-to-date Advanced Weather Computer is just one of many
on changing du cate conditions. exciting products in the Heathkit catalog. You'll
The Advanced Weather Computer is an discover 108 color pages packed full of electronic
intelligent system, sounding alarms whenever products in kit and assembled form induding TVs,
threatening weather VCRs, computers, test instruments, as well as our
approaches. In addition, the new high-tech audio line.
[D-5001 is the only weather
instrument known which The ID -5001 and all our other fine electronic
automatically averages products can be found in our FREE Heathkit catalog.
wind speed and direction For your copy, call 24 hours a day TOLL FREE:
to FAA/NWS standards

InclLdes precision wind

and gives true values for
wind speed and wind
1 -800 -44 -HEATH
sensor assembly. direction. (1-800-444-3284)

Heath Company Ea
CL797R1 A subelfaary of Zenith Electronics Corporation

CIRCLE 14 ON FREE INFORMATION CARD